HANDBOUND
AT THE

UNIVERSITY OF
TORONTO PRESS

237

THE

LOGIC OF CHANCE

THE

LOGIC OF CHANCE

AN ESSAY

ON THE FOUNDATIONS AND PROVINCE OF
THE THEORY OF PROBABILITY,

WITH ESPECIAL REFERENCE TO ITS LOGICAL BEARINGS
AND ITS APPLICATION TO

MORAL AND SOCIAL SCIENCE, AND TO STATISTICS,

BY

JOHN VENN, Sc.D., F.R.S.,

FELLOW AND LECTURER IN THE MORAL SCIENCES, GONVILLE AND CAIUS COLLEGE,

CAMBRIDGE.

LATE EXAMINER IN LOGIC AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY IN THE
UNIVERSITY OF LONDON.

"So careful of the type she seems
So careless of the single life."

THIRD EDITION, HE-WRITTEN AND ENLARGED.

ILonfcon :
MACMILLAN AND CO.

AND NEW YORK
1888

[All Eights reserved.]

First Edition printed 1866.
Second Edition 1876.
Third Edition 1888.

PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION.

ANY work on Probability by a Cambridge man will be so
likely to have its scope and its general treatment of the
subject prejudged, that it may be well to state at the outset
that the following Essay is in no sense mathematical. Not
only, to quote a common but often delusive assurance, will
'no knowledge of mathematics beyond the simple rules of
Arithmetic ' be required to understand these pages, but it is
not intended that any such knowledge should be acquired by
the process of reading them. Of the two or three occasions
on which algebraical formulae occur they will not be found to
form any essential part pf the text.

The science of Probability occupies at present a some
what anomalous position. It is impossible, I think, not to
observe in it some of the marks and consequent disadvantages
of a sectional study. By a small body of ardent students it
has been cultivated with great assiduity, and the results they
have obtained will always be reckoned among the most ex
traordinary products of mathematical genius. But by the
general body of thinking men its principles seem to be
regarded with indifference or suspicion. Such persons may
admire the ingenuity displayed, and be struck with the pro
fundity of many of the calculations, but there seems to

vi Preface to the First Edition.

them, if I may so express it, an unreality about the whole
treatment of the subject. To many persons the mention of
Probability suggests little else than the notion of a set of
rules, very ingenious and profound rules no doubt, with which
mathematicians amuse themselves by setting and solving
puzzles.

It must be admitted that some ground has been given
for such an opinion. The examples commonly selected by
writers on the subject, though very well adapted to illustrate
its rules, are for the most part of a special and peculiar
character, such as those relating to dice and cards. When
they have searched for illustrations drawn from the practical
business of life, they have very generally, but unfortunately,
hit upon just the sort of instances which, as I shall endea
vour to show hereafter, are among the very worst that could
be chosen for the purpose. It is scarcely possible for any
unprejudiced person to read what has been written about the
credibility of witnesses by eminent writers, without his ex
periencing an invincible distrust of the principles which they
adopt. To say that the rules of evidence sometimes given
by such writers are broken in practice, would scarcely be
correct ; for the rules are of such a kind as generally to defy
any attempt to appeal to them in practice.

This supposed want of harmony between Probability and
other branches of Philosophy is perfectly erroneous. It
arises from the belief that Probability is a branch of mathe
matics trying to intrude itself on to ground which does not
altogether belong to it. I shall endeavour to show that .this
belief is unfounded. To answer correctly the sort of questions
to which the science introduces us does generally demand
some knowledge of mathematics, often a great knowledge,
but the discussion of the fundamental principles on which
the rules are based does not necessarily require any such

Preface to the First Edition. vii

qualification. Questions might arise in other sciences, in
Geology, for example, which could only be answered by the
aid of arithmetical calculations. In such a case any one
would admit that the arithmetic was extraneous and acci
dental. However many questions of this kind there might
be here, those persons who do not care to work out special
results for themselves might still have an accurate know
ledge of the principles of the science, and even considerable
acquaintance with the details of it. The same holds true in
Probability; its connection with mathematics, though cer
tainly far closer than that of most other sciences, is still of
much the same kind. It is principally when we wish to
work out results for ourselves that mathematical knowledge
.s required; without such knowledge the student may still
have a firm grasp of the principles and even see his way to
many of the derivative results.

The opinion that Probability, instead of being a branch of
;he general science of evidence which happens to make much
use of mathematics, is a portion of mathematics, erroneous as
it is, has yet been very disadvantageous to the science in
several ways. Students of Philosophy in general have thence
conceived a prejudice against Probability, which has for the
most part deterred them from examining it. As soon as a
subject comes to be considered 'mathematical' its claims
seem generally, by the mass of readers, to be either on the
me hand scouted or at least courteously rejected, or on the
)ther to be blindly accepted with all their assumed conse
quences. Of impartial and liberal criticism it obtains little
>r nothing.

The consequences of this state of things have been, I
think, disastrous to the students themselves of Probability.
No science can safely be abandoned entirely to its own devo
tees. Its details of course can only be studied by those who

viii Preface to the First Edition.

make it their special occupation, but its general principles
are sure to be cramped if it is not exposed occasionally to
the free criticism of those whose main culture has been of
a more general character. Probability has been very much
abandoned to mathematicians, who as mathematicians have
generally been unwilling to treat it thoroughly. They have
worked out its results, it is true, with wonderful acuteness,
and the greatest ingenuity has been shown in solving various
problems that arose, and deducing subordinate rules. And
this was all that they could in fairness be expected to do.
Any subject which has been discussed by such men as
Laplace and Poisson, and on which they have exhausted all
their powers of analysis, could not fail to be profoundly
treated, so far as it fell within their province. But from this
province the real principles of the science have generally
been excluded, or so meagrely discussed that they had better
have been omitted altogether. Treating the subject as ma
thematicians such writers have naturally taken it up at the
point where their mathematics would best come into play,
and that of course has not been at the foundations. In the
works of most writers upon the subject we should search in
vain for anything like a critical discussion of the funda
mental principles upon which its rules rest, the class of
enquiries to which it is most properly applicable, or the
relation it bears to Logic and the general rules of inductive
evidence.

This want of precision as to ultimate principles is per
fectly compatible here, as it is in the departments of Morals
and Politics, with a general agreement on processes and
results. But it is, to say the least, unphilosophical, and
denotes a state of things in which positive error is always
liable to arise whenever the process of controversy forces us
to appeal to the foundations of the science.

Preface to the First Edition. ix

With regard to the remarks in the last few paragraphs,
prominent exceptions must be made in the case of two recent
works at least1. The first of these is Professor de Morgan's
Formal Logic. He has there given an investigation into the
foundations of Probability as conceived by him, and nothing
can be more complete and precise than his statement of
principles, and his deductions from them. If I could at all
agree with these principles there would have been no neces
sity for the following essay, as I could not hope to add
anything to their foundation, and should be far indeed from
rivalling his lucid statement of them. But in his scheme
Probability is regarded very much from the Conceptualist
point of view ; as stated in the preface, he considers that
Probability is concerned with formal inferences in which the
premises are entertained with a conviction short of absolute
certainty. With this view I cannot agree. As I have entered
into criticism of some points of his scheme in one of the
following chapters, and shall have occasion frequently to refer
to his work, I need say no more about it here. The other
work to which I refer is the profound Laws of Thought of
the late Professor Boole, to which somewhat similar remarks
may in part be applied. Owing however to his peculiar
treatment of the subject, I have scarcely anywhere come
into contact with any of his expressed opinions.

The view of the province of Probability adopted in this
Essay differs so radically from that of most other writers on
the subject, and especially from that of those just referred to,
that I have thought it better, as regards details, to avoid all
criticism of the opinions of others, except where conflict was

1 I am here speaking, of course, of History of the Theory of Probability

those only who have expressly treated being, as the name denotes, mainly

of the foundations of the science. Mr historical, such enquiries have not

Todhunter's admirable work on the directly fallen within his province.

x Preface to the First Edition.

unavoidable. With regard to that radical difference itself
Bacon's remark applies, behind which I must shelter myself
from any change of presumption. — "Quod ad universalem
istam reprehensionem attinet, certissimum vere est rem re-
putanti, earn et magis probabilem esse et magis modestam,
quam si facta fuisset ex parte."

Almost the only writer who seems to me to have ex
pressed a just view of the nature and foundation of the rules
of Probability is Mr Mill, in his System of Logic1. His
treatment of the subject is however very brief, and a consi
derable portion of the space which he has devoted to it is
occupied by the discussion of one or two special examples.
There are moreover some errors, as it seems to me, in what
he has written, which will be referred to in some of the
following chapters.

The reference to the work just mentioned will serve to
convey a general idea of the view of Probability adopted in
this Essay. With what may be called the Material view of
Logic as opposed to the Formal or Coriceptualist, — with that
which regards it as taking cognisance of laws of things and
not of the laws of our own minds in thinking about things, —
I am in entire accordance. Of the province of Logic, regarded
from this point of view, and under its widest aspect, Proba
bility may, in my opinion, be considered to be a portion. The
principal objects of this Essay are to ascertain how great a
portion it comprises, where we are to draw the boundary be
tween it and the contiguous branches of the general science

1 This remark, and that at the Probability. I have given a pretty

Gommencement of the last paragraph, full discussion of the general prin-

having been misunderstood, I ought ciples of this view in the tenth

to say that the only sense in which chapter, and have there pointed out

originality is claimed for this Essay some of the peculiarities to which it

is in the thorough working out of the leads.
Material view of Logic as applied to

Preface to the First Edition. xi

of evidence, what are the ultimate foundations upon which its
rules rest, what the nature of the evidence they are capable
of affording, and to what class of subjects they may most fitly
be applied. That the science of Probability, on this view of
it, contains something more important than the results of a
system of mathematical assumptions, is obvious. I am con
vinced moreover that it can and ought to be rendered both
interesting and intelligible to ordinary readers who have any
taste for philosophy. In other words, if the large and grow
ing body of readers who can find pleasure in the study of
books like Mill's Logic and Whe well's Inductive Sciences,
turn with aversion from a work on Probability, the cause in
the latter case must lie either in the view of the subject or
in the manner and style of the book.

I take this opportunity of thanking several friends,
amongst whom I must especially mention Mr Todhunter, of
St John's College, and Mr H. Sidgwick, of Trinity College,
for the trouble they have kindly taken in looking over the
proof-sheets, whilst this work was passing through the Press.
To the former in particular my thanks are due for thus
adding to the obligations which I, as an old pupil, already
owed him, by taking an amount of trouble, in making sug
gestions and corrections for the benefit of another, which few
would care to take for anything but a work of their own.
His extensive knowledge of the subject, and his extremely
accurate judgment, render the service he has thus afforded
me of the greatest possible value.

GONVILLE AND CAIUS COLLEGE,

September, 1866.

PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION.

THE principal reason for designating this volume a second
edition consists in the fact that the greater portion of what
may be termed the first edition is incorporated into it. Be
sides various omissions (principally where the former treat
ment has since seemed to me needlessly prolix), I have added
new matter, not much inferior in amount to the whole of
the original work. In addition, moreover, to these altera
tions in the matter, the general arrangement of the subject
as regards the successive chapters has been completely
changed; the former arrangement having been (as it now
seems to me) justly objected to as deficient and awkward in
method.

After saying this, it ought to be explained whether any
change of general view or results will be found in the present
treatment.

The general view of Probability adopted is quite un
changed, further reading and reflection having only confirmed
me in the conviction that this is the soundest and most
fruitful way of regarding the subject. It is the more ne
cessary to say this, as to a cursory reader it might seem

xiv Preface to the Second Edition.

otherwise; owing to my having endeavoured to avoid the
needlessly polemical tone which, as is often the case with
those who are making their first essay in writing upon any
subject, was doubtless too prominent in the former edition.
I have not thought it necessary, of course, except in one or
two cases, to indicate points of detail which it has seemed
necessary to correct.

A number of new discussions have been introduced upon
topics which were but little or not at all treated before. The
principal of these refer to the nature and physical origin of
Laws of Error (Ch. II.); the general view of Logic, and con
sequently of Probability, termed the Material view, adopted
here (Ch. x.); a brief history and criticism of the various
opinions held on the subject of Modality (Ch. XII.); the
logical principles underlying the method of Least Squares
(Ch. xiii.); and the practices of Insurance and Gambling,
so far as the principles involved in them are concerned
(Ch. xv.). The Chapter on the Credibility of Extraordinary
Stories is also mainly new ; this was the portion of the former
work which has since seemed to me the least satisfactory,
but owing to the extreme intricacy of the subject I am far
from feeling thoroughly satisfied with it even now.

I have again to thank several friends for the assistance
they have so kindly afforded. Amongst these I must promi-
neatly mention Mr C. J. Monro, late fellow of Trinity. It is
only the truth to say that I have derived more assistance from
his suggestions and criticisms than has been consciously ob
tained from all other external sources together. Much of this

Preface to Second Edition. xv

criticism has been given privately in letters, and notes on
the proof-sheets; but one of the most elaborate of his discus
sions of the subject was communicated to the Cambridge
Philosophical Society some years ago; as it was not published,
however, I am unfortunately unable to refer the reader to it.
I ought to add that he is not in any way committed to any
of my opinions upon the subject, from some of which in fact
he more or less dissents. I am also much indebted to
Mr J. W. L. Glaisher, also of Trinity College, for many hints
and references to various publications upon the subject of
Least Squares, and for careful criticism (given in the midst
of much other labour) of the chapter in which that subject is
treated.

I need not add that, like every one else who has had to
discuss the subject of Probability during the last ten years,
[ have made constant use of Mr Todhunter's History.

I may take this opportunity of adding that a considerable
)ortion of the tenth chapter has recently appeared in the
anuary number of Mind, and that the substance of several
chapters, especially in the more logical parts, has formed part
f my ordinary lectures in Cambridge; the foundation and
ogical treatment of Probability being now expressly included
n the Schedule of Subjects for the Moral Sciences Tripos.

March, 1876.

PREFACE TO THIRD EDITION

?HE present edition has been revised throughout, and in fact

written. Three chapters are new, viz. the fifth (On the
onception of Randomness) and the eighteenth and nine-

ienth (On the nature, and on the employment, of Averages),
'he eighth, tenth, eleventh, and fifteenth chapters have been

icast, and much new matter added, and numerous altera-
Lons made in the remaining portions1. On the other hand
hree chapters of the last edition have been nearly or
ntirely omitted.

These alterations do not imply any appreciable change of
lew on my part as to the foundations and province of
robability. Some of them are of course due to the necessary
Ganges involved in the attempt to write up to date upon a
ibject which has not been stationary during the last eleven
ra. For instance the greatly increased interest now
iken in what may be called the Theory of Statistics has

ndered it desirable to go much more fully into the Nature
ad treatment of Laws of Error. The omissions are mainly

1 I have indicated the new chapters and sections by printing them in
lies in the Table of Contents.

62

xviii Preface.

due to a wish to avoid increasing the bulk of this volume
more than is actually necessary, and to a feeling that the
portions treating specially of Inductive Logic (which oc- j
cupied some space in the last edition) would be more
suitable to a regular work on that subject. I am at present
engaged on such a work.

The publications which I have had occasion to notice
have mostly appeared in various scientific journals. The
principal authors of these have been Mr F. Galton and
Mr F. Y. Edgeworth: to the latter of whom I am also
personally much obliged for many discussions, oral and
written, and for his kindness in looking through the proof-
sheets. His published articles are too numerous for separate!
mention here, but I may say generally, in addition to thi
obligations specially noticed, that I have been considerably!
indebted to them in writing the last two chapters. Twd
authors of works of a somewhat more substantial character!
viz. Prof. Lexis and Von Kries, only came under my noticd
unfortunately after this work was already in the printer's!
hands. With the latter of these authors I find myself id
closer agreement than with most others, in respect of hiJ
general conception and treatment of Probability.

December, 1887.

TABLE OF CONTENTS1.

PART I.

^HYSICAL FOUNDATIONS OF THE SCIENCE OF PKOBABILITY.

CHH. I— V.

CHAPTER I.

THE SERIES OF PROBABILITY.

§ 1, 2. Distinction between the proportional propositions of Probability,

and the propositions of Logic.
3, 4. The former are best regarded as presenting a series of individuals,

5. Which may occur in any order of time,

6, 7. And which present themselves in groups.

8. Comparison of the above with the ordinary phraseology.

9, 10. These series ultimately fluctuate,

11. Especially in the case of moral and social phenomena,

12. Though in the case of games of chance the fluctuation is practically

inappreciable.

13. 14. In this latter case only can rigorous inferences be drawn.
15, 16. The Petersburg Problem.

CHAPTER II.

ARRANGEMENT AND FORMATION OF THE SERIES. LAWS OF ERROR.
§§1,2. Indication of the nature of a Law of Error or Divergence.

3. Is there necessarily but one such law,

-i. Applicable to widely distinct classes of things ?

1 Chapters and sections which are nearly or entirely new are printed in italics.

xx Contents.

§§5,6. This cannot be proved directly by statistics ;

7, 8. Which in certain cases shoiv actual asymmetry.

9, 10. Nor deductively ;

11. Nor by the Method of Least Squares.

12. Distinction between Laws of Error and the Method of Least

Squares.

13. Supposed existence of types.

14 16. Homogeneous and heterogeneous classes.

17, 18. The type in the case of human stature, &c.

19, 20. The type in mental characteristics.

21, 22. Applications of the foregoing principles and results.

CHAPTER III.

ORIGIN OR PROCESS OF CAUSATION OF THE SERIES.

I § 1. The causes consist of (1) ' objects,'

2, 3. Which may or may not be distinguishable into natural kinds.

4—6. And (2) ' agencies.'

7. Requisites demanded in the above :

8, 9. Consequences of their absence.

10. Where are the required causes found ?

11, 12. Not in the direct results of human will.
13_15. Examination of apparent exceptions.
16 — is. Further analysis of some natural causes.

CHAPTER IV.

HOW TO DISCOVER AND PROVE THE SERIES.

§ 1. The data of Probability are established by experience ;

/ 2. Though in practice most problems are solved deductively.

3 — 7. Mechanical instance to show the inadequacy of any a priori proof.

8. The Principle of Sufficient Reason inapplicable.

Contents. xxi

/| 9. Evidence of actual experience.
10, 11. Further examination of the causes.

12, 13. Distinction between the succession of physical events and the
Doctrine of Combinations.

14, 15. Kemarks of Laplace on this subject.

16. Bernoulli's Theorem ;

17, 18. Its inapplicability to social phenomena.
19. Summation of preceding results.

CHAPTER V.

THE CONCEPTION OF RANDOMNESS.

§ 1. General Indication.

2—5. The postulate of ultimate uniform distribution at one stage or
another.

6. This area of distribution must be finite :

7, 8. Geometrical illustrations in support :

9. Can we conceive any exception here ?

10, 11. Experimental determination of the random character when the

events are many:

12. Corresponding determination when they are few.

13, 14. Illustration from the constant TT.

15, 16. Conception of a line drawn at random.
17. Graphical illustration.

PART II.

LOGICAL SUPEKSTEUCTURE ON THE ABOVE PHYSICAL
FOUNDATIONS. CHH. VI— XIV.

CHAPTER VI.

MEASUREMENT OF BELIEF.

1, 2. Preliminary remarks.

3, 4. Are we accurately conscious of gradations of belief?

I
xxii Contents.

§ 5. Probability only concerned with part of this enquiry.

6. Difficulty of measuring our belief ;

7. Owing to intrusion of emotions,
,y 8. And complexity of the evidence.

9. And when measured, is it always correct ?
v/10, 11. Distinction between logical and psychological views.
j 12 — 16. Analogy of Formal Logic fails to show that we can thus detach

and measure our belief.

17. Apparent evidence of popular language to the contrary.
(w!8. How is full belief justified in inductive enquiry?

19 — 23. Attempt to show how partial belief may be similarly justified.
24 — 28. Extension of this explanation to cases which cannot be repeated
in experience.

29. Can other emotions besides belief be thus measured ?

30. Errors thus arising in connection with the Petersburg Problem.

31. 32. The emotion of surprise is a partial exception.
33, 34. Objective and subjective phraseology.

35. The definition of probability,

36. Introduces the notion of a 'limit',

37. And implies, vaguely, some degree of belief.

CHAPTER VII.

THE RULES OF INFERENCE IN PROBABILITY.
§ 1. Nature of these inferences.

2. Inferences by addition and subtraction.

3. Inferences by multiplication and division.
4 — 6. Rule for independent events.

7. Other rules sometimes introduced.

8. All the above rules may be interpreted subjectively, i.e. in terms

of belief.

- 9—11. Eules of so-called Inverse Probability.
12, 13. Nature of the assumption involved in them:
14— 16. Arbitrary character of this assumption.
17, 18. Physical illustrations.

Contents. xxiii

CHAPTER VIII.

THE RULE OF SUCCESSION.

Eeasons for desiring some such rule :

Though it could scarcely belong to Probability.

Distinction between Probability and Induction. -/(<-

Impossibility of reducing the various rules of the latter under one

head.
(5. Statement of the Rule of Succession ;

7. Proof offered for it.

8. Is it a strict rule of inference?

9. Or is it a psychological principle ?

CHAPTER IX.

INDUCTION.

} 1—5. Statement of the Inductive problem, and origin of the Inductive

inference.
6. Eelation of Probability to Induction.

7 — 9. The two are sometimes merged into one.

10. Extent to which causation is needed in Probability.
11 — 13. Difficulty of referring an individual to a class :

14. This difficulty but slight in Logic,

15, 16. But leads to perplexity in Probability :
17— 21.IVlild form of this perplexity;

22, 23. Serious form.

24—27. Illustration from Life Insurance.

28. 29. Meaning of ' the value of a life'.

30, 31. Successive specialization of the classes to which objects are

referred.
32. Summary of results.

XXIV

Contents.

CHAPTER X.

CHANCE, CAUSATION AND DESIGN.

§ 1. Old Theological objection to Chance.

2_4. Scientific version of the same.

5. Statistics in reference to Free-will.

6—8. Inconclusiveness of the common arguments here.

9, 10. Chance as opposed to Physical Causation.

11. Chance as opposed to Design in the case of numerical constants.

12 14. Theoretic solution between Chance and Design.

15. Illustration from the dimensions of the Pyramid.

16, 17. Discussion of certain difficulties here.
18, 19. Illustration from Psychical Phenomena.

20. Arbuthnott's Problem of the proportion of the sexes.
21 — 23. Random or designed distribution of the stars.
(Note on the proportion of the sexes.)

CHAPTER XT.

MATERIAL AND FORMAL LOGIC.

§§ 1, 2. Broad distinction between these views;

2, 3. Difficulty of adhering consistently to the objective view;

4. Especially in the case of Hypotheses.

5. The doubtful stage of our facts is only occasional in Inductive

Logic.

6—9. But normal and permanent in Probability.
10, 11. Consequent difficulty of avoiding Conceptualist phraseology.

CHAPTER XII.

CONSEQUENCES OF THE DISTINCTIONS OF THE PREVIOUS CHAPTER.

§§1,2. Probability has no relation to time.

3, 4. Butler and Mill on Probability before and after the event.

Contents. xxv

i 5. Other attempts at explaining the difficulty.

6 — 8. What is really meant by the distinction.

9. Origin of the common mistake.
10— 12. Examples in illustration of this view,

13. Is Probability relative ?

14. What is really meant by this expression.

15. Objections to terming Probability relative.

16. 17. In suitable examples the difficulty scarcely presents itself.

CHAPTER XIII.

ON MODALITY.

§ 1. Various senses of Modality ;

2. Having mostly some relation to Probability.

Modality must be recognized.

4. Sometimes relegated to the predicate,

5, 6. Sometimes incorrectly rejected altogether.
7, 8. Common practical recognition of it.

9 — 11. Modal propositions in Logic and in Probability.

12. Aristotelian view of the Modals ;

13, 14. Founded on extinct philosophical views;

15. But long and widely maintained.

16. Kant's general view.

17 — 19. The number of modal divisions admitted by various logicians.

20. Influence of the theory of Probability.

21, 22. Modal syllogisms.

23. Popular modal phraseology.

24—26. Probable and Dialectic syllogisms.

27, 28. Modal difficulties occur in Jurisprudence.

29, 30. Proposed standards of legal certainty.

31. Rejected formally in English Law, but possibly recognized prac

tically.

32. How, if so, it might be determined.

xx vi Contents.

CHAPTER XIY.

FALLACIES.

§§ i_3. (I.) Errors in judging of events after they have happened.
4—7. Very various judgments may be thus involved.
8, 9. (II.) Confusion between random and picked selections.
10, 11. (III.) Undue limitation of the notion of Probability.
12—16. (IV.) Double or Quits : the Martingale.
17, 18. Physical illustration.

19, 20. (V.) Inadequate realization of large numbers.
21 — 24. Production of works of art by chance.
25. Illustration from doctrine of heredity.
26 — 30. (VI.) Confusion between Probability and Induction.
31—33. (VII.) Undue neglect of small chances.
34, 35. (VIII.) Judging by the event in Probability and in Induction.

PART III.

VAEIOUS APPLICATIONS OF THE THEORY OF PROBABILITY.
CHH. XV— XIX.

CHAPTER XV.

INSURANCE AND GAMBLING.

5§ 1, 2. The certainties and uncertainties of life.

3—5. Insurance a means of diminishing the uncertainties.
6, 7. Gambling a means of increasing them.
8, 9. Various forms of gambling.
10, 11. Comparison between these practices.
12— 14. Proofs of the disadvantage of gambling: —
(1) on arithmetical grounds:

XXV11

Contents.

15, 16. Illustration from family names.

17. (2) from the 'moral expectation'.

18, 19. Inconclusiveness of these proofs.

20 — 22. Broader questions raised by these attempts.

CHAPTER XVI.

APPLICATION OF PROBABILITY TO TESTIMONY.

i 1, 2. Doubtful applicability of Probability to testimony.

3. Conditions of such applicability.

4. Eeasons for the above conditions.

5. 6. Are these conditions fulfilled in the case of testimony :

7. The appeal here is not directly to statistics.

8, 9. Illustrations of the above.

10, 11. Is any application of Probability to testimony valid?

CHAPTER XVII.

CREDIBILITY OF EXTRAORDINARY STORIES.

1. Improbability before and after the event.

2, 3. Does the rejection of this lead to the conclusion that the credi

bility of a story is independent of its nature ?
4. General and special credibility of a witness.

5—8. Distinction between alternative and open questions, and the

usual rules for application of testimony to each of these.

9. Discussion of an objection.

10, 11. Testimony of worthless witnesses.

12—14. Common practical ways of regarding such problems.
15. Extraordinary stories not necessarily less probable.
16 — 18. Meaning of the term extraordinary, and its distinction from
miraculous.

xxviii Contents.

§§ 19, 20. Combination of testimony.
21, 22. Scientific meaning of a miracle.

23, 24. Two distinct prepossessions in regard to miracles, and the logical
consequences of these.

25. Difficulty of discussing by our rules cases in which arbitrary

interference can be postulated.

26, 27. Consequent inappropriateness of many arguments.

CHAPTER XVIII.

ON THE NATURE AND USE OF AN AVERAGE, AND ON THE
DIFFERENT KINDS OF AVERAGE.

1. Preliminary rude notion of an average,

2. More precise quantitative notion, yielding
(1) the Arithmetical Average,

3. (2) the Geometrical.

4. In asymmetrical curves of error the arithmetic average must be dis

tinguished from,

5. (3) the Maximum Ordinate average,

6. (4) and the Median.

7. Diagram in illustration.

8—10. Average departure from the average, considered under the above

heads, and under that of

11. (5) The (average of) Mean Square of Error.
12 — 14. The objects of taking averages.

15. Mr Gallon's practical method of determining the average.

16, 17. No distinction between the average and the mean.

18 20. Distinction between ivhat is necessary and what is experimental here.

21, 22. Theoretical defects in the determination of the 'errors'.
23. Practical escape from these.

(Note about the units in the exponential equation and integral.)

Contents. xxix

CHAPTER XIX.

THE THEORY OF THE AVERAGE AS A MEANS OF APPROXIMATION
TO THE TRUTH.

§§ 1 — 4. General indication of the problem : i.e. an inverse one requiring the
previous consideration of a direct one.

[I. The direct problem:— given the central value and law of
dispersion of the single errors, to determine those of the
averages. §§ 6—20.]

6. (i) The law of dispersion may be determinate a priori,

7. (ii) or experimentally, by statistics.

8. 9. Thence to determine the modulus of the error curve.

10—14. Numerical example to illustrate the nature and amount of the con
traction of the modulus of the average-error curve.

15. This curve is of the same general kind as that of the single errors;

16. Equally symmetrical,

17. 18. And more heaped up toivards the centre.

19, 20. Algebraic generalization of the foregoing results.

[II. The inverse problem: — given but a few of the errors to
determine their centre and law, and thence to draw the above
deductions. §§ 21—25.]

22, 23. The actual calculations are the same as before,

With the extra demand that we must determine how probable are the
results.

25. Summary.

[III. Consideration of the same questions as applied to certain
peculiar laics of error. §§ 26—37.]

26. (i) All errors equally probable.

27. 28. (ii) Certain peculiar laws of error.

29, 30. Further analysis of the reasons for taking averages.
31 — 35. Illustrative examples.

36, 37. Curves ivith double centre and absence of symmetry.
38, 39. Conclusion.

THE LOGIC OF CHANCE.

CHAPTER I.

ON CERTAIN KINDS OF GROUPS OR SERIES AS THE
FOUNDATION OF PROBABILITY.

§ 1. IT is sometimes not easy to give a clear definition of a
science at the outset, so as to set its scope and province before
the reader in a few words. In the case of those sciences
which are more immediately and directly concerned with
what are termed objects, rather than with what are termed
processes, this difficulty is not indeed so serious. If the
reader is already familiar with the objects, a simple reference
to them will give him a tolerably accurate idea of the
direction and nature of his studies. Even if he be not
familiar with them, they will still be often to some extent
connected and associated in his mind by a name, and
the mere utterance of the name may thus convey a fair
amount of preliminary information. This is more or less
the case with many of the natural sciences ; we can often
tell the reader beforehand exactly what he is going to study.
JBut when a science is concerned, not so much with objects
directly, as with processes and laws, or when it takes for the
subject of its enquiry some comparatively obscure feature
drawn from phenomena which have little or nothing else in
common, the difficulty of giving preliminary information
becomes greater. Recognized classes of objects have then
v. 1

2 On certain kinds of Groups or Series. [CHAP. I.

to be disregarded and even broken up, and an entirely novel
arrangement of the objects to be made. In such cases it is
the study of the science that first gives the science its unity,
for till it is studied the objects with which it is concerned
were probably never thought of together. Here a definition
cannot be given at the outset, and the process of obtaining it
may become by comparison somewhat laborious.

The science of Probability, at least on the view taken of
it in the following pages, is of this latter description. The
reader who is at present unacquainted with the science!
cannot be at once informed of its scope by a reference
objects with which he is already familiar. He will hav
to be taken in hand, as it were, and some little tim
and trouble will have to be expended in directing h
attention to our subject-matter before he can be expected
know it. To do this will be our first task.

§ 2. In studying Nature, in any form, we are continual
coming into possession of information which we sum up
general propositions. Now in very many cases these gener
propositions are neither more nor less certain and accura
than the details which they embrace and of which they a
composed. We are assuming at present that the truth
these generalizations is not disputed; as a matter of fa
they may rest on weak evidence, or they may be uncerta
from their being widely extended by induction ; what
meant is, that when we resolve them into their compone
parts we have precisely the same assurance of the truth
the details as we have of that of the whole. When I kno
for instance, that all cows ruminate, I feel just as certa
that any particular cow or cows ruminate as that the who
class does. I may be right or wrong in my original stat«
ment, and I may have obtained it by any conceivable moc1
in which truths can be obtained ; but whatever the value

SECT. 3.] On certain kinds of Groups or Series. 3

the general proposition may be, that of the particulars is
neither greater nor less. The process of inferring the par
ticular from the general is not accompanied by the slightest
diminution of certainty. If one of these 'immediate infer
ences' is justified at all, it will be equally right in every
case.

But it is by no means necessary that this characteristic
should exist in all cases. There is a class of immediate in
ferences, almost unrecognized indeed in logic, but constantly
drawn in practice, of which the characteristic is, that as they
increase in particularity they diminish in certainty. Let me
assume that I am told that some cows ruminate ; I cannot
infer logically from this that any particular cow does so,
though I should feel some way removed from absolute dis
belief, or even indifference to assent, upon the subject ; but
if I saw a herd of cows I should feel more sure that some of
them were ruminant than I did of the single cow, and my
assurance would increase with the numbers of the herd about
which I had to form an opinion. Here then we have a class
of things as to the individuals of which we feel quite in
uncertainty, whilst as we embrace larger numbers in our
assertions we attach greater weight to our inferences. It is
with such classes of things and such inferences that the
science of Probability is concerned.

§ 3. In the foregoing remarks, which are intended to
be purely preliminary, we have not been able altogether to
avoid some reference to a subjective element, viz. the degree
of our certainty or belief about the things which we are
supposed to contemplate. The reader may be aware that
by some writers this element is regarded as the subject-
matter of the science. Hence it will have to be discussed
in a future chapter. As however I do not agree with the
opinion of the writers just mentioned, at least as regards

1—2

4 On certain kinds of Groups or Series. [CHAP. i.

treating this element as one of primary importance, no
further allusion will be made to it here, but we will pass on
at once to a more minute investigation of that distinctive
characteristic of certain classes of things which was intro
duced to notice in the last section.

In these classes of things, which are those with which
Probability is concerned, the fundamental conception which
the reader has to fix in his mind as clearly as possible, is, I
take it, that of a series. But it is a series of a peculiar kind,
one of which no better compendious description can be given
than that which is contained in the statement that it com
bines individual irregularity with aggregate regularity. This
is a statement which will probably need some explanation.
Let us recur to an example of the kind already alluded toj
selecting one which shall be in accordance with experience]
Some children will not live to thirty. Now if this propo
sition is to be regarded as a purely indefinite or, as it would
be termed in logic, 'particular' proposition, no doubt the!
notion of a series does not obviously present itself in con-J
nection with it. It contains a statement about a certa
unknown proportion of the whole, and that is all. But it
not with these purely indefinite propositions that we sha
be concerned. Let us suppose the statement, on the co:
trary, to be of a numerical character, and to refer to a giv<
proportion of the whole, and we shall then find it difficult
exclude the notion of a series. We shall find it, I thin
impossible to do so as soon as we set before us the aim
obtaining accurate, or even moderately correct inference
What, for instance, is the meaning of the statement th
two new-born children in three fail to attain the age
sixty-three ? It certainly does not declare that in any give
batch of, say, thirty, we shall find just twenty that fai
whatever might be the strict meaning of the words, th

SECT. 3.] On certain kinds of Groups or Series. 5

is not the import of the statement. It rather contemplates
our examination of a large number, of a long succession
of instances, and states that in such a succession we shall
find a numerical proportion, not indeed fixed and accurate at
first, but which tends in the long run to become so. In
every kind of example with which we shall be concerned we
shall find this reference to a large number or succession
of objects, or, as we shall term it, series of them.

A few additional examples may serve to make this plain.
Let us suppose that we toss up a penny a great many
times ; the results of the successive throws may be conceived
to form a series. The separate throws of this series seem to
occur in utter disorder; it is this disorder which causes our
uncertainty about them. Sometimes head comes, sometimes
tail comes ; sometimes there is a repetition of the same face,
I sometimes not. So long as we confine our observation to a
few throws at a time, the series seems to be simply chaotic.
But when we consider the result of a long succession we find
a marked distinction; a kind of order begins gradually to
emerge, and at last assumes a distinct and striking aspect.
We find in this case that the heads and tails occur in about
equal numbers, that similar repetitions of different faces do
so also, and so on. In a word, notwithstanding the individual
disorder, an aggregate order begins to prevail. So again if
we are examining the length of human life, the different lives
which fall under our notice compose a series presenting the
same features. The length of a single life is familiarly un
certain, but the average duration of a batch of lives is be
coming in an almost equal degree familiarly certain. The
larger the number we take out of any mixed crowd, the
clearer become the symptoms of order, the more nearly will
the average length of each selected class be the same.
These few cases will serve as simple examples of a property

6 On certain kinds of Groups or Series. [CHAP. i.

of things which can be traced almost everywhere, to a
greater or less extent, throughout the whole field of our ex
perience. Fires, shipwrecks, yields of harvest, births, mar
riages, suicides; it scarcely seems to matter what feature we
single out for observation1. The irregularity of the single
instances diminishes when we take a large number, and at
last seems for all practical purposes to disappear.

In speaking of the effect of the average in thus diminish-!
ing the irregularities which present themselves in the details,,
the attention of the student must be prominently directed to
the point, that it is not the absolute but the relative irregu
larities which thus tend to diminish without limit. This
idea will be familiar enough to the mathematician, but t
others it may require some reflection in order to grasp i
clearly. The absolute divergences and irregularities, so fa
from diminishing, show a disposition to increase, and this (i
may be) without limit, though their relative importance show
a corresponding disposition to diminish without limit. Thu
in the case of tossing a penny, if we take a few throws, sa
ten, it is decidedly unlikely that there should be a differenc
of six between the numbers of heads and tails; that is, tha

1 The following statistics will give (fluctuation 1*85), and the numbe

a fair idea of the wide range of ex- of pounds of manufactured tobacc

perience over which such regularity taken for home consumption (fluctug

is found to exist: "As illustrations tion 1-89); or out-door paupers (flu

of equal amounts of fluctuation from tuation 3-45) and tonnage of Britis

totally dissimilar causes, take the vessels entered in ballast (fluctuatio

deaths in the West district of London 3-43), &c." [Extracted from a pap*

in seven years (fluctuation 13-66), in the Journal of the Statistical S<

and offences against the person (flue- ciety, by Mr Guy, March, 1858 ; tl

tuation 13-61); or deaths from apo- 'fluctuation' here given is a me:

plexy (fluctuation 5-54), and offences sure of the amount of irregularit;

against property, without violence that is of departure from the averag

(fluctuation 5-48) ; or students regis- estimated in a way which wall

tered at the College of Surgeons described hereafter.]

SECT. 4.] On certain kinds of Groups or Series. 7

there should be as many as eight heads and therefore as few

as two tails, or vice versa. But take a thousand throws, and

it becomes in turn exceedingly likely that there should be

j as much as, or more than, a difference of six between the

| respective numbers. On the other hand the proportion of

! heads to tails in the case of the thousand throws will be very

much nearer to unity, in most cases, than when we only took

, ten. In other words, the longer a game of chance continues

the larger are the spells and runs of luck in themselves, but

the less their relative proportions to the whole amounts

| involved.

§ 4. In speaking as above of events or things as to the
details of which we know little or nothing, it is not of course
implied that our ignorance about them is complete and uni
versal, or, what comes to the same thing, that irregularity
may be observed in all their qualities. All that is meant is
that there are some qualities or marks in them, the existence
of which we are not able to predicate with certainty in the
individuals. With regard to all their other qualities there
may be the utmost uniformity, and consequently the most
complete certainty. The irregularity in the length of human
life is notorious, but no one doubts the existence of such
organs as a heart and brains in any person whom he happens
to meet. And even in the qualities in which the irregularity
is observed, there are often, indeed generally, positive limits
within which it will be found to be confined. No person,
for instance, can calculate what may be the length of any
particular life, but we feel perfectly certain that it will not
stretch out to 150 years. The irregularity of the individual
instances is only shown in certain respects, as e.g. the length
of the life, and even in these respects it has its limits. The
same remark will apply to most of the other examples with
which we shall be concerned. The disorder in fact is not

8 On certain kinds of Groups or Series. [CHAP. I.

universal and unlimited, it only prevails in certain directions
and up to certain points.

§ 5. In speaking as above of a series, it will hardly be
necessary to point out that we do not imply that the objects
themselves which compose the series must occur successively
in time; the series may be formed simply by their coming
in succession under our notice, which as a matter of fact
they may do in any order whatever. A register of mortality,
for instance, may be made up of deaths which took place
simultaneously or successively; or, we might if we pleased
arrange the deaths in an order quite distinct from either of
these. This is entirely a matter of indifference; in all these
cases the series, for any purposes which we need take into
account, may be regarded as being of precisely the same de
scription. The objects, be it remembered, are given to us in
nature ; the order under which we view them is our own pri
vate arrangement. This is mentioned here simply by way of
caution, the meaning of this assertion will become more plain
in the sequel.

I am aware that the word 'series' in the application with
which it is used here is liable to some misconstruction, but I
cannot find any better word, or indeed any as suitable in all
respects. As remarked above, the events need not neces
sarily have occurred in a regular sequence of time, though
they often will have done so. In many cases (for instance,
the throws of a penny or a die) they really do occur in suc
cession; in other cases (for instance, the heights of men, or
the duration of their lives), whatever may have been the
order of their actual occurrence, they are commonly brought
under our notice in succession by being arranged in statistical
tables. In all cases alike our processes of inference involve
the necessity of examining one after another of the members
which compose the group, or at least of being prepared to do

SECT. 6.] On certain kinds of Groups or Series. 9

this, if we are to be in a position to justify our inferences.
The force of these considerations will come out in the course
of the investigation in Chapter VI.

The late Leslie Ellis1 has expressed what seems to me
a substantially similar view in terms of genus and species,
instead of speaking of a series. He says, " When individual
cases are considered, we have no conviction that the ratios of
frequency of occurrence depend on the circumstances common
to all the trials. On the contrary, we recognize in the de
termining circumstances of their occurrence an extraneous
element, an element, that is, extraneous to the idea of the
genus and species. Contingency and limitation come in (so
to speak) together ; and both alike disappear when we con
sider the genus in its entirety, or (which is the same thing)
in what may be called an ideal and practically impossible
realization of all which it potentially contains. If this be
granted, it seems to follow that the fundamental principle
of the Theory of Probabilities may be regarded as included
in the following statement, — The conception of a genus
implies that of numerical relations among the species sub
ordinated to it." As remarked above, this appears a sub
stantially similar doctrine to that explained in this chapter,
but I do not think that the terms genus and species are by
any means so well fitted to bring out the conception of a
tendency or limit as when we speak of a series, and I there
fore much prefer the latter expression.

§ 6. The reader will now have in his mind the conception
of a series or group of things or events, about the individuals
of which we know but little, at least in certain respects,
whilst we find a continually increasing uniformity as we
take larger numbers under our notice. This is definite

1 Transactions of the Cambridge Beprinted in the collected edition of
Philosophical Society, Vol. ix. p. 605. his writings, p. 50.

10 On certain kinds of Groups or Series. [CHAP. i.

enough to point out tolerably clearly the kind of things
with which we have to deal, but it is not sufficiently definite
for purposes of accurate thought. We must therefore at
tempt a somewhat closer analysis.

There are certain phrases so commonly adopted as to
have become part of the technical vocabulary of the sub
ject, such as an 'event' and the 'way in which it can
happen.' Thus the act of throwing a penny would be called
an event, and the fact of its giving head or tail would be
called the way in which the event happened. If we were
discussing tables of mortality, the former term would de
note the mere fact of death, the latter the age at which
it occurred, or the way in which it was brought about,
or whatever else in it might be the particular circumstance
under discussion. This phraseology is very convenient, and
will often be made use of in this work, but without expla
nation it may lead to confusion. For in many cases the
way in which the event happens is of such great relative
importance, that according as it happens in one way or
another the event would have a different name ; in other
words, it would not in the two cases be nominally the same
event. The phrase therefore will have to be considerably
stretched before it will conveniently cover all the cases to
which we may have to apply it. If for instance we were
contemplating a series of human beings, male and female,
it would sound odd to call their humanity an event, and
their sex the way in which the event happened.

If we recur however to any of the classes of objects
already referred to, we may see our path towards obtaining
a more accurate conception of what we want. It will easily
be seen that in every one of them there is a mixture of
similarity and dissimilarity; there is a series of events
which have a certain number of features or attributes in

SECT. 7.] On certain kinds of Groups or Series. 11

common, — without this they would not be classed together.
But there is also a distinction existing amongst them ; a
certain number of other attributes are to be found in some
and are not to be found in others. In other words, the
individuals which form the series are compound, each being
made up of a collection of things or attributes ; some of
these things exist in all the members of the series, others
are found in some only. So far there is nothing peculiar
to the science of Probability ; that in which the distinctive
characteristic consists is this ; — that the occasional attri
butes, as distinguished from the permanent, are found on
an extended examination to tend to exist in a certain definite
proportion of the whole number of cases. We cannot tell in
any given instance whether they will be found or not, but
as we go on examining more cases we find a growing uni
formity. We find that the proportion of instances in which
they are found to instances in which they are wanting, is
gradually subject to less and less comparative variation, and
approaches continually towards some apparently fixed value.

The above is the most comprehensive form of description ;
as a matter of fact the groups will in many cases take a
far simpler form ; they may appear, e.g. simply as a suc
cession of things of the same kind, say human beings, with
or without an occasional attribute, say that of being left-
handed. We are using the word attribute, of course, in its
widest sense, intending it to include every distinctive feature
that can be observed in a thing, from essential qualities
down to the merest accidents of time and place.

§ 7. On examining our series, therefore, we shall find
that it may best be conceived, not necessarily as a succession
of events happening in different ways, but as a succession
of groups of things. These groups, on being analysed, are
found in every case to be resolvable into collections of sub-

12 On certain kinds of Groups or Series. [CHAP. I.

stances and attributes. That which gives its unity to the
succession of groups is the fact of some of these substances or
attributes being common to the whole succession ; that which
gives their distinction to the groups in the succession is the
fact of some of them containing only a portion of these sub
stances and attributes, the other portion or portions being
occasionally absent. So understood, our phraseology may
be made to embrace every class of things of which Proba
bility can take account.

§ 8. It will be easily seen that the ordinary expression
(viz. the 'event,' and the 'way in which it happens') may be
included in the above. When the occasional attributes are
unimportant the permanent ones are sufficient to fix and
appropriate the name, the presence or absence of the others
being simply denoted by some modification of the name or
the addition of some predicate. We may therefore in all such
cases speak of the collection of attributes as < the event/
the same event essentially, that is— only saying that it (so as
to preserve its nominal identity) happens in different ways
in the different cases. When the occasional attributes how
ever are important, or compose the majority, this way of
speaking becomes less appropriate ; language is somewhat
strained by our implying that two extremely different assem
blages are in reality the same event, with a difference only
in its mode of happening. The phrase is however a very
convenient one, and with this caution against its being mis
understood, it will frequently be made use of here.

§ 9. A series of the above-mentioned kind is, I ap
prehend, the ultimate basis upon which all the rules of
Probability must be based. It is essential to a clear com
prehension of the subject to have carried our analysis up
to this point, but any attempt at further analysis into the
intimate nature of the events composing the series, is not

SECT. 10.] On certain kinds of Groups or Series. 13

required. It is altogether unnecessary, for instance, to form
any opinion upon the questions discussed in metaphysics as
to the independent existence of substances. We have dis
covered, on examination, a series composed of groups of
substances and attributes, or of attributes alone. At such
a series we stop, and thence investigate our rules of infer
ence ; into what these substances or attributes would them
selves be ultimately analysed, if taken in hand by the
psychologist or metaphysician, it is no business of ours to
enquire here.

§ 10. The stage then which we have now reached is
that of having discovered a quantity of things (they prove
on analysis to be groups of things) which are capable of
being classified together, and are best regarded as consti
tuting a series. The distinctive peculiarity of this series is
our finding in it an order, gradually emerging out of disorder,
and showing in time a marked and unmistakeable uniformity.

The impression which may possibly be derived from the
description of such a series, and which the reader will pro
bably already entertain if he have studied Probability before,
is that the gradual evolution of this order is indefinite, and
its approach therefore to perfection unlimited. And many of
the examples commonly selected certainly tend to confirm
such an impression. But in reference to the theory of the
subject it is, I am convinced, an error, and one liable to lead
to much confusion.

The lines which have been prefixed as a motto to this
work, " So careful of the type she seems, so careless of the
single life," are soon after corrected by the assertion that
the type itself, if we regard it for a long time, changes,
and then vanishes and is succeeded by others. So in Pro
bability; that uniformity which is found in the long run,
and which presents so great a contrast to the individual

14 On certain kinds of Groups or Series. [CHAP. I.

disorder, though durable is not everlasting. Keep on watch
ing it long enough, and it will be found almost invariably to
fluctuate, and in time may prove as utterly irreducible to
rule, and therefore as incapable of prediction, as the indi
vidual cases themselves. The full bearing of this fact upon
the theory of the subject, and upon certain common modes
of calculation connected with it, will appear more fully in
some of the following chapters ; at present we will confine
ourselves to very briefly establishing and illustrating it.

Let us take, for example, the average duration of life.
This, provided our data are sufficiently extensive, is known to
be tolerably regular and uniform. This fact has been already
indicated in the preceding sections, and is a truth indeed
of which the popular mind has a tolerably clear grasp at the
present day. But a very little consideration will show that
there may be a superior as well as an inferior limit to
the extent within which this uniformity can be observed;
in other words whilst we may fall into error by taking too
few instances we may also fail in our aim, though in a very
different way and from quite different reasons, by taking too
many. At the present time the average duration of life in
England may be, say, forty years; but a century ago it was
decidedly less ; several centuries ago it was presumably very
much less; whilst if we possessed statistics referring to a still
earlier population of the country we should probably find that
there has been since that time a still more marked improve
ment. What may be the future tendency no man can say for
certain. It may be, and we hope that it will be the case,
that owing to sanitary and other improvements, the duration
of life will go on increasing steadily ; it is at least conceivable,
though doubtless incredible, that it should do so without
limit. On the other hand, and with much more likelihood,
this duration might gradually tend towards some fixed

SECT. 11.] On certain kinds of Groups or Series. 15

length. Or, again, it is perfectly possible that future gene
rations might prefer a short and a merry life, and therefore
reduce their average longevity. The duration of life cannot
but depend to some extent upon the general tastes, habits
and employments of the people, that is upon the ideal which
they consciously or unconsciously set before them, and he would
be a rash man who should undertake to predict what this ideal
will be some centuries hence. All that it is here necessary
however to indicate is, that this particular uniformity (as we
have hitherto called it, in order to mark its relative cha
racter) has varied, and, under the influence of future eddies
in opinion and practice, may vary still; and this to any
extent, and with any degree of irregularity. To borrow a
term from Astronomy, we find our uniformity subject to what
might be called an irregular secular variation.

§11. The above is a fair typical instance. If we had
taken a less simple feature than the length of life, or one
less closely connected with what may be called by compari
son the great permanent uniformities of nature, we should
have found the peculiarity under notice exhibited in a far
more striking degree. The deaths from small-pox, for ex
ample, or the instances of duelling or accusations of witch
craft, if examined during a few successive decades, might
have shown a very tolerable degree of uniformity. But these
uniformities have risen possibly from zero ; after various and
very great fluctuations seem tending towards zero again, at
least in this century ; and may, for anything we know, un
dergo still more rapid fluctuations in future. Now these
examples must be regarded as being only extreme ones, and
not such very extreme ones, of what is the almost universal
rule in nature. I shall endeavour to show that even the few
apparent exceptions, such as the proportions between male
and female births, &c., may not be, and probably in reality

16 On certain kinds of Groups or Series. [CHAP. I.

are not, strictly speaking, exceptions. A type, that is, which
shall be in the fullest sense of the words, persistent and
invariable is scarcely to be found in nature. The full import
of this conclusion will be seen in future chapters. Attention
is only directed here to the important inference that, although
statistics are notoriously of no value unless they are in suffi
cient numbers, yet it does not follow but that in certain cases
we may have too many of them. If they are made too ex
tensive, they may again fall short, at least for any particular
time or place, of their greatest attainable accuracy.

§ 12. These natural uniformities then are found at
length to be subject to fluctuation. Now contrast with them
any of the uniformities afforded by games of chance ; these
latter seem to show no trace of secular fluctuation, however
long we may continue our examination of them. Criticisms
will be offered, in the course of the following chapters, upon
some of the common attempts to prove a priori that there
must be this fixity in the uniformity in question, but of its
existence there can scarcely be much doubt. Pence give
heads and tails about equally often now, as they did when
they were first tossed, and as we believe they will continue
to do, so long as the present order of things continues. The
fixity of these uniformities may not be as absolute as is
commonly supposed, but no amount of experience which we
need take into account is likely in any appreciable degree to
interfere with them. Hence the obvious contrast, that,
whereas natural uniformities at length fluctuate, those af
forded by games of chance seem fixed for ever.

§ 13. Here then are series apparently of two different
kinds. They are alike in their initial irregularity, alike in
their subsequent regularity ; it is in what we may term
their ultimate form that they begin to diverge from each
other. The one tends without any irregular variation

SECT. 13.] On certain kinds of Groups or Series. 17

towards a fixed numerical proportion in its uniformity; in
[the other the uniformity is found at last to fluctuate, and to
fluctuate, it may be, in a manner utterly irreducible to rule.
As this chapter is intended to be little more than ex
planatory and illustrative of the foundations of the science,
the remark may be made here (for which subsequent justi
fication will be offered) that it is in the case of series of the
former kind only that we are able to make anything which
can be interpreted into strict scientific inferences. We shall
be able however in a general way to see the kind and extent
of error that would be committed if, in any example, we were
to substitute an imaginary series of the former kind for any
actual series of the latter kind which experience may present
to us. The two series are of course to be as alike as possible
in all respects, except that the variable uniformity has been
replaced by a fixed one. The difference then between them
would not appear in the initial stage, for in that stage the
distinctive characteristics of the series of Probability are not
apparent ; all is there irregularity, and it would be as im
possible to show that they were alike as that they were
different ; we can only say generally that each shows the
same kind of irregularity. Nor would it appear in the next
subsequent stage, for the real variability of the uniformity
has not for some time scope to make itself perceived. It
would only be in what we have called the ultimate stage,
when we suppose the series to extend for a very long time,
that the difference would begin to make itself felt1. The
proportion of persons, for example, who die each year at the
age of six months is, when the numbers examined are on a

1 We might express it thus : — a it takes a very great number to esta-

few instances are not sufficient to blish that a change is taking place in

display a law at all ; a considerable the law.
number will suffice to display it ; but

v. 2

18 On certain kinds of Groups or Series. [CHAP. I.

small scale, utterly irregular; it becomes however regular
when the numbers examined are on a larger scale ; but if we
continued our observation for a very great length of time, or
over a very great extent of country, we should find this
regularity itself changing in an irregular way. The sub
stitution just mentioned is really equivalent to saying, Let
us assume that the regularity is fixed and permanent. It is
making a hypothesis which may not be altogether consistent
with fact, but which is forced upon us for the purpose of,
securing precision of statement and definition.

§ 14. The full meaning and bearing of such a substi
tution will only become apparent in some of the subsequent
chapters, but it may be pointed out at once that it is in this
way only that we can with perfect strictness introduce thei
notion of a 'limit' into our account of the matter, at anyi
rate in reference to many of the applications of the subject
to purely statistical enquiries. We say that a certain pro
portion begins to prevail among the events in the long run ;i
but then on looking closer at the facts we find that we have
to express ourselves hypothetically, and to say that if present)
circumstances remain as they are, the long run will show i1
characteristics without disturbance. When, as is often th(
case, we know nothing accurately of the circumstances bj
which the succession of events is brought about, but hav<
strong reasons to suspect that these circumstances are likely
to undergo some change, there is really nothing else to
done. We can only introduce the conception of a limit, to-|
wards which the numbers are tending, by assuming thai
these circumstances do not change ; in other words, by sub
stituting a series with a fixed uniformity for the actual om
with the varying uniformity1.

1 The mathematician may illustrate analogies of the 'circle of curvature
the nature of this substitution by the in geometry, and the 'instantaneoi

SECT. 15.] On certain kinds of Groins or Series. 19

§ 15. If the reader will study the following example,
one well known to mathematicians under the name of the
Petersburg1 problem, he will find that it serves to illustrate
several of the considerations mentioned in this chapter. It
serves especially to bring out the facts that the series with
which we are concerned must be regarded as indefinitely
extensive in point of number or duration ; and that when so
regarded certain series, but certain series only (the one in
question being a case in point), take advantage of the in
definite range to keep on producing individuals in it whose
deviation from the previous average has no finite limit
whatever. When rightly viewed ii> is a very simple problem,
but it has given rise, at one time or another, to a good
deal of confusion and perplexity.

The problem may be stated thus : — a penny is tossed up ;
if it gives head I receive one pound ; if heads twice running
two pounds ; if heads three times running four pounds, and
so on ; the amount to be received doubling every time that
a fresh head succeeds. That is, I am to go on as long as it
continues to give a succession of heads, to regard this suc
cession as a ' turn ' or set, and then take another turn, and so
on ; and for each such turn I am to receive a payment ; the
occurrence of tail being understood to yield nothing, in fact
being omitted from our consideration. However many times
head may be given in succession, the number of pounds I
may claim is found by raising two to a power one less

ellipse' in astronomy. In the cases on that supposition,

in which these conceptions are made * So called from its first mathe-

use of we have a phenomenon which matical treatment appearing in the

is continuously varying and also Commentarii. of the Petersburg Aca-

changing its rate of variation. We demy;- a^ variety of notices upon it

take it at some given moment, sup- will be found in Mr Todhunter's

pose its rate at that moment to be History of the Theory of Probability,
fixed, and then complete its career

2—2

20 On certain kinds of Groups or Series. [CHAP. I.

than that number of times. Here then is a series formed by
a succession of throws. We will assume, — what many per
sons will consider to admit of demonstration, and what:
certainly experience confirms within considerable limits, —
that the rarity of these ' runs ' of the same face is in direct
proportion to the amount I receive for them when they d<
occur. In other words, if we regard only the occasions on
which I receive payments, we shall find that every othei
time I get one pound, once in four times I get two pounds
once in eight times four pounds, and so on without any end
The question is then asked, what ought I to pay for this
privilege ? At the risk of a slight anticipation of the results
of a subsequent chapter, we may assume that this is equiva
lent to asking, what amount paid each time would on th(
average leave me neither winner nor loser ? In other words
what is the average amount I should receive on the above
terms ? Theory pronounces that I ought to give an infinite
sum: that is, no finite sum, however great, would be an
adequate equivalent. And this is really quite intelligible
There is a series of indefinite length before me, and th(
longer I continue to work it the richer are my returns, am
this without any limit whatever. It is true that the very
rich hauls are extremely rare, but still they do come, and
when they come they make it up by their greater richness
On every occasion on which people have devoted themselve,
to the pursuit in question, they made acquaintance, of course
with but a limited portion of this series ; but the series on
which we base our calculation is unlimited; and the in
ferences usually drawn as to the sum which ought in the long
run to be paid for the privilege in question are in perfed
accordance with this supposition.

The common form of objection is given in the reply, thai
so far from paying an infinite sum, no sensible man woulc

SECT. 16.] On certain kinds of Groups or Series. 21 j

2five anything approaching to £50 for such a chance. Pro-
bably not, because no man would see enough of the series to
make it worth his while. What most persons form their
practical opinion upon, is such small portions of the series
as they have actually seen or can reasonably expect. Now
in any such portion, say one which embraces 100 turns, the
longest succession of heads would not amount on the average
to more than seven or eight. This is observed, but it is for
gotten that the formula which produced these, would, if it
had greater scope, keep on producing better and better ones
without any limit. Hence it arises that some persons are
perplexed, because the conduct they would adopt, in reference
to the curtailed portion of the series which they are practically
likely to meet with, does not find its justification in inferences
which are necessarily based upon the series in the complete
ness of its infinitude.

§ 16. This will be more clearly seen by considering the
various possibilities, arid the scope required in order to exhaust
them, when we confine ourselves to a limited number of
throws. Begin with three. This yields eight equally likely
possibilities. In four of these cases the thrower starts with
tail and therefore loses : in two he gains a single point
(i.e. £1); in one he gains two points, and in one he gains four
points. Hence his total gain being eight pounds achieved in
four different contingencies, his average gain would be two
pounds.

Now suppose he be allowed to go as far as n throws, so
that we have to contemplate 2n possibilities. All of these
have to be taken into account if we wish to consider what
happens on the average. It will readily be seen that, when
all the possible cases have been reckoned once, his total gain
will be (reckoned in pounds),

2«-2 + 2n~3. 2 + 2n~4. 22 + . . . . -f 2 . 2n~3 + 2n~2 + 2n-1,

_

>2 On certain kinds of Groups or Series. [CHAP. I. [

Viz. (n + 1) 2n'2.

This being spread over 2n-1 different occasions of gain his

average gain will be %(n + 1).

Now when we are referring to averages it must be re
membered that the minimum number of different occurrences
necessary in order to justify the average is that which enables I
each of them to present itself once. A man proposes to stop
short at a succession of ten heads. Well and good. We tell
him that his average gain will be £5. 10s. Od.: but we also
impress upon him that in order to justify this statement he
must commence to toss at least 1024 times, for in no less
number can all the contingencies of gain and loss be exhibited
and balanced. If he proposes to reach an average gain of
£20, he will require to be prepared to go up to 39 throws.
To justify this payment he must commence to throw 239
times, i.e. about a million million times. Not before he has
accomplished this will he be in a position to prove to any
sceptic that this is the true average value of a ' turn' extend
ing to 39 successive tosses.

Of course if he elects to toss to all eternity we must I
adopt the line of explanation which alone is possible where :•;
questions of infinity in respect of number and magnitude are if
involved. We cannot tell him to pay down ' an infinite sum/ H
for this has no strict meaning. But we tell him that, however |
much he may consent to pay each time runs of heads occur, \
he will attain at last a stage in which he will have won
back his total payments by his total receipts. However
large n may be, if he perseveres in trying 2n times he may
have a true average receipt of ±(n + 1) pounds, and if he
continues long enough onwards he will have it.

The problem will recur for consideration in a future
chapter.

>f

CHAPTER II.

FURTHER DISCUSSION UPON THE NATURE OF THE SERIES
MENTIONED IN THE LAST CHAPTER.

§ 1. IN the course of the last chapter the nature of a par
ticular kind of series, that namely, which must be considered
to constitute the basis of the science of Probability, has re
ceived a sufficiently general explanation for the preliminary
purpose of introduction. One might indeed say more than
this ; for the characteristics which were there pointed out are
really sufficient in themselves to give a fair general idea of
the nature of Probability, and of the sort of problems with
which it deals. But in the concluding paragraphs an indi
cation was given that the series of this kind, as they actu
ally occur in nature or as the results of more or less artificial
production, are seldom or never found to occur in such a
simple form as might possibly be expected from what had
previously been said ; but that they are almost always seen
to be associated together in groups after a somewhat com
plicated fashion. A fuller discussion of this topic must now
be undertaken.

We will take for examination an instance of a kind with
which the investigations of Quetelet will have served to
familiarize some readers. Suppose that we measure the
heights of a great many adult men in any town or country.
These heights will of course lie between certain extremes in

*A Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. II.

each direction, and if we continue to accumulate our mea
sures it will be found that they tend to lie continuously
between these extremes ; that is to say, that under those
circumstances no intermediate height will be found to be
permanently unrepresented in such a collection of measure
ments. Now suppose these heights to be marshalled in the
order of their magnitude. What we always find is some
thing of the following kind; — about the middle point be
tween the extremes, a large number of the results will be
found crowded together: a little on each side of this point
there will still be an excess, but not to so great an extent ;
and so on, in some diminishing scale of proportion, until as
we get towards the extreme results the numbers thin off and
become relatively exceedingly small.

The point to which attention is here directed is not the
mere fact that the numbers thus tend to diminish from the
middle in each direction, but, as will be more fully explained
directly, the law according to which this progressive diminu
tion takes place. The word ' law ' is here used in its mathe
matical sense, to express the formula connecting together the
two elements in question, namely, the height itself, and the
relative 'number that are found of that height. We shall
have to enquire whether one of these elements is a function
of the other, and, if so, what function.

§ 2. After what was said in the last chapter, it need
hardly be insisted upon that the interest and significance of
such investigations as these are almost entirely dependent
upon the statistics being very extensive. In one or other of
Quetelet's works on Social Physics1 will be found a selection
of measurements of almost every element which the physical
frame of man can furnish :— his height, his weight, the mus
cular power of various limbs, the dimensions of almost every
1 Essai de Physique Sociale, 1869. Anthropometrie, 1870.

SECT. 3.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 25

part and organ, and so on. Some of the most extensive of
these express the heights of 25,000 Federal soldiers from the
Army of the Potomac, and the circumferences of the chests
of 5738 Scotch militia men taken many years ago. Those
who wish to consult a large repertory of such statistics can
not be referred to any better sources than to these and other
works by the same author1.

Interesting and valuable, however, as are Quetelet's sta
tistical investigations (and much of the importance now
deservedly attached to such enquiries is, perhaps, owing
more to his efforts than to those of any other person), I can
not but feel convinced that there is much in what he has
written upon the subject which is erroneous and confusing as
regards the foundations of the science of Probability, and the
philosophical questions which it involves. These errors are
not by any means confined to him, but for various reasons
they will be better discussed in the form of a criticism of his
explicit or implicit expression of them, than in any more in
dependent way.

§ 3. In the first place then, he always, or almost always,
assumes that there can be but one and the same law of ar
rangement for the results of our observations, measurements,
and so on, in these statistical enquiries. That is, he as
sumes that whenever we get a group of such magnitudes
clustering about a mean, and growing less frequent as

1 As regards later statistics on the Secretary (Mr C. Eoberts) that their

same subject the reader can refer to statistics are "unique in range and

the Eeports of the Anthropometrical numbers". They embrace not merely

Committee of the British Association military recruits — like most of the

(1879, 1880, 1881, 1883 ;— especially previous tables— but almost every

this last). These reports seem to class and age, and both sexes. More-

me to represent a great advance on over they refer not only to stature

the results obtained by Quetelet, and but to a number of other physical

fully to justify the claim of the characteristics.

26 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. n.

they depart from that mean, we shall find that this di
minution of frequency takes place according to one in
variable law, whatever may be the nature of these mag
nitudes, and whatever the process by which they may have
been obtained.

That such a uniformity as this should prevail amongst
many and various classes of phenomena would probably seem
surprising in any case. But the full significance of such a
fact as this (if indeed it were a fact) only becomes apparent
when attention is directed to the profound distinctions in the
nature and origin of the phenomena which are thus supposed
to be harmonized by being brought under one comprehensive
principle. This will be better appreciated if we take a brief
glance at some of the principal classes into which the things
with which Probability is chiefly concerned may be divided.
These are of a three-fold kind.

§ 4. In the first place there are the various combina
tions, and runs of luck, afforded by games of chance. Sup
pose a handful, consisting of ten coins, were tossed up a
great many times in succession, and the results were tabu
lated. What we should obtain would be something of the
following kind. In a certain proportion of cases, and these
the most -numerous of all, we should find that we got five
heads and five tails ; in a somewhat less proportion of cases
we should have, as equally frequent results, four heads six
tails, and four tails six heads ; and so on in a continually
diminishing proportion until at length we came down, in a
very small relative number of cases, to nine heads one tail,
and nine tails one head ; whilst the least frequent results
possible would be those which gave all heads or all tails1.

1 As every mathematician knows, cessive terms of the expansion of
the relative numbers of each of these (l + l)10, viz. 1, 10, 45, 120, 210, 252,
possible throws are given by the sue- 210, 120, 45, 10, 1.

SECT. 4.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 27

Here the statistical elements under consideration are, as
regards their origin at any rate, optional or brought about
by human choice. They would, therefore, be commonly
described as being mainly artificial, but their results ulti
mately altogether a matter of chance.

Again, in the second place, we might take the accurate
measurements — i.e. the actual magnitudes themselves, — of
a great many natural objects, belonging to the same genus
or class ; such as the cases, already referred to, of the heights,
or other characteristics of the inhabitants of any district.
Here human volition or intervention of any kind seem to
have little or nothing to do with the matter. It is optional
with us to collect the measures, but the things measured are
quite outside our control. They would therefore be com
monly described as being altogether the production of nature,
and it would not be supposed that in strictness chance had
anything whatever to do with the matter.

In the third place, the result at which we are aiming
may be some fixed magnitude, one and the same in each
of our successive attempts, so that if our measurements
were rigidly accurate we should merely obtain the same
result repeated over and over again. But since all our
methods of attaining our aims are practically subject to
innumerable imperfections, the results actually obtained
will depart more or less, in almost every case, from the
real and fixed value which we are trying to secure. They
will be sometimes more wide of the mark, sometimes less
so, the worse attempts being of course the less frequent.
If a man aims at a target he will seldom or never hit it
precisely in the centre, but his good shots will be more1

1 That is they will be more densely cessive circle, the number of shot
aggregated. If a space the size of the marks which it contains will be suc-
bulVs-eye be examined in each sue- cessively less. The actual number

28 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. n.

numerous than his bad ones. Here again, then, we have
a series of magnitudes (i.e. the deflections of the shots from
the point aimed at) clustering about a mean, but produced
in a very different way from those of the last two cases.
In this instance the elements would be commonly regarded
as only partially the results of human volition, and chance
therefore as being only a co-agent in the effects produced.
With these must be classed what may be called estimates,
as distinguished from measurements. By the latter are
generally understood the results of a certain amount of
mechanism or manipulation; by the former we may under
stand those cases in which the magnitude in question is
determined by direct observation or introspection. The
interest and importance of this class, so far as scientific
principles are concerned, dates mainly from the investigations
of Fechner. Its chief field is naturally to be found amongst
psychological data.

Other classes of things, besides those alluded to above,
might readily be given. These however are the classes about
which the most extensive statistics are obtainable, or to
which the most practical importance and interest are at
tached. The profound distinctions which separate their
origin and character are obvious. If they all really did
display precisely the same law of variation it would be a
most remarkable fact, pointing doubtless to some deep-
seated identity underlying the various ways, apparently
so widely distinct, in which they had been brought about.
The questions now to be discussed are; Is it the case,
with any considerable degree of rigour, that only one law
of distribution does really prevail ? and, in so far as this
is so, how does it come to pass ?

of shots which strike the bull's-eye so much less surface than any of the
will not be the greatest, since it covers other circles.

SECT. 5.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 29

§ 5. In support of an affirmative answer to the former
of these two questions, several different kinds of proof are,
or might be, offered.

(I.) For one plan we may make a direct appeal to
experience, by collecting sets of statistics and observing
what is their law of distribution. As remarked above, this
has been done in a great variety of cases, and in some
instances to a very considerable extent, by Quetelet and
others. His researches have made it abundantly convincing
that many classes of things and processes, differing widely
in their nature and origin, do nevertheless appear to con
form with a considerable degree of accuracy to one and the
same1 law. At least this is made plain for the more

1 Commonly called the exponential
law; its equation being of the form
y = Ae~hx*. The curve corresponding
to it cuts the axis of y at right
angles (expressing the fact that near
the mean there are a large num
ber of values approximately equal;
after a time it begins to slope away
rapidly towards the axis of a; (express
ing the fact that the results soon
begin to grow less common as we
recede from the mean) ; and the axis

of x is an asymptote in both direc
tions (expressing the fact that no
magnitude, however remote from the
mean, is strictly impossible ; that is,
every deviation, however excessive,
will have to be encountered at length
within the range of a sufficiently long
experience). The curve is obviously
symmetrical, expressing the fact that
equal deviations from the mean, in
excess and in defect, tend to occur
equally often in the long run.

A rough graphic representation of
the curve is given above. For the
benefit of those unfamiliar with

K

mathematics one or two brief remarks
may be here appended concerning
some of its properties. (1) It must

30 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. n.

central values, for those that is which are situated most
nearly about the mean. With regard to the extreme values
there is, on the other hand, some difficulty. For instance
in the arrangements of the heights of a number of men,
these extremes are rather a stumbling-block ; indeed it has
been proposed to reject them from both ends of the scale
on the plea that they are monstrosities, the fact being that
their relative numbers do not seem to be by any means
those which theory would assign1. Such a plan of rejection
is however quite unauthorized, for these dwarfs and giants
are born into the world like their more normally sized
brethren, and have precisely as much right as any others
to be included in the formulae we draw up.

Besides the instance of the heights of men, other classes

not be supposed that all specimens of
the curve are similar to one another.
The dotted lines are equally specimens
of it. In fact, by varying the essen
tially arbitrary units in which x and
y are respectively estimated, we may
make the portion towards the vertex
of the curve as obtuse or as acute as
we please. This consideration is of
importance; for it reminds us that,
by varying one of these arbitrary
units, we could get an 'exponential
curve' which should tolerably closely
resemble any symmetrical curve of
error, provided that this latter re
cognized and was founded upon the
assumption that extreme divergences
were excessively rare. Hence it
would be difficult, by mere observa
tion, to prove that the law of error
in any given case was not exponen
tial; unless the statistics were very
extensive, or the actual results de

parted considerably from the expo
nential form. (2) It is quite impos
sible by any graphic representation
to give an adequate idea of the exces
sive rapidity with which the curve
after a time approaches the axis of x.
At the point jR, on our scale, the curve
would approach within the fifteen-
thousandth part of an inch from the
axis of x, a distance which only a very
good microscope could detect. Where
as in the hyperbola, e.g. the rate of
approach of the curve to its asymp
tote is continually decreasing, it is
here just the reverse ; this rate is
continually increasing. Hence the
two, viz. the curve and the axis of x,
appear to the eye, after a very short
time, to merge into one another.

1 As by Quetelet: noted, amongst
others, by Herschel, Essays, page
409.

SECT. 6.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 31

of observations of a somewhat similar character have been
already referred to as collected and arranged by Quetelet.
From the nature of the case, however, there are not many
appropriate ones at hand; for when our object is, not to
illustrate a law which can be otherwise proved, but to
obtain actual direct proof of it, the collection of observations
and measurements ought to be made upon such a large
scale as to deter any but the most persevering computers
from undergoing the requisite labour. Some of the remarks
made in the course of the note on the opposite page will
serve to illustrate the difficulties which would lie in the way
of such a mode of proof.

We are speaking here, it must be understood, only of
symmetrical curves : if there is asymmetry, i.e. if the Law of
Error is different on different sides of the mean, — a com
paratively very small number of observations would suffice
to detect the fact. But, granted symmetry and rapid
decrease of frequency on each side of the mean, we could
generally select some one species of the exponential curve
which should pretty closely represent our statistics in the
neighbourhood of the mean. That is, where the statistics are
numerous we could secure agreement ; and where we could
not secure agreement the statistics would be comparatively
so scarce that we should have to continue the observations
for a very long time in order to prove the disagreement.

§ 6. Allowing the various statistics such credit as they
deserve, for their extent, appropriateness, accuracy and so
on, the general conclusion which will on the whole be drawn
by almost every one who takes the trouble to consult them,
is that they do, in large part, conform approximately to one
type or law, at any rate for all except the extreme values.
So much as this must be fully admitted. But that they do
not, indeed we may say that they cannot, always do so in

32 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. n.

the case of the extreme values, will become obvious on
a little consideration. In some of the classes of things to
which the law is supposed to apply, for example, the suc
cessions of heads and tails in the throws of a penny, there is
no limit to the magnitude of the fluctuations which may and
will occur. Postulate as long a succession of heads or of tails
as we please, and if we could only live and toss long enough
for it we should succeed in getting it at length. In other
cases, including many of the applications of Probability
to natural phenomena, there can hardly fail to be such
limits. Deviations exceeding a certain range may not be
merely improbable, that is of very rare occurrence, but they
may often from the nature of the case be actually impos
sible. And even when they are not actually impossible '
may frequently appear on examination that they are onl)
rendered possible by the occasional introduction of agencie
which are not supposed to be available in the productio:
of the more ordinary or intermediate values. When, fo
instance, we are making observations with any kind c
instrument, the nature of its construction may put a
absolute limit upon the possible amount of error. And eve
if there be not an absolute limit under all kinds of usag
it may nevertheless be the case that there is one unde
fair and proper usage; it being the case that only whe
the instrument is designedly or carelessly tampered with wi
any new causes of divergence be introduced which were no
confined within the old limits.

Suppose, for instance, that a man is firing at a marl
His worst shots must be supposed to be brought about
a combination of such causes as were acting, or prepare
to act, in every other case ; the extreme instance of whs
we may thus term 'fair usage' being when a number <
distinct causes have happened to conspire together so

SECT. 7.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 33

to tend in the same direction, instead of, as in the other
cases, more or less neutralizing one another's work. But
the aggregate effect of such causes may well be supposed
to be limited. The man will not discharge his shot nearly
at right angles to the true line, of fire unless some entirely
new cause comes in, as by some unusual circumstance
having distracted his attention, or by his having had some
spasmodic seizure. But influences of this kind were not
supposed to have been available before ; and even if they
were we are taking a bold step in assuming that these
occasional great disturbances are subject to the same kind
of laws as are the aggregates of innumerable little ones.

We cannot indeed lay much stress upon an example
of this last kind, as compared with those in which we
can see for certain that there is a fixed limit to the range
of error. It is therefore offered rather for illustration than
for proof. The enormous, in fact inconceivable magnitude
of the numbers expressive of the chance of very rare com
binations, such as those in question, has such a bewildering
effect upon the mind that one may be sometimes apt to con
found the impossible with the higher degrees of the merely
mathematically improbable.

§ 7. At the time the first edition of this essay was com
posed writers on Statistics were, I think, still for the most
part under the influence of Quetelet, and inclined to over
value his authority on this particular subject: of late however
attention has been repeatedly drawn to the necessity of
taking account of other laws of arrangement than the binomial
or exponential.

Mr Galton, for instance, — to whom every branch of the
theory of statistics owes so much, — has insisted1 that the
" assumption which lies at the basis of the well-known law of
1 Proc. E. Soc. Oct. 21, 1879.

v. 3

34 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. II.

< Frequency of Error'... is incorrect in many groups of vital
and social phenomena.... For example, suppose we endeavour
to match a tint ; Fechner's law, in its approximative and
simplest form of sensation = log. stimulus, tells us that a
series of tints, in which the quantities of white scattered on a
black ground are as 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, &c., will appear to the
eye to be separated by equal intervals of tint. Therefore, in
matching a grey that contains 8 portions of white, we are
just as likely to err by selecting one that has 16 portions as
one that has 4 portions. In the first case there would be an
error in excess, of 8 ; in the second there would be an error,
in deficiency, of 4. Therefore, an error of the same magnitude
in excess or in deficiency is not equally probable." The con
sequences of this assumption are worked out in a remarkable
paper by Dr D. McAlister, to which allusion will have to be
made again hereafter. All that concerns us here to point out
is that when the results of statistics of this character are
arranged graphically we do not get a curve which is sym
metrical on both sides of a central axis.

§ 8. More recently, Mr F. Y. Edge worth (in a report of
a Committee of the British Association appointed to enquire
into the variation of the monetary standard) has urged the
same considerations in respect of prices of commodities. He
gives a number of statistics " drawn from the prices of twelve
commodities during the two periods 1782—1820, 1820—1865.
The maximum and minimum entry for each series having
been noted, it is found that the number of entries above the
' middle point,' half-way between the maximum and minimum1,
is in every instance less than half the total number of entries
in the series. In the twenty-four trials there is not a single
exception to the rule, and in very few cases even an approach

1 We are here considering, re- of statistics; so that there are actual
member, the case of a finite amount limits at each end.

SECT. 8.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 35

to an exception. We may presume then that the curves are
of the lop-sided character indicated by the accompanying
diagram." The same facts are also ascertained in respect to
place variations as distinguished from time variations. To
these may be added some statistics of my own, referring to
he heights of the barometer taken at the same hour on more
than 4000 successive days (v. Nature, Sept. 2, 1887). So far
as. these go they show a marked asymmetry of arrangement.

In fact it appears to me that this want of symmetry
ought to be looked for in all cases in which the phenomena
under measurement are of a 'one-sided' character; in the
sense that they are measured on one side only of a certain
ixed point from which their possibility is supposed to start.
For not only is it impossible for them to fall below this point :
ong before they reach it the influence of its proximity is felt
n enhancing the difficulty and importance of the same
amount of absolute difference.

Look at a table of statures, for instance, with a mean
value of 69 inches. A diminution of three feet (were this
)ossible) is much more influential, — counts for much more,
m every sense of the term, — than an addition of the same
amount ; for the former does not double the mean, while the
latter more than halves it. Revert to an illustration. If
a vast number of petty influencing circumstances of the kind
already described were to act upon a swinging pendulum we
should expect the deflections in each direction to display
symmetry ; but if they were to act upon a spring we should
not expect such a result. Any phenomena of which the '
latter is the more appropriate illustration can hardly be
expected to range themselves with symmetry about a mean \

1 It must be admitted that ex- shown this asymmetry in respect of
perience has not yet (I believe) heights.

3—2

36 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. n.

§ 9 (II.). The last remarks will suggest another kind of
proof which might be offered to establish the invariable nature
of the law of error. It is of a direct deductive kind, not
appealing immediately to statistics, but involving an enquiry
into the actual or assumed nature of the causes by which the
events are brought about. Imagine that the event under
consideration is brought to pass, in the first place, by some
fixed cause, or group of fixed causes. If this comprised all
the influencing circumstances the event would invariably
happen in precisely the same way : there would be no errors
or deflections whatever to be taken account of. But now
suppose that there were also an enormous number of very
small causes which tended to produce deflections ; that these
causes acted in entire independence of one another ; and that
each of the lot told as often, in the long run, in one direction
as in the opposite. It is easy1 to see, in a general way, what
would follow from these assumptions. In a very few cases
nearly all the causes would tell in the same direction; in
other words, in a very few cases the deflection would be
extreme. In a greater number of cases, however, it would
only be the most part of them that would tell in one direc
tion, whilst a few did what they could to counteract the rest ;
the result being a comparatively larger number of somewhat
smaller deflections. So on, in increasing numbers, till we
approach the middle point. Here we shall have a very large
number of very small deflections: the cases in which the
opposed influences just succeed in balancing one another,
so that no error whatever is produced, being, though actually
infrequent, relatively the most frequent of all.

1 The above reasoning will proba- selves, involve somewhat of an anti-
bly be accepted as valid at this stage cipation. They demand, and in a
of enquiry. But in strictness, as- future chapter will receive, closer
sumptions are made here, which how- scrutiny and criticism,
ever justifiable they maybe in them-

SECT. 10.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 37

Now if all deflections from a mean were brought about in
the way just indicated (an indication which must suffice for
the present) we should always have one and the same law of
arrangement of frequency for these deflections or errors, viz.
the exponential1 law mentioned in § 5.

§ 10. It may be readily admitted from what we know
about the production of events that something resembling

1 A definite numerical example of
this kind of concentration of fre
quency about the mean was given in
the note to § 4. It was of a binomial
form, consisting of the successive
terms of the expansion of (1 + l)m.
Now it may be shown (Quetelet, Let
ters, p. 263 ; Liagre, Calcul des Proba-
bilites, § 34) that the expansion of such
a binomial, as m becomes indefinitely
great, approaches as its limit the
exponential form ; that is, if we take
a number of equidistant ordinates
proportional respectively to 1, m,
m(m- 1)

1-2

&c. , and connect their ver

tices, the figure we obtain approxi
mately represents some form of the
curve y = Ae-hx<2, and tends to become
identical with it, as m is increased
without limit. In other words, if
we suppose the errors to be produced
by a limited number of finite, equal
and independent causes, we have an
approximation to the exponential
Law of Error, which merges into
identity as the causes are increased
in number and diminished in magni
tude without limit. Jevons has given
(Principles of Science, p. 381) a dia
gram drawn to scale, to show how
rapid this approximation is. One

point must be carefully remembered
here, as it is frequently overlooked
(by Quetelet, for instance). The co
efficients of a binomial of two equal
terms — as (l + l)m, in the preceding
paragraph — are symmetrical in their
arrangement from the first, and very
speedily become indistinguishable in
(graphical) outline from the final ex
ponential form. But if, on the other
hand, we were to consider the suc
cessive terms of such a binomial as
(l + 4)m (which are proportional to
the relative chances of 0, 1, 2, 3,...
failures in m ventures, of an event
which has one chance in its favour
to four against it) we should have an
unsymmetrical succession. If how
ever we suppose m to increase with
out limit, as in the former supposi
tion, the unsymmetry gradually dis
appears and we tend towards pre
cisely the same exponential form as
if we had begun with two equal terms.
The only difference is that the posi
tion of the vertex of the curve is no
longer in the centre : in other words,
the likeliest term or event is not an
equal number of successes and fail
ures but successes and failures in
the ratio of 1 to 4.

38 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. n.

these assumptions, and therefore something resembling the
consequences which follow from them, is really secured in a
very great number of cases. But although this may prevail
approximately, it is in the highest degree improbable that it
could ever be secured, even artificially, with anything ap
proaching to rigid accuracy. For one thing, the causes of
deflection will seldom or never be really independent of one
another. Some of them will generally be of a kind such that
the supposition that several are swaying in one direction,
may affect the capacity of each to produce that full effect
which it would have been capable of if it had been left to do
its work alone. In the common example, for instance, of
firing at a mark, so long as we consider the case of the toler
ably good shots the effect of the wind (one of the causes of
error) will be approximately the same whatever may be the
precise direction of the bullet. But when a shot is consider
ably wide of the mark the wind can no longer be regarded as
acting at right angles to the line of flight, and its effect in
consequence will not be precisely the same as before. In
other words, the causes here are not strictly independent, as
they were assumed to be ; and consequently the results to be
attributed to each are not absolutely uninfluenced by those
of the others. Doubtless the effect is trifling here, but I
apprehend that if we were carefully to scrutinize the modes j
in which the several elements of the total cause conspire i
together, we should find that the assumption of absolute
independence was hazardous, not to say unwarrantable, in a
very great number of cases. These brief remarks upon the I
process by which the deflections are brought about must)
suffice for the present purpose, as the subject will receive a
fuller investigation in the course of the next chapter.

According, therefore, to the best consideration which
can at the present stage be afforded to this subject, we may

SECT. 11.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 39

draw a similar conclusion from this deductive line of argu
ment as from the direct appeal to statistics. The same
general result seems to be established ; namely, that approxi
mately, with sufficient accuracy for all practical purposes, we
may say that an examination of the causes by which the
deflections are generally brought about shows that they are
mostly of such a character as would result in giving us the
commonly accepted c Law of Error,' as it is termed1. The
two lines of enquiry, therefore, within the limits assigned,
afford each other a decided mutual confirmation.

§ 11 (III.). There still remains a third, indirect and
mathematical line of proof, which might be offered to esta
blish the conclusion that the Law of Error is always one and
the same. It may be maintained that the recognized and
universal employment of one and the same method, that
known to mathematicians and astronomers as the Method of
Least Squares, in all manner of different cases with very
satisfactory results, is compatible only with the supposition
that the errors to which that method is applied must be
grouped according to one invariable law. If all 'laws of
error' were not of one and the same type, that is, if the
relative frequency of large and small divergences (such as we
have been speaking of) were not arranged according to one
pattern, how could one method or rule equally suit them all ?

In order to preserve a continuity of treatment, some
notice must be taken of this enquiry here, though, as in the
case of the last argument, any thorough discussion of the

1 'Law of Error' is the usual tioned in § 4, but by a convenient

technical term for what has been generalization it is equally applied

elsewhere spoken of above as a Law to the other two ; so that we term

of Divergence from a mean. It is in the amount of the divergence from

strictness only appropriate in the the mean an 'error' in every case,

case of one, namely the third, of the however it may have been brought

three classes of phenomena men- about.

40 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. u.

subject is impossible at the present stage. For one thing, it
would involve too much employment of mathematics, or at
any rate of mathematical conceptions, to be suitable for the
general plan of this treatise : I have accordingly devoted a
special chapter to the consideration of it.

The main reason, however, against discussing this argu
ment here, is, that to do so would involve the anticipation of
a totally different side of the science of Probability from that
hitherto treated of. This must be especially insisted upon, as
the neglect of it involves much confusion and some error.
During these earlier chapters we have been entirely occupied
with laying what may be called the physical foundations of
Probability. We have done nothing else than establish, in one
way or another, the existence of certain groups or arrange
ments of things which are found to present themselves in
nature ; we have endeavoured to explain how they come to
pass, and we have illustrated their principal characteristics.
But these are merely the foundations of Inference, we have
not yet said a word upon the logical processes which are to
be erected upon these foundations. We have not therefore
entered yet upon the logic of chance.

§ 12. Now the way in which the Method of Least Squares
is sometimes spoken of tends to conceal the magnitude of
this distinction. Writers have regarded it as synonymous
with the Law of Error, whereas the fact is that the two are
not only totally distinct things but that they have scarcely
even any necessary connection with each other. The Law of
Error is the statement of a physical fact ; it simply assigns,
with more or less of accuracy, the relative frequency with
which errors or deviations of any kind are found in practice
to present themselves. It belongs therefore to what may be
termed the physical foundations of the science. The Method
of Least Squares, on the other hand, is not a law at all in the

SECT. 13.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 41

scientific sense of the term. It is simply a rule or direction
informing us how we may best proceed to treat any group of
these errors which may be set before us, so as to extract the
true result at which they have been aiming. Clearly there
fore it belongs to the inferential or logical part of the subject.

It cannot indeed be denied that the methods we employ
must have some connection with the arrangement of the facts
to which they are applied ; but the two things are none the
less distinct in their nature, and in this case the connection
does not seem at all a necessary one, but at most one of pro
priety and convenience. The Method of Least Squares is
usually applied, no doubt, to the most familiar and common
form of the Law of Error, namely the exponential form with
which we have been recently occupied. But other forms of
laws of error may exist, and, if they did, the method in
question might equally well be applied to them. I am not
asserting that it would necessarily be the best method in
every case, but it would be a possible one ; indeed we may
go further and say, as will be shown in a future chapter,
that it would be a good method in almost every case. But
its particular merits or demerits do not interfere with its
possible employment in every case in which we may choose
to resort to it. It will be seen therefore, even from the few
remarks that can be made upon the subject here, that the
fact that one and the same method is very commonly em
ployed with satisfactory results affords little or no proof that
the errors to which it is applied must be arranged according
to one fixed law.

§ 13. So much then for the attempt to prove the preva
lence, in all cases, of this particular law of divergence. The
next point in Quetelet's treatment of the subject which deserves
attention as erroneous or confusing, is the doctrine maintained
by him and others as to the existence of what he terms a type

42 Arrargement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. n.

in the groups of things in question. This is a not unnatural
consequence from some of the data and conclusions of the
last few paragraphs. Refer back to two of the three classes
of things already mentioned in § 4. If it really were the case
that in arranging in order a series of incorrect observations
or attempts of our own, and a collection of natural objects
belonging to some one and the same species or class, we found
that the law of their divergence was in each case identical in
the long run, we should be naturally disposed to apply the
same expression 'Law of Error' to both instances alike,
though in strictness it could only be appropriate to the
former. When we perform an operation ourselves with a
clear consciousness of what we are aiming at, we may quite
correctly speak of every deviation from this as being an
error; but when Nature presents us with a group of objects
of any kind, it is using a rather bold metaphor to speak in
this case also of a law of error, as if she had been aiming at
something all the time, and had like the rest of us missed
her mark more or less in almost every instance1.

Suppose we make a long succession of attempts to measure
accurately the precise height of a man, we should from one
cause or another seldom or never succeed in doing so with
absolute accuracy. But we have no right to assume that these,
imperfect measurements of ours would be found so to deviate
according to one particular law of error as to present the
precise counterpart of a series of actual heights of different
men, supposing that these latter were assigned with absolute
precision. What might be the actual law of error in a series
of direct measurements of any given magnitude could hardly
be asserted beforehand, and probably the attempt to deter-

1 This however seems to be the rate works hy Quetelet, viz. his
purport, either by direct assertion Physique Sociale, and his Anthropo-
or by implication, of two elabo- metric.

SECT. 14.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 43

mine it by experience has not been made sufficiently often to
enable us to ascertain it ; but upon general grounds it seems
by no means certain that it would follow the so-called ex
ponential law. Be this however as it may, it is rather a
licence of language to talk as if nature had been at work in
the same way as one of us ; aiming (ineffectually for the most
part) at a given result, that is at producing a man endowed
with a certain stature, proportions, and so on, who might
therefore be regarded as the typical man.

§ 14. Stated as above, namely, that there is a fixed
invariable human type to which all individual specimens of
humanity may be regarded as having been meant to attain,
but from which they have deviated in one direction or
another, according to a law of deviation capable of ci priori
determination, the doctrine is little else than absurd. But
if we look somewhat closer at the facts of the case, and the
probable explanation of these facts, we may see our way to
an important truth. The facts, on the authority of Quetelet's
statistics (the great interest and value of which must be
frankly admitted), are very briefly as follows : if we take any
element of our physical frame which admits of accurate
measurement, say the height, and determine this measure in
a great number of different individuals belonging to any
tolerably homogeneous class of people, we shall find that
these heights do admit of an orderly arrangement about a
mean, after the fashion which has been already repeatedly
mentioned. What is meant by a homogeneous class ? is a
pertinent and significant enquiry, but applying this condition
to any simple cases its meaning is readily stated. It implies
that the mean in question will be different according to the
nationality of the persons under measurement. According to
Quetelet1, in the case of Englishmen the mean is about
1 He scarcely, however, professes to give these as an accurate measure

44 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. II.

5 ft. 9 in.; for Belgians about 5 ft. 7 in.; for the French about
5 ft. 4 in. It need hardly be added that these measures are
those of adult-males.

§ 15. It may fairly be asked here what would have
been the consequence, had we, instead of keeping the English
and the French apart, mixed the results of our measurements
of them all together ? The question is an important one, as it
will oblige us to understand more clearly what we mean by
homogeneous classes. The answer that would usually be
given to it, though substantially correct, is somewhat too de
cisive and summary. It would be said that we are here
mixing distinctly heterogeneous elements, and that in con
sequence the resultant law of error will be by no means of
the simple character previously exhibited. So far as such an
answer is to be admitted its grounds are easy to appreciate.
In accordance with the usual law of error the divergences
from the mean grow continuously less numerous as they
increase in amount. Now, if we mix up the French and
English heights, what will follow ? Beginning from the
English mean of 5 feet 9 inches, the heights will at first fol
low almost entirely the law determined by these English
conditions, for at this point the English data are very nume
rous, and the French by comparison very few. But, as we
begin to approach the French mean, the numbers will cease
to show that continual diminution which they should show,
according to the English scale of arrangement, for here the
French data are in turn very numerous, and the English by
comparison few. The result of such a combination of hetero-

of the mean height, nor does he afford accurate data on any large

always give precisely the same mea- scale. The statistics given a few

sure. Practically, none but soldiers pages further on are probably far

being measured in any great num- more trustworthy,
bers, the English stature did not

•IECT. 16.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 45

reneous elements is illustrated by the figure annexed, of
:ourse in a very exaggerated form.

§ 16. In the above case the nature of the heterogeneity,
and the reasons why the statistics should be so collected and
arranged as to avoid it, seemed tolerably obvious. It will be
seen still more plainly if we take a parallel case drawn from
artificial proceedings. Suppose that after a man had fired a
few thousand shots at a certain spot, say a wafer fixed some
where on a wall, the position of the spot at which he aims
were shifted, and he fired a few thousand more shots at the
wafer in its new position. Now let us collect and arrange all
the shots of both series in the order of their departure from
either of the centres, say the new one. Here we should
really be mingling together two discordant sets of elements,
either of which, if kept apart from the other, would have
been of a simple and homogeneous character. We should
find, in consequence, that the resultant law of error betrayed
its composite or heterogeneous origin by a glaring departure
from the customary form, somewhat after the fashion indi
cated in the above diagram.

The instance of the English and French heights resem
bles the one just given, but falls far short of it in the strin
gency with which the requisite conditions are secured. The
fact is we have not here got the most suitable requirements,
' viz. a group consisting of a few fixed causes supplemented by
innumerable little disturbing influences. What we call a
nation is really a highly artificial body, the members of

46 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. n.

which are subject to a considerable number of local or oc
casional disturbing causes. Amongst Frenchmen were in
cluded, presumably, Bretons, Provencals, Alsatians, and so on,
thus commingling distinctions which, though less than those
between French and English, regarded as wholes, are very
far from being insignificant. And to these differences of
race must be added other disturbances, also highly impor- |
tant, dependent upon varying climate, food and occupation. !
It is plain, therefore, that whatever objections exist against
confusing together French and English statistics, exist also,
though of course in a less degree, against confusing together
those of the various provincial and other components which
make up the French people.

§ 17. Out of the great variety of important causes
which influence the height of men, it is probable that those
which most nearly fulfil the main conditions required by the
'Law of Error' are those about which we know the least.
Upon the effects of food and employment, observation has
something to say, but upon the purely physiological causes
by which the height of the parents influences the height of
the offspring, we have probably nothing which deserves to
be called knowledge. Perhaps the best supposition we can
make is one which, in accordance with the saying that 'like
breeds like', would assume that the purely physiological
causes represent the constant element ; that is, given a homo
geneous race of people to begin with, who freely inter
marry, and are subject to like circumstances of climate, food,
and occupation, the standard would remain on the whole
constant1.

In such a case the man who possessed the mean height,
mean weight, mean strength, and so on, might then be

1 This statement will receive some explanation and correction in the next
chapter.

ECT. 18.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 47

ailed, in a sort of way, a 'type'. The deviations from this
ype would then be produced by innumerable small influ-
nces, partly physiological, partly physical and social, acting
Dr the most part independently of one another, and result-
ng in a Law of Error of the usual description. Under such
estrictions and explanations as these, there seems to be no
easonable objection to speaking of a French or English type
r mean. But it must always be remembered that under
he present circumstances of every political nation, these
omewhat heterogeneous bodies might be subdivided into
'arious smaller groups, each of which would frequently ex-
libit the characteristics of such a type in an even more
narked degree.

§ 18. On this point the reports of the Anthropometrical
Committee, already referred to, are most instructive. They
llustrate the extent to which this subdivision could be
jarried out, and prove, — if any proof were necessary, — that
ihe discovery of Quetelet's homme moyen would lead us a
ong chase. So far as their results go the mean 'English'
stature (in inches) is 6 7 '6 6. But this is composed of Scotch,
[rish, English and Welsh constituents, the separate means of
,hese being, respectively; 6871, 67'90, 67'36, and 66'66.
But these again may be subdivided; for careful observation
shows that the mean English stature is distinctly greater in
certain districts (e.g. the North-Eastern counties) than in
others. Then again the mean of the professional classes is
considerably greater than that of the labourers; and that of
the honest and intelligent is very much greater than that of
the criminal and lunatic constituents of the population.
And, so far as the observations are extensive enough for the
purpose, it appears that every characteristic in respect of the
grouping about a mean which can be detected in the more
extensive of these classes can be detected also in the nar-

48 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. 11.

rower. Nor is there any reason to suppose that the same
process of subdivision could not be carried out as much
farther as we chose to prolong it.

§ 19. It need hardly be added to the above -remarks
that no one who gives the slightest adhesion to the Doctrine
of Evolution could regard the type, in the above qualified
sense of the term, as possessing any real permanence and
fixity. If the constant causes, whatever they may be, re
main unchanged, and if the variable ones continue in the
long run to balance one another, the results will continue to
cluster about the same mean. But if the constant ones
undergo a gradual change, or if the variable ones, instead of
balancing each other suffer one or more of their number to
begin to acquire a preponderating influence, so as to put a
sort of bias upon their aggregate effect, the mean will at
once begin, so to say, to shift its ground. And having once
begun to shift, it may continue to do so, to whatever extent
we recognize that Species are variable and Development is a
fact. It is as if the point on the target at which we aim, in
stead of being fixed, were slowly changing its position as we
continue to fire at it; changing almost certainly to some ex
tent and temporarily, and not improbably to a considerable
extent and permanently.

§ 20. Our examples throughout this chapter have been
almost exclusively drawn from physical characteristics,
whether of man or of inanimate things; but it need not be
supposed that we are necessarily confined to such instances.
Mr Galton, for instance, has proposed to extend the same
principles of calculation to mental phenomena, with a view
to their more accurate determination. The objects to be
gained by so doing belong rather to the inferential part of
our subject, and will be better indicated further on; but
they do not involve any distinct principle. Like other at-

SECT. 20.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 49

tempts to apply the methods of science in the region of the
mind, this proposal has met with some opposition; with very
slight reason, as it seems to me. That our mental qualities,
if they could be submitted to accurate measurement, would
be found to follow the usual Law of Error, may be assumed
without much hesitation. The known extent of the correla
tion of mental and bodily characteristics gives high proba
bility to the supposition that what is proved to prevail, at
any rate approximately, amongst most bodily elements which
have been submitted to measurement, will prevail also
amongst the mental elements.

To what extent such measurements could be carried
out practically, is another matter. It does not seem to
me that it could be done with much success; partly be
cause our mental qualities are so closely connected with,
indeed so run into one another, that it is impossible to
isolate them for purposes of comparison1. This is to some
extent indeed a difficulty in bodily measurements, but it is
far more so in those of the mind, where we can hardly get
beyond what can be called a good guess. The doctrine,
therefore, that mental qualities follow the now familiar law
of arrangement can scarcely be grounded upon anything
'inore than a strong analogy. Still this analogy is quite
strong enough to justify us in accepting the doctrine and
all the conclusions which follow from it, in so far as our
estimates and measurements can be regarded as trustworthy.
There seems therefore nothing unreasonable in the attempt
to establish a system of natural classification of mankind
by arranging them into a certain number of groups above
and below the average, each group being intended to cor-

1 I am not speaking here of the measurement of perceptions and other
now familiar results of Psychophysics, simple states of consciousness,
which are mainly occupied with the

v. 4

50 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. n.

respond to certain limits of excellency or deficiency.1 All
that is necessary for such a purpose is that the rate of1
departure from the mean should be tolerably constant under
widely different circumstances : in this case throughout all
the races of man. Of course if the law of divergence is
the same as that which prevails in inanimate nature we
have a still wider and more natural system of classification
at hand, and one which ought to be familiar, more or less, to
every one who has thus to estimate qualities.

§ 21. Perhaps one of the best illustrations of the legi
timate application of such principles is to be found in Mr
Galton's work on Hereditary Genius. Indeed the full force
and purport of some of his reasonings there can hardly be]
appreciated except by those who are familiar with the con
ceptions which we have been discussing in this chapter. We
can only afford space to notice one or two points, but the|
student will find in the perusal, of at any rate the more
argumentive parts, of that volume2 an interesting illustration
of the doctrines now under discussion. For one thing it
may be safely asserted, that no one unfamiliar with the Law
of Error would ever in the least appreciate the excessive

1 Perhaps the best hrief account with some approach to accuracy,

of Mr Galton's method is to be found select the middlemost person in the

in a paper in Mind (July, 1880) on row and use him as a basis of com-

the statistics of Mental Imagery. parison with the corresponding per-

The subject under comparison here son in any other batch. And simi-

— viz. the relative power, possessed larly with those who occupy other

by different persons, of raising clear relative positions than that of the

visual images of objects no longer middlemost,

present to us— is one which it seems 2 j refer to tlie introductory and

impossible to 'measure', in the ordi- concluding chapters: the bulk of the

nary sense of the term. But by book is, from the nature of the case,

arranging all the answers in the mainly occupied with statistical and

order in which the faculty in ques- biographical details,
tion seems to be possessed we can,

(SCT. 22.] Arrangement and Formation of the Series. 51

ipidity with which the superior degrees of excellence tend
become scarce. Every one, of course, can see at once, in
numerical way at least, what is involved in being 'one of a
illion'; but they would not at all understand, how very
ttle extra superiority is to be looked for in the man who is
me of two million'. They would confound the mere nu-
lerical distinction, which seems in some way to imply
ouble excellence, with the intrinsic superiority, which
ould mostly be represented by a very small fractional ad-
antage. To be 'one of ten million' sounds very grand, but
the qualities under consideration could be estimated in
lemselves without the knowledge of the vastly wider area
•om which the selection had been made, and in freedom
lerefore from any consequent numerical bias, people would
e surprised to find what a very slight comparative superi-
dty was, as a rule, thus obtained.

§ 22. The point just mentioned is an important one in
rguments from statistics. If, for instance, we find a small
roup of persons, connected together by blood-relationship,
id all possessing some mental characteristic in marked
iperiority, much depends upon the comparative rarity of
ich excellence when we are endeavouring to decide whether
• not the common possession of these qualities was acci-
mtal. Such a decision can never be more than a rough
le, but if it is to be made at all this consideration must
iter as a factor. Again, when we are comparing one nation
ith another1, say the Athenian with any modern European
iople, does the popular mind at all appreciate what sort of
ddence of general superiority is implied by the production,
it of one nation, of such a group as can be composed of
Derates, Plato, and a few of their contemporaries ? In this

1 See Galton's Hereditary Genius, pp. 336 — 350, "On the comparative
>rth of different races."

4—2

,52 Arrangement and Formation of the Series. [CHAP. II.

latter case we are also, it should be remarked, employing the
' Law of Error ' in a second way ; for we are assuming that
where the extremes are great so will also the means be, in
other words we are assuming that every amount of departure
from the mean occurs with a (roughly) calculable degree
of relative frequency. However generally this truth may
be accepted in a vague way, its evidence can only be ap
preciated by those who know the reasons which can be given
in its favour.

But the same principles will also supply a caution in
the case of the last example. They remind us that, foi
the mere purpose of comparison, the average man of any
group or class is a much better object for selection thai
the eminent one. There may be greater difficulties in th
way of detecting him, but when we have done so we hav
got possession of a securer and more stable basis of coin
parison. He is selected, by the nature of the case, fron
the most numerous stratum of his society; the eminen
man from a thinly occupied stratum. In accordance there
fore with the now familiar laws of averages and of larg
numbers the fluctuations amongst the former will generall
be very few and small in comparison with those amongst th
latter.

CHAPTER III.

0^ THE CAUSAL PROCESS BY WHICH THE GROUPS OR
SERIES OF PROBABILITY ARE BROUGHT ABOUT.

1. IN discussing the question whether all the various
Toups and series with which Probability is concerned are of
>recisely one and the same type, we made some examination
f the process by which they are naturally produced, but we
Qust now enter a little more into the details of this pro-
ess. All events are the results of numerous and com
plicated antecedents, far too numerous and complicated
in fact for it to be possible for us to determine or take
them all into account. Now, though it is strictly true that
we can never determine them all, there is a broad dis
tinction between the case of Induction, in which we can
make out enough of them, and with sufficient accuracy, to
satisfy a reasonable certainty, and Probability, in which we
cannot do so. To Induction we shall return in a future
chapter, and therefore no more need be said about it here.

We shall find it convenient to begin with a division
which, though not pretending to any philosophical accuracy,
will serve as a preliminary guide. It is the simple division
into objects, and the agencies which affect them. All the
phenomena with which Probability is concerned (as indeed
most of those with which science of any kind is concerned)
are the product of certain objects natural and artificial,
acting under the influence of certain agencies natural and

54 Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. [CHAP. in.

artificial. In the tossing of a penny, for instance, the objects
would be the penny or pence which were successively
thrown; the agencies would be the act of throwing, and
everything which combined directly or indirectly with this
to make any particular face come uppermost. This is a
simple and intelligible division, and can easily be so ex
tended in meaning as to embrace every class of objects with
which we are concerned.

Now if, in any two or more cases, we had the same
object, or objects indistinguishably alike, and if they were
exposed to the influence of agencies in all respects precisely
alike, we should expect the results to be precisely similar.
By one of the applications of the familiar principle of the
uniformity of nature we should be confident that exact
likeness in the antecedents would be followed by exact
likeness in the consequents. If the same penny, or similar
pence, were thrown in exactly the same way, we should
invariably find that the same face falls uppermost.

§ 2. What we actually find is, of course, very far re
moved from this. In the case of the objects, when the
are artificial constructions, e.g. dice, pence, cards, it is true
that they are purposely made as nearly as possible indis
tinguishably alike. We either use the same thing over an
over again or different ones made according to precisel
the same model. But in natural objects nothing of th
sort prevails. In fact when we come to examine them, w
find reproduced in them precisely the same characteristi
as those which present themselves in the final result which
we were asked to explain, so that unless we examine them
a stage further back, as we shall have to do to some extent
at any rate, we seem to be merely postulating again the
very peculiarity of the phenomena which we were under
taking to explain. They will be found, for instance, to

I SECT. 3.] Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. 55

I consist of large classes of objects, throughout all the indi-
I vidual members of which a general resemblance extends.
J Suppose that we were considering the length of life. The
objects here are the human beings, or that selected class
of them, whose lives we are considering. The resemblance
existing among them is to be found in the strength and
soundness of their principal vital organs, together with all
the circumstances which collectively make up what we call
the goodness of their constitutions. It is true that most of
these circumstances do not admit of any approach to actual
measurement ; but, as was pointed out in the last chapter,
very many of the circumstances which do admit of such
measurement have been measured, and found to display
the characteristics in question. Hence, from the known
analogy and correlation between our various organs, there
can be no reasonable doubt that if we could arrange human
constitutions in general, or the various elements which com
pose them in particular, in the order of their strength, we
should find just such an aggregate regularity and just such
groupings about the mean, as the final result (viz. in this
case the length of their lives) presents to our notice.

§ 3. It will be observed therefore that for this pur
pose the existence of natural kinds or groups is necessary.
In our games of chance of course the same die may be
thrown, or a card be drawn from the same pack, as often
as we please ; but many of the events which occur to
human beings either cannot be repeated at all, or not often
enough to secure in the case of the single individual any
sufficient statistical uniformity. Such regularity as we trace
in nature is owing, much more than is often suspected,
to the arrangement of things in natural kinds, each of
them containing a large number of individuals. Were each
kind of animals or vegetables limited to a single pair, or

56 Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. [CHAR in.

even to but a few pairs, there would not be much scope
left for the collection of statistical tables amongst them.
Or to take a less violent supposition, if the numbers
in each natural class of objects were much smaller than
they are at present, or the differences between their varie
ties and sub-species much more marked, the consequent
difficulty of extracting from them any sufficient length of
statistical tables, though not fatal, might be very serious.
A large number of objects in the class, together with that
general similarity which entitles the objects to be fairly
comprised in one class, seem to be important conditions
for the applicability of the theory of Probability to any
phenomenon. Something analogous to this excessive paucity
of objects in a class would be found in the attempt to
apply special Insurance offices to the case of those trades
where the numbers are very limited, and the employment
so dangerous as to put them in a class by themselves. If
an insurance society were started for the workmen in
gunpowder mills alone, a premium would have to be charged
to avoid possible ruin, so high as to illustrate the extreme
paucity of appropriate statistics.

§ 4. So much (at present) for the objects. If we turn
to what we have termed the agencies, we find much the
same thing again here. By the adjustment of their relative
intensity, and the respective frequency of their occurrence,
the total effects which they produce are found to be also
tolerably uniform. It is of course conceivable that this
should have been otherwise. It might have been found
that the second group of conditions so exactly corrected the
former as to convert the merely general uniformity into
an absolute one; or it might have been found, on the
other hand, that the second group should aggravate or
disturb the influence of the former to such an extent

SECT. 4.] Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. 57

[ as to destroy all the uniformity of its effects. Practically
j neither is the case. The second condition simply varies the
details, leaving the uniformity on the whole of precisely
the same general description as it was before. Or if the
objects were supposed to be absolutely alike, as in the case
of successive throws of a penny, it may serve to bring about
a uniformity. Analysis will show these agencies to be
thus made up of an almost infinite number of different
components, but it will detect the same peculiarity that
we have so often had occasion to refer to, pervading almost
all these components. The proportions in which they are
combined will be found to be nearly, though not quite, the
same; the intensity with which they act will be nearly
though not quite equal. And they will all unite and blend
into a more and more perfect regularity as we proceed to
take the average of a larger number of instances.

Take, for instance, the length of life. As we have seen,
the constitutions of a very large number of persons selected
at random will be found to present much the same feature ;
general uniformity accompanied by individual irregularity.
Now when these persons go out into the world, they are
exposed to a variety of agencies, the collective influence
of which will assign to each the length of life allotted to
him. These agencies are of course innumerable, and their
mutual interaction complicated beyond all power of analysis
to extricate. Each effect becomes in its turn a cause, is
interwoven inextricably with an indefinite number of other
causes, and reacts upon the final result. Climate, food,
clothing, are some of these agencies, or rather comprise
aggregate groups of them. The nature of a man's work
is also important. One man overworks himself, another
follows an unhealthy trade, a third exposes himself to in
fection, and so on.

58 Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. [CHAP. ill.

The result of all this interaction between what we have
thus called objects and agencies is that the final outcome
presents the same general characteristics of uniformity as may
be detected separately in the two constituent elements. Or
rather, as we shall proceed presently to show, it does so
in the great majority of cases.

§ 5. It may be objected that such an explanation as
the above does not really amount to anything deserving
of the name, for that instead of explaining how a particular
state of things is caused it merely points out that the
same state exists elsewhere. There is a uniformity dis
covered in the objects at the stage when they are com
monly submitted to calculation; we then grope about
amongst the causes of them, and after all only discover
a precisely similar uniformity existing amongst these causes.
This is to some extent true, for though part of the objection
can be removed, it must always remain the case that the
foundations of an objective science will rest in the last resort
upon the mere fact that things are found to be of such and
such a character.

§ 6. This division, into objects and the agencies which
affect them, is merely intended for a rough practical ar
rangement, sufficient to point out to the reader the imme
diate nature of the causes which bring about our familiar
uniformities. If we go back a step further, it might fairly
be maintained that they may be reduced to one, namely,
to the agencies. The objects, as we have termed them,
are not an original creation in the state in which we now
find them. No one supposes that whole groups or classes
were brought into existence simultaneously, with all their
general resemblances and particular differences fully de
veloped. Even if it were the case that the first parents
of each natural kind had been specially created, instead

SECT. 6.] Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. 59

of being developed out of pre-existing forms, it would still
be true that amongst the numbers of each that now present
themselves the characteristic differences and resemblances
are the result of what we have termed agencies. Take, for
instance, a single characteristic only, say the height; what
determines this as we find it in any given group of men?
Partly, no doubt, the nature of their own food, clothing,
employment, and so on, especially in the earliest years of
their life; partly also, very likely, similar conditions and
circumstances on the part of their parents at one time or
another. No one, I presume, in the present state of know
ledge, would attempt to enumerate the remaining causes,
or even to give any indication of their exact nature; but
at the same time few would entertain any doubt that
agencies of this general description have been the determin
ing causes at work.

If it be asked again, Into what may these agencies
themselves be ultimately analysed ? the answer to this
question, in so far as it involves any detailed examination
of them, would be foreign to the plan of this essay. In so
far as any general remarks, applicable to nearly all classes
alike of such agencies, are called for, we are led back to
the point from which we started in the previous chapter,
when we were discussing whether there is necessarily one
fixed law according to which all our series are formed. We
there saw that every event might be regarded as being
brought about by a comparatively few important causes, of
the kind which comprises all of which ordinary observation
takes any notice, and an indefinitely numerous group of
small causes, too numerous, minute, and uncertain in their
action for us to be able to estimate them or indeed to take
them individually into account at all. The important ones,
it is true, may also in turn be themselves conceived to be

00 Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. [CHAP. ill.

made up of aggregates of small components, but they are
still best regarded as being by comparison simple and dis
tinct, for their component parts act mostly in groups col
lectively, appearing and disappearing together, so that they
possess the essential characteristics of unity.

§ 7. Now, broadly speaking, it appears to me that the
most suitable conditions for Probability are these : that the
important causes should be by comparison fixed and per
manent, and that the remaining ones should on the average
continue to act as often in one direction as in the other.
This they may do in two ways. In the first place we
may be able to predicate nothing more of them than the
mere fact that they act1 as often in one direction as the
other; what we should then obtain would be merely the
simple statistical uniformity that is described in the first
chapter. But it may be the case, and in practice generally
is so more or less approximately, that these minor causes
act also in independence of one another. What we then
get is a group of uniformities such as was explained and
illustrated in the second chapter. Every possible combi
nation of these causes then occurring with a regular de
gree of frequency, we find one peculiar kind of uniformity
exhibited, not merely in the mere fact of excess and defect
(of whatever may be the variable quality in question), but
also in every particular amount of excess and defect.
Hence, in this case, we get what some writers term a
'mean' or 'type,' instead of a simple average. For in
stance, suppose a man throwing a quoit at a mark. Here
our fixed causes are his strength, the weight of the quoit,

1 As stated above, this is really that which we are called upon to ex-
little more than a re- statement, a plain in the concrete details pre-
stage further back, of the existence sented to us in experience,
of the same kind of uniformity as

SECT. 8.] Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. 61

and the intention of aiming at a given point. These we
must of course suppose to remain unchanged, if we are
to obtain any such uniformity as we are seeking. The
minor and variable causes are all those innumerable little
disturbing influences referred to in the last chapter. It
might conceivably be the case that we were only able to
ascertain that these acted as often in one direction as in
the other; what we should then find was that the quoit
tended to fall short of the mark as often as beyond it.
But owing to these little causes being mostly independent
of one another, and more or less equal in their influence,
we find also that every amount of excess and defect presents
the same general characteristics, and that in a large number
of throws the quantity of divergences from the mark, of any
given amount, is a tolerably determinate function, according
to a regular law, of that amount of divergence1.

§ 8. The necessity of the conditions just hinted at
will best be seen by a reference to cases in which any of

1 "It would seem in fact that in having been till then masked and

coarse and rude observations the overshadowed by the graver errors

errors proceed from a very few prin- which had been now approximately

cipal causes, and in consequence our removed There were errors of

hypothesis [as to the Exponential graduation, and many others in the

Law of Error] will probably repre- contraction of instruments ; other

sent the facts only imperfectly, and errors of their adjustments ; errors

the frequency of the errors will only (technically so called) of observation ;

approximate roughly and vaguely to errors from the changes of tempera-

the law which follows from it. But ture, of weather, from slight irregular

when astronomers, not content with motions and vibrations; in short, the

the degree of accuracy they had thousand minute disturbing influ-

reached, prosecuted their researches ences with which modern astrono-

into the remaining sources of error, mers are familiar." (Extracted from

they found that not three or four, a paper by Mr Crofton in the Vol. of

but a great number of minor sources the Philosophical Transactions for

of error of nearly co-ordinate import- 1870, p. 177.)
ance began to reveal themselves,

62 Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. [CHAP. in.

them happen to be missing. Thus we know that the length
of life is on the whole tolerably regular, and so are the
numbers of those who die in successive years or centuries
of most of the commoner diseases. But it does not seem
to be the case with all diseases. What, for instance, of
the Sweating Sickness, the Black Death, the Asiatic
Cholera ? The two former either do not recur, or, if they
do, recur in such a mild form as not to deserve the same
name. What in fact of any of the diseases which are
epidemic rather than endemic ? All these have their causes
doubtless, and would be produced again by the recurrence
of the conditions which caused them before. But some of
them apparently do not recur at all. They seem to have
depended upon such rare conditions that their occurrence
was almost unique. And of those which do recur the course
is frequently so eccentric and irregular, often so much de
pendent upon human will or want of will, as to entirely
deprive their results (that is, the annual number of deaths
which they cause) of the statistical uniformity of which we
are speaking.

The explanation probably is that one of the principal
causes in such cases is what we commonly call contagion.
If so, we have at once a cause which so far from being fixed is
subject to the utmost variability. Stringent caution may
destroy it, carelessness may aggravate it to any extent. The
will of man, as finding its expression either on the part of
government, of doctors, or of the public, may make of it
pretty nearly what is wished, though against the possibility
of its entrance into any community no precautions can ab
solutely insure us.

§ 9. If it be replied that this want of statistical regu
larity only arises from the fact of our having confined our
selves to too limited a time, and that we should find

SECT. 10.] Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. 63

irregularity disappear here, as elsewhere, if we kept our
tables open long enough, we shall find that the answer will
suggest another case in which the requisite conditions for
Probability are wanting. Such a reply would only be con
clusive upon the supposition that the ways and thoughts of
men are in the long run invariable, or if variable, subject to
periodic changes only. On the assumption of a steady pro
gress in society, either for the better or the worse, the argu
ment falls to the ground at once. From what we know of
the course of the world, these fearful pests of the past may
be considered as solitary events in our history, or at least
events which will not be repeated. No continued uniformity
would therefore be found in the deaths which they occasion,
though the registrar's books were kept open for a thousand
years. The reason here is probably to be sought in the
gradual alteration of those indefinitely numerous conditions
which we term collectively progress or civilization. Every
little circumstance of this kind has some bearing upon the
liability of any one to catch a disease. But when a kind of
slow and steady tide sets in, in consequence of which these
influences no longer remain at about the same average
strength, warring on about equal terms with hostile in
fluences, but on the contrary show a steady tendency to in
crease their power, the statistics will, with consequent steadi
ness and permanence, take the impress of such a change.

§ 10. Briefly then, if we were asked where the dis
tinctive characteristics of Probability are most prominently
to be found, and where they are most prominently absent,
we might say that (1) they prevail principally in the pro
perties of natural kinds, both in the ultimate and in the de
rivative or accidental properties. In all the characteristics of
natural species, in all they do and in all which happens to
them, so far as it depends upon their properties, we seldom

64 Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. [CHAP. ill.

fail to detect this regularity. Thus in men; their height,
strength, weight, the age to which they live, the diseases of
which they die ; all present a well-known uniformity. Life
insurance tables offer the most familiar instance of the im
portance of these applications of Probability.

(2) The same peculiarity prevails again in the force
and frequency of most natural agencies. Wind and weather
are seen to lose their proverbial irregularity when examined
on a large scale. Man's work therefore, when operated on
by such agencies as these, even though it had been made in
different cases absolutely alike to begin with, afterwards
shows only a general regularity. I may sow exactly the
same amount of seed in my field every year. The yield may
one year be moderate, the next year be abundant through
favourable weather, and then again in turn be destroyed by
hail. But in the long run these irregularities will be equalized
in the result of my crops, because they are equalized in the
power and frequency of the productive agencies. The
business of underwriters, and offices which insure the crops
against hail, would fall under this class ; though, as already
remarked, there is no very profound distinction between them
and the former class.

The reader must be reminded again that this fixity is
only temporary, that is, that even here the series belong to
the class of those which possess a fluctuating type. Those
indeed who believe in the fixity of natural species will have
the best chance of finding a series of the really permanent
type amongst them, though even they will admit that some
change in the characteristic is attainable in length of time.
In the case of the principal natural agencies, it is of course
incontestable that the present average is referable to the
present geological period only. Our average temperature
and average rainfall have in former times been widely

SECT. 11.] Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. 65

different from what they now are, and doubtless will be so
again.

Any fuller investigation of the process by which, on the
Theory of Evolution, out of a primeval simplicity and uni
formity the present variety was educed, hardly belongs to
the scope of the present work : at most, a few hints must
suffice.

§ 11. The above, then, are instances of natural objects
and natural agencies. There seems reason to believe that it
is in such things only, as distinguished from things artificial,
that the property in question is to be found. This is an as
sertion that will need some discussion and explanation. Two
instances, in apparent opposition, will at once occur to the
mind of some readers; one of which, from its great intrinsic
importance, and the other, from the frequency of the pro
blems which it furnishes, will demand a few minutes' separate
examination.

(1) The first of these is the already mentioned case of
instrumental observations. In the use of astronomical and
other instruments the utmost possible degree of accuracy is
often desired, a degree which cannot be reasonably hoped for
•in any one single observation. What we do therefore in
these cases is to make a large number of successive observa
tions which are naturally found to differ somewhat from each
other in their results; by means of these the true value
(as explained in a future chapter, on the Method of Least
Squares) is to be determined as accurately as possible. The
subjects then of calculation here are a certain number of
elements, slightly incorrect elements, given by successive
observations. Are not these observations artificial, or the
direct product of voluntary agency ? Certainly not : or rather,
the answer depends on what we understand by voluntary.
What is really intended and aimed at by the observer, is of
v. 5

66 Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. [CHAP. in.

course, perfect accuracy, that is, the true observation, or the
voluntary steps and preliminaries on which this observation
depends. Whether voluntary or not, this result only can be
called intentional. But this result is not obtained. What
we actually get in its place is a series of deviations from it,
containing results more or less wide of the truth. Now by
what are these deviations caused? By just such agencies as
we have been considering in some of the earlier sections in
this chapter. Heat and its irregular warping influence,
draughts of air producing their corresponding effects, dust
and consequent friction in one part or another, the slight
distortion of the instrument by strains or the slow uneven
contraction which continues long after the metal was cast;
these and such as these are some of the causes which divert
us from the truth. Besides this group, there are others
which certainly do depend upon human agency, but which
are not, strictly speaking, voluntary. They are such as the
irregular action of the muscles, inability to make our various
organs and members execute precisely the purposes we have
in mind, perhaps different rates in the rapidity of the ner
vous currents, or in the response to stimuli, in the same or
different observers. The effect produced by some of these,
and the allowance that has in consequence to be made, are
becoming familiar even to the outside world under the name
of the 'personal equation' in astronomical, psychophysical
and other observations.

§12. (2) The other example, alluded to above, is the stocl
one of cards and dice. Here, as in the last case, the resul?
is remotely voluntary, in the sense that deliberate volitio
presents itself at one stage. But subsequently to this stag*
the result is produced or affected by so many involuntar
agencies that it owes its characteristic properties to thes
The turning up, for example, of a particular face of a die :

SECT. 14.] Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. 67

the result of voluntary agency, but it is not an immediate
result. That particular face was not chosen, though the fact
of its being chosen was the remote consequence of an act of
choice. There has been an intermediate chaos of conflicting
agencies, which no one can calculate before or distinguish
afterwards. These agencies seem to show a uniformity in
the long run, and thence to produce a similar uniformity in
the result. The drawing of a card from a pack is indeed
more directly volitional, as in cutting for partners in a game
of whist. But no one continues to do this long without
having the pack well shuffled in the interval, whereby a host
of involuntary influences are let in.

§ 13. The once startling but now familiar uniformities
exhibited in the cases of suicides and misdirected letters, do
not belong to the same class. The final resolution, or want
of it, which leads to these results, is in each case indeed an
important ingredient in the individual's action or omission;
but, in so far as volition has anything to do with the results
as a whole, it instantly disturbs them. If the voice of the
Legislature speaks out, or any great preacher or moralist
succeeds in deterring, or any impressive example in in
fluencing, our moral statistics are instantly tampered with.
Some further discussion will be devoted to this subject in a
future chapter; it need only be remarked here that (always
excluding such common or general influence as those just
mentioned) the average volition, potent as it is in each
separate case, is on the whole swayed by non-voluntary con
ditions, such as those of health, the casualties of employ
ment, &c., in fact the various circumstances which influence
the length of a man's life.

§ 14. Such distinctions as those just insisted on may
seem to some persons to be needless, but serious errors have
occasionally arisen from the neglect of them. The imme-

5—2

68 Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. [CHAP. ill.

diate products of man's mind, so far indeed as we can make
an attempt to obtain them, do not seem to possess this
essential characteristic of Probability. Their characteristic
seems rather to be, either perfect mathematical accuracy or
utter want of it, either law unfailing or mere caprice. If,
e.g., we find the trees in a forest growing in straight lines,
we unhesitatingly conclude that they were planted by man
as they stand. It is true on the other hand, that if we find
them not regularly planted, we cannot conclude that they
were not planted by man; partly because the planter may
have worked without a plan, partly because the subsequent
irregularities brought on by nature may have obscured the
plan. Practically the mind has to work by the aid of im
perfect instruments, and is subjected to many hindrances
through various and conflicting agencies, and by these means
the work loses its original properties. Suppose, for instance,
that a man, instead of producing numerical results by im
perfect observations or by the cast of dice, were to select
them at first hand for himself by simply thinking of them
at once; what sort of series would he obtain? It would be
about as difficult to obtain in this way any such series as
those appropriate to Probability as it would be to keep his
heart or pulse working regularly by direct acts of volition,
supposing that he had the requisite control over these organs.
But the mere suggestion is absurd. A man must have an
object in thinking, he must think according to a rule or for
mula; but unless he takes some natural series as a copy, he
will never be able to construct one mentally which shall per
manently imitate the originals. Or take another product of
human efforts, in which the intention can be executed with
tolerable success. When any one builds a house, there are
many slight disturbing influences at work, such as shrinking
of bricks and mortar, settling of foundations, &c. But the

SECT. 15.] Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. 69

effect which these disturbances are able to produce is so in
appreciably small, that we may fairly consider that the result
obtained is the direct product of the mind, the accurate
realization of its intention. What is the consequence?
Every house in the row, if designed by one man and at one
time, is of exactly the same height, width, &c. as its
neighbours; or if there are variations they are few, definite,
and regular. The result offers no resemblance whatever to
the heights, weights, &c. of a number of men selected at
random. The builder probably had some regular design in
contemplation, and he has succeeded in executing it.

§ 15. It may be replied that if we extend our observa
tions, say to the houses of a large city, we shall then detect
the property under discussion. The different heights of a
great number, when grouped together, might be found to
resemble those of a great number of human beings under
similar treatment. Something of this kind might not impro
bably be found to be the case, though the resemblance
would be far from being a close one. But to raise this
question is to get on to different ground, for we were
speaking (as remarked above) not of the work of different
minds with their different aims, but of that of one mind.
In a multiplicity of designs, there may be that variable uni
formity, for which we may look in vain in a single design.
The heights which the different builders contemplated
might be found to group themselves into something of the
same kind of uniformity as that which prevails in most
other things which they should undertake to do indepen
dently. We might then trace the action of the same two
conditions, — a uniformity in the multitude of their different
designs, a uniformity also in the infinite variety of the
influences which have modified those designs. But this is a
very different thing from saying that the work of one man

70 Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. [CHAP. in.

will show such a result as this. The difference is much like
that between the tread of a thousand men who are stepping
without thinking of each other, and their tread when they
are drilled into a regiment. In the former case there is
the working, in one way or another, of a thousand minds;
in the latter, of one only.

The investigations of this and the former chapter
constitute a sufficiently close examination into the detailed
causes by which the peculiar form of statistical results with
which we are concerned is actually produced, to serve the
purpose of a work which is occupied mainly with the methods
of the Science of Probability. The great importance, how
ever, of certain statistical or sociological enquiries will de
mand a recurrence in a future chapter to one particular
application of these statistics, viz. to those concerned with
some classes of human actions.

§ 16. The only important addition to, or modification of,
the foregoing remarks which I have found occasion to make
is due to Mr Galton. He has recently pointed out, — and was
I believe the first to do so, — that in certain cases some
analysis of the causal processes can be effected, and is in fact
absolutely necessary in order to account for the facts ob
served. Take, for instance, the heights of the population of
any country. If the distribution or dispersion of these about
their mean value were left to the unimpeded action of those
myriad productive agencies alluded to above, we should cer
tainly obtain such an arrangement in the posterity of any
one generation as had already been exhibited in the parents.
That is, we should find repeated in the previous stage the
same kind of order as we were trying to account for in the
following stage.

But then, as Mr Galton insists, if such agencies acted
freely and independently, though we should get the same

SECT. 17.] Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. 71

kind of arrangement or distribution, we should not get the
same degree of it : there would, on the contrary, be a tendency
owards further dispersion. The 'curve of facility' (v. the
diagram on p. 29) would belong to the same class, but would
lave a different modulus. We shall see this at once if we
take for comparison a case in which similar agencies work
their way without any counteraction whatever. Suppose, for
nstance, that a large number of persons, whose fortunes
were equal to begin with, were to commence gambling or
betting continually for some small sum. If we examine
;heir circumstances after successive intervals of time, we
should expect to find their fortunes distributed according to
the same general law, — i.e. the now familiar law in ques
tion, — but we should also expect to find that the poorest
ones were slightly poorer, and the richest ones slightly
richer, on each successive occasion. We shall see more
about this in a future chapter (on Gambling), but it may
be taken for granted here that there is nothing in the laws
of chance to resist this tendency towards intensifying the
extremes.

Now it is found, on the contrary, in the case of vital
phenomena, — for instance in that of height, and presumably
of most of the other qualities which are in any way character
istic of natural kinds, — that there is, through a number of
successive generations, a remarkable degree of fixitj^. The
tall men are not taller, and the short men are not shorter,
per cent, of the population in successive generations : always
supposing of course that some general change of circum
stances, such as climate, diet, &c. has not set in. There
must therefore here be some cause at work which tends, so
to say, to draw in the extremes and thus to check the other
wise continually increasing dispersion.

§ 17. The facts were first tested by careful experiment.

72 Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. [CHAP. in.

At the date of Mr Galton's original paper on the subject1,
there were no available statistics of heights of human beings ;
so a physical element admitting of careful experiment (viz.
the size or weight of certain seeds) was accurately estimated.
From these data the actual amount of reversion from the
extremes, that is, of the slight pressure continually put upon
the extreme members with the result of crowding them back
towards the mean, was determined, and this was compared
with what theory would require in order to keep the charac
teristics of the species permanently fixed. Since then,
statistics have been obtained to a large extent which deal
directly with the heights of human beings.

The general conclusion at which we arrive is that there
are several causes at work which are neither slight nor in
dependent. There is, for instance, the observed fact that the
extremes are as a rule not equally fertile with the means,
nor equally capable of resisting death and disease. Hence
as regards their mere numbers, there is a tendency for them
somewhat to thin out. Then again there is a distinct
positive cause in respect of 'reversion.' Not only are the
offspring of the extremes less numerous, but these offspring
also tend to cluster about a mean which is, so to say, shifted
a little towards the true centre of the whole group; i.e. to
wards the mean offspring of the mean parents.

§ 18. For a full discussion of these characteristics, and
for a variety of most ingenious illustrations of their mode of
agency and of their comparative efficacy, the reader may be
referred to Mr Galton's original articles. For our present
purpose it will suffice to say that these characteristics tend
towards maintaining the fixity of species; and that though
they do not affect what may be called the general nature of

1 Typical Laws of Heredity; read 1877. See also Journal of the An-
before the Royal Institution, Feb. 9, throp. Inst. Nov. 1885.

SECT. 18.] Origin, or Process of Causation of the Series. 73

the 'probability curve' or 'law of facility', they do determine
its precise value in the cases in question. If, indeed, it be
asked why there is no need for any such corrective influence
in the case of, say, firing at a mark: the answer is that there
is no opening for it except where a cumulative influence is in
troduced. The reason why the fortunes of our betting party
showed an ever increasing divergency, and why some special
correction was needed in order to avert such a tendency in
the case of vital phenomena, was that the new starting-point
at every step was slightly determined by the results of the
previous step. The man who has lost a shilling one time
starts, next time, worse off by just a shilling; and, but for
the corrections we have been indicating, the man who was
born tall would, so to say, throw off his descendants from a
vantage ground of superior height. The true parallel in the
case of the marksmen would be to suppose that their new
points of aim were always shifted a little in the direction of
the last divergence. The spreading out of the shot-marks
would then continue without limit, just as would the diver
gence of fortunes of the supposed gamblers.

CHAPTER IV.

ON THE MODES OF ESTABLISHING AND DETERMINING THE
EXISTENCE AND NUMERICAL PROPORTIONS OF THE CHA
RACTERISTIC PROPERTIES OF OUR SERIES OR GROUPS.

§ 1. AT the point which we have now reached, we are
supposed to be in possession of series or groups of a certain
kind, lying at the bottom, as one may say, and forming the
foundation on which the Science of Probability is to be
erected. We have described with sufficient particularity the
characteristics of such a series, and have indicated the pro
cess by which it is, as a rule, actually brought about in
nature. The next enquiries which have to be successively
made are, how in any particular case we are to establish
their existence and determine their special character and
properties ? and secondly1, when we have obtained them, in
what mode are they to be employed for logical purposes ?

The answer to the former enquiry does not seem difficult
Experience is our sole guide. If we want to discover what is
in reality a series of things, not a series of our own concep
tions, we must appeal to the things themselves to obtain it
for we cannot find much help elsewhere. We cannot tel
how many persons will be born or die in a year, or how
many houses will be burnt or ships wrecked, without actually
counting them. When we thus speak of ' experience ' we

1 This latter enquiry belongs to logical part of this volume, and is
what may be termed the more purely entered on in the course of Chapter vi

! SECT. 2.] Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. 75

mean to employ the term in its widest signification; we
mean experience supplemented by all the aids which in
ductive or deductive logic can afford. When, for instance,
we have found the series which comprises the numbers of
persons of any assigned class who die in successive years, we
have no hesitation in extending it some way into the future
as well as into the past. The justification of such a proce
dure must be sought in the ordinary canons of Induction.
As a special discussion will be given upon the connection
between Probability and Induction, no more need be said
upon this subject here; but nothing will be found there at
variance with the assertion just made, that the series we
employ are ultimately obtained by experience only.

§ 2. In many cases it is undoubtedly true that we do not
resort to direct experience at all. If I want to know what is
my chance of holding ten trumps in a game of whist, I do
not enquire how often such a thing has occurred before. If
all the inhabitants of the globe were to divide themselves up
into whist parties they would have to keep on at it for a
great many years, if they wanted to settle the question
satisfactorily in that way. What we do of course is to cal
culate algebraically the proportion of possible combinations
in which ten trumps can occur, and take this as the answer
to our problem. So again, if I wanted to know the chance
of throwing six with a die whose faces were unequal, it
would be a question if my best way would not be to calculate
geometrically the solid angle subtended at the centre of
gravity by the opposite face, and the ratio of this to the
whole surface of a sphere would represent sufficiently closely
the chance required.

It is quite true that in such examples as the above, espe
cially the former one, nobody would ever think of appealing
to statistics. This would be a tedious process to adopt when,

76 Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. [CHAP. iv.

as here, the mechanical and other conditions upon which the
production of the events depend are comparatively few, de
terminate, and admit of isolated consideration, whilst the
enormous number of combinations which can be constructed
out of them causes an enormous consequent multiplicity of
ways in which the events can possibly happen. Hence, in
practice, a priori determination is often easy, whilst a poste
riori appeal to experience would be not merely tedious but
utterly impracticable. This, combined with the frequent
simplicity and attractiveness of such examples when deduct
ively treated, has made them very popular, and produced the
impression in many quarters that they are the proper typical
instances to illustrate the theory of chance. Whereas, had
the science been concerned with those kinds of events only
which in practice are commonly made subjects of insurance,
probably no other view would ever have been taken than
that it was based upon direct appeal to experience.

§ 3. When, however, we look a little closer, we find that
there is no occasion for such a sharp distinction as that ap
parently implied between the two classes of examples just
indicated. In such cases as those of dice and cards, even, in
which we appear to reason directly from the determining
conditions, or possible variety of the events, rather thai from
actual observation of their occ rrence, we shall find that this
procedure is only valid by the "help of a tacit assumption
which can never be determined otherwise than by direct
experience. It is, no doubt, an exceedingly natural and
obvious assumption, and one which is continually deriving
fresh weight from every-day observation, but it is one which
ought not to be admitted without consideration. As this is a
very important matter, not so much in itself as in connection
with the light which it throws upon the theory of the subject,
we will enter into a somewhat detailed examination of it.

I SECT. 3.] Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. 77

Let us take a very simple example, that of tossing up a
penny. Suppose that I am contemplating a succession of
two throws ; I can see that the only possible events are1
HH., HT., TH., TT. So much is certain. We are more
over tolerably well convinced from experience that these
events occur, in the long run, about equally often. This is
of course admitted on all hands. But on the view commonly
maintained, it is contended that we might have known the
fact beforehand on grounds which are applicable to an indefi
nite number of other and more complex cases. The form in
which this view would generally be advanced is, that we are
enabled to state beforehand that the four throws above men
tioned are equally likely. If in return we ask what is meant
by the expression 'equally likely', it appears that there are
two and only two possible forms of reply. One of these seeks
the explanation in the state of mind of the observer, the
other seeks it in some characteristic of the things observed.

(1) It might, for instance, be said on the one hand, that
what is meant is that the four events contemplated are
equally easy to imagine, or, more accurately, that our ex
pectation or belief in their occurrence is equal. We could
hardly be content with this reply, for the further enquiry
woulc-' immediately be urged, On what ground is this to be
believed ? What are the chi acteristics of events of which
our expectation is equal ? If we consented to give an answer
to this further enquiry, we should be led to the second form
of reply, to be noticed directly; if we did not consent we
should, it seems, be admitting that Probability was only a

1 For the use of those not ac- two successive throws of the penny

quainted with the common notation give head ; HT that the first of

employed in this subject, it may be them gives head, and the second

remarked that HH is simply an tail ; and so on with the remaining

abbreviated way of saying that the symbols.

78 Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. [CHAP. IV.

portion of Psychology, confined therefore to considering states
of mind in themselves, rather than in their reference to facts,
viz. as being true or false. We should, that is, be ceasing
to make it a science of inference about things. This point
will have to be gone into more thoroughly in another chap
ter ; but it is impossible to direct attention too prominently
to the fact that Logic (and therefore Probability as a branch
of Logic) is not concerned with what men do believe, but
with what they ought to believe, if they are to believe
correctly.

(2) In the other form of reply the explanation of the
phrase in question would be sought, not in a state of mind,
but in a quality of the things contemplated. We might assign
the following as the meaning, viz. that the events really
would occur with equal frequency in the long run. The
ground of this assertion would probably be found in past ex
perience, and it would doubtless be impossible so to frame
the answer as to exclude the notion of our belief altogether.
But still there is a broad distinction between seeking an
equality in the amount of our belief, as before, and in the
frequency of occurrence of the events themselves, as here.

§ 4. When we have got as far as this it can readily be
shown that an appeal to experience cannot be long evaded.
For can the assertion in question (viz. that the throws of the
penny will occur equally often) be safely made a priori?
Those who consider that it can seem hardly to have fully
faced the difficulties which meet them. For when we begin
to enquire seriously whether the penny will really do what
is expected of it, we find that restrictions have to be in
troduced. In the first place it must be an ideal coin, with
its sides equal and fair. This restriction is perfectly intelli
gible ; the study of solid geometry enables us to idealize a
penny into a circular or cylindrical lamina. But this condition

SECT. 5.] Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. 79

by itself is not sufficient, others are wanted as well. The
penny was supposed to be tossed up, as we say ' at random.'
What is meant by this, and how is this process to be ideal
ized ? To ask this is to introduce no idle subtlety ; for it
would scarcely be maintained that the heads and tails would
get their fair chances if, immediately before the throwing,
we were so to place the coin in our hands as to start it
always with the same side upwards. The difference that
would result in consequence, slight as its cause is, would
tend in time to show itself in the results. Or, if we per
sisted in starting with each of the two sides alternately
upwards, would the longer repetitions of the same side get
their fair chance ?

Perhaps it will be replied that if we think nothing what
ever about these matters all will come right of its own accord.
It may, and doubtless will be so, but this is falling back upon
experience. It is here, then, that we find ourselves resting on
the experimental assumption above mentioned, and which
indeed cannot be avoided. For suppose, lastly, that the
circumstances of nature, or my bodily or mental constitution,
were such that the same side always is started upwards, or
indeed that they are started in any arbitrary order of our
own ? Well, it will be replied, it would not then be a fair
trial. If we press in this way for an answer to such enquiries,
we shall find that these tacit restrictions are really nothing
else than a mode of securing an experimental result. They
are only another way of saying, Let a series of actions be
performed in such a way as to secure a sequence of a par
ticular kind, viz., of the kind described in the previous
chapters.

§ 5. An intermediate way of evading the direct appeal
to experience is sometimes found by defining the probability
of an event as being measured by the ratio which the

80 Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. [CHAP. IV.

number of cases favourable to the event bears to the total
number of cases which are possible. This seems a somewhat
loose and ambiguous way of speaking. It is clearly not
enough to count the number of cases merely, they must also
be valued, since it is not certain that each is equally potent
in producing the effect. This, of course, would never be
denied, but sufficient importance does not seem to be at
tached to the fact that we have really no other way of
valuing them except by estimating the effects which they
actually do, or would produce. Instead of thus appealing to
the proportion of cases favourable to the event, it is far better
(at least as regards the foundation of the science, for we are
not at this moment discussing the practical method of facili
tating our calculations) to appeal at once to the proportion
of cases in which the event actually occurs.

§ 6. The remarks above made will apply, of course, to
most of the other common examples of chance ; the throwing
of dice, drawing of cards, of balls from bags, &c. In the
last case, for instance, one would naturally be inclined to
suppose that a ball which had just been put back would
thereby have a better chance of coming out again next time,
since it will be more in the way for that purpose. How is
this to be prevented ? If we designedly thrust it to the
middle or bottom of the others, we may overdo the precau
tion ; and are in any case introducing human design, that
element so essentially hostile to all that we understand by
chance. If we were to trust to a good shake setting matters
right, we may easily be deceived ; for shaking the bag can
hardly do more than diminish the disposition of those balls
which were already in each other's neighbourhood, to remain
so. In the consequent interaction of each upon all, the
arrangement in which they start cannot but leave its impress
to some extent upon their final positions. In all such cases,

SECT. 7.] Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. 81

therefore, if we scrutinize our language, we shall find that
any supposed a priori mode of stating a problem is little else
than a compendious way of saying, Let means be taken for
obtaining a given result. Since it is upon this result that
our inferences ultimately rest, it seems simpler and more
philosophical to appeal to it at once as the groundwork of
our science.

§ 7. Let us again take the instance of the tossing of a
penny, and examine it somewhat more minutely, to see what
can be actually proved about the results we shall obtain.
We are willing to give the pence fair treatment by assuming
that they are perfect, that is, that in the long run they show
no preference for either head or tail ; the question then
remains, Will the repetitions of the same face obtain the
proportional shares to which they are entitled by the
usual interpretations of the theory ? Putting then, as before,
for the sake of brevity, H for head, and HH for heads twice
running, we are brought to this issue ; — Given that the
chance of H is J, does it follow necessarily that the chance of
HH (with two pence) is J ? To say nothing of ' H ten times '
occurring once in 1024 times (with ten pence), need it occur
at all ? The mathematicians, for the most part, seem to think
that this conclusion follows necessarily from first principles ;
to me it seems to rest upon no more certain evidence than a
reasonable extension by Induction.

Taking then the possible results which can be obtained
from a pair of pence, what do we find ? Four different
results may follow, namely, (1) HT, (2) HH, (3) TH, (4) TT.
If it can be proved that these four are equally probable, that
\ is, occur equally often, the commonly accepted conclusions
will follow, for a precisely similar argument would apply to
all the larger numbers.

§ 8. The proof usually advanced makes use of what is
v. 6

82 Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. [CHAP. IV.

called the Principle of Sufficient Keason. It takes this
form; — Here are four kinds of throws which may happen;
once admit that the separate elements of them, namely, H
and T, happen equally often, and it will follow that the above
combinations will also happen equally often, for no reason can
be given in favour of one of them that would not equally hold
in favour of the others.

To a certain extent we must admit the validity of the
principle for the purpose. In the case of the throws given
above, it would be valid to prove the equal frequency of (1)
and (3) and also of (2) and (4) ; for there is no difference
existing between these pairs except what is introduced by our
own notation1. TH is the same as HT, except in the order
of the occurrence of the symbols H and T, which we do not
take into account. But either of the pair (1) and (3) is
different from either of the pair (2) and (4). Transpose the
notation, and there would still remain here a distinction which
the mind can recognize. A succession of the same thing
twice running is distinguished from the conjunction of two
different things, by a distinction which does not depenc
upon our arbitrary notation only, and would remain entirely
unaltered by a change in this notation. The principle there
fore of Sufficient Reason, if admitted, would only prove thai
doublets of the two kinds, for example (2) and (4), occur
equally often, but it would not prove that they must each

1 I am endeavouring to treat this tween the terms of the series? The

rule of Sufficient Eeason in a way succession seems then reduced to a

that shall be legitimate in the opinion dull uniformity, a mere iteration of

of those who accept it, but there the same thing many times ; the

seem very great doubts whether a series we contemplated has disap-

contradiction is not involved when peared. If the sides are not abso-

we attempt to extract results from lutely alike, what becomes of the

it. If the sides are absolutely alike, applicability of the rule ?
how can there be any difference be-

SECT. 9.] Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. 83

occur once in four times. It cannot be proved indeed in this
way that they need ever occur at all.

§ 9. The formula, then, not being demonstrable a priori,
(as might have been concluded,) can it be obtained by ex
perience ? To a certain extent it can ; the present experience
of mankind in pence and dice seems to show that the smaller
successions of throws do really occur in about the proportions
assigned by the theory. But how nearly they do so no one
can say, for the amount of time and trouble to be expended
before we could feel that we have verified the fact, even for
small numbers, is very great, whilst for large numbers it
would be simply intolerable. The experiment of throwing
often enough to obtain ' heads ten times ' has been actually
performed by two or three persons, and the results are given
by De Morgan, and Jevons1. This, however, being only
sufficient on the average to give ' heads ten times ' a single
chance, the evidence is very slight ; it would take a con
siderable number of such experiments to set the matter
nearly at rest.

Any such rule, then, as that which we have just been
discussing, which professes to describe what will take place
in a long succession of throws, is only conclusively proved by
experience within very narrow limits, that is, for small repe
titions of the same face ; within limits less narrow, indeed,
we feel assured that the rule cannot be flagrantly in error,
otherwise the variation would be almost sure to be detected.
From this we feel strongly inclined to infer that the same
law will hold throughout. In other words, we are inclined
to extend the rule by Induction and Analogy. Still there
are so many instances in nature of proposed laws which hold
within narrow limits but get egregiously astray when we

1 Formal Logic, p. 185. Principles of Science, p. 208.

6—2

84 Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. [CHAP. iv.

attempt to push them to great lengths, that we must give at
best but a qualified assent to the truth of the formula.

§ 10. The object of the above reasoning is simply to
show that we cannot be certain that the rule is true. Let
us now turn for a minute to consider the causes by which
the succession of heads and tails is produced, and we may
perhaps see reasons to make us still more doubtful.

It has been already pointed out that in calculating proba
bilities a priori, as it is called, we are only able to do so by
introducing restrictions and suppositions which are in reality
equivalent to assuming the expected results. We use words
which in strictness mean, Let a given process be performed ;
but an analysis of our language, and an examination oJ
various tacit suppositions which make themselves felt the
moment they are not complied with, soon show that our real
meaning is, Let a series of a given kind be obtained ; it is to
this series only, and not to the conditions of its production,
that all our subsequent calculations properly apply. The
physical process being performed, we want to know whether
anything resembling the contemplated series really will be
obtained.

Now if the penny were invariably set the same side up
permost, and thrown with the same velocity of rotation anc
to the same height, &c. — in a word, subjected to the same
conditions, — it would always come down with the same side
uppermost. Practically, we know that nothing of this kind
occurs, for the individual variations in the results of the
throws are endless. Still there will be an average of these
conditions, about which the throws will be found, as it were,
to cluster much more thickly than elsewhere. We should be
inclined therefore to infer that if the same side were always
set uppermost there would really be a departure from the
sort of series which we ordinarily expect. In a very large

SECT. 11.] Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. 85

number of throws we should probably begin to find, under
such circumstances, that either head or tail was having a
preference shown to it. If so, would not similar effects be
found to be connected with the way in which we started
each successive pair of throws ? According as we chose to
make a practice of putting HH or TT uppermost, might
there not be a disturbance in the proportion of successions of
two heads or two tails ? Following out this train of reason
ing, it would seem to point with some likelihood to the con
clusion that in order to obtain a series of the kind we
expect, we should have to dispose the antecedents in a
similar series at the start. The changes and chances pro
duced by the act of throwing might introduce infinite in
dividual variations, and yet there might be found, in the very
long run, to be a close similarity between these two series.

§ 11. This is, to a certain extent, only shifting the dif
ficulty, I admit; for the claim formerly advanced about the
possibility of proving the proportions of the throws in the
former series, will probably now be repeated in favour of
those in the latter. Still the question is very much nar
rowed, for we have reduced it to a series of voluntary acts.
A man may put whatever side he pleases uppermost. He
may act consciously, as I have said, or he may think nothing
whatever about the matter, that is, throw at random; if so,
it will probably be asserted by many that he will involun
tarily produce a series of the kind in question. It may be
so, or it may not; it does not seem that there are any
easily accessible data by which to decide. All that I am
concerned with here is to show the likelihood that the com
monly received result does in reality depend upon the ful
filment of a certain condition at the outset, a condition which
it is certainly optional with any one to fulfil or not as he
pleases. The short successions doubtless will take care of

86 Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. [CHAP. iv.

themselves, owing to the infinite complications produced by
the casual variations in throwing; but the long ones may
suffer, unless their interest be consciously or unconsciously
regarded at the outset.

§ 12. The advice, 'Only try long enough, and you will
sooner or later get any result that is possible,' is plausible,
but it rests only on Induction and Analogy; mathematics do
not prove it. As has been repeatedly stated, there are two
distinct views of the subject. Either we may, on the one
hand, take a series of symbols, call them heads and tails;
H, T, &c. ; and make the assumption that each of these, and
each pair of them, and so 011, will occur in the long run with
a regulated degree of frequency. We may then calculate
their various combinations, and the consequences that may
be drawn from the data assumed. This is a purely algebraical
process; it is infallible; and there is no limit whatever to the
extent to which it may be carried. This way of looking at
the matter may be, and undoubtedly should be, nothing
more than the counterpart of what I have called the substi
tuted or idealized series which generally has to be introduced
as the basis of our calculation. The danger to be guarded
against is that of regarding it too purely as an algebraical
conception, and thence of sinking into the very natural
errors both of too readily evolving it out of our own con
sciousness, and too freely pushing it to unwarranted lengths.
Or on the other hand, we may consider that we are treat
ing of the behaviour of things; — balls, dice, births, deaths,
&c.; and drawing inferences about them. But, then, what
were in the former instance allowable assumptions, become
here propositions to be tested by experience. Now the whole
theory of Probability as a practical science, in fact as any
thing more than an algebraical truth, depends of course upon
there being a close correspondence between these two views

SECT. 13.] Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. 87

of the subject, in other words, upon our substituted series
being kept in accordance with the actual series. Experience
abundantly proves that, between considerable limits, in the
example in question, there does exist such a correspondence.
But let no one attempt to enforce our assent to every remote
deduction that mathematicians can draw from their formulae.
When this is attempted the distinction just traced becomes
prominent and important, and we have to choose our side.
Either we go over to the mathematics, and so lose all right
of discussion about the things: or else we take part with the
things, and so defy the mathematics. We do not question
the formal accuracy of the latter within their own province,
but either we dismiss them as somewhat irrelevant, as apply
ing to data of whose correctness we cannot be certain, or
we take the liberty of remodelling them so as to bring them
into accordance with facts.

§ 13. A critic of any doctrine can hardly be considered
to have done much more than half his duty when he has
explained and justified his grounds for objecting to it. It
still remains for him to indicate, if only in a few words,
what he considers its legitimate functions and position to be,
for it can seldom happen that he regards it as absolutely
worthless or unmeaning. I should say, then, that when
Probability is thus divorced from direct reference to objects,
as it substantially is by not being founded upon experience,
it simply resolves itself into the common algebraical or arith
metical doctrine of Permutations and Combinations1. The
considerations upon which these depend are purely formal
and necessary, and can be fully reasoned out without any
appeal to experience. We there start from pure considera
tions of number or magnitude, and we terminate with them,

1 The close connection between title of Mr Whitworth's treatise,
these subjects is well indicated in the Choice and Chance.

\

88 Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. [CHAP. IV.

having only arithmetical calculations to connect them to
gether. I wish, for instance, to find the chance' of throwing
heads three times running with a penny. All I have to do
is first to ascertain the possible number of throws. Permu
tations tell me that with two things thus in question (viz.
head and tail) and three times to perform the process, there
are eight possible forms of the result. Of these eight one
only being favourable, the chance in question is pronounced
to be one- eighth.

Now though it is quite true that the actual calculation of
every chance problem must be of the above character, viz. an
algebraical or arithmetical process, yet there is, it seems to
me, a broad and important distinction between a material
science which employs mathematics, and a formal one which
consists of nothing but mathematics. When we cut our
selves off from the necessity of any appeal to experience, we
are retaining only the intermediate or calculating part of the
investigation; we may talk of dice, or pence, or cards, but
these are really only names we choose to give to our symbols.
The H's and T's with which we deal have no bearing on ob
jective occurrences, but are just like the a?'s and y's with
which the rest of algebra deals. Probability in fact, when so
treated, seems to be absolutely nothing else than a system of
applied Permutations and Combinations.

It will now readily be seen how narrow is the range of
cases to which any purely deductive method of treatment can
apply. It is almost entirely confined to such employments
as games of chance, and, as already pointed out, can only be
regarded as really trustworthy even there, by the help of
various tacit restrictions. This alone would be conclusive
against the theory of the subject being rested upon such a
basis. The experimental method, on the other hand, is, in the
same theoretical sense, of universal application. It would

SECT. 14.] Modes of establishing the Groups or Series, 89

include the ordinary problems furnished by games of chance,
I as well as those where the dice are loaded and the pence are
| not perfect, and also the indefinitely numerous applications
of statistics to the various kinds of social phenomena.

§ 14. The particular view of the deductive character of
Probability above discussed, could scarcely have intruded
itself into any other examples than those of the nature of
games of chance, in which the conditions of occurrence are
by comparison few and simple, and are amenable to accurate
numerical determination. But a doctrine, which is in reality
little else than the same theory in a slightly disguised form,
is very prevalent, and has been applied to truths of the most
purely empirical character. This doctrine will be best in
troduced by a quotation from Laplace. After speaking of
the irregularity and uncertainty of nature as it appears at
first sight, he goes on to remark that when we look closer we
begin to detect "a striking regularity which seems to sug
gest a design, and which some have considered a proof of
Providence. But, on reflection, it is soon perceived that this
regularity is nothing but the development of the respective
probabilities of the simple events, which ought to occur more
frequently according as they are more probable V

If this remark had been made about the succession of
heads and tails in the throwing up of a penny, it would
have been intelligible. It would simply mean this : that the
constitution of the body was such that we could anticipate
with some confidence what the result would be when it was
treated in a certain way, and that experience would justify
our anticipation in the long run. But applied as it is in a
more general form to the facts of nature, it seems really to
have but little meaning in it. Let us test it by an instance.
Amidst the irregularity of individual births, we find that the

1 Essai Philosophiqnc. Ed. 1825, p. 74.

90 Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. [CHAP. iv.

male children are to the female, in the long run, in about
the proportion of 106 to 100. Now if we were told that
there is nothing in this but " the development of their re
spective probabilities," would there be anything in such a
statement but a somewhat pretentious re-statement of the
fact already asserted ? The probability is nothing but that
proportion, and is unquestionably in this case derived from
no other source but the statistics themselves; in the above
remark the attempt seems to be made to invert this process,
and to derive the sequence of events from the mere nume
rical statement of the proportions in which they occur.

§ 15. It will very likely be replied that by the proba
bility above mentioned is meant, not the mere numerical
proportion between the births, but some fact in our consti
tution upon which this proportion depends; that just as
there was a relation of equality between the two sides of the
penny, which produced the ultimate equality in the number
of heads and tails, so there may be something in our consti
tution or circumstances in the proportion of 106 to 100,
which produces the observed statistical result. When this
something, whatever it might be, was discovered, the ob
served numbers might be supposed capable of being deter
mined beforehand. Even if this were the case, however, it
must not be forgotten that there could hardly fail to be, in
combination with such causes, other concurrent conditions in
order to produce the ultimate result; just as besides the shape
of the penny, we had also to take into account the nature of
the 'randomness' with which it was tossed. What these
may be, no one at present can undertake to say, for the best
physiologists seem indisposed to hazard even a guess upon
the subject1. But without going into particulars, one may

1 An opinion prevailed rather at Quetelet amongst others) that the
one time (quoted and supported by relative ages of the parents had

SECT. 16.] Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. 91

assert with some confidence that these conditions cannot well
be altogether independent of the health, circumstances, man
ners aod customs, &c. (to express oneself in the vaguest way)
of the parents ; and if once these influencing elements are
introduced, even as very minute factors, the results cease to
be dependent only on fixed and permanent conditions. We
are at once letting in other conditions, which, if they also
possess the characteristics that distinguish Probability (an
exceedingly questionable assumption), must have that fact
specially proved about them. That this should be the case
indeed seems not merely questionable, but almost certainly
impossible ; for these conditions partaking of the nature of
what we term generally, Progress and Civilization, cannot be
expected to show any permanent disposition to hover about
an average.

§ 16. The reader who is familiar with Probability is of
course acquainted with the celebrated theorem of James
Bernoulli. This theorem, of which the examples just ad
duced are merely particular cases, is generally expressed
somewhat as follows : — in the long run all events will tend
to occur with a relative frequency proportional to their
objective probabilities. With the mathematical proof of this
theorem we need not trouble ourselves, as it lies outside the
province of this work; but indeed if there is any value in the
foregoing criticism, the basis on which the mathematics rest
is faulty, owing to there being really nothing which we can
with propriety call an objective probability.

If one might judge by the interpretation and uses to

something to do with the sex of the to 100 does not seem by any means

offspring. If this were so, it would universal in all countries or at all

quite bear out the above remarks. times. For various statistical tables

As a matter of fact, it should be on the subject see Quetelet, Physique

observed, that the proportion of 106 Sociale, Vol. i. 166, 173, 238.

92 Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. [CHAP. iv.

which this theorem is sometimes exposed, we should regard
it as one of the last remaining relics of Realism, which after
being banished elsewhere still manages to linger in the re
mote province of Probability. It would be an illustration of
the inveterate tendency to objectify our conceptions, even in
cases where the conceptions had no right to exist at all. A
uniformity is observed ; sometimes, as in games of chance, it
is found to be so connected with the physical constitution of
the bodies employed as to be capable of being inferred be
forehand ; though even here the connection is by no means
so necessary as is commonly supposed, owing to the fact that
in addition to these bodies themselves we have also to take
into account their relation to the agencies which influence
them. This constitution is then converted into an 'objective
probability', supposed to develope into the sequence which
exhibits the uniformity. Finally, this very questionable ob
jective probability is assumed to exist, with the same faculty
of development, in all the cases in which uniformity is ob
served, however little resemblance there may be between
these and games of chance.

§ 17. How utterly inappropriate any such conception is
in most of the cases in which we find statistical uniformity,
will be obvious on a moment's consideration. The observed
phenomena are generally the product, in these cases, of very
numerous and complicated antecedents. The number of
crimes, for instance, annually committed in any society, is a
function amongst other things, of the strictness of the law,
the morality of the people, their social condition, and the
vigilance of the police, each of these elements being in itself
almost infinitely complex. Now, as a result of all these
agencies, there is some degree of uniformity ; but what has
been called above the change of type, which it sooner or
later tends to display, is unmistakeable. The average annual

SECT. 18.] Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. 93

numbers do not show a steady gradual approach towards
what might be considered in some sense a limiting value,
but, on the contrary, fluctuate in a way which, however it
may depend upon causes, shows none of the permanent uni
formity which is characteristic of games of chance. This
fact, combined with the obvious arbitrariness of singling out,
from amongst the many and various antecedents which pro
duced the observed regularity, a few only, which should con
stitute the objective probability (if we took all, the events
being absolutely determined, there would be no occasion for
an appeal to probability in the case), would have been suf
ficient to prevent any one from assuming the existence of
any such thing, unless the mistaken analogy of other cases
had predisposed him to seek for it.

There is a familiar practical form of the same error, the
tendency to which may not improbably be derived from a
similar theoretical source. It is that of continuing to accu
mulate our statistical data to an excessive extent. If the
type were absolutely fixed we could not possibly have too
many statistics; the longer we chose to take the trouble
of collecting them the more accurate our results would be.
But if the type is changing, in other words, if some of the
principal causes which aid in their production have, in regard
to their present degree of intensity, strict limits of time or
space, we shall do harm rather than good if we overstep
these limits. The danger of stopping too soon is easily seen,
but in avoiding it we must not fall into the opposite error of
going on too long, and so getting either gradually or sud
denly under the influence of a changed set of circumstances.

§ 18. This chapter was intended to be devoted to a
consideration, not of the processes by which nature produces
the series with which we are concerned, but of the theoretic
basis of the methods by which we can determine the existence

94 Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. [CHAP. iv.

of such series. But it is not possible to keep the two enquiries
apart, for here, at any rate, the old maxim prevails that to
know a thing we must know its causes. Recur for a minute
to the considerations of the last chapter. We there saw
that there was a large class of events, the conditions of pro
duction of which could be said to consist of (1) a comparatively
few nearly unchangeable elements, and (2) a vast number
of independent and very changeable elements. At least if
there were any other elements besides these, we are assumed
either to make special allowance for them, or to omit them
from our enquiry. Now in certain cases, such as games of
chance, the unchangeable elements may without practical
error be regarded as really unchangeable throughout any
range of time and space. Hence, as a result, the deductive
method of treatment becomes in their case at once the most
simple, natural, and conclusive ; but, as a further consequence,
the statistics of the events, if we choose to appeal to them,
may be collected ad libitum with better and better ap
proximation to truth. On the other hand, in all social
applications of Probability, the unchangeable causes can only
be regarded as really unchangeable under many qualifica
tions. We know little or nothing of them directly ; they are
often in reality numerous, indeterminate, and fluctuating;
and it is only under the guarantee of stringent restrictions of
time and place, that we can with any safety attribute to
them sufficient fixity to justify our theory. Hence, as a
result, the deductive method, under whatever name it may
go, becomes totally inapplicable both in theory and practice ;
and, as a further consequence, the appeal to statistics has to
be made with the caution in mind that we shall do mischief
rather than good if we go on collecting too many of them.

§ 19. The results of the last two chapters may be
summed up as follows :— We have extended the conception

SECT. 19.] Modes of establishing the Groups or Series. 95

of a series obtained in the first chapter ; for we have found
that these series are mostly presented to us in groups.
These groups are found upon examination to be formed upon
approximately the same type throughout a very wide and
varied range of experience ; the causes of this agreement we
discussed and explained in some detail. When, however, we
extend our examination by supposing the series to run to a
very great length, we find that they may be divided into two
classes separated by important distinctions. In one of these
classes (that containing the results of games of chance) the
conditions of production, and consequently the laws of statis
tical occurrence, may be practically regarded as absolutely
fixed; and the extent of the divergences from the mean
seem to know no finite limit. In the other class, on the
contrary (containing the bulk of ordinary statistical enquiries),
the conditions of production vary with more or less rapidity,
and so in consequence do the results. Moreover it is often
impossible that variations from the mean should exceed a
certain amount. The former we may term ideal series. It
is they alone which show the requisite characteristics with
any close approach to accuracy, and to make the theory of
the subject tenable, we have really to substitute one of this
kind for one of the less perfect ones of the other class, when
these latter are under treatment. The former class have,
however, been too exclusively considered by writers on the
subject ; and conceptions appropriate only to them, and not
always even to them, have been imported into the other
class. It is in this way that a general tendency to an ex
cessive deductive or d priori treatment of the science has
been encouraged.

CHAPTER V.

THE CONCEPTION EANDOMNESS AND ITS SCIENTIFIC
TREATMENT.

§ 1. THERE is a term of frequent occurrence in treatises
on Probability, and which we have already had repeated oc
casion to employ, viz. the designation random applied to an
event, as in the expression 'a random distribution'. The
scientific conception involved in the correct use of this term
is, I apprehend, nothing more than that of aggregate order
and individual irregularity (or apparent irregularity), which
has been already described in the preceding chapters. A
brief discussion of the requisites in this scientific conception,
and in particular of the nature and some of the reasons for
the departure from the popular conception, may serve to
clear up some of the principal remaining difficulties which
attend this part of our subject.

The original1, and still popular, signification of the term
is of course widely different from the scientific. What it
looks to is the origin, not the results/of the random per
formance, and it has reference rather to the single action
than to a group or series of actions. Thus, when a man

* According to Prof. Skeat (Ety- nected with the Teutonic word rand

mological Dictionary) the earliest (brim), and implies the furious and

known meaning is that of furious irregular action of a river full to the

action, as 111 a charge of cavalry. brim.
The etymology, he considers, is con-

SECT. 2.] Randomness and its scientific treatment. 97

draws a bow 'at a venture', or 'at random', we mean only
to point out the aimless character of the performance;
we are contrasting it with the definite intention to hit a
certain mark. But it is none the less true, as already
pointed out, that we can only apply processes of inference to
such performances as these when we regard them as being
capable of frequent, or rather of indefinitely extended repeti
tion.

Begin with an illustration. Perhaps the best typical
example that we can give of the scientific meaning of
random distribution is afforded by the arrangement of the
drops of rain in a shower. No one can give a guess where
abouts at any instant a drop will fall, but we know that if
we put out a sheet of paper it will gradually become uni
formly spotted over; and that if we were to mark out any
two equal areas on the paper these would gradually tend
to be struck equally often.

§ 2. I. Any attempt to draw inferences from the as
sumption of random arrangement must postulate the oc
currence of this particular state of things at some stage or
other. But there is often considerable difficulty, leading oc
casionally to some arbitrariness, in deciding the particular
stage at which it ought to be introduced.

(1) Thus, in many of the problems discussed by mathe
maticians, we look as entirely to the results obtained, and
think as little of the actual process by which they are obtained,
as when we are regarding the arrangement of the drops of
rain. A simple example of this kind would be the following.
A pawn, diameter of base one inch, is placed at random on
a chess-board, the diameter of the squares of which is one inch
and a quarter: find the chance that its base shall lie across
one of the intersecting lines. Here we may imagine the
pawns to be so to say rained down vertically upon the board,
v. 7

98 Randomness and its scientific treatment. [CHAP. v.

and the question is to find the ultimate proportion of those
which meet a boundary line to the total of those which fall.
The problem therefore becomes a merely geometrical one,
viz. to determine the ratio of a certain area on the board to
the whole area. The determination of this ratio is all that
the mathematician ever takes into account.

Now take the following. A straight brittle rod is broken
at random in two places: find the chance that the pieces can
make a triangle1. Since the only condition for making a
triangle with three straight lines is that each two shall be
greater than the third, the problem seems to involve the
same general conception as in the former case. We must
conceive such rods breaking at one pair of spots after
another, — no one can tell precisely where, — but showing the
same ultimate tendency to distribute these spots throughout
the whole length uniformly. As in the last case, the mathe
matician thinks of nothing but this final result, and pays no
heed to the process by which it may be brought about. Ac
cordingly the problem is again reduced to one of mensura
tion, though of a somewhat more complicated character.

§ 3. (2) In another class of cases we have to contemplate
an intermediate process rather than a final result; but the
same conception has to be introduced here, though it is now
applied to the former stage, and in consequence will not in
general apply to the latter.

For instance : a shot is fired at random from a gun whose
maximum range (i.e. at 45° elevation) is 3000 yards: what is
the chance that the actual range shall exceed 2000 yards?
The ultimately uniform (or random) distribution here is
commonly assumed to apply to the various directions in
which the gun can be pointed; all possible directions above

1 See the problem paper of Jan. 18, 1854, in the Cambridge Mathema
tical Tripos.

SECT. 4.] Randomness and its scientific treatment. 99

the horizontal being equally represented in the long run.
We have therefore to contemplate a surface of uniform dis
tribution, but it will be the surface, not of the ground, but
of a hemisphere whose centre is occupied by the man who
iires. The ultimate distribution of the bullets on the spots
where they strike the ground will not be uniform. The
problem is in fact to discover the law of variation of the
density of distribution.

The above is, I presume, the treatment generally adopted
in solving such a problem. But there seems no absolute
necessity for any such particular choice. It is surely open to
&ny one to maintain1 that his conception of the randomness of
the firing is assigned by saying that it is likely that a man
.should begin by facing towards any point of the compass in
differently, and then proceed to raise his gun to any angle
indifferently. The stage of ultimately uniform distribution
here has receded a step further back. It is not assigned
directly to the surface of an imaginary hemisphere, but to
the lines of altitude and azimuth drawn on that surface.
Accordingly, the distribution over the hemisphere itself will
not now be uniform, — there will be a comparative crowding
up towards the pole, — and the ultimate distribution over the
ground will not be the same as before.

§ 4. Difficulties of this kind, arising out of the un
certainty as to what stage should be selected for that of uni
form distribution, will occasionally present themselves. For
instance : let a book be taken at random out of a bookcase ;
what is the chance of hitting upon some assigned volume?
I hardly know how this question would commonly be treated.
If we were to set our man opposite the middle of the shelf

1 As, according to Mr H. Godfray, proposed in an examination. See
the majority of the candidates did the Educational Times (Eeprint, Vol.
assume when the problem was once vn. p. 99.)

7—2

100 Randomness and its scientific treatment. [CHAP. v.

and inquire what would generally happen in practice, sup
posing him blindfolded, there cannot be much doubt that
the volumes would not be selected equally often. On the
contrary, it is likely that there would be a tendency to in
creased frequency about a centre indicated by the height
of his shoulder, and (unless he be left-handed) a trifle to the
right of the point exactly opposite his starting point.

If the question were one which it were really worth
while to work out on these lines we should be led a long
way back. Just as we imagined our rifleman's position (on
the second supposition) to be determined by two inde
pendent coordinates of assumed continuous and equal facility,
so we might conceive our making the attempt to analyse the
man's movements into a certain number of independent
constituents. We might suppose all the various directions
from his starting point, along the ground, to be equally
likely; and that when he reaches the shelves the random
motion of his hand is to be regulated after the fashion of a
shot discharged at random.

The above would be one way of setting about the state
ment of the problem. But the reader will understand that
all which I am here proposing to maintain is that in these,
as in every similar case, we always encounter, under this
conception of 'randomness', at some stage or other, this
postulate of ultimate uniformity of distribution over some
assigned magnitude: either time ; or space, linear, superficial,
or solid. But the selection of the stage at which this is to
be applied may give rise to considerable difficulty, and even
arbitrariness of choice.

§ 5. Some years ago there was a very interesting discus
sion upon this subject carried on in the mathematical part of
the Educational Times (see, especially, Vol. VII.). As not
unfrequently happens in mathematics there was an almost

SECT. 5.] Randomness and its scientific treatment. 101

entire accord amongst the various writers as to the assump
tions practically to be made in any particular case, and there
fore as to the conclusion to be drawn, combined with a very
considerable amount of difference as to the axioms and defi
nitions to be employed. Thus Mr M. W. Crofton, with the
substantial agreement of Mr Woolhouse, laid it down un
hesitatingly that "at random" has "a very clear and definite
meaning; one which cannot be better conveyed than by Mr
Wilson's definition, 'according to no law'; and in this sense
alone I mean to use it." According to any scientific inter
pretation of ' law ' I should have said that where there was
no law there could be no inference. But ultimate tendency
towards equality of distribution is as much taken for granted
by Mr Crofton as by any one else: in fact he makes this a
deduction from his definition: — "As this infinite system of
parallels are drawn according to no law, they are as thickly
disposed along any part of the [common] perpendicular as
along any other" (vn. p. 85). Mr Crofton holds that any
kind of unequal distribution would imply law, — "If the points
[on a plane] tended to become denser in any part of the plane
than in another, there must be some law attracting them
there" (ib. p. 84). The same view is enforced in his paper
on Local Probability (in the Phil. Trans., Vol. 158). Surely
if they tend to become equally dense this is just as much
a case of regularity or law.

It may be remarked that wherever any serious practical
consequences turn upon duly securing the desired random
ness, it is always so contrived that no design or awkwardness
or unconscious one-sidedness shall disturb the result. The
principal case in point here is of course afforded by games of
chance. What we want, when we toss a die, is to secure that
all numbers from 1 to 6 shall be equally often represented in
the long run, but that no person shall be able to predict the

102 Randomness and its scientific treatment. [CHAP, v,

individual occurrence. We might, in our statement of a
problem, as easily postulated number thought o/at random '
as 'a shot fired at random', but no one would risk his chances
of gain and loss on the supposition that this would be done
with continued fairness. Accordingly, we construct a die
whose sides are accurately alike, and it is found that we may
do almost what we like with this, at any previous stage to
that of its issue from the dice box on to the table, without
interfering with the random nature of the result.

§ 6. II. Another characteristic in which the scientific
conception seems to me to depart from the popular or original
signification is the following. The area of distribution which
we take into account must be a finite or limited one. The
necessity for this restriction may not be obvious at first sight,
but the consideration of one or two examples will serve to
indicate the point at which it makes itself felt. Suppose
that one were asked to choose a number at random, not
from a finite range, but from the inexhaustible possibilities
of enumeration. In the popular sense of the term, — i.e. of
uttering a number without pausing to choose, — there is no
difficulty. But a moment's consideration will show that no
arrangement even tending towards ultimately uniform dis
tribution can be secured in this way. No average could be
struck with ever increasing steadiness. So with spatial
infinity. We can rationally speak of choosing a point at
random in a given straight line, area, or volume. But if we
suppose the line to have no end, or the selection to be made
in infinite space, the basis of ultimate tendency towards
what may be called the equally thick deposit of our random
points fails us utterly.

Similarly in any other example in which one of the
magnitudes is unlimited. Suppose I fling a stick at random
in a horizontal plane against a row of iron railings and

SECT. 7.] Randomness and its scientific treatment. 103

inquire for the chance of its passing through without touch
ing them. The problem bears some analogy to that of the
chessmen, and so far as the motion of translation of the
stick is concerned (if we begin with this) it presents no
difficulty. But as regards the rotation it is otherwise. For
any assigned linear velocity there is a certain angular ve
locity below which the stick may pass through without con
tact, but above which it cannot. And inasmuch as the former
range is limited and the latter is unlimited, we encounter
the same impossibility as before in endeavouring to conceive
a uniform distribution. Of course we might evade this
particular difficulty by beginning with an estimate of the
angular velocity, when we should have to repeat what has
just been said, mutatis mutandis, in reference to the linear
velocity.

§ 7. I am of course aware that there are a variety of
problems current which seem to conflict with what has just
been said, but they will all submit to explanation. For in
stance ; What is the chance that three straight lines, taken
or drawn at random, shall be of such lengths as will admit of
their forming a triangle ? There are two ways in which we
may regard the problem. We may, for one thing, start with
the assumption of three lines not greater than a certain
length n, and then determine towards what limit the chance
tends as n increases unceasingly. Or, we may maintain that
the question is merely one of relative proportion of the three
lines. We may then start with any magnitude we please to
represent one of the lines (for simplicity, say, the longest of
them), and consider that all possible shapes of a triangle
will be represented by varying the lengths of the other two.
In either case we get a definite result without need to make
an attempt to conceive any random selection from the in
finity of possible length.

104 Randomness and its scientific treatment. [CHAP. v.

So in what is called the " three-point problem " : — Three
points in space are selected at random ; find the chance of
their forming an acute-angled triangle. What is done is to
start with a closed volume, — say a sphere, from its superior
simplicity, — find the chance (on the assumption of uniform
distribution within this volume) ; and then conceive the con
tinual enlargement without limit of this sphere. So regarded
the problem is perfectly consistent and intelligible, though I
fail to see why it should be termed a random selection in
space rather than in a sphere. Of course if we started with
a different volume, say a cube, we should get a different
result; and it is therefore contended (e.g. by Mr Crofton in
the Educational Times, as already referred to) that infinite
space is more naturally and appropriately regarded as tended
towards by the enlargement of a sphere than by that of a
cube or any other figure.

Again : A group of integers is taken at random ; show
that the number thus taken is more likely to be odd than
even. What we do in answering this is to start with any
finite number n, and show that of all the possible com
binations which can be made within this range there are
more odd than even. Since this is true irrespective of the
magnitude of n, we are apt to speak as if we could conceive
the selection being made at random from the true infinity
contemplated in numeration.

§ 8. Where these conditions cannot be secured then it
seems to me that the attempt to assign any finite value to
the probability fails. For instance, in the following problem,
proposed by Mr J. M. Wilson, "Three straight lines are
drawn at random on an infinite plane, and a fourth line is
drawn at random to intersect them : find the probability of
its passing through the triangle formed by the other three "
(Ed. Times, Reprint, Vol. v. p. 82), he offers the following

SECT. 8.] Randomness and its scientific treatment. 105

solution : " Of the four lines, two must and two must not pass
within the triangle formed by the remaining three. Since
all are drawn at random, the chance that the last drawn
should pass through the triangle formed by the other three
is consequently J."

I quote this solution because it seems to me to illustrate
the difficulty to which I want to call attention. As the
problem is worded, a triangle is supposed to be assigned by
three straight lines. However large it may be, its size bears
no finite ratio whatever to the indefinitely larger area out
side it ; and, so far as I can put any intelligible construction
on the supposition, the chance of drawing a fourth random
line which should happen to intersect this finite area must
.be reckoned as zero. The problem Mr Wilson has solved
.seems to me to be a quite different one, viz. " Given four
intersecting straight lines, find the chance that we should,
at random, select one that passes through the triangle formed
by the other three."

The same difficulty seems to me to turn up in most other
attempts to apply this conception of randomness to real
infinity. The following seems an exact analogue of the
above problem : — A number is selected at random, find the
chance that another number selected at random shall be
greater than the former ; — the answer surely must be that
.the chance is unity, viz. certainty, because the range above
any assigned number is infinitely greater than that below it.
Or, expressed in the only language in which I can under
stand the term 'infinity', what I mean is this. If the first
number be m and I am restricted to selecting up to n
(n > m) then the chance of exceeding m is n — m:n; if I
am restricted to 2n then it is 2n — m : 2n and so on. That
is, however large n and m may be the expression is always
intelligible ; but, m being chosen first, n may be made as

106 Randomness and its scientific treatment. [CHAP. V,

much larger than m as we please : i. e. the chance may be
made to approach as near to unity as we please.

I cannot but think that there is a similar fallacy in De
Morgan's admirably suggestive paper on Infinity (Camb.
Phil. Trans. Vol. 11.) when he is discussing the "three-point
problem": — i.e. given three points taken at random find the
chance that they shall form an acute-angled triangle. All
that he shows is, that if we start with one side as given and
consider the subsequent possible positions of the opposite
vertex, there are infinitely as many such positions which
would form an acute-angled triangle as an obtuse : but, as-
before, this is solving a different problem.

§ 9. The nearest approach I can make towards true indefi
nite randomness, or random selection from true iridefiniteness,.
is as follows. Suppose a circle with a tangent line extended
indefinitely in each direction. Now from the centre draw
radii at random ; in other words, let the semicircumference
which lies towards the tangent be ultimately uniformly in
tersected by the radii. Let these radii be then produced se
as to intersect the tangent line, and consider the distribution
of these points of intersection. We shall obtain in the result
one characteristic of our random distribution; i.e. no portion
of this tangent, however small or however remote, but will
find itself in the position ultimately of any small portion of
the pavement in our supposed continual rainfall. That is,
any such elementary patch will become more and more closely
dotted over with the points of intersection. But the other
essential characteristic, viz. that of ultimately uniform dis
tribution, will be missing. There will be a special form of
distribution, — what in fact will have to be discussed in a
future chapter under the designation of a ' law of error ',— by
virtue of which the concentration will tend to be greatest at
a certain point (that of contact with the circle), and will thin

SECT. 11.] Randomness and its scientific treatment. 107

out from here in each direction according to an easily
calculated formula. The existence of such a state of things
as this is quite opposed to the conception of true randomness.

§ 10. III. Apart from definitions and what comes of
them, perhaps the most important question connected with
the conception of Randomness is this: How in any given
case are we to determine whether an observed arrangement
is to be considered a random one or not? This question will
have to be more fully discussed in a future chapter, but we
are already in a position to see our way through some of the
difficulties involved in it.

(1) If the events or objects under consideration are sup
posed to be continued indefinitely, or if we know enough
about the mode in which they are brought about to detect
'their ultimate tendency, — or even, short of this, if they are
numerous enough to be beyond practical counting, — there is
no great difficulty. We are simply confronted with a ques
tion of fact, to be settled like other questions of fact. In the
case of the rain-drops, watch two equal squares of pavement
or other surfaces, and note whether they come to be more
and more densely uniformly and evenly spotted over: if they
do, then the arrangement is what we call a random one. If
I want to know whether a tobacco-pipe really breaks at ran
dom, and would therefore serve as an illustration of the
problem proposed some pages back, I have only to drop
enough of them and see whether pieces of all possible lengths
are equally represented in the long run. Or, I may argue
deductively, from what I know about the strength of ma
terials and the molecular constitution of such bodies, as to-
whether fractures of small and large pieces are all equally
likely to occur.

§ 11. The reader's attention must be carefully directed
to a source of confusion here, arising out of a certain cross-

108 Randomness and its scientific treatment. [CHAP. v.

division. What we are now discussing is a question of fact,
viz. the nature of a certain ultimate arrangement; we are
not discussing the particular way in which it is brought
about. In other words, the antithesis is between what is and
what is not random : it is not between what is random and
what is designed. As we shall see in a few moments it is
quite possible that an arrangement which is the result, — if
ever anything were so, — of 'design', may nevertheless present
the unmistakeable stamp of randomness of arrangement.

Consider a case which has been a good deal discussed,
and to which we shall revert again: the arrangement of the
stars. The question here is rather complicated by the fact
that we know nothing about the actual mutual positions of
the stars, all that we can take cognizance of being their ap
parent or visible places as projected upon the surface of a
supposed sphere. Appealing to what alone we can thus
observe, it is obvious that the arrangement, as a whole, is
not of the random sort. The Milky Way and the other re
solvable nebulae, as they present themselves to us, are as ob
vious an infraction of such an arrangement as would be the
occurrence here and there of patches of ground in a rain-fall
which received a vast number more drops than the spaces
surrounding them. If we leave these exceptional areas out
of the question and consider only the stars which are visible
by the naked eye or by slight telescopic power, it seems
equally certain that the arrangement is, for the most part, a
fairly representative random one. By this we mean nothing
more than the fact that when we mark off any number oi
equal areas on the visible sphere these are found to contain
approximately the same number of stars.

The actual arrangement of the stars in space may alsc
be of the same character: that is, the apparently densei
aggregation may be apparent only, arising from the fact thai

SECT. 12.] Randomness and its scientific treatment. 109

we are looking through regions which are not more thickly
occupied but are merely more extensive. The alternative
before us, in fact, is this. If the whole volume, so to say, of
the starry heavens is tolerably regular in shape, then the
arrangement of the stars is not of the random order; if that
volume is very irregular in shape, it is possible that the ar
rangement within it may be throughout of that order.

§ 12. (2) When the arrangement in question includes
but a comparatively small number of events or objects, it
becomes much more difficult to determine whether or not it
is to be designated a random one. In fact we have to shift
our ground, and to decide not by what has been actually
observed but by what we have reason to conclude would be
observed if we could continue our observation much longer.
This introduces what is called 'Inverse Probability', viz. the
determination of the nature of a cause from the nature of the
observed effect; a question which will be fully discussed in
a future chapter. But some introductory remarks may be
conveniently made here.

Every problem of Probability, as the subject is here under
stood, introduces the conception of an ultimate limit, and
therefore presupposes an indefinite possibility of repetition.
When we have only a finite number of occurrences before us,
direct evidence of the character of their arrangement fails us,
and we have to fall back upon the nature of the agency
which produces them. And as the number becomes smaller
the confidence with which we can estimate the nature of the
agency becomes gradually less.

Begin with an intermediate case. There is a small lawn,
sprinkled over with daisies: is this a random arrangement?
We feel some confidence that it is so, on mere inspection;
meaning by this that (negatively) no trace of any regular
pattern can be discerned and (affirmatively) that if we take

110 Randomness and its scientific treatment. [CHAP. v.

any moderately small area, say a square yard, we shall find
much about the same number of the plants included in it.
But we can help ourselves by an appeal to the known agency
of distribution here. We know that the daisy spreads by
seed, and considering the effect of the wind and the continued
sweeping and mowing of the lawn we can detect causes at
work which are analogous to those by which the dealing of
cards and the tossing of dice are regulated.

In the above case the appeal to the process of production
was subsidiary, but when we come to consider the nature of
a very small succession or group this appeal becomes much
more important. Let us be told of a certain succession of
•' heads ' and ' tails ' to the number of ten. The range here is
far too small for decision, and unless we are told whether the
agent who obtained them was tossing or designing we are
quite unable to say whether or not the designation of 'ran
dom' ought to be applied to the result obtained. The truth
must never be forgotten that though 'design' is sure to
break down in the long run if it make the attempt to pro
duce directly the semblance of randomness1, yet for a short
spell it can simulate it perfectly. Any short succession, say
of heads and tails, may have been equally well brought
about by tossing or by deliberate choice.

§ 13. The reader will observe that this question of
randomness is being here treated as simply one of ultimate
statistical fact. I have fully admitted that this is not the
primitive conception, nor is it the popular interpretation,
but to adopt it seems the only course open to us if we are to
draw inferences such as those contemplated in Probability.
When we look to the producing agency of the ultimate
arrangement we may find this very various. It may prove
itself to be (a few stages back) one of conscious deliberate

1 Vide p. 68.

SECT. 1.3.] Randomness and its scientific treatment. Ill

purpose, as in drawing a card or tossing a die: it may be
the outcome of an extremely complicated interaction of many
natural causes, as in the arrangement of the flowers scattered
over a lawn or meadow : it may be of a kind of which we
know literally nothing whatever, as in the case of the actual
arrangement of the stars relatively to each other.

This was the state of things had in view when it was
said a few pages back that randomness and design would
result in something of a cross-division. Plenty of arrange
ments in which design had a hand, a stage or two back, can
be mentioned, which would be quite indistinguishable in
their results from those in which no design whatever could
be traced. Perhaps the most striking case in point here is
to be found in the arrangement of the digits in one of the
natural arithmetical constants, such as TT or e, or in a table
of logarithms. If we look to the process of production of
these digits, no extremer instance can be found of what we
mean by the antithesis of randomness : every figure has its
necessarily pre-ordained position, and a moment's flagging of
intention would defeat the whole purpose of the calculator.
And yet, if we look to results only, no better instance can
be found than one of these rows of digits if it were intended
to illustrate what we practically understand by a chance
arrangement of a number of objects. Each digit occurs
approximately equally often, and this tendency developes as
we advance further; the mutual juxtaposition of the digits
also shows the same tendency, that is, any digit (say 5) is
just as often followed by 6 or 7 as by any of the others. In
fact, if we were to take the whole row of hitherto calculated
figures, cut off the first five as familiar to us all, and con
template the rest, no one would have the slightest reason
to suppose that these had not come out as the results of a
die with ten equal faces.

112 Randomness and its scientific treatment [CHAP. v.

§ 14. If it be asked why this is so, a rather puzzling
question is raised. Wherever physical causation is involved
we are generally understood to have satisfied the demand
implied in this question if we assign antecedents which will
be followed regularly by the event before us; but in geometry
and arithmetic there is no opening for antecedents. What
we then commonly look for is a demonstration, i.e. the re
solution of the observed fact into axioms if possible, or at
any rate into admitted truths of wider generality. I do not
know that a demonstration can be given as to the existence
of this characteristic of statistical randomness in such suc
cessions of digits as those under consideration. But the
following remarks may serve to shift the onus of unlikeli
hood by suggesting that the preponderance of analogy is
rather in favour of the existence.

Take the well-known constant TT for consideration. This
stands for a quantity which presents itself in a vast number
of arithmetical and geometrical relations ; let us take for
examination the best known of these, by regarding it as
standing for the ratio of the circumference to the diameter
of a circle. So regarded, it is nothing more than a simple
case of the measurement of a magnitude by an arbitrarily
selected unit. Conceive then that we had before us a rod
or line and that we wished to measure it with absolute
accuracy. We must suppose — if we are to have a suitable
analogue to the determination of TT to several hundred
figures, — that by the application of continued higher magni
fying power we can detect ever finer subdivisions in the
graduation. We lay our rod against the scale and find it,
say, fall between 31 and 32 inches ; we then look at the
next division of the scale, viz. that into tenths of an inch.
Can we see the slightest reason why the number of these
tenths should be other than independent of the number of

SECT. 15.] Randomness and its scientific treatment. 113

whole inches ? The " piece over " which we are measuring
may in fact be regarded as an entirely new piece, which had
fallen into our hands after that of 31 inches had been
measured and done with ; and similarly with every successive
piece over, as we proceed to the ever finer and finer divisions.

Similar remarks may be made about most other incom
mensurable quantities, such as irreducible roots. Conceive
two straight lines at right angles, and that we lay off a
certain number of inches along each of these from the point
of intersection; say two and five inches, and join the ex
tremities of these so as to form the diagonal of a right-angled
triangle. If we proceed to measure this diagonal in terms
of either of the other lines we are to all intents and purposes
extracting a square root. We should expect, rather than
otherwise, to find here, as in the case of TT, that incommen
surability and resultant randomness of order in the digits
was the rule, and commensurability was the exception. Now
and then, as when the two sides were three and four, we
should find the diagonal commensurable with them ; but
these would be the occasional exceptions, or rather they
would be the comparatively finite exceptions amidst the
indefinitely numerous cases which furnished the rule.

§ 15. The best way perhaps of illustrating the truly
random character of such a row of figures is by appealing to
graphical aid. It is not easy here, any more than in ordinary
statistics, to grasp the import of mere figures ; whereas the
arrangement of groups of points or lines is much more
readily seized. The eye is very quick in detecting any
symptoms of regularity in the arrangement, or any tendency
to denser aggregation in one direction than in another.
How then are we to dispose our figures so as to force them
to display their true character ? I should suggest that we
set about drawing a line at random; and, since we cannot
v. 8

114 Randomness and its scientific treatment. [CHAP. v.

trust our own unaided efforts to do this, that we rely upon
the help of such a table of figures to do it for us, and then
examine with what sort of efficiency they can perform the
task. The problem of drawing straight lines at random,
under various limitations of direction or intersection, is
familiar enough, but I do not know that any one has sug
gested the drawing of a line whose shape as well as position
shall be of a purely random character. For simplicity we
suppose the line to be confined to a plane.

The definition of such a line does not seem to involve
any particular difficulty. Phrased in accordance with the
ordinary language we should describe it as the path (i.e. any
path) traced out by a point which at every moment is as
likely to move in any one direction as in any other. That
we could not ourselves draw such a line, and that we could
not get it traced by any physical agency, is certain. The
mere inertia of any moving body will always give it a
tendency, however slight, to go on in a straight line at each
moment, instead of being instantly responsive to instanta
neously varying dictates as to its direction of motion. Nor can
we conceive or picture such a line in its ultimate or ideal con
dition. But it is easy to give a graphical approximation to it,
and it is easy also to show how this approximation may be
carried on as far as we please towards the ideal in question.

We may proceed as follows. Take a sheet of the ordinary
ruled paper prepared for the graphical exposition of curves.
Select as our starting point the intersection of two of these
lines, and consider the eight 'points of the compass' in
dicated by these lines and the bisections of the contained
right angles \ For suggesting the random selection amongst

1 It would of course be more com- digits ; but this is much more trou-
plete to take ten alternatives of direc- blesome in practice than to confine
tion, and thus to omit none of the ourselves to eight.

SECT. 16.] Randomness and its scientific treatment. 115

these directions let them be numbered from 0 to 7, and
let us say that a line measured due 'north' shall be de
signated by the figure 0, ' north-east ' by 1, and so on. The
selection amongst these numbers, and therefore directions, at
<every corner, might be handed over to a die with eight faces ;
but for the purpose of the illustration in view we select the
digits 0 to 7 as they present themselves in the calculated
value of TT. The sort of path along which we should
travel by a series of such steps thus taken at random
may be readily conceived; it is given at the end of this
-chapter.

For the purpose with which this illustration was pro-
pqsed, viz. the graphical display of the succession of digits
in any one of the incommensurable constants of arithmetic
or geometry, the above may suffice. After actually testing
some of them in this way they seem to me, so far as the eye,
or the theoretical principles to be presently mentioned, are
any guide, to answer quite fairly to the description of ran
domness.

§ 16. As we are on the subject, however, it seems worth
going farther by enquiring how near we could get to the
ideal of randomness of direction. To carry this out com
pletely two improvements must be made. For one thing,
instead of confining ourselves to eight directions we must
;admit an infinite number. This would offer no great diffi
culty ; for instead of employing a small number of digits we
should merely have to use some kind of circular teetotum
which would rest indifferently in any direction. But in the
next place instead of short finite steps we must suppose them
indefinitely short. It is here that the actual unattainability
makes itself felt. We are familiar enough with the device,
employed by Newton, of passing from the discontinuous
polygon to the continuous curve. But we can resort to this

8—2

116 Randomness and its scientific treatment* [CHAP, v

device because the ideal, viz. the curve, is as easily drawn
(and, I should say, as easily conceived or pictured) as any o1
the steps which lead us towards it. But in the case before
us it is otherwise. The line in question will remain dis
continuous, or rather angular, to the last : for its angles do-
not tend even to lose their sharpness, though the fragments
which compose them increase in number and diminish in
magnitude without any limit. And such an ideal is not con
ceivable as an ideal. It is as if we had a rough body under
the microscope, and found that as we subjected it to higher
and higher powers there was no tendency for the angles to
round themselves off. Our ' random line ' must remain as
'spiky' as ever, though the size of its spikes of course
diminishes without any limit.

The case therefore seems to be this. It is easy, in words
to indicate the conception by speaking of a line which at
every instant is as likely to take one direction as another
It is easy moreover to draw such a line with any degree
of minuteness which we choose to demand. But it is nol
possible to conceive or picture the line in its ultimate form l
There is in fact no ' limit ' here, intelligible to the under
standing or picturable by the imagination (corresponding to
the asymptote of a curve, or the continuous curve to th<
incessantly developing polygon), towards which we find our
selves continually approaching, and which therefore we are
apt to conceive ourselves as ultimately attaining The usua
assumption therefore which underlies the Newtonian in
finitesimal geometry and the Differential Calculus, ceases to
apply here.

§ 17. If we like to consider such a line in one of its
approximate stages, as above indicated, it seems to me that

1 Any more than we picture the shape of an equiangular spiral at tht
centre.

SECT. 17.] Randomness and its scientific treatment. 117

some of the usual theorems of Probability, where large
numbers are concerned, may safely be applied. If it be
asked, for instance, whether such a line will ultimately tend
to stray indefinitely far from its starting point, Bernoulli's
* Law of Large Numbers ' may be appealed to, in virtue of
which we should say that it was excessively unlikely that its
divergence should be relatively great. Recur to our gra
phical illustration, and consider first the resultant deviation
of the point (after a great many steps) right or left of the
vertical line through the starting point. Of the eight ad
missible motions at each stage two will not affect this relative
position, whilst the other six are equally likely to move us a
step to the right or to the left. Our resultant ' drift ' there
fore to the right or left will be analogous to the resultant
difference between the number of heads and tails after a
great many tosses of a penny. Now the well-known out
come of such a number of tosses is that ultimately the
proportional approximation to the a priori probability, i.e. to
equality of heads and tails, is more and more nearly carried
out, but that the absolute deflection is more and more widely
displayed.

Applying this to the case in point, and remembering
that the results apply equally to the horizontal and vertical
directions, we should say that after any very great number
of such ' steps ' as those contemplated, the ratio of our dis
tance from the starting point to the whole distance travelled
will pretty certainly be small, whereas the actual distance
from it would be large. We should also say that the longer
we continued to produce such a line the more pronounced
would these tendencies become. So far as concerns this test,
and that afforded by the general appearance of the lines
drawn, — this last, as above remarked, being tolerably trust
worthy, — I feel no doubt as to the generally 'random'

118

Randomness and its scientific treatment [CHAP. V,

character of the rows of figures displayed by the incommen
surable or irrational ratios in question.

As it may interest the reader to see an actual specimen
of such a path I append one representing the arrangement
of the eight digits from 0 to 7 in the value of TT. The data
are taken from Mr Shanks' astonishing performance in the
calculation of this constant to 707 places of figures (Proc. of
R. S., xxi. p. 319). Of these, after omitting 8 and 9, there
remain 568; the diagram represents the course traced out
by following the direction of these as the clue to our path.
Many of the steps have of course been taken in opposite
directions twice or oftener. The result seems to me to
furnish a very fair graphical indication of randomness. I
have compared it with corresponding paths furnished by
rows of figures taken from logarithmic tables, and in other
ways, and find the results to be much the same.

Start

CHAPTER VI1.

THE SUBJECTIVE SIDE OF PROBABILITY.
MEASUREMENT OF BELIEF.

§ 1. HAVING now obtained a clear conception of a
certain kind of series, the next enquiry is, What is to be
done with this series? How is it to be employed as a means
of making inferences? The general step that we are now
about to take might be described as one from the objective
to the subjective, from the things themselves to the state of
our minds in contemplating them.

The reader should observe that a substitution has, in a
great number of cases, already been made as a first stage
towards bringing the things into a shape fit for calculation.
This substitution, as described in former chapters, is, in a
measure, a process of idealization. The series we actually
meet with are apt to show a changeable type, and the indivi
duals of them will sometimes transgress their licensed irregu
larity. Hence they have to be pruned a little into shape, as

1 Originally written in somewhat deavour to express myself with less
of a spirit of protest against what emphasis, and I have made altera-
seemed to me the prevalent dis- tions in that direction. The reader
position to follow De Morgan in who wishes to see a view not sub-
taking too subjective a view of the stantially very different from mine,
science. In reading it through now but expressed with a somewhat oppo-
I cannot find any single sentence to site emphasis, can refer to Mr F. Y.
which I could take distinct objection, Edgeworth's article on " The Philoso-
though I must admit that if I were phy of Chance " (Mind, Vol. ix. )
writing it entirely afresh I should en-

120 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

natural objects almost always have before they are capable of
being accurately reasoned about. The form in which the
series emerges is that of a series with a fixed type. This
imaginary or ideal series is the basis of our calculation.

§ 2. It must riot be supposed that this is at all at vari
ance with the assertion previously made, that Probability is a
science of inference about real things; it is only by a substi
tution of the above kind that we are enabled to reason about
the things. In nature nearly all phenomena present them
selves in a form which departs from that rigorously accurate
one which scientific purposes mostly demand, so we have to
introduce an imaginary series, which shall be free from any
such defects. The only condition to be fulfilled is, that the
substitution is to be as little arbitrary, that is, to vary from
the truth as slightly, as possible. This kind of substitution
generally passes without notice when natural objects of any
kind are made subjects of exact science. I direct distinct
attention to it here simply from the apprehension that want
of familiarity with the subject-matter might lead some readers
to suppose that it involves, in this case, an exceptional de
flection from accuracy in the formal process of inference.

It may be remarked also that the adoption of this imagi
nary series offers no countenance whatever to the doctrine
criticised in the last chapter, in accordance with which it was
supposed that our series possessed a fixed unchangeable type
which was merely the "development of the probabilities" of
things, to use Laplace's expression. It differs from anything
contemplated on that hypothesis by the fact that it is to be
recognized as a necessary substitution of our own for the
actual series, and to be kept in as close conformity with facts as
possible. It is a mere fiction or artifice necessarily resorted
to for the purpose of calculation, and for this purpose only.

This caution is the more necessary, because in the example

SECT. 3.] Measurement of Belief. 121

that I shall select, and which belongs to the most favourite
class of examples in this subject, the substitution becomes
accidentally unnecessary. The things, as has been repeatedly
pointed out, may sometimes need no trimming, because in
the form in which they actually present themselves they are
almost idealized. In most cases a good deal of alteration is
necessary to bring the series into shape, but in some — pro
minently in the case of games of chance — we find the alter
ations, for all practical purposes, needless.

§ 3. We start then, from such a series as this, upon the
enquiry, What kind of inference can be made about it? It
may assist the logical reader to inform him that our first step
will be analogous to one class of what are commonly known
as immediate inferences, — inferences, that is, of the type, —
"'All men are mortal, therefore any particular man or men
are mortal.' This case, simple and obvious as it is in Logic,
requires very careful consideration in Probability.

It is obvious that we must be prepared to form an opinion
upon the propriety of taking the step involved ki making
such an inference. Hitherto we have had as little to do as
possible with the irregular individuals ; we have regarded
them simply as fragments of a regular series. But we cannot
long continue to neglect all consideration of them. Even if
these events in the gross be tolerably certain, it is not only
in the gross that we have to deal with them ; they con
stantly come before us a few at a time, or even as indivi
duals, and we have to form some opinion about them in this
state. An insurance office, for instance, deals with num
bers large enough to obviate most of the uncertainty, but
•each of their transactions has another party interested in
it — What has the man who insures to say to their proceed
ings ? for to him this question becomes an individual one.
And even the office itself receives its cases singly, and would

122 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

therefore like to have as clear views as possible about these
single cases. Now, the remarks made in the preceding chapters
about the subjects which Probability discusses might seem to
preclude all enquiries of this kind, for was not ignorance of
the individual presupposed to such an extent that even (as
will be seen hereafter) causation might be denied, within
considerable limits, without affecting our conclusions ? The
answer to this enquiry will require us to turn now to the
consideration of a totally distinct side of the question, and
one which has not yet come before us. Our best introduction
to it will be by the discussion of a special example.

§ 4. Let a penny be tossed up a very great many
times ; we may then be supposed to know for certain this-
fact (amongst many others) that in the long run head and
tail will occur about equally often. But suppose we consider
only a moderate number of throws, or fewer still, and so
continue limiting the number until we come down to three
or two, or even one ? We have, as the extreme cases, cer
tainty or something undistinguishably near it, and utter
uncertainty. Have we not, between these extremes, all
gradations of belief? There is a large body of writers, in
cluding some of the most eminent authorities upon this
subject, who state or imply that we are distinctly conscious of
such a variation of the amount of our belief, and that this
state of our minds can be measured and determined with
almost the same accuracy as the external events to which
they refer. The principal mathematical supporter of thi&
view is De Morgan, who has insisted strongly upon it in all
his works on the subject. The clearest exposition of his
opinions will be found in his Formal Logic, in which work he
has made the view which we are now discussing the basis of
his system. He holds that we have a certain amount of belief
of every proposition which may be set before us, an amount

SECT. 5.] Measurement of Belief. 123

which in its nature admits of determination, though we may
practically find it difficult in any particular case to determine
it. He considers, in fact, that Probability is a sort of sister
science to Formal Logic1, speaking of it in the following
words : " I cannot understand why the study of the effect,,
which partial belief of the premises produces with respect to-
the conclusion, should be separated from that of the con
sequences of supposing the former to be absolutely true2".
In other words, there is a science — Formal Logic — which in
vestigates the rules according to which one proposition can be
necessarily inferred from another ; in close correspondence
with this there is a science which investigates the rules ac
cording to which the amount of our belief of one proposition
varies with the amount of our belief of other propositions
with which it is connected.

The same view is also supported by another high authority,
the late Prof. Donkin, who says (Phil. Mag. May, 1851), "It
will, I suppose, be generally admitted, and has often been
more or less explicitly stated, that the subject-matter of
calculation in the mathematical theory of Probabilities is
quantity of belief."

§ 5. Before proceeding to criticise this opinion, one re
mark may be made upon it which has been too frequently
overlooked. It should be borne in mind that, even were this
view of the subject not actually incorrect, it might be objected
to as insufficient for the purpose of a definition, on the ground
that variation of belief is not confined to Probability. It is
a property with which that science is concerned, no doubt,
but it is a property which meets us in other directions a&

1 In the ordinary signification of indicated in his title ' ' Formal Logic,

this term. As De Morgan uses it or the Calculus of Inference, neces-

he makes Formal Logic include Pro- sary and probable."

bability, as one of its branches, as 2 Formal Logic. Preface, page v.

124 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

well. In every case in which we extend our inferences by
Induction or Analogy, or depend upon the witness of others,
or trust to our own memory of the past, or come to a conclu
sion through conflicting arguments, or even make a long and
complicated deduction by mathematics or logic, we have a
result of which we can scarcely feel as certain as of the pre
mises from which it was obtained. In all these cases then
we are conscious of varying quantities of belief, but are the
laws according to which the belief is produced and varied the
same ? If they cannot be reduced to one harmonious scheme,
if in fact they can at best be brought to nothing but a number
of different schemes, each with its own body of laws and rules,
then it is vain to endeavour to force them into one science.

This opinion is strengthened by observing that most of
the writers who adopt the definition in question do practi
cally dismiss from consideration most of the above-mentioned
examples of diminution of belief, and confine their attention
to classes of events which have the property discussed in
Chap. I., viz. 'ignorance of the few, knowledge of the many.'
It is quite true that considerable violence has to be done to
some of these examples, by introducing exceedingly arbitrary
suppositions into them, before they can be forced to assume
a suitable form. But still there is little doubt that, if we
carefully examine the language employed, we shall find that
in almost every case assumptions are made which virtually
imply that our knowledge of the individual is derived from
propositions given in the typical form described in Chap. I.
This will be more fully proved when we come to consider
some common misapplications of the science.

§ 6. Even then, if the above-mentioned view of the
subject were correct, it would yet, I consider, be insufficient
for the purpose of a definition ; but it is at least very doubtful
whether it is correct. Before we could properly assign to

SECT. 7.] Measurement of Belief. 125

the belief side of the question the prominence given to it by
De Morgan and others, certainly before the science could be
defined from that side, it would be necessary, it appears, to
establish the two following positions, against both of which
strong objections can be brought.

(1) That our belief of every proposition is a thing which
we can, strictly speaking, be said to measure ; that
there must be a certain amount of it in every case,
which we can realize somehow in consciousness and
refer to some standard so as to pronounce upon its
value.

(2) That the value thus apprehended is the correct one
according to the theory, viz. that it is the exact
fraction of full conviction that it should be. This
statement will perhaps seem somewhat obscure at
first ; it will be explained presently.

§ 7. (I) Now, in the first place, as regards the difficulty
of obtaining any measure of the amount of our belief. One
source of this difficulty is too obvious to have escaped notice ;
this is the disturbing influence produced on the quantity of
belief by any strong emotion or passion. A deep interest in
the matter at stake, whether it excite hope or fear, plays great
havoc with the belief-meter, so that we must assume the
mind to be quite unimpassioned in weighing the evidence.
This is noticed and acknowledged by Laplace and others;
but these writers seem to me to assume it to be the only
source of error, and also to be of comparative unimportance.
Even if it were the only source of error I cannot see that it
would be unimportant. We experience hope or fear in so
very many instances, that to omit such influences from con
sideration would be almost equivalent to saying that whilst
we profess to consider the whole quantity of our belief we
will in reality consider only a portion of it. Very strong

126 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

feelings are, of course, exceptional, but we should neverthe
less find that the emotional element, in some form or other,
makes itself felt on almost every occasion. It is very seldom
that we cannot speak of our surprise or expectation in refer
ence to any particular event. Both of these expressions, but
especially the former, seem to point to something more than
mere belief. It is true that the word ' expectation ' is gene
rally defined in treatises on Probability as equivalent to
belief; but it seems doubtful whether any one who attends
to the popular use of the terms would admit that they were
exactly synonymous. Be this however as it may, the emo
tional element is present upon almost every occasion, and its
disturbing influence therefore is constantly at work.

§ 8. Another cause, which co-operates with the former,
is to be found in the extreme complexity and variety of the
evidence on which our belief of any proposition depends.
Hence it results that our actual belief at any given moment
is one of the most fugitive and variable things possible, so
that we can scarcely ever get sufficiently clear hold of it to
measure it. This is not confined to the times when our
minds are in a turmoil of excitement through hope or fear.
In our calmest moments we shall find it no easy thing to
give a precise answer to the question, How firmly do I hold
this or that belief? There may be one or two prominent
arguments in its favour, and one or two corresponding ob
jections against it, but this is far from comprising all the
causes by which our state of belief is produced. Because
such reasons as these are all that can be practically intro
duced into oral or written controversies, we must not con
clude that it is by these only that our conviction is influenced.
On the contrary, our conviction generally rests upon a sort
of chaotic basis composed of an infinite number of inferences
and analogies of every description, and these moreover dis-

SECT. 9.] Measurement of Belief. 127

torted by our state of feeling at the time, dimmed by the
degree of our recollection of them afterwards, and probably
received from time to time with varying force according to
the way in which they happen to combine in our conscious
ness at the moment. To borrow a striking illustration from
Abraham Tucker, the substructure of our convictions is not
so much to be compared to the solid foundations of an ordi
nary building, as to the piles of the houses of Rotterdam
which rest somehow in a deep bed of soft mud. They bear
their weight securely enough, but it would not be easy to
point out accurately the dependence of the different parts
upon one another. Directly we begin to think of the amount
of our belief, we have to think of the arguments by which it
is produced — in fact, these arguments will intrude themselves
without our choice. As each in turn flashes through the
mind, it modifies the strength of our conviction ; we are like
a person listening to the confused hubbub of a crowd, where
there is always something arbitrary in the particular sound
we choose to listen to. There may be reasons enough to
suffice abundantly for our ultimate choice, but on examina
tion we shall find that they are by no means apprehended
with the same force at different times. The belief produced
by some strong argument may be very decisive at the mo
ment, but it will often begin to diminish when the argument
is not actually before the mind. It is like being dazzled by
a strong light ; the impression still remains, but begins al
most immediately to fade away. I think that this is the
•case, however we try to limit the sources of our conviction.

§ 9. (II) But supposing that it were possible to strike
a sort of average of this fluctuating state, should we find this
average to be of the amount assigned by theory ? In other
words, is our natural belief in the happening of two different
events in direct proportion to the frequency with which those

128 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

events happen in the long run ? There is a lottery with 100
tickets and ten prizes; is a man's belief that he will get a
prize fairly represented by one-tenth of certainty ? The mere
reference to a lottery should be sufficient to disprove this.
Lotteries have flourished at all times, and have never failed
to be abundantly supported, in spite of the most perfect con
viction, on the part of many, if not of most, of those who put
into them, that in the long run all will lose. Deductions
should undoubtedly be made for those who act from super
stitious motives, from belief in omens, dreams, and so on.
But apart from these, and supposing any one to come forti
fied by all that mathematics can do for him, it is difficult to
believe that his natural impressions about single events would
be always what they should be according to theory. Are
there many who can honestly declare that they would have
no desire to buy a single -ticket ? They would probably say
to themselves that the sum they paid away was nothing
worth mentioning to lose, and that there was a chance of
gaining a great deal; in other words, they are not appor
tioning their belief in the way that theory assigns.

What bears out this view is, that the same persons who
would act in this way in single instances would often not
think of doing so in any but single instances. In other
words, the natural tendency here is to attribute too great an
amount of belief where it is or should be small ; i.e. to de
preciate the risk in proportion to the contingent advantage.
They would very likely, when argued with, attach disparag
ing epithets to this state of feeling, by calling it an un
accountable fascination, or something of that kind, but of
its existence there can be little doubt. We are speaking
now of what is the natural tendency of our minds, not of
that into which they may at length be disciplined by educa
tion and thought. If, however, educated persons have sue-

SECT. 10.] Measurement of Belief . 129

ceeded for the most part in controlling this tendency in
games of chance, the spirit of reckless speculation has
scarcely yet been banished from commerce. On examination,
this tendency will be found so prevalent in all ages, ranks,
and dispositions, that it would be inadmissible to neglect it in
order to bring our supposed instincts more closely into ac
cordance with the commonly received theories of Probability.
§ 10. There is another aspect of this question which has
been often overlooked, but which seems to deserve some
attention. Granted that we have an instinct of credence,
why should it be assumed that this must be just of that in
tensity which subsequent experience will justify ? Our
instincts are implanted in us for good 'purposes, and are in
tended to act immediately and unconsciously. They are,
however, subject to control, and have to be brought into
accordance with what we believe to be true and right. In
other departments of psychology we do not assume that
every spontaneous prompting of nature is to be left just as
we find it, or even that on the average, omitting individual
variations, it is set at that pitch that will be found in the
end to be the best when we come to think about it and assign
its rules. Take, for example, the case of resentment. Here
we have an instinctive tendency, and one that on the whole
is good in its results. But moralists are agreed that almost
all our efforts at self-control are to be directed towards sub
duing it and keeping it in its right direction. It is assumed
to be given as a sort of rough protection, and to be set, if
one might so express oneself, at too high a pitch to be
deliberately and consciously acted on in society. May not
something of this kind be the case also with our belief?
I only make a passing reference to this point here, as on
the theory of Probability adopted in this work it does not
appear to be at all material to the science. But it seems
v. 9

130 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

a strong argument against the expediency of commencing
the study of the science from the subjective side, or even of
assigning any great degree of prominence to this side.

That men do not believe in exact accordance with this
theory must have struck almost every one, but this has
probably been considered as mere exception and irregularity;
the assumption being made that on the average, and in far
the majority of cases, they do so believe. As stated above,
it is very doubtful whether the tendency which has just
been discussed is not so widely prevalent that it might with
far more propriety be called the rule than the exception.
And it may be better that this should be so: many good
results may follow from that cheerful disposition which in
duces a man sometimes to go on trying after some great
good, the chance of which he overvalues. He will keep on
through trouble and disappointment, without serious harm
perhaps, when the cool and calculating bystander sees plainly
that his 'measure of belief is much higher than it should
be. So, too, the tendency also so common, of underrating
the chance of a great evil may also work for good. By many
men death might be looked upon as an almost infinite evil,
at least they would so regard it themselves ; suppose they
kept this contingency constantly before them at its right
value, how would it be possible to get through the practical
work of life ? Men would be stopping indoors because if
they went out they might be murdered or bitten by a mad
dog. To say this is not to advocate a return to our instincts ;
indeed when we have once reached the critical and conscious
state, it is hardly possible to do so ; but it should be noticed
that the advantage gained by correcting them is at best but
a balanced one1. What is most to our present purpose, it

1 An illustration of the points been given in a quarter where few
here insisted on has recently [1876] would have expected it ; I allude, as

SECT. 11.] Measurement of Belief. 131

suggests the inexpediency of attempting to found an exact
theory on what may afterwards prove to be a mere instinct,
unauthorized in its full extent by experience.

§11. It may be replied, that though people, as a matter
of fact, do not apportion belief in this exact way, yet they
ought to do so. The purport of this remark will be examined
presently ; it need only be said here that it grants all that
is now contended for. For it admits that the degree of our
belief is capable of modification, and may need it. But in
accordance with what is the belief to be modified ? obviously
in accordance with experience ; it cannot be trusted to by
itself, but the fraction at which it is to be rated must be
determined by the comparative frequency of the events to
which it refers. Experience then furnishing the standard, it
is surely most reasonable to start from this experience, and to
found the theory of our processes upon it.

If we do not do this, it should be observed that we are
detaching Probability altogether from the study of things
external to us, and making it nothing else in effect than a
portion of Psychology. If we refuse to be controlled by
experience, but confine our attention to the laws according
to which belief is naturally or instinctively compounded and
distributed in our minds, we have no right then to appeal to
experience afterwards even for illustrations, unless under the

many readers will readily infer, to stance of immortality and the exist-

J. S. Mill's exceedingly interesting ence of the Deity), may nevertheless

Essays on Theism. It is not within not only continue to exist in culti-

our province here to criticise any of vated minds, but may also be pro-

their conclusions, but they have ex- fitably encouraged there, at any rate

pressed in a very significant way the in the shape of hopes, for certain

conviction entertained by him that supposed advantages attendant on

beliefs which are not justified by their retention, irrespective even of

evidence, and possibly may not be their truth,
•capable of justification (those for in-

9—2

132 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

express understanding that we do not guarantee its accuracy.
Our belief in some single events, for example, might be cor
rect, and yet that in a compound of several (if derived merely
from our instinctive laws of belief) very possibly might not
be correct, but might lead us into practical mistakes if we
determined to act upon it. Even if the two were in accord
ance, this accordance would have to be proved, which would
lead us round, by what I cannot but think a circuitous
process, to the point which has been already chosen for
commencing with.

§ 12. De Morgan seems to imply that the doctrine
criticised above finds a justification from the analogy of
Formal Logic. If the laws of necessary inference can be
studied apart from all reference to external facts (except
by way of illustration), why not those of probable inference ?
There does not, however, seem to be much force in any such
analogy. Formal Logic, at any rate under its modern or
Kantian mode of treatment, is based upon the assumption
that there are laws of thought as distinguished from laws of
things, and that these laws of thought can be ascertained and
studied without taking into account their reference to any
particular object. Now so long as we are confined to neces
sary or irreversible laws, as is of course the case in ordinary
Formal Logic, this assumption leads to no special difficulties
We mean by this, that no conflict arises between these sub
jective and objective necessities. The two exist in perfect
harmony side by side, the one being the accurate counter
part of the other. So precise is the correspondence between
them, that few persons would notice, until study of meta
physics had called their attention to such points, that there
were these two sides to the question. They would make
their appeal to either with equal confidence, saying indiffer
ently, 'the thing must be so,' or, 'we cannot conceive its being

SECT. 13.] Measurement of Belief. 133

otherwise.' In fact it is only since the time of Kant that
this mental analysis has been to any extent appreciated and
accepted. And even now the dominant experience school of
philosophy would not admit that there are here two really
distinct sides to the phenomenon ; they maintain either that
the subjective necessity is nothing more than the conse
quence by inveterate association of the objective uniformity,
or else that this so-called necessity (say in the Law of Con
tradiction) is after all merely verbal, merely a different way of
saying the same thing over again in other words. Whatever
the explanation adopted, the general result is that fallacies,
as real acts of thought, are impossible within the domain of
pure logic ; error within that province is only possible by a
momentary lapse of attention, that is of consciousness.

§ 13. But though this perfect harmony between sub
jective and objective uniformities or laws may exist within
the domain of pure logic, it is far from existing within that
of probability. The moment we make the quantity of our
belief an integral part of the subject to be studied, any such
invariable correspondence ceases to exist. In the former
case, we could not consciously think erroneously even though
we might try to do so ; in the latter, we not only can believe
erroneously but constantly do so. Far from the quantity of
our belief being so exactly adjusted in conformity with the
facts to which it refers that we cannot even in imagination
go astray, we find that it frequently exists in excess or defect
of that which subsequent judgment will approve. Our in
stincts of credence are unquestionably in frequent hostility
with experience ; and what do we do then ? We simply
modify the instincts into accordance with the things. We
are constantly performing this practice, and no cultivated
mind would find it possible to do anything else. No man
would think of divorcing his belief from the things on which

134 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

it was exercised, or would suppose that the former had any
thing else to do than to follow the lead of the latter. Hence
it results that that separation of the subjective necessity from
the objective, and that determination to treat the former
as a science apart by itself, for which a plausible defence
could be made in the case of pure logic, is entirely inad
missible in the case of probability. However we might
contrive to 'think' aright without appeal to facts, we can
not believe aright without incessantly checking our pro
ceedings by such appeals. Whatever then may be the
claims of Formal Logic to rank as a separate science, it
does not appear that it can furnish any support to the
theory of Probability at present under examination.

§ 14. The point in question is sometimes urged as
follows. Suppose a man with two, and only two, alterna
tives before him, one of which he knows must involve
success and the other failure. He knows nothing more
about them than this, and he is forced to act. Would he
not regard them with absolutely similar and equal feelings
of confidence, without the necessity of referring them to any
real or imaginary series ? If so, is not this equivalent to
saying that his belief of either, since one of them must
come to pass, is equal to that of the other, and therefore that
his belief of each is one-half of full confidence ? Similarly
if there are more than two alternatives : let it be supposed
that there are any number of them, amongst which no
distinctions whatever can be discerned except in such par
ticulars as we know for certain will not affect the result ;
should we not feel equally confident in respect of each of
them ? and so here again should we not have a fractional
estimate of our absolute amount of belief? It is thus
attempted to lay the basis of a pure science of Probability,
determining the distribution and combination of our belief

SECT. 15.] Measurement of Belief. 135

hypothetically ; viz. if the contingencies are exactly alike,
then our belief is so apportioned, the question whether the
contingencies are equal being of course decided as the ob
jective data of Logic or Mathematics are decided.

To discuss this question fully would require a statement
at some length of the reasons in favour of the objective or
material view of Logic, as opposed to the Formal or Con-
ceptualist. I shall have to speak on this subject in another
chapter, and will not therefore enter upon it here. But one
conclusive objection which is applicable more peculiarly to
Probability may be offered at once. To pursue the line of
enquiry just indicated, is, as already remarked, to desert
the strictly logical ground, and to take up that appropriate
to psychology ; the proper question, in all these cases, being
not what do men believe, but what ought they to believe ?
Admitting, as was done above, that in the case of Formal
Logic these two enquiries, or rather those corresponding to
them, practically run into one, owing to the fact that men
cannot consciously 'think' wrongly; it cannot be too strongly
insisted on that in Probability the two are perfectly sepa
rable and distinct. It is of no use saying what men do or
will believe, we want to know what they will be right in
believing ; and this can never be settled without an appeal
to the phenomena themselves.

§ 15. But apart from the above considerations, this way
of putting the case does not seem to me at all conclusive.
Take the following example. A man1 finds himself on the

1 It is necessary to take an ex- fore there is nothing of the nature

ample in which the man is forced to of belief to be extracted out of his

act, or we should not be able to shew mental condition. He very likely

that he has any belief on the subject would take this ground if we asked

at all. He may declare that he him, as De Morgan does, with a

neither knows nor cares anything slightly different reference (Formal

about the matter, and that there- Logic, p. 183), whether he considers

136 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

sands of the Wash or Morecambe Bay, in a dense mist, when
the spring-tide is coming in; and knows therefore that to
be once caught by the tide would be fatal. He hears a
church-bell at a distance, but has no means of knowing
whether it is on the same side of the water with himself or
on the opposite side. He cannot tell therefore whether by
following its sound he will be led out into the mid-stream
and be lost, or led back to dry land and safety. Here there
can be no repetition of the event, and the cases are indis-
tinguishably alike, to him, in the only circumstances which
can affect the issue : is not then his prospect of death, it
will be said, necessarily equal to one-half? A proper analysis
of his state of mind would be a psychological rather than
a logical enquiry, and in any case, as above remarked, the
decision of this question does not touch our logical position.
But according to the best introspection I can give I should
say that what really passes through the mind in such a case
is something of this kind: In most doubtful positions and
circumstances we are accustomed to decide our conduct by
a consideration of the relative advantages and disadvantages
of each side, that is by the observed or inferred frequency
with which one or the other alternative has succeeded. In
proportion as these become more nearly balanced, we are
more frequently mistaken in the individual cases ; that is, it
becomes more and more nearly what would be called 'a
mere toss up ' whether we are right or wrong. The case
in question seems merely the limiting case, in which it has

that there are volcanoes on the unseen seem good instances to illustrate the

side of the moon larger than those position that we always entertain a

on the side turned towards us; or, certain degree of belief on every

with Jevons (Principles of Science, question which can be stated, and

Ed. ii. p. 212) whether he considers that utter inability to give a reason

that a Platythliptic Coefficient is in favour of either alternative cor-

positive. These do not therefore responds to half belief.

SECT. 16.] Measurement of Belief. 137

been contrived that there shall be no appreciable difference
between the alternatives, by which to decide in favour of
one or other, and we accordingly feel no confidence in the
particular result. Having to decide, however, we decide ac
cording to the precedent of similar cases which have occurred
before. To stand still and wait for better information is
certain death, and we therefore appeal to and employ the
only rule we know of; or rather we feel, or endeavour to
feel, as we have felt before when acting in the presence of
alternatives as nearly balanced as possible. But I can
neither perceive in my own case, nor feel convinced in that
of others, that this appeal, in a case which cannot be re
peated1, to a rule acted on and justified in cases which can be
and are repeated, at all forces us to admit that our state of
mind is the same in each case.

§ 16. This example serves to bring out very clearly a point
which has been already mentioned, and which will have to be
insisted upon again, viz. that all which Probability discusses
is the statistical frequency of events, or, if we prefer so to
put it, the quantity of belief with which any one of these
events should be individually regarded, but leaves all the
subsequent conduct dependent upon that frequency, or that
belief, to the choice of the agents. Suppose there are two
travellers in the predicament in question : shall they keep
together, or separate in opposite directions ? In either case
alike the chance of safety to each is the same, viz. one-half,
but clearly their circumstances must decide which course it
is preferable to adopt. If they are husband and wife, they will
probably prefer to remain together ; if they are sole deposi
taries of an important state secret, they may decide to part.
In other words, we have to select here between the two alter
natives of the certainty of a single loss, and the even chance

1 Except indeed on the principles indicated further on in §§ 24, 25.

138 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

of a double loss; alternatives which the common mathe
matical statement of their chances has a decided tendency
to make us regard as indistinguishable from one another.
But clearly the decision must be grounded on the desires,
feelings, and conscience of the agents. Probability cannot
say a word upon this question. As I have pointed out else
where, there has been much confusion on this matter in
applications of the science to betting, and in the discussion
of the Petersburg problem.

We have thus examined the doctrine in question with
a minuteness which may seem tedious, but in consequence of
the eminence of its supporters it would have been presump
tuous to have rejected it without the strongest grounds. The
objections which have been urged might be summarised as
follows : — the amount of our belief of any given proposition,
supposing it to be in its nature capable of accurate determi
nation (which does not seem to be the case), depends upon a
great variety of causes, of which statistical frequency — the
subject of Probability — is but one. That even if we confine
our attention to this one cause, the natural amount of our
belief is not necessarily what theory would assign, but has to
be checked by appeal to experience. The subjective side of
Probability therefore, though very interesting and well de
serving of examination, seems a mere appendage of the objec
tive, and affords in itself no safe ground for a science of
inference.

§ 17. The conception then of the science of Probability
as a science of the laws of belief seems to break down at
every point. We must not however rest content with such
merely negative criticism. The degree of belief we enter
tain of a proposition may be hard to get at accurately, and
when obtained may be often wrong, and may need therefore
to be checked by an appeal to the objects of belief. Still in

SECT. 17.] Measurement of Belief. 139

popular estimation we do seem to be able with more or less
accuracy to form a graduated scale of intensity of belief.
What we have to examine now is whether this be possible,
and, if so, what is the explanation of the fact ?

That it is generally believed that we can form such a
scale scarcely admits of doubt. There is a whole vocabulary
of common expressions such as, 'I feel almost sure/ 'I do not
feel quite certain,' <I am less confident of this than of that/
and so on. When we make use of any one of these phrases
we seldom doubt that we have a distinct meaning to convey
by means of it. Nor do we feel much at a loss, under any
given circumstances, as to which of these expressions we
should employ in preference to the others. If we were asked
to arrange in order, according to the intensity of the belief
with which we respectively hold them, things broadly marked
off from one another, we could do it from our consciousness
of belief alone, without a fresh appeal to the evidence upon
which the belief depended. Passing over the looser proposi
tions which are used in common conversation, let us take but
one simple example from amongst those which furnish nume
rical data. Do I not feel more certain that some one will die
this week in the whole town, than in the particular street in
which I live ? and if the town is known to contain a popula
tion one hundred times greater than that in the street, would
not almost any one be prepared to assert on reflection that
he felt a hundred times more sure of the first proposition
than of the second? Or to take a non-numerical example, are
we not often able to say unhesitatingly which of two propo
sitions we believe the most, and to some rough degree how
much more we believe one than the other, at a time when all
the evidence upon which each rests has faded from the
mind, so that each has to be judged, as we may say, solely on
its own merits?

140 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

Here then a problem proposes itself. If popular opinion,
as illustrated in common language, be correct, — and very
considerable weight must of course be attributed to it, — there
does exist something which we call partial belief in refer
ence to any proposition of the numerical kind described
above. Now what we want to do is to find some test or
justification of this belief, to obtain in fact some intelligible
answer to the question, Is it correct ? We shall find incident
ally that the answer to this question will throw a good deal
of light upon another question nearly as important arid far
more intricate, viz. What is the meaning of this partial belief?

§ 18. We shall find it advisable to commence by ascer
taining how such enquiries as the above would be answered
in the case of ordinary full belief. Such a step would not
offer the slightest difficulty. Suppose, to take a simple
example, that we have obtained the following proposition, —
whether by induction, or by the rules of ordinary deductive
logic, does not matter for our present purpose, — that a certain
mixture of oxygen and hydrogen is explosive. Here we have
an inference, and consequent belief of a proposition. Now
suppose there were any enquiry as to whether our belief
were correct, what should we do? The simplest way of
settling the matter would be to find out by a distinct appeal
to experience whether the proposition was true. Since we
are reasoning about things, the justification of the belief, that
is, the test of its correctness, would be most readily found in
the truth of the proposition. If by any process of inference
I have come to believe that a certain mixture will explode, I
consider my belief to be justified, that is to be correct, if
under proper circumstances the explosion always does occur ;
if it does not occur the belief was wronsr.

o

Such an answer, no doubt, goes but a little way, or rather
no way at all, towards explaining what is the nature of beliei

SECT. 19.] Measurement of Belief. 141

in itself; but it is sufficient for our present purpose, which is
merely that of determining what is meant by the correctness
of our belief, and by the test of its correctness. In all infer
ences about things, in which the amount of our belief is not
taken into account, such an explanation as the above is quite
sufficient ; it would be the ordinary one in any question of
science. It is moreover perfectly intelligible, whether the
conclusion is particular or universal. Whether we believe
that 'some men die7, or that 'all men die', our belief may with
equal ease be tested by the appropriate train of experience.

§ 19. But when we attempt to apply the same test to
partial belief, we shall find ourselves reduced to an awkward
perplexity. A difficulty now emerges which has been singu
larly overlooked by those who have treated of the subject.
As a simple example will serve our purpose, we will take the
case of a penny. I am about to toss one up, and I therefore
half believe, to adopt the current language, that it will give
head. Now it seems to be overlooked that if we appeal to
the event, as we did in the case last examined, our belief
must inevitably be wrong, and therefore the test above men
tioned will fail. For the thing must either happen or not
happen : i.e. in this case the penny must either give head, or
not give it; there is no third alternative. But whichever
way it occurs, our half-belief, so far as such a state of mind
admits of interpretation, must be wrong. If head does come,
I am wrong in not having expected it enough ; for I only half
believed in its occurrence. If it does not happen, I am
equally wrong in having expected it too much; for I half
believed in its occurrence, when in fact it did not occur at all.

The same difficulty will occur in every case in which we
attempt to justify our state of partial belief in a single con
tingent event. Let us take another example, slightly differ
ing from the last. A man is to receive £1 if a die gives six,

142 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

to pay Is. if it gives any other number. It will generally be
admitted that he ought to give 2s. 6d. for the chance, and
that if he does so he will be paying a fair sum. This ex
ample only differs from the last in the fact that instead of
simple belief in a proposition, we have taken what mathema
ticians call 'the value of the expectation'. In other words,
we have brought into greater prominence, not merely the be
lief, but the conduct which is founded upon the belief. But
precisely the same difficulty recurs here. For appealing to the
event, — the single event, that is, — we see that one or other
party must lose his money without compensation. In what
sense then can such an expectation be said to be a fair one ?
§ 20. A possible answer to this, and so far as appears the
only possible answer, will be, that what we really mean by
saying that we half believe in the occurrence of head is to
express our conviction that head will certainly happen on
the average every other time. And similarly, in the second
example, by calling the sum a fair one it is meant that in
the long run neither party will gain or lose. As we shall
recur presently to the point raised in this form of answer, the
only notice that need be taken of it at this point is to call
attention to the fact that it entirely abandons the whole
question in dispute, for it admits that this partial belief does
not in any strict sense apply to the individual event, since it
clearly cannot be justified there. At such a result indeed we
cannot be surprised ; at least we cannot on the theory adopted
throughout this Essay. For bearing in mind that the em
ployment of Probability postulates ignorance of the single
event, it is not easy to see how we are to justify any other
opinion or statement about the single event than a confes
sion of such ignorance.

§ 21. So far then we do not seem to have made the
slightest approximation to a solution of the particular

SECT. 21.] Measurement of Belief. 143

question now under examination. The more closely we have
analysed special examples, the more unmistakeably are we
brought to the conclusion that in the individual instance no
justification of anything like quantitative belief is to be
found ; at least none is to be found in the same sense in
which we expect it in ordinary scientific conclusions, whether
Inductive or Deductive. And yet we have to face and
account for the fact that common impressions, as attested by
a whole vocabulary of common phrases, are in favour of the
existence of this quantitative belief. How are we to account
for this ? If we appeal to an example again, and analyse it
somewhat more closely, we may yet find our way to some
satisfactory explanation.

In our previous analysis (§ 18) we found it sufficient to stop
at an early stage, and to give as the justification of our belief
the fact of the proposition being true. Stopping however at
that stage, we have found this explanation fail altogether to
give a justification of partial belief; fail, that is, when applied
to the individual instance. The two states of belief and dis
belief correspond admirably to the two results of the event
happening and not happening respectively, and unless for
psychological purposes we saw no reason to analyse further ;
but to partial belief there is nothing corresponding in the re
sult, for the event cannot partially happen in such cases as we
are concerned with. Suppose then we advance a step further
in the analysis, and ask again what is meant by the proposi
tion being true ? This introduces us, of course, to a very long
and intricate path ; but in the short distance along it which
we shall advance, we shall not, it is to be hoped, find any
very serious difficulty. As before, we will illustrate the
analysis by first applying it to the case of ordinary full belief.

§ 22. Whatever opinion then may be held about the
essential nature of belief, it will probably be admitted that a

144 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

readiness to act upon the proposition believed is an insepar
able accompaniment of that state of mind. There can be no
alteration in our belief (at any rate in the case of sane persons)
without a possible alteration in our conduct, nor anything in
our conduct which is not connected with something in our
belief. We will first take an example in connection with the
penny, in which there is full belief; we will analyse it a step
further than we did before, and then attempt to apply the
same analysis to an example of a similar kind, but one in
which the belief is partial instead of full.

Suppose that I am about to throw a penny up, and con
template the prospect of its falling upon one of its sides and
not upon its edge. We feel perfectly confident that it will
do so. Now whatever else may be implied in our belief, we
certainly mean this ; that we are ready to stake our conduct
upon its falling thus. All our betting, and everything else
that we do, is carried on upon this supposition. Any risk
whatever that might ensue upon its falling otherwise will be
incurred without fear. This, it must be observed, is equally
the case whether we are speaking of a single throw or of a
long succession of throws.

But now let us take the case of a penny falling, not upon
one side or the other, but upon a given side, head. To a
certain extent this example resembles the last. We are per
fectly ready to stake our conduct upon what comes to pass in
the long run. When we are considering the result of a large
number of throws, we are ready to act upon the supposition
that head comes every other time. If e.g. we are betting
upon it, we shall not object to paying £1 every time that
head comes, on condition of receiving £1 every time that
head does not come. This is nothing else than the transla
tion, as we may call it, into practice, of our belief that head
and tail occur equally often.

SECT. 23.] Measurement of Belief. 145

Now it will be obvious, on a moment's consideration, that
our conduct is capable of being slightly varied: of being
varied, that is, in form, whilst it remains identical in respect
of its results. It is clear that to pay £1 every time we lose,
and to get £1 every time we gain, comes to precisely the same
thing, in the case under consideration, as to pay ten shillings
every time without exception, and to receive £1 every time
that head occurs. It is so, because heads occur, on the
average, every other time. In the long run the two results
coincide ; but there is a marked difference between the two
cases, considered individually. The difference is two-fold.
In the first place we depart from the notion of a payment
every other time, and come to that of one made every time.
In the second place, what we pay every time is half of what
we get in the cases in which we do get anything. The dif
ference may seem slight ; but mark the effect when our con
duct is translated back again into the subjective condition
upon which it depends, viz. into our belief. It is in conse
quence of such a translation, as it appears to me, that the
notion has been acquired that we have an accurately deter-
minable amount of belief as to every such proposition. To
have losses and gains of equal amount, and to incur them
equally often, was the experience connected with our belief
that the two events, head and tail, would occur equally often.
This was quite intelligible, for it referred to the long run.
To find that this could be commuted for a payment made
every time without exception, a payment, observe, of half the
amount of what we occasionally receive, has very naturally
been interpreted to mean that there must be a state of half-
belief which refers to each individual throw.

§ 23. One such example, of course, does not go far to
wards establishing a theory. But the reader will bear in
mind that almost all our conduct tends towards the same
v- 10

14-6 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

result ; that it is not in betting only, but in every course of
action in which we have to count the events, that such a
numerical apportionment of our conduct is possible. Hence,
by the ordinary principles of association, it would appear
exceedingly likely that, not exactly a numerical condition of
mind, but rather numerical associations, become inseparably
connected with each particular event which we know to occur
in a certain proportion of times. Once in six times a die
gives ace ; a knowledge of this fact, taken in combination
with all the practical results to which it leads, produces, one
cannot doubt, an inseparable notion of one-sixth connected
with each single throw. But it surely cannot be called belief
to the amount of one-sixth ; at least it admits neither of
justification nor explanation in these single cases, to which
alone the fractional belief, if such existed, ought to apply.

It is in consequence, I apprehend, of such association that
we act in such an unhesitating manner in reference to any
single contingent event, even when we have no expectation
of its being repeated. A die is going to be thrown up once,
and once only. I bet 5 to 1 against ace, not, as is commonly
asserted, because I feel one -sixth part of certainty in the
occurrence of ace; but because I know that such conduct
would be justified in the long run of such cases, and I apply
to the solitary individual the same rule that I should apply
to it if I knew it were one of a long series. This accounts
for my conduct being the same in the two cases ; by associa
tion, moreover, we probably experience very similar feelings
in regard to them both.

§ 24. And here, on the view of the subject adopted in
this Essay, we might stop. We are bound to explain the
* measure of our belief ' in the occurrence of a single event
when we judge solely from the statistical frequency with
which such events occur, for such a series of events was our

SECT. 24.] Measurement of Belief. 147

starting-point ; but we are not bound to inquire whether in
every case in which persons have, or claim to have, a certain
measure of belief there must be such a series to which to
refer it, and by which to justify it. Those who start from
the subjective side, and regard Probability as the science of
quantitative belief, are obliged to do this, but we are free
from the obligation.

Still the question is one which is so naturally raised in
connection with this subject, that it cannot be altogether
passed by. I think that to a considerable extent such a
justification as that mentioned above will be found applicable
in other cases. The fact is that we are very seldom called
iipon to decide and act upon a single contingency which can
not be viewed as being one of a series. Experience intro
duces us, it must be remembered, not merely to a succession
of events neatly arranged in a single series (as we have
hitherto assumed them to be for the purpose of illustration),
but to an infinite number belonging to a vast variety of
•different series. A man is obliged to be acting, and there
fore exercising his belief about one thing or another, almost
the whole of every day of his life. Any one person will have
to decide in his time about a multitude of events, each one
of which may never recur again within his own experience.
But by the very fact of there being a multitude, though they
are all of different kinds, we shall still find that order is
maintained, and so a course of conduct can be justified. In
a plantation of trees we should find that there is order of a
certain kind if we measure them in any one direction, the
trees being on an average about the same distance from each
other. But a somewhat similar order would be found if we
were to examine them in any other direction whatsoever. So
in nature generally; there is regularity in a succession of
events of the same kind. But there may also be regularity

10—2

14,8 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

if we form a series by taking successively a number out of
totally distinct kinds.

It is in this circumstance that we find an extension of the-
practical justification of the measure of our belief. A manr
say, buys a life annuity, insures his life on a railway journey,
puts into a lottery, and so on. Now we may make a series
out of these acts of his, though each is in itself a single event
which he may never intend to repeat. His conduct, and there
fore his belief, measured by the result in each individual
instance, will not be justified, but the reverse, as shewn in
§ 19. Could he indeed repeat each kind of action often
enough it would be justified ; but from this, by the conditions
of life, he is debarred. Now it is perfectly conceivable that
in the new series, formed by his successive acts of different
kinds, there should be no regularity. As a matter of fact,
however, it is found that there is regularity. In this way the
equalization of his gains and losses, for which he cannot hope
in annuities, insurances, and lotteries taken separately, may
yet be secured to him out of these events taken collectively.
If in each case he values his chance at its right proportion
(and acts accordingly) he will in the course of his life neither
gain nor lose. And in the same way if, whenever he has the
alternative of different courses of conduct, he acts in accord
ance with the estimate of his belief described above, i.e.
chooses the event whose chance is the best, he will in the end
gain more in this way than by any other course. By the ex
istence, therefore, of these cross-series, as we may term them,
there is an immense addition to the number of actions which
may be fairly considered to belong to those courses of con -I
duct which offer many successive opportunities of equalizing-
gains and losses. All these cases then may be regarded as
admitting of justification in the way now under discussion.

§ 25. In the above remarks it will be observed that we

SECT. 25.] Measurement of Belief. 149

have been giving what is to be regarded as a justification of
his belief from the point of view of the individual agent him
self. If we suppose the existence of an enlarged fellow-feel
ing, the applicability of such a justification becomes still more
extensive. We can assign a very intelligible sense to the
assertion that it is 999 to 1 that I shall not get a prize in a
lottery, even if this be stated in the form that my belief in
my so doing is represented by the fraction y^th of certainty.
Properly it means that in a very large number of throws I
should gain once in 1000 times.' If we include other contin
gencies of the same kind, as described in the last section,
each individual may be supposed to reach to something like
this experience within the limits of his own life. He could
not do it in this particular line of conduct alone, but he could
do it in this line combined with others. Now introduce the
possibility of each man feeling that the gain of others offers
pome analogy to his own gains, which we may conceive his
doing except in the case of the gains of those against whom
he is directly competing, and the above justification becomes
still more extensively applicable.

The following would be a fair illustration to test this
view. I know that I must die on some day of the week, and
there are but seven days. My belief, therefore, that I shall
die on a Sunday is one-seventh. Here the contingent event
is clearly one that does not admit of repetition; and yet
would not the belief of every man have the value assigned it
;by the formula? It would appear that the same principle
will be found to be at work here as in the former examples.
It is quite true that I have only the opportunity of dying
once myself, but I am a member of a class in which deaths
occur with frequency, and I form my opinion upon evidence
drawn from that class. If, for example, I had insured my
life for £1000, 1 should feel a certain propriety in demanding

150 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

£7000 in case the office declared that it would only pay in
the event of my dying on a Sunday. I, indeed, for my own
private part, might not find the arrangement an equitable
one; but mankind at large, in case they acted on such a
principle, might fairly commute their aggregate gains in such
a way, whilst to the Insurance Office it would not make any
difference at all.

§ 26. The results of the last few sections might be sum
marised as follows : — the different amounts of belief which
we entertain upon different events, and which are recognized
by various phrases in common use, have undoubtedly some
meaning. But the greater part of their meaning, and cer
tainly their only justification, are to be sought in the series
of corresponding events to which they belong ; in regard to
which it may be shewn that far more events are capable of
being referred to a series than might be supposed at first
sight. The test and justification of belief are to be found in
conduct ; in this test applied to the series as a whole, there
is nothing peculiar, it differs in no way from the similar test
when we are acting on our belief about any single event.
But so applied, from the nature of the case it is applied
successively to each of the individuals of the series ; here our
conduct generally admits of being separately considered in
reference to each particular event ; and this has been under
stood to denote a certain amount of belief which should be a
fraction of certainty. Probably on the principles of associa
tion, a peculiar condition of mind is produced in reference to
each single event. And these associations are not unnaturally
retained even when we contemplate any one of these single
events isolated from any series to which it belongs. When
it is found alone we treat it, and feel towards it, as we do
when it is in company with the rest of the series.

§ 27. We may now see, more clearly than we could

SECT. 27.] Measurement of Belief. 151

before, why it is that we are free from any necessity of as
suming the existence of causation, in the sense of necessary
invariable sequence, in the case of the events which compose
our series. Against such a view it might very plausibly be
urged, that we constantly talk of the probability of a single
event ; but how can this be done, it may reasonably be said,
if we once admit the possibility of that event occurring for
tuitously ? Take an instance from human life ; the average
duration of the lives of a batch of men aged thirty will be
about thirty-four years. We say therefore to any individual
of them, Your expectation of life is thirty-four years. But
how can this be said if we admit that the train of events
composing his life is liable to be destitute of all regular
sequence of cause and effect ? To this it may be replied
that the denial of causation enables us to say neither more
nor less than its assertion, in reference to the length of the
individual life, for of this we are ignorant in each case alike.
By assigning, as above, an expectation in reference to the
individual, we mean nothing more than to make a statement
about the average of his class. Whether there be causation
or not in these individual cases does not affect our knowledge
of the average, for this by supposition rests on independent
experience. The legitimate inferences are the same on either
hypothesis, and of equal value. The only difference is that
on the hypothesis of non-causation we have forced upon our
attention the impropriety of talking of the 'proper' expecta
tion of the individual, owing to the fact that all knowledge of
its amount is formally impossible ; on the other hypothesis
the impropriety is overlooked from the fact of such know
ledge being only practically unattainable. As a matter of
fact the amount of our knowledge is the same in each case ;
it is a knowledge of the average, and of that only1.

1 For a fuller discussion of this, see the Chapter on Causation.

152 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

§ 28. We may conclude, then, that the limits within
which we are thus able to justify the amount of our belief
are far more extensive than might appear at first sight.
Whether every case in which persons feel an amount of
belief short of perfect confidence could be forced into the
province of Probability is a wider question. Even, however,
if the belief could be supposed capable of justification on its
principles, its rules could never in such cases be made use of.
Suppose, for example, that a father were in doubt whether
to give a certain medicine to his sick child. On the one
hand, the doctor declared that the child would die unless the
medicine were given ; on the other, through a mistake, the
father cannot feel quite sure that the medicine he has is the
right one. It is conceivable that some mathematicians, in
their conviction that everything has its definite numerical
probability, would declare that the man's belief had some
'value' (if they could only find out what it is), say nine-
tenths ; by which they would mean that in nine cases out of
ten in which he entertained a belief of that particular value
he proved to be right. So with his belief and doubt on
the other side of the question. Putting the two together,
there is but one course which, as a prudent man and a good
father, he can possibly follow. It may be so, but when (as
here) the identification of an event in a series depends on
purely subjective conditions, as in this case upon the degree
of vividness of his conviction, of which no one else can judge,
no test is possible, and therefore no proof can be found.

§ 29. So much then for the attempts, so frequently
made, to found the science on a subjective basis ; they can
lead, as it has here been endeavoured to show, to no satisfac
tory result. Still our belief is so inseparably connected with
our action, that something of a defence can be made for the
attempts described above ; but when it is attempted, as is

SECT. 29.] Measurement of Belief. 153

often the case, to import other sentiments besides pure belief,
and to find a justification for them also in the results of our
science, the confusion becomes far worse. The following
extract from Archbishop Thomson's Laws of Thought (§ 122,
Ed. n.) will show what kind of applications of the science are
contemplated here : " In applying the doctrine of chances to
that subject in connexion with which it was invented — games
•of chance, — the principles of what has been happily termed
' moral arithmetic ' must not be forgotten. Not only would
it be difficult for a gamester to find an antagonist on terms,
as to fortune and needs, precisely equal, but also it is im
possible that with such an equality the advantage of a
considerable gain should balance the harm of a serious loss.
* If two men,' says Buffon, ' were to determine to play for
their whole property, what would be the effect of this agree
ment? The one would only double his fortune, and the
other reduce his to naught. What proportion is there be
tween the loss and the gain? The same that there is between
all and nothing. The gain of the one is but a moderate
sum, — the loss of the other is numerically infinite, and
morally so great that the labour of his whole life may not
perhaps suffice to restore his property.'"

As moral advice this is all very true and good. But if it
be regarded as a contribution to the science of the subject it
is quite inappropriate, and seems calculated to cause con
fusion. The doctrine of chances pronounces upon certain
kinds of events in respect of number and magnitude ; it has
absolutely nothing to do with any particular person's feelings
about these relations. We might as well append a corollary
to the rules of arithmetic, to point out that although it is
very true that twice two are four it does not follow that four
horses will give twice as much pleasure to the owner as two
will. If two men play on equal terms their chances are

154 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

equal ; in other words, if they were often to play in this
manner each would lose as frequently as he would gain. That
is all that Probability can say ; what under the circumstances
may be the determination and opinions of the men in ques
tion, it is for them and them alone to decide. There are
many persons who cannot bear mediocrity of any kind, and
to whom the prospect of doubling their fortune would out
weigh a greater chance of losing it altogether. They alone
are the judges.

If we will introduce such a balance of pleasure and pain
the individual must make the calculation for himself. The
supposition is that total ruin is very painful, partial loss
painful in a less proportion than that assigned by the ratio
of the losses themselves; the inference is therefore drawn
that on the average more pain is caused by occasional great
losses than by frequent small ones, though the money value
of the losses in the long run may be the same in each case.
But if we suppose a country where the desire of spending
largely is very strong, and where owing to abundant produc
tion loss is easily replaced, the calculation might incline the
other way. Under such circumstances it is quite possible
that more happiness might result from playing for high than
for low stakes. The fact is that all emotional considerations
of this kind are irrelevant ; they are, at most, mere applica
tions of the theory, and such as each individual is alone
competent to make for himself. Some more remarks will be
made upon this subject in the chapter upon Insurance and
Gambling.

§ 80. It is by the introduction of such considerations as
these that the Petersburg Problem has been so perplexed.
Having already given some description of this problem we
will refer to it very briefly here. It presents us with a
sequence of sets of throws for each of which sets I am to

SECT. 30.] Measurement of Belief. 155

receive something, say a shilling, as the minimum receipt.
My receipts increase in proportion to the rarity of each
particular kind of set, and each kind is observed or inferred
to grow more rare in a certain definite but unlimited order.
By the wording of the problem, properly interpreted, I am
supposed never to stop. Clearly therefore, however large a
fee I pay for each of these sets, I shall be sure to make it up
in time. The mathematical expression of this is, that I
ought always to pay an infinite sum. To this the objection
is opposed, that no sensible man would think of advancing
even a large finite sum, say £50. Certainly he would not ;
but why ? Because neither he nor those who are to pay
him would be likely to live long enough for him to obtain
throws good enough to remunerate him for one-tenth of his
outlay ; to say nothing of his trouble and loss of time. We
must not suppose that the problem, as stated in the ideal
form, will coincide with the practical form in which it
presents itself in life. A carpenter might as well object to
Euclid's second postulate, because his plane came to a stop
in six feet on the plank on which he was at work. Many
persons have failed to perceive this, and have assumed that,
besides enabling us to draw numerical inferences about the
members of a series, the theory ought also to be called upon
to justify all the opinions which average respectable men
might be inclined to form about them, as well as the conduct
they might choose to pursue in consequence. It is obvious
that to enter upon such considerations as these is to diverge
from our proper ground. We are concerned, in these cases,
with the actions of men only, as given in statistics ; with the
emotions they experience in the performance of these actions
we have no direct concern whatever. The error is the same
as if any one were to confound, in political economy, value in
use with value in exchange, and object to measuring the

156 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

value of a loaf by its cost of production, because bread is
worth more to a man when he is hungry than it is just after
his dinner.

§ 31. One class of emotions indeed ought to be ex-
cepted, which, from the apparent uniformity and consist
ency with which they show themselves in different persons
and at different times, do really present some better claim to
consideration. In connection with a science of inference
they can never indeed be regarded as more than an accident
of what is essential to the subject, but compared with other
emotions they seem to be inseparable accidents.

The reader will remember that attention was drawn in
the earlier part of this chapter to the compound nature of
the state of mind which we term belief. It is partly intel
lectual, partly also emotional ; it professes to rest upon
experience, but in reality the experience acts through the
distorting media of hopes and fears and other disturbing
agencies. So long as we confine our attention to the state
of mind of the person who believes, it appears to me that
these two parts of belief are quite inseparable. Indeed, to
speak of them as two parts may convey a wrong impression ;
for though they spring from different sources, they so en
tirely merge in one result as to produce what might be
called an indistinguishable compound. Every kind of infer
ence, whether in probability or not, is liable to be disturbed
in this way. A timid man may honestly believe that he will
be wounded in a coming battle, when others, with the same
experience but calmer judgments, see that the chance is
too small to deserve consideration. But such a man's belief,
if we look only to that, will not differ in its nature from
sound belief. His conduct also in consequence of his belief
will by itself afford no ground of discrimination; he will
make his will as sincerely as a man who is unmistakeably on

SECT. 32.] Measurement of Belief. 157

his death-bed. The only resource is to check and correct
his belief by appealing to past and current experience1. This
was advanced as an objection to the theory on which proba
bility is regarded as concerned primarily with laws of belief.
But on the view taken in this Essay in which we are sup
posed to be concerned with laws of inference about things,
error and difficulty from this source vanish. Let us bear clearly
in mind that we are concerned with inferences about things,
and whatever there may be in belief which does not depend
on experience will disappear from notice.

§ 32. These emotions then can claim no notice as an
integral portion of any science of inference, and should in
strictness be rigidly excluded from it. But if any of them
are uniform and regular in their production and magnitude,
they may be fairly admitted as accidental and extraneous
accompaniments. This is really the case to some extent
with our surprise. This emotion does show a considerable
degree of uniformity. The rarer any event is the more am I,
in common with most other men, surprised at it when it does
happen. This surprise may range through all degrees, from
the most languid form of interest up to the condition which
we term 'being startled'. And since the surprise seems
to be pretty much the same, under similar circumstances,
at different times, and in the case of different persons, it is
free from that extreme irregularity which is found in most
of the other mental conditions which accompany the con-

1 The best example I can recall usual statistical ground of the ex-
of the distinction between judging treine rarity of such events. She
from the subjective and the objec- listened patiently, and then replied,
tive side, in such cases as these, "Yes, Sir, that is all very well; but
occurred once in a railway train. I don't see how the real danger will
I met a timid old lady who was be a bit the less because I don't be-
in much fear of accidents. I en- lieve in it."
deavoured to soothe her on the

158 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. VI.

templation of unexpected events. Hence our surprise, though,
as stated above, having no proper claim to admission into
the science of Probability, is such a constant and regular
accompaniment of that which Probability is concerned with,
that notice must often be taken of it. References will oc
casionally be found to this aspect of the question in the
following chapters.

It may be remarked in passing, for the sake of further
illustration of the subject, that this emotional accompani
ment of surprise, to which we are thus able to assign some
thing like a fractional value, differs in two important respects
from the commonly accepted fraction of belief. In the first
place, it has what may be termed an independent existence ;
it is intelligible by itself. The belief, as we endeavoured to
show, needs explanation and finds it in our consequent con
duct. Not so with the emotion; this stands upon its own
footing, and may be examined in and by itself. Hence, in
the second place, it is as applicable, and as capable of any kind
of justification, in relation to the single event, as to a series of
events. In this respect, as will be remembered, it offers a
complete contrast to our state of belief about any one con
tingent event. May not these considerations help to account
for the general acceptance of the doctrine, that we have a
certain definite and measurable amount of belief about these
events ? I cannot help thinking that what is so obviously
true of the emotional portion of the belief, has been uncon
sciously transferred to the other or intellectual portion of the
compound condition, to which it is not applicable, and where
it cannot find a justification.

§ 33. A further illustration may now be given of the
subjective view of Probability at present under discus
sion.

An appeal to common language is always of service, as

SECT. 33.] Measurement of Belief. 159

rhe employment of any distinct word is generally a proof
that mankind have observed some distinct properties in the
things, which have caused them to be singled out and have
that name appropriated to them. There is such a class of
words assigned by popular usage to the kind of events of
which Probability takes account. If we examine them we
shall find, I think, that they direct us unmistakeably to the
two-fold aspect of the question,— the objective and the sub
jective, the quality in the events and the state of our minds
in considering them,— that have occupied our attention
during the former chapters.

The word ' extraordinary ', for instance, seems to point -to
the observed fact, that events are arranged in a sort of ordo
or rank. No one of them might be so exactly placed that
we could have inferred its position, but when we take a great
many into account together, running our eye, as it were,
along the line, we begin to see that they really do for the
most part stand in order. Those which stand away from the
line have this divergence observed, and are called ex
traordinary, the rest ordinary, or in the line. So too ' irre
gular ' and ' abnormal ' are doubtless used from the appear
ance of things, when examined in large numbers, being that
of an arrangement by rule or measure. This only holds
when there are a good many ; we could not speak of the
single events being so arranged. Again the word 'law', in
its philosophical sense, has now become quite popularised.
How the term became introduced is not certain, but
there can be little doubt that it was somewhat in this
way:— The effect of a law, in its usual application to
human conduct, is to produce regularity where it did not
previously exist ; when then a regularity began to be per
ceived in nature, the same word was used, whether the cause
was supposed to be the same or not. In each case there

160 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

was the same generality of agreement, subject to occasional
deflection1.

On the other hand, observe the words ' wonderful ', ' un
expected', 'incredible'. Their connotation describes states
of mind simply ; they are of course not confined to Proba
bility, in the sense of statistical frequency, but imply simply
that the events they denote are such as from some cause we
did not expect would happen, and at which therefore, when
they do happen, we are surprised.

Now when we bear in mind that these two classes of
words are in their origin perfectly distinct; — the one de
noting simply events of a certain character ; the other,
though also denoting events, connoting simply states of
mind; — and yet that they are universally applied to the
same events, so as to be used as perfectly synonymous, we
have in this a striking illustration of the two sides under
which Probability may be viewed, and of the universal recog
nition of a close connection between them. The words are
popularly used as synonymous, and we must not press their
meaning too far ; but if it were to be observed, as I am
rather inclined to think it could, that the application of the
words which denote mental states is wider than that of the
others, we should have an illustration of what has been
already observed, viz. that the province of Probability is not
so extensive as that over which variation of belief might be
observed. Probability only considers the case in which this
variation is brought about in a certain definite statistical
way.

§ 34. It will be found in the end both interesting and
important to have devoted some attention to this subjective

1 This would still hold of empiri- shifted the word, to denote an ulti-
cal laws which may be capable of be- ^mate law which it is supposed cannot
ing broken : we now have very much be broken.

SECT. 34.] Measurement of Belief. 161

side of the question. In the first place, as a mere specu
lative inquiry the quantity of our belief of any proposition
deserves notice. To study it at all deeply would be to tres
pass into the province of Psychology, but it is so intimately
connected with our own subject that we cannot avoid all
reference to it. We therefore discuss the laws under which
our expectation and surprise at isolated events increases or
diminishes, so as to account for these states of mind in any
individual instance, and, if necessary, to correct them when
they vary from their proper amount.

But there is another more important reason than this.
It is quite true that when the subjects of our discussion in
any particular instance lie entirely within the province
of Probability, they may be treated without any reference
to our belief. We may or we may not employ this side of
the question according to our pleasure. If, for example, I
am asked whether it is more likely that A. B. will die this
year, than that it will rain to-morrow, I may calculate the
chance (which really is at bottom the same thing as my
belief) of each, find them respectively, one-sixth and one-
seventh, say, and therefore decide that my ' expectation ' of
the former is the greater, viz. that this is the more likely
event. In this case the process is precisely the same whether
we suppose our belief to be introduced or not ; our mental
state is, in fact, quite immaterial to the question. But, in
other cases, it may be different. Suppose that we are com
paring two things, of which one is wholly alien to Proba
bility, in the sense that it is hopeless to attempt to assign
any degree of numerical frequency to it, the only ground
they have in common may be the amount of belief to which
they are respectively entitled. We cannot compare the
frequency of their occurrence, for one may occur too seldom
to judge by, perhaps it may be unique. It has been already

v. 11

162 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

said, that our belief of many events rests upon a very com
plicated and extensive basis. My belief may be the product
of many conflicting arguments, and many analogies more or
less remote ; these proofs themselves may have mostly faded
from my mind, but they will leave their effect behind them
in a weak or strong conviction. At the time, therefore, I
may still be able to say, with some degree of accuracy,
though a very slight degree, what amount of belief I enter
tain upon the subject. Now we cannot compare things that
are heterogeneous: if, therefore, we are to decide between
this and an event determined naturally and properly by
Probability, it is impossible to appeal to chances or frequency
of occurrence. The measure of belief is the only common
ground, and we must therefore compare this quantity in each
case. The test afforded will be an exceedingly rough one,
for the reasons mentioned above, but it will be better than
none ; in some cases it will be found to furnish all we want.

Suppose, for example, that one letter in a million is lost
in the Post Office, and that in any given instance I wish to
know which is more likely, that a letter has been so lost, or
that my servant has stolen it? If the latter alternative
could, like the former, be stated in a numerical form, the
comparison would be simple. But it cannot be reduced to
this form, at least not consciously and directly. Still, if we
could feel that our belief in the man's dishonesty was greater
than one-millionth, we should then have homogeneous things
before us, and therefore comparison would be possible.

§ 35. We are now in a position to give a tolerably accu
rate definition of a phrase which we have frequently been
obliged to employ, or incidentally to suggest, and of which
the reader may have looked for a definition already, viz. the
probability of an event, or what is equivalent to this, the
chance of any given event happening. I consider that these

SECT. 35.] Measurement of Belief. 163

terms presuppose a series ; within the indefinitely numerous
class which composes this series a smaller class is distin
guished by the presence or absence of some attribute or
attributes, as was fully illustrated and explained in a pre
vious chapter. These larger and smaller classes respectively
are commonly spoken of as instances of the ' event,' and of
'its happening in a given particular way.' Adopting this
phraseology, which with proper explanations is suitable
enough, we may define the probability or chance (the terms
are here regarded as synonymous) of the event happening
in that particular way as the numerical fraction which repre
sents the proportion between the two different classes in the
long run. Thus, for example, let the probability be that
of a given infant living to be eighty years of age. The
larger series will comprise all infants, the smaller all who live
to eighty. Let the proportion of the former to the latter be
J) to 1 ; in other words, suppose that one infant in ten lives
to eighty. Then the chance or probability that any given
infant will live to eighty is the numerical fraction ^. This
assumes that the series are of indefinite extent, and of the
kind which we have described as possessing a fixed type.
If this be not the case, but the series be supposed termi
nable, or regularly or irregularly fluctuating, as might be the
case, for instance, in a society where owing to sanitary or
other causes the average longevity was steadily undergoing
a change, then in so far as this is the case the series ceases
to be a subject of science. What we have to do under these
circumstances, is to substitute a series of the right kind for
the inappropriate one presented by nature, choosing it, of
course, with as little deflection as possible from the observed
facts. This is nothing more than has to be done, and in
variably is done, whenever natural objects are made subjects
of strict science.

11—2

164 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

§ 36. A word or two of explanation may be added about
the expression employed above, ' the proportion in the long
run.' The run must be supposed to be very long indeed, in
fact never to stop. As we keep on taking more terms of the
series we shall find the proportion still fluctuating a little,
but its fluctuations will grow less. The proportion, in fact,
will gradually approach towards some fixed numerical value,
what mathematicians term its limit. This fractional value
is the one spoken of above. In the cases in which deductive
reasoning is possible, this fraction may be obtained without
direct appeal to statistics, from reasoning about the con
ditions under which the events occur, as was explained in
the fourth chapter.

Here becomes apparent the full importance of the dis
tinction so frequently insisted on, between the actual irregular
series before us and the substituted one of calculation, and
the meaning of the assertion (Ch. I. § 13), that it was in the
case of the latter only that strict scientific inferences could
be made. For how can we have a 'limit' in the case of
those series which ultimately exhibit irregular fluctuations ?
When we say, for instance, that it is an even chance that
a given person recovers from the cholera, the meaning of
this assertion is that in the long run one half of the persons
attacked by that disease do recover. But if we examined
a sufficiently extensive range of statistics, we might find
that the manners and customs of society had produced such
a change in the type of the disease or its treatment, that we
were no nearer approaching towards a fixed limit than we
were at first. The conception of an ultimate limit in the
ratio between the numbers of the two classes in the series
necessarily involves an absolute fixity of the type. When
therefore nature does not present us with this absolute fixity,
as she seldom or never does except in games of chance (and

SECT. 37.] Measurement of Belief. 165

not demonstrably there), our only resource is to introduce
such a series, in other words, as has so often been said, to
substitute a series of the right kind.

§ 37. The above, which may be considered tolerably
complete as a definition, might equally well have been
given in the last chapter. It has been deferred however
to the present place, in order to connect with it at once a
proposition involving the conceptions introduced in this
chapter ; viz. the state of our own minds, in reference to the
amount of belief we entertain in contemplating any one
of the events whose probability has just been described.
Reasons were given against the opinion that our belief ad
mitted of any exact apportionment like the numerical one
just mentioned. Still, it was shown that a reasonable expla
nation could be given of such an expression as, ' my belief is
T^th of certainty3, though it was an explanation which pointed
unmistakeably to a series of events, and ceased to be intel
ligible, or at any rate justifiable, when it was not viewed in
such a relation to a series. In so far, then, as this expla
nation is adopted, we may say that our belief is in pro
portion to the above fraction. This referred to the purely
intellectual part of belief which cannot be conceived to be
separable, even in thought, from the things upon which it
is exercised. With this intellectual part there are com
monly associated various emotions. These we can to a
certain extent separate, and, when separated, can measure
with that degree of accuracy which is possible in the case of
other emotions. They are moreover intelligible in reference
to the individual events. They will be found to increase
and diminish in accordance, to some extent, with the fraction
which represents the scarcity of the event. The emotion of
surprise does so with some degree of accuracy.

The above investigation describes, though in a very brief

166 Measurement of Belief. [CHAP. vi.

form, the amount of truth which appears to me to be con
tained in the assertion frequently made, that the fraction
expressive of the probability represents also the fractional
part of full certainty to which our belief of the individual
event amounts. Any further analysis of the matter would
seem to belong to Psychology rather than to Probability.

CHAPTER VII.

THE RULES OF INFERENCE IN PROBABILITY.

§ 1. IN the previous chapter, an investigation was made into
what may be called, from the analogy of Logic, Immediate
Inferences. Given that nine men out of ten, of any assigned
age, live to forty, what could be inferred about the prospect
of life of any particular man ? It was shown that, although
this step was very far from being so simple as it is frequently
supposed to be, and as the corresponding step really is in
Logic, there was nevertheless an intelligible sense in which
we might speak of the amount of our belief in any one of
these ' proportional propositions,' as they may succinctly be
termed, and justify that amount. We must now proceed to
the consideration of inferences more properly so called, I
mean inferences of the kind analogous to those which form the
staple of ordinary logical treatises. In other words, having
ascertained in what manner particular propositions could be
inferred from the general propositions which included them,
we must now examine in what cases one general proposition
can be inferred from another. By a general proposition here
is meant, of course, a general proposition of the statistical
kind contemplated in Probability. The rules of such infer
ence being very few and simple, their consideration will not
detain us long. From the data now in our possession we are

168 The Rules of Inference in Probability. [CHAP. vn.

able to deduce the rules of probability given in ordinary
treatises upon the science. It would be more correct to say
that we are able to deduce some of these rules, for, as will
appear on examination, they are of two very different kinds,
resting on entirely distinct grounds. They might be divided
into those which are formal, and those which are more or less
experimental. This may be otherwise expressed by saying
that, from the kind of series described in the first chapters,
some rules will follow necessarily by the mere application of
arithmetic ; whilst others either depend upon peculiar hypo
theses, or demand for their establishment continually re
newed appeals to experience, and extension by the aid of the
various resources of Induction. We shall confine our atten
tion at present principally to the former class ; the latter can
only be fully understood when we have considered the con
nection of our science with Induction.

§ 2. The fundamental rules of Probability strictly so
called, that is the formal rules, may be divided into two
classes, — those obtained by addition or subtraction on the
one hand, corresponding to what are generally termed the
connection of exclusive or incompatible events1; and those
obtained by multiplication or division, on the other hand,
corresponding to what are commonly termed dependent
events. We will examine these in order.

(1) We can make inferences by simple addition. If,
for instance, there are two distinct properties observable in
various members of the series, which properties do not occur
in the same individual; it is plain that in any batch the
number that are of one kind or the other will be equal to the
sum of those of the two kinds separately. Thus 36.4 infants

1 It might be more accurate to or 'mutually exclusive classes of
speak of 'incompatible hypotheses events',
with respect to any individual case',

SECT. 2.] The Rules of Inference in Probability. 169

in 100 live to over sixty, 35.4 in 100 die before they are
ten1; take a large number, say 10,000, then there will be
about 3640 who live to over sixty, and about 3540 who do
not reach ten ; hence the total number who do not die within
the assigned limits will be about 2820 altogether. Of course
if these proportions were accurately assigned, the resultant
sum would be equally accurate : but, as the reader knows, in
Probability this proportion is merely the limit towards which
the numbers tend in the long run, not the precise result
assigned in any particular case. Hence we can only venture
to say that this is the limit towards which we tend as the
numbers become greater and greater.

This rule, in its general algebraic form, would be ex
pressed in the language of Probability as follows: — If the
chances of two exclusive or incompatible events be re
spectively — and -- the chance of one or other of them
m n

1 1 m -\- n

happening will be — h - or - — . Similarly if there were
m n inn

more than two events of the kind in question. On the prin
ciples adopted in this work, the rule, when thus algebraically
expressed, means precisely the same thing as when it is
expressed in the statistical form. It was shown at the con
clusion of the last chapter that to say, for example, that the

chance of a given event happening in a certain way is ^ , is

only another way of saying that in the long run it does tend
to happen in that way once in six times.

It is plain that a sort of corollary to this rule might be

1 The examples, of this kind, re- high authority of De Morgan for re
ferring to human mortality are taken garding them as the best representa-
from the Carlisle tables. These tive of the average mortality of the
differ considerably, as is well known, English middle classes at the present
from other tables, but we have the day.

170 The Rules of Inference in Probability. [CHAP. vu.

obtained, in precisely the same way, by subtraction instead of
addition. Stated generally it would be as follows : — If the

chance of one or other of two incompatible events be — and

772*

the chance of one alone be -, the chance of the remaining

.n , 1 1 n — m

one will be or —

m n nm

For example, if the chance of any one dying in a year is
IJT , and his chance of dying of some particular disease is ^-^ ,

9
his chance of dying of any other disease is - - .

The reader will remark here that there are two apparently
different modes of stating this rule, according as we speak
of ' one or other of two or more events happening/ or of ' the
same event happening in one or other of two or more ways.'
But no confusion need arise on this ground ; either way of
speaking is legitimate, the difference being merely verbal,
and depending (as was shown in the first chapter, § 8) upon
whether the distinctions between the ' ways ' are or are not
too deep and numerous to entitle the event to be conven
tionally regarded as the same.

We may also here point out the justification for the com
mon doctrine that certainty is represented by unity, just as
any given degree of probability is represented by its appro
priate fraction. If the statement that an event happens once
in m times, is equivalently expressed by saying that its chance

is — , it follows that to say that it happens m times in m
times, or every time without exception, is equivalent to

nyi

saying that its chance is — or 1. Now an event that happens
every time is of course one of whose occurrence we are

SECT. 3.] The Rules of Inference in Probability. 171

certain ; hence the fraction which represents the ' chance ' of
an event which is certain becomes unity.

It will be equally obvious that given that the chance that

an event will happen is — , the chance that it will not happen

1 m-1
is 1 or -

in m

§ 3. (2) We can also make inferences by multiplication
or division. Suppose that the two events, instead of being
incompatible, are connected together in the sense that one
is contingent upon the occurrence of the other. Let us be
told that a given proportion of the members of the series
possess a certain property, and a given proportion again of
these possess another property, then the proportion of the
whole which possess both properties will be found by multi
plying together the two fractions which represent the above
two proportions. Of the inhabitants of London, twenty-five
in a thousand, say, will die in the course of the year ; we
suppose it to be known also that one death in five is due to
fever ; we should then infer that one in 200 of the inhabitants
will die of fever in the course of the year. It would of course
be equally simple, by division, to make a sort of converse
inference. Given the total mortality per cent, of the popula
tion from fever, and the proportion of fever cases to the
aggregate of other cases of mortality, we might have inferred,
by dividing one fraction by the other, what was the total
mortality per cent, from all causes.

The rule as given above is variously expressed in the
language of Probability. Perhaps the simplest and best
statement is that it gives us the rule of dependent events.

That is ; if the chance of one event is — , and the chance that

m

if it happens another will also happen is — , then the chance

172 The Rules of Inference in Probability. [CHAP. vn.

of the latter is — In this case it is assumed that the latter
mn

is so entirely dependent upon the former that though it does
not always happen with it, it certainly will not happen with
out it ; the necessity of this assumption however may be
obviated by saying that what we are speaking of in the
latter case is the joint event, viz. both together if they are
simultaneous events, or the latter in consequence of the
former, if they are successive.

§ 4. The above inferences are necessary, in the sense in
which arithmetical inferences are necessary, and they do not
demand for their establishment any arbitrary hypothesis.
We assume in them no more than is warranted, and in fact
necessitated by the data actually given to us, and make our
inferences from these data by the help of arithmetic. In the
simple examples given above nothing is required beyond
arithmetic in its most familiar form, but it need hardly be
added that in practice examples may often present them
selves which will require much profounder methods than
these. It may task all the resources of that higher and more
abstract arithmetic known as algebra to extract a solution.
But as the necessity of appeal to such methods as these does
not touch the principles of this part of the subject we need
not enter upon them here.

§ 5. The formula next to be discussed stands upon a
somewhat different footing from the above in respect of its
cogency and freedom from appeal to experience, or to hypo
thesis. In the two former instances we considered cases in
which the data were supposed to be given under the conditions
that the properties which distinguished the different kinds of
events whose frequency was discussed, were respectively
known to be disconnected and known to be connected. Let
us now suppose that no such conditions are given to us.

SECT. 5.] The Rules of Inference in Probability, 173

One man in ten, say, has black hair, and one in twelve
is short-sighted ; what conclusions could we then draw as
to the chance of any given man having one only of these
two attributes, or neither, or both ? It is clearly possible
that the properties in question might be inconsistent with
one another, so as never to be found combined in the same
person ; or all the short-sighted might have black hair ; or
the properties might be allotted1 in almost any other propor
tion whatever. If we are perfectly ignorant upon these
points, it would seem that no inferences whatever could be
drawn about the required chances.

Inferences however are drawn, and practically, in most
cases, quite justly drawn. An escape from the apparent
indeterminateness of the problem, as above described, is
found by assuming that, not merely will one-tenth of the
whole number of men have black hair (for this was given as
one of the data), but also that one-tenth alike of those who
are and who are not short-sighted have black hair. Let us
take a batch of 1200, as a sample of the whole. Now, from
the data which were originally given to us, it will easily be
seen that in every such batch there will be on the average
120 who have black hair, and therefore 1080 who have not.
And here in strict right we ought to stop, at least until we
have appealed again to experience ; but we do not stop here.
From data which we assume, we go on to infer that of the
120, 10 (i.e. one-twelfth of 120) will be short-sighted, and
110 (the remainder) will not. Similarly we infer that of the

1 I say, almost any proportion, be- men are short-sighted, for in any

cause, as may easily be seen, arith- given batch of men the former are

metic imposes certain restrictions more numerous. But the range of

upon the assumptions that can be these restrictions is limited, and

made. We could not, for instance, their existence is not of importance

suppose that all the black-haired in the above discussion.

174 The Rules of Inference in Probability. [CHAP. vu.

1080, 90 are short-sighted, and 990 are not. On the whole,
then, the 1200 are thus divided : — black-haired short-sighted,
10 ; short-sighted without black hair, 90 ; black-haired men
who are not short-sighted, 110; men who are neither short
sighted nor have black hair, 990.

This rule, expressed in its most general form, in the
language of Probability, would be as follows : — If the chances

of a thing being p and q are respectively and - , then the

1 n — 1

chance of its being both p and q is , p and not q is — — ,

. m—1 . (m — 1) (n — 1)

<j and not p is - - , not p and not q is - — ,

tnn mn

where p and q are independent. The sum of these chances
is obviously unity; as it ought to be, since one or other of
the four alternatives must necessarily exist.

§ 6. I have purposely emphasized the distinction be
tween the inference in this case, and that in the two preced
ing, to an extent which to many readers may seem unwar
ranted. But it appears to me that where a science makes
use, as Probability does, of two such very distinct sources of
conviction as the necessary rules of arithmetic and the
merely more or less cogent ones of Induction, it is hardly
possible to lay too much stress upon the distinction. Few
will be prepared to deny that very arbitrary assumptions
have been made by many writers on the subject, and none
will deny that in the case of what are called ' inverse proba
bilities ' assumptions are sometimes made which are at least
decidedly open to question. The best course therefore is to
make a pause and stringent enquiry at the point at which the
possibility of such error and doubtfulness first exhibits itself.
These remarks apply to some of the best writers on the sub
ject; in the case of inferior writers, or those who appeal to

SECT. 7.] The Rules of Inference in Probability. 175

Probability without having properly mastered its principles,
we may go further. It would really not be asserting too
much to say that they seem to think themselves justified in
assuming that where we know nothing about the distribution
of the properties alluded to we must assume them to be dis
tributed as above described, and therefore apportion our
belief in the same ratio. This is called ' assuming the events
to be independent,' the supposition being made that the rule
will certainly follow from this independence, and that we
have a right, if we know nothing to the contrary, to assume
that the events are independent.

The validity of this last claim has already been discussed
in the first chapter ; it is only another of the attempts to
construct a priori the series which experience will present to
us, and one for which no such strong defence can be made as
for the equality of heads and tails in the throws of a penny.
But the meaning to be assigned to the 'independence' of the
events in question demands a moment's consideration.

The circumstances of the problem are these. There are
two different qualities, by the presence and absence respec
tively of each of which, amongst the individuals of a series,
two distinct pairs of classes of these individuals are pro
duced. For the establishment of the rule under discussion
it was found that one supposition was both necessary and
sufficient, namely, that the division into classes caused by
each of the above distinctions should subdivide each of the
classes created by the other distinction in the same ratio
in which it subdivides the whole. If the independence be
granted and so defined as to mean this, the rule of course
will stand, but, without especial attention being drawn to
the point, it does not seem that the word would naturally
be so understood.

§7. The above, then, being the fundamental rules of

176 The Rules of Inference in Probability. [CHAP. VIL

inference in probability, the question at once arises, What is
their relation to the great body of formulas which are made
use of in treatises upon the science, and in practical applica
tions of it ? The reply would be that these formulae, in so
far as they properly belong to the science, are nothing else
in reality than applications of the above fundamental rules.
Such applications may assume any degree of complexity, for
owing to the difficulty of particular examples, in the form in
which they actually present themselves, recourse must some
times be made to the profoundest theorems of mathematics.
Still we ought not to regard these theorems as being any
thing else than convenient and necessary abbreviations of
arithmetical processes, which in practice have become too
cumbersome to be otherwise performed.

This explanation will account for some of the rules as
they are ordinarily given, but by no means for all of them.
It will account for those which are demonstrable by the cer
tain laws of arithmetic, but not for those which in reality
rest only upon inductive generalizations. And it can hardly
be doubted that many rules of the latter description have
become associated with those of the former, so that in popu
lar estimation they have been blended into one system, of
which all the separate rules are supposed to possess a similar
origin and equal certainty. Hints have already been fre
quently given of this tendency, but the subject is one of
such extreme importance that a separate chapter (that on
Induction) must be devoted to its consideration.

§ 8. In establishing the validity of the above rules, we
have taken as the basis of pur investigations, in accordance
with the general scheme of this work, the statistical frequency
of the events referred to ; but it was also shown that each
formula, when established, might with equal propriety be ex
pressed in the more familiar form of a fraction representing

SECT. 8.] The Rules of Inference in Probability. 177

the ' chance ' of the occurrence of the particular event. The
question may therefore now be raised, Can those writers who
(as described in the last chapter) take as the primary subject
of the science not the degree of statistical frequency, but the
quantity of belief, with equal consistency make this the basis
of their rules, and so also regard the fraction expressive of
the chance as a merely synonymous expression ? De Morgan
maintains that whereas in ordinary logic we suppose the
premises to be absolutely true, the province of Probability is
to study ' the effect which partial belief of the premises pro
duces with respect to the conclusion.' It would appear
therefore as if in strictness we ought on this view to be able
to determine this consequent diminution at first hand, from
introspection of the mind, that is of the conceptions and
beliefs which it entertains; instead of making any recourse
to statistics to tell us how much we ought to believe the
conclusion.

Any readers who have concurred with me in the general
results of the last chapter, will naturally agree in the conclu
sion that nothing deserving the name of logical science can
be extracted from any results of appeal to our consciousness
as to the quantity of belief we entertain of this or that pro
position. Suppose, for example, that one person in 100 dies
on the sea passage out to India, and that one in 9 dies dur
ing a 5 years residence there. It would commonly be said
that the chance that any one, who is now going out, has of
living to start homewards 5 years hence, is -^ ; for his chance
of getting there is T9^ ; and of his surviving, if he gets
there, f ; hence the result or dependent event is got by
multiplying these fractions together, which gives -fijfo. Here
the real basis of the reasoning is statistical, and the processes
or results are merely translated afterwards into fractions.
But can we say the same when we look at the belief side of
v. 12

178 The Rules of Inference in Probability. [CHAP. vn.

the question ? I quite admit the psychological fact that we
have degrees of belief, more or less corresponding to the
frequency of the events to which they refer. In the above ex
ample, for instance, we should undoubtedly admit on enquiry
that our belief in the man's return was affected by each of
the risks in question, so that we had less expectation of it
than if he were subject to either risk separately ; that is, we
should in some way compound the risks. But what I cannot
recognise is that we should be able to perform the process
with any approach to accuracy without appeal to the statis
tics, or that, even supposing we could do so, we should
have any guarantee of the correctness of the result with
out similar appeal. It appears to me in fact that but little
meaning, and certainly no security, can be attained by so
regarding the process of inference. The probabilities ex
pressed as degrees of belief, just as those which are expressed
as fractions, must, when we are put upon our justification,
first be translated into their corresponding facts of statistical
frequency of occurrence of the events, and then the in
ferences must be drawn and justified there. This part of
the operation, as we have already shown, is mostly carried
on by the ordinary rules of arithmetic. When we have
obtained our conclusion we may, if we please, translate it
back again into the subjective form, just as we can and do
for convenience into the fractional, but I do not see how the
process of inference can be conceived as taking place in that
form, and still less how any proof of it can thus be given. If
therefore the process of inference be so expressed it must be
regarded as a symbolical process, symbolical of such an in
ference about things as has been described above, and it
therefore seems to me more advisable to state and expound
it in this latter form.

Inverse Probability. 179

On Inverse Probability and the Rules required for it.

§ 9. It has been already stated that the only funda
mental rules of inference in Probability are the two described
in §§ 2, 3, but there are of course abundance of derivative
rules, the nature and use of which are best obtained from the
study of any manual upon the subject. One class of these
derivative rules, however, is sufficiently distinct in respect of
the questions to which it may give rise, to deserve special
examination. It involves the distinction commonly recog
nised as that between Direct and Inverse Probability. It is
thus introduced by De Morgan : —

" In the preceding chapter we have calculated the chances
of an event, knowing the circumstances under which it is to
happen or fail. We are now to place ourselves in an inverted
position : we know the event, and ask what is the probability
which results from the event in favour of any set of circum
stances under which the same might have happened1." The
distinction might therefore be summarily described as that
between finding an effect when we are given the causes, and
finding a cause when we are given effects.

On the principles of the science involved in the definition
which was discussed and adopted in the earlier chapters of
this work, the reader will easily infer that no such distinction
as this can be regarded as fundamental. One common feature
was traced in all the objects which were to be referred to
Probability, and from this feature the possible rules of

1 Essay on Probabilities, p. 53. I peedia Metropolitana he has stated
have been reminded that in his arti- that such rules involve no new prin-
«le on Probability in the Encyclo- ciple.

12—2

180 Inverse Probability. [CHAP. vn.

inference can be immediately derived. All other distinctions
are merely those of arrangement or management.

But although the distinction is not by any means fun
damental, it is nevertheless true that the practical treatment
of such problems as those principally occurring in Inverse
Probability, does correspond to a very serious source^ of
ambiguity and perplexity. The arbitrary assumptions which
appear in Direct Probability are not by any means serious ;
but those which invade us in a large proportion of the prob
lems offered by Inverse Probability are both serious and
inevitable.

§ 10. This will be best seen by the examination of
special examples; as any, however simple, will serve our
purpose, let us take the two following :—

(1) A ball is drawn from a bag containing nine black
balls and one white: what is the chance of its being the

white ball ?

(2) A ball is drawn from a bag containing ten balls, and
is found to be white ; what is the chance of there having
been but that one white ball in the bag ?

The class of which the first example is a simple instance
has been already abundantly discussed. The interpretation
of it is as follows : If balls be continually drawn and re
placed, the proportion of white ones to the whole number
drawn will tend towards the fraction TV The contemplated
action is a single one, but we view it as one of the above
series ; at least our opinion is formed upon that assumption.
We conclude that we are going to take one of a series of
events which may appear individually fortuitous, but in
which, in the long run, those of a given kind are one-tenth of
the whole ; this kind (white) is then singled out by anticipa
tion. By stating that its chance is T^, we merely mean to
assert this physical fact, together with such other mental

SECT. 11.]

Inverse Probability.

181

facts, emotions, inferences, &c., as may be properly associ
ated with it.

§ 11. Have we to interpret the second example in a
different way ? Here also we have a single instance, but the
nature of the question would seem to decide that the only
series to which it can properly be referred is the following I—
Balls are continually drawn from different bags each contain
ing ten, and are always found to be white ; what is ultimately
the proportion of cases in which they will be found to have
been taken from bags with only one white ball in them ?
Now it may be readily shown1 that time has nothing to
do with the question ; omitting therefore the consideration
of this element, we have for the two series from which our
opinions in these two examples respectively are to be
formed : — (1) balls of different colours presented to us in a
given ultimate ratio ; (2) bags with different contents simi
larly presented. From these data respectively we have to
assign their due weight to our anticipations of (1) a white
ball ; (2) a bag containing but one white ball. So stated the
problems would appear to be formally identical.

When, however, we begin the practical work of solving
them we perceive a most important distinction. In the first
example there is not much that is arbitrary; balls would
under such circumstance really come out more or less accu
rately in the proportion expected. Moreover, in case it
should be objected that it is difficult to prove that they will
do so, it does not seem an unfair demand to say that the balls
are to be ' well-mixed ' or ' fairly distributed/ or to introduce
any of the other conditions by which, under the semblance of
judging a priori, we take care to secure our prospect of a

1 This point will be fully discussed
in a future chapter, after the general
stand-point of an objective system

of logic has been explained and illus
trated.

182 Inverse Probability. [CHAP. vn.

series of the desired kind. But we cannot say the same in
the case of the second example.

§ 12. The line of proof by which it is generally at
tempted to solve the second example is of this kind ; — It is
shown that there being one white ball for certain in the bag,
the only possible antecedents are of ten kinds, viz. bags,
each of which contains ten balls, but in which the white
balls range respectively from one to ten in number. This of
course imposes limits upon the kind of terms to be found
in our series. But we want more than such limitations, we
must know the proportions in which these terms are ulti
mately found to arrange themselves in the series. Now this
requires an experience about bags which may not, and in
deed in a large proportion of similar cases, cannot, be given
to us. If therefore we are to solve the question at all we
must make an assumption ; let us make the following ; — that
each of the bags described above occurs equally often, — and see
what follows. The bags being drawn from equally often, it
does not follow that they will each yield equal numbers of
white balls. On the contrary they will, as in the last
example, yield them in direct proportion to the number of
such balls which they contain. The bag with one white
and nine black will yield a white ball once in ten times ; that
with two white, twice ; and so on. The result of this, it will
be easily seen, is that in 100 drawings there will be obtained
on the average 55 white balls and 45 black. Now with
those drawings that do not yield white balls we have, by the
question, nothing to do, for that question postulated the
drawing of a white ball as an accomplished fact. The series
we want is therefore composed of those which do yield white.
Now what is the additional attribute which is found in some
members, and in some members only, of this series, and
which we mentally anticipate ? Clearly it is the attribute of

SECT. 13.] Inverse Probability. 183

having been drawn from a bag which only contained one of
these white balls. Of these there is, out of the 55 drawings,
but one. Accordingly the required chance is ^. That is to
say, the white ball will have been drawn from the bag con
taining only that one white, once in 55 times.

§ 13. Now, with the exception of the passage in italics,
the process here is precisely the same as in the other exam
ple ; it is somewhat longer only because we are not able to
appeal immediately to experience, but are forced to try to
deduce what the result will be, though the validity of this
deduction itself rests, of course, ultimately upon experience.
But the above passage is a very important one. Tt is scarcely
necessary to point out how arbitrary it is.

For is the supposition, that the different specified kinds
of bags are equally likely, the most reasonable supposition
under the circumstances in question ? One man may think
it is, another may take a contrary view. In fact in an excel
lent manual1 upon the subject a totally different supposition
is made, at any rate in one example ; it is taken for granted
in that instance, not that every possible number of black and
white balls respectively is equally likely, but that every
possible way of getting each number is equally likely, whence
it follows that bags with an intermediate number of black
and white balls are far more likely than those with an ex
treme number of either. On this supposition five black
and five white being obtainable in 252 ways against the
ten ways of obtaining one white and nine black, it fol
lows that the chance that we have drawn from a bag of
the latter description is much less than on the hypothesis
first made. The chance, in fact, becomes now ^ instead
of ^. In the one case each distinct result is considered

1 Whitworth's Choice and Chance, Ed. n., p. 123. See also Boole's
Laws of Thoiujht, p. 370.

184 Inverse Probability. [CHAP. vn.

equally likely, in the other every distinct way of getting
each result.

§ 14. Uncertainties of this kind are peculiarly likely to
arise in these inverse probabilities, because when we are
merely given an effect and told to look out for the chance of
some assigned cause, we are often given no clue as to the rela
tive prevalence of these causes, but are left to determine them
on general principles. Give us either their actual prevalence
in statistics, or the conditions by which such prevalence is
brought about, and we know what to do ; but without the
help of such data we are reduced to guessing. In the above
example, if we had been told how the bag had been originally
filled, that is by what process, or under what circumstances,
we should have known what to do. If it had been filled at
random from a box containing equal numbers of black and
white balls, the supposition in Mr Whitworth's example is
the most reasonable ; but in the absence of any such infor
mation as this we are entirely in the dark, and the supposi
tion made in § 12 is neither more nor less trustworthy and
reasonable than many others, though it doubtless possesses
the merit of superior simplicity1. If the reader will recur to
Ch. v. §§ 4, 5, he will find this particular difficulty fully
explained. Everybody practically admits that a certain
characteristic arrangement or distribution has to be intro
duced at some prior stage ; and that, as soon as this stage
has been selected, there are no further theoretic difficulties
to be encountered. But when we come to decide, in examples
of the class in question, at what stage it is most reasonable

1 Opinions differ about the defence doubtful, call it the most impartial

of such suppositions, as they do about hypothesis. Others regard it as a

the nature of them. Some writers, sort of mean hypothesis,
admitting the above assumption to be

SECT. 15.] Inverse Probability. 185

to make our postulate, we are often left without any very
definite or rational guidance.

§ 15. When, however, we take what may be called, by
comparison with the above purely artificial examples, instances
presented by nature, much of this uncertainty will disappear,
and then all real distinction between direct and inverse
probability will often vanish. In such cases the causes are
mostly determined by tolerably definite rules, instead of
being a mere cloud-land of capricious guesses. We may
either find their relative frequency of occurrence by refer
ence to tables, or may be able to infer it by examination of
the circumstances under which they are brought about.
Almost any simple example would then serve to illustrate
the fact that under such circumstances the distinction
between direct and inverse probability disappears altogether,
or merely resolves itself into one of time, which, as will be
more fully shown in a future chapter, is entirely foreign to
our subject.

It is not of course intended to imply that difficulties
similar to those mentioned above do not occasionally invade
us here also. As already mentioned, they are, if not inherent
in the subject, at any rate almost unavoidable in comparison
with the simpler and more direct procedure of determining
what is likely to follow from assigned conditions. What is
meant is that so long as we confine ourselves within the
comparatively regular and uniform field of natural sequences
and coexistences, statistics of causes may be just as readily
available as those of effects. There will not be much more
that is arbitrary in the one than in the other. But of course
this security is lost when, as will be almost immediately
noticed, what may be called metaphysical rather than na
tural causes are introduced into the enquiry.

For instance, it is known that in London about 20 people

186 Inverse Probability. [CHAP. VIL

die per thousand each year. Suppose it also known that of
every 100 deaths there are about 4 attributable to bronchitis.
The odds therefore against any unknown person dying of
bronchitis in a given year are 1249 to 1. Exactly the same
statistics are available to solve the inverse problem :— A man
is dead, what is the chance that he died of bronchitis ? Here,
since the man's death is taken for granted, we do not require
to know the general average mortality. All that we want is
the proportional mortality from the disease in question as
given above. If Probability dealt only with inferences
founded in this way upon actual statistics, and these toler
ably extensive, it is scarcely likely that any distinction such
as this between direct and inverse problems would ever have
been drawn.

§ 16. Considered therefore as a contribution to the theory
of the subject, the distinction between Direct and Inverse Pro
bability must be abandoned. When the appropriate statis
tics are at hand the two classes of problems become identical
in method of treatment, and when they are not we have no
more right to extract a solution in one case than in the other.
The discussion however may serve to direct renewed atten
tion to another and far more important distinction. It will
remind us that there is one class of examples to which the
calculus of Probability is rightfully applied, because statistical
data are all we have to judge by; whereas there are other
examples in regard to which, if we will insist upon making
use of these rules, we may either be deliberately abandoning
the opportunity of getting far more trustworthy information
by other means, or we may be obtaining solutions about
matters on which the human intellect has no right to any
definite quantitative opinion.

§ 17. The nearest approach to any practical justification
of such judgments that I remember to have seen is afforded

SECT. 17.] Inverse Probability. 187

by cases of which the following example is a specimen:

"Of 10 cases treated by Lister's method, 7 did well and 3
suffered from blood-poisoning: of 14 treated with ordinary
dressings, 9 did well and 5 had blood-poisoning; what are
the odds that the success of Lister's method was due to
chance ?1". Or, to put it into other words, a short experience
has shown an actual superiority in one method over the
other : what are the chances that an indefinitely long expe
rience, under similar conditions, will confirm this superiority ?

The proposer treated this as a ' bag and balls ' problem,
analogous to the following : 10 balls from one bag gave
7 white and 3 black, 14 from another bag gave 9 white and
5 black : what is the chance that the actual ratio of white to
black balls was greater in the former than in the latter ?—
this actual ratio being of course considered a true indication
of what would be the ultimate proportions of white and black
drawings. This seems to me to be the only reasonable way
of treating the problem, if it is to be considered capable of
numerical solution at all.

Of course the inevitable assumption has to be made here
about the equal prevalence of the different possible kinds of
bag, — or, as the supporters of the justice of the calculation
would put it, of the obligation to assume the equal a priori
likelihood of each kind, — but I think that in this particular
example the arbitrariness of the assumption is less than
usual. This is because the problem discusses simply a
balance between two extremely similar cases, and there is a
certain set-off against each other of the objectionable assump-

1 Educational Times;Eeprint, Vol. kind hardly any two of the writers

xxxvii. p. 40. The question was were in agreement as to the assump-

proposed by Dr Macalister and gave tions to be made, or therefore as to

rise to considerable controversy. As the numerical estimate of the odds,
usual with problems of this inverse

188 Inverse Probability. [CHAP. vn.

tions on each side. Had one set of experiments only been
proposed, and had we been asked to evaluate the probability
of continued repetition of them confirming their verdict, I
should have felt all the scruples I have already mentioned.
But here we have got two sets of experiments carried on
under almost exactly similar circumstances, and there is
therefore less arbitrariness in assuming that their unknown
conditions are tolerably equally prevalent.

§ 18. Examples of the description commonly introduced
seem objectionable enough, but if we wish to realize to its
full extent the vagueness of some of the problems submit
ted to this Inverse Probability, we have not far to seek. In
natural as in artificial examples, where statistics are unattain
able the enquiry becomes utterly hopeless, and all attempts
at laying down rules for calculation must be abandoned.
Take, for instance, the question which has given rise to some
discussion1, whether such and such groups of stars are or are
not to be regarded as the results of an accidental distribu
tion ; or the still wider and vaguer question, whether such and
such things, or say the world itself, have been produced by
chance ?

In cases of this kind the insuperable difficulty is in deter
mining what sense exactly is to be attached to the words
< accidental ' and ' random ' which enter into the discussion.
Some account was given, in the fourth chapter, of their
scientific and conventional meaning in Probability. There
seem to be the same objections to generalizing them out of
such relation, as there is in metaphysics to talking of the
Infinite or the Absolute. Infinite magnitude, or infinite

1 See Todhunter's History, pp. Forbes in a paper in the Philosophi-

333, 4. cal Magazine for Dec. 1850. It was

There is an interesting discussion replied to in a subsequent number by

upon this question by the late J. D. Prof. Donkin.

SECT. 18.] Inverse Probability. 189

power, one can to some extent comprehend, or at least one
may understand what is being talked about, but 'the infi
nite ' seems to me a term devoid of meaning. So of anything
supposed to have been produced at random : tell us the
nature of the agency, the limits of its randomness and so on,
and we can venture upon the problem, but without such data
we know not what to do. The further consideration of such
a problem might, I think, without arrogance be relegated to
the Chapter on Fallacies. Accordingly any further remarks
which I have to make upon the subject will be found there,
and at the conclusion of the chapter on Causation and
Design.

CHAPTER VIII.

THE RULE OF SUCCESSION1.

§ 1. IN the last chapter we discussed at some length the
nature of the kinds of inference in Probability which corre
spond to those termed, in Logic, immediate and mediate infer
ences. We ascertained what was the meaning of saying, for
example, that the chance of any given man A. B. dying
in a year is 1, when concluded from the general proposition
that one man out of three in his circumstances dies. We
also discussed the nature and evidence of rules of a more
completely inferential character. But to stop at this point
would be to take a very imperfect view of the subject. If
Probability is a science of real inference about things, it
must surely lead up to something more than such merely
formal conclusions ; we must be able, if not by means of it, at
any rate by some means, to step beyond the limits of what
has been actually observed, and to draw conclusions about
what is as yet unobserved. This leads at once to the ques
tion, What is the connection of Probability with Induction ?
This is a question into which it will be necessary to enter
now with some minuteness.

That there is a close connection between Probability and
Induction, must have been observed by almost every one

1 A word of apology may be offered one of Induction. But such a title I

here for the introduction of a new cannot admit, for reasons which will

name. The only other alternative be almost immediately explained,
would have been to entitle the rule

SECT. 2.] The Rule of Succession. 191

who has treated of either subject ; I have not however seen
any account of this connection that seemed to me to be
satisfactory. An explicit description of it should rather be
sought in treatises upon the narrower subject, Probability ;
but it is precisely here that the most confusion is to be
found. The province of Probability being somewhat narrow,
incursions have been constantly made from it into the ad
jacent territory of Induction. In this way, amongst the
arithmetical rules discussed in the last chapter, others have
been frequently introduced which ought not in strictness to
be classed with them, as they rest on an entirely different
basis.

§ 2. The origin of such confusion is easy of explana
tion; it arises, doubtless, from the habit of laying undue
stress upon the subjective side of Probability, upon that
which treats of the quantity of our belief upon different
subjects and the variations of which that quantity is sus
ceptible. It has been already urged that this variation of
belief is at most but a constant accompaniment of what is
really essential to Probability, and is moreover common to
other subjects as well. By denning the science therefore
from this side these other subjects would claim admittance
into it ; some of these, as Induction, have been accepted, but
others have been somewhat arbitrarily rejected. Our belief
in a wider proposition gained by Induction is, prior to verifi
cation, not so strong as that of the narrower generalization
from which it is inferred. This being observed, a so-called
rule of probability has been given by which it is supposed
that this diminution of assent could in many instances be
calculated.

But time also works changes in our conviction ; our belief
in the happening of almost every event, if we recur to it long
afterwards, when the evidence has faded from the mind is

192 The Rule of Succession. [CHAP. vm.

less strong than it was at the time. Why are not rules of
oblivion inserted in treatises upon Probability ? If a man is.
told how firmly he ought to expect the tide to rise again,
because it has already risen ten times, might he not also ask
for a rule which should tell him how firm should be his belief
of an event which rests upon a ten years' recollection?1 The
infractions of a rule of this latter kind could scarcely be more
numerous and extensive, as we shall see presently, than those
of the former confessedly are. The fact is that the agencies,
by which the strength of our conviction is modified, are so
indefinitely numerous that they cannot all be assembled into
one science ; for purposes of definition therefore the quantity
of belief had better be omitted from consideration, or at any
rate regarded as a mere appendage, and the science, defined
from the other or statistical side of the subject, in which,
as has been shown, a tolerably clear boundary-line can be
traced.

§ 3. Induction, however, from its importance does merit
a separate discussion ; a single example will show its bearing
upon this part of our subject. We are considering the pros
pect of a given man, A.B. living another year, and we find
that nine out of ten men of his age do survive. In forming
an opinion about his surviving, however, we shall find that
there are in reality two very distinct causes which aid in
determining the strength of our conviction ; distinct, but in
practice so intimately connected that we are very apt to
overlook one, and attribute the effect entirely to the other.

(I) There is that which strictly belongs to Probability;

1 John Craig, in his often named problems as: — Quando evanescet pro-
work, Theologice Christiana Prin- babilitas cujusvis Historic, cujussub-
cipia Mathematica (Lond. 1699) at- jectum est transiens, viva tantum
tempted something in this direction voce transmissas, determinare.
when he proposed to solve such

SECT. 3.] The Rule of Succession. 193

that which (as was explained in Chap, vi.) measures our
belief of the individual case as deduced from the general
proposition. Granted that nine men out of ten of the kind
to which A. B. belongs do live another year, it obviously
does not follow at all necessarily that he will. We describe
this state of things by saying, that our belief of his surviving
is diminished from certainty in the ratio of 10 to 9, or, in
other words, is measured by the fraction -f^.

(II) But are we certain that nine men out of ten like
him will live another year ? we know that they have so sur
vived in time past, but will they continue to do so? Since
A. B. is still alive it is plain that this proposition is to a
certain extent assumed, or rather obtained by Induction.
We cannot however be as certain of the inductive inference
as we are of the data from which it was inferred. Here,
therefore, is a second cause which tends to diminish our
belief; in practice these two causes always accompany each
other, but in thought they can be separated.

The two distinct causes described above are very liable
to be confused together, and the class of cases from which
examples are necessarily for the most part drawn increases
this liability. The step from the statement 'all men have
died in a certain proportion ' to the inference ' they will con
tinue to die in that proportion ' is so slight a step that it is
unnoticed, and the diminution of conviction that should
accompany it is unsuspected. In what are called a priori
examples the step is still slighter. We feel so certain about
the permanence of the laws of mechanics, that few people
would think of regarding it as an inference when they
believe that a die will in the long run turn up all its faces
equally often, because other dice have done so in time
•Bast.
al" § 4. It has been already pointed out (in Chapter vi.)

v. 13

194 The Rule of Succession. [CHAP. vin.

that, so far as concerns that definition of Probability which
regards it as the science which discusses the degree and
modifications of our belief, the question at issue seems to be
simply this: — Are the causes alluded to above in (II) capable
of being reduced to one simple coherent scheme, so that any
universal rules for the modification of assent can be obtained
from them ? If they are, strong grounds will have been
shown for classing them with (I), in other words, for con
sidering them as rules of probability. Even then they
would be rules practically of a very different kind, contin
gent instead of necessary (if one may use these terms with
out committing oneself to any philosophical system), but this
objection might perhaps be overruled by the greater simpli
city secured by classing them together. This view is, with
various modifications, generally adopted by writers on Pro
bability, or at least, as I understand the matter, implied by
their methods of definition and treatment. Or, on the other
hand, must these causes be regarded as a vast system, one
might almost say a chaos, of perfectly distinct agencies;
which may indeed be classified and arranged to some extent,
but from which we can never hope to obtain any rules of
perfect generality which shall not be subject to constant
exception ? If so, but one course is left ; to exclude them
all alike from Probability. In other words, we must assume
the general proposition, viz. that which has been described
throughout as our starting-point, to be given to us ; it may
be obtained by any of the numerous rules furnished by
Induction, or it may be inferred deductively, or given by our
own observation; its value may be diminished by its depend
ing upon the testimony of witnesses, or its being recalled by
our own memory. Its real value may be influenced by
these causes or any combinations of them ; but all these are
preliminary questions with which we have nothing directly

SECT. 6.] The Rule of Succession. 195

to do. We assume our statistical proposition to be true,
neglecting the diminution of its value by the process of
attainment ; we take it up first at this point and then apply
our rules to it. We receive it in fact, if one may use the
expression, ready-made, and ask no questions about the pro
cess or completeness of its manufacture.

§ 5. It is not to be supposed, of course, that any writers
have seriously attempted to reduce to one system of calcula
tion all the causes mentioned above, and to embrace in one
formula the diminution of certainty to which the inclusion of
them subjects us. But on the other hand, they have been
unwilling to restrain themselves from all appeal to them.
From an early period in the study of the science attempts
have been made to proceed, by the Calculus of Probability,
from the observed cases to adjacent and similar cases. In
practice, as has been already said, it is not possible to avoid
some extension of this kind. But it should be observed,
that in these instances the divergence from the strict ground
of experience is not in reality recognized, at least not as a
part of our logical procedure. We have, it is true, wandered
somewhat beyond it, and so obtained a wider proposition
than our data strictly necessitated, and therefore one of less
certainty. Still we assume the conclusion given by induc
tion to be equally certain with the data, or rather omit all
notice of the divergence from consideration. It is assumed
that the unexamined instances will resemble the examined,
an assumption for which abundant warrant may exist ; the
theory of the calculation rests upon the supposition that
there will be no difference between them, and the practical
error is insignificant simply because this difference is small.

§ 6. But the rule we are now about to discuss, and
which may be called the Rule of Succession, is of a very
different kind. It not only recognizes the fact that we are

13—2

196 The Rule of Succession. [CHAP. vin.

leaving the ground of past experience, but takes the conse
quences of this divergence as the express subject of its calcu
lation. It professes to give a general rule for the measure of
expectation that we should have of the reappearance of a
phenomenon that has been already observed any number of
times. This rule is generally stated somewhat as follows:
"To find the chance of the recurrence of an event already
observed, divide the number of times the event has been
observed, increased by one, by the same number increased
by two."

§ 7. It will be instructive to point out the origin of
this rule ; if only to remind the reader of the necessity of
keeping mathematical formulae to their proper province,
and to show what astonishing conclusions are apt to
be accepted on the supposed warrant of mathematics.
Revert then to the example of Inverse Probability on p.
182. We saw that under certain assumptions, it would
follow that when a single white ball had been drawn
from a bag known to contain 10 balls which were white
or black, the chance could be determined that there was
only one white ball in it. Having done this we readily
calculate 'directly' the chance that this white ball will
be drawn next time. Similarly we can reckon the chances
of there being two, three, &c. up to ten white balls in it,
and determine on each of these suppositions the chance
of a white ball being drawn next time. Adding these
together we have the answer to the question : — a white
ball has been drawn once from a bag known to contain
ten balls, white or black ; what is the chance of a second
time drawing a white ball ?

So far only arithmetic is required. For the next step we
need higher mathematics, and by its aid we solve this
problem : — A white ball has been drawn m times from a

SECT. 8.] The Rule of Succession. 197

bag which contains any number, we know not what, of
balls each of which is white or black, find the chance of
the next drawing also yielding a white ball. The answer is

m+ 1

m+2'

Thus far mathematics. Then comes in the physical
assumption that the universe may be likened to such a bag
as the above, in the sense that the above rule may be
applied to solve this question : — an event has been observed
to happen m times in a certain way, find the chance that
it will happen in that way next time. Laplace, for instance,
has pointed out that at the date of the writing of his Essai
Philosophique, the odds in favour of the sun's rising again
(on the old assumption as to the age of the world) were
1,826,214 to 1. De Morgan says that a man who standing
on the bank of a river has seen ten ships pass by with flags
should judge it to be 11 to 1 that the next ship will also
carry a flag.

§ 8. It is hard to take such a rule as this seriously, for
there does not seem to be even that moderate confirmation
of it which we shall find to hold good in the case of the
application of abstract formulae to the estimation of the
evidence of witnesses. If however its validity is to be dis
cussed there appear to be two very distinct lines of enquiry
along which we may be led.

(1) In the first place we may take it for what it pro
fesses to be, and for what it is commonly understood to
be, viz. a rule which assigns the measure of expectation
we ought to entertain of the recurrence of the event under
the circumstances in question. Of course, on the view
adopted in this work, we insist on enquiring whether it is
really true that on the average events do thus repeat their
performance in accordance with this law. Thus tested, no

198 The Rule of Succession. [CHAP. vin.

one surely would attempt to defend such a formula. So
far from past occurrence being a ground for belief in future
recurrence, there are (as will be more fully pointed out
in the Chapter on Fallacies) plenty of cases in which the
direct contrary holds good. Then again a rule of this kind
is subject to the very serious perplexity to be explained
in our next chapter, arising out of the necessary arbitrariness
of such inverse reference. That is, when an event has
happened but a few times, we have no certain guide ; and
when it has happened but once 1, we have no guide whatever,
as to the class of cases to which it is to be referred. In
the example above, about the flags, why did we stop short at
this notion simply, instead of specifying the size, shape, &c.
of the flags ?

De Morgan, it must be remembered, only accepts this-
rule in a qualified sense. He regards it as furnishing a
minimum value for the amount of our expectation. He
terms it " the rule of probability of a pure induction" and
says of it, "The probabilities shown by the above rules
are merely minima which may be augmented by other
sources of knowledge." That is, he recognizes only those
instances in which our belief in the Uniformity of Nature
and in the existence of special laws of causation comes in

1 When m=l the fraction becomes seen before, how many of the ob-

|; i.e. the odds are 2 to 1 in favour served characteristics of that single

of recurrence. And there are writers ' event ' are to be considered essential ?

who accept this result. For instance, Must the pilot precede ; and at the

Jevons (Principles of Science p. 258) same distance? Must we consider

says "Thus on the first occasion on the latitude, the ocean, the season,

which a person sees a shark, and the species of shark, as matter also

notices that it is accompanied by a of repetition on the next occasion?

little pilot fish, the odds are 2 to 1 and so on. I cannot see how the

that the next shark will be so accom- Inductive problem can be even in-

panied." To say nothing of the fact telligibly stated, for quantitative

that recognizing and naming the fish purposes, on the first occurrence of

implies that they have often been any event.

SECT. 9.] The Rule of Succession. 199

to supplement that which arises from the mere frequency
of past occurrence. This however does not meet those cases
in which past occurrence is a positive ground of disbelief in
future recurrence.

§ 9. (2) There is however another and very different
view which might be taken of such a rule. It is one, an
obscure recognition of which has very likely had much to
do with the acceptance which the rule has received.

What we might suppose ourselves to be thus expressing
is, — not the measure of rational expectation which might be
held by minds sufficiently advanced to be able to classify
and to draw conscious inferences, but, — the law according to
which the primitive elements of belief were started and
developed. Of course such an interpretation as this would
be equivalent to quitting the province of Logic altogether
and crossing over into that of Psychology ; but it would be a
perfectly valid line of enquiry. We should be attempting
nothing more than a development of the researches of
Fechner and his followers in psycho-physical measurement.
Only then we ought, like them, not to start with any analogy
of a ballot box and its contents, but to base our enquiry
on careful determination of the actual mental phenomena
experienced. We know how the law has been determined
in accordance with which the intensity of the feeling of
light varies with that of its objective source. We see how it
is possible to measure the growth of memory according to
the number of repetitions of a sentence or a succession
of mere syllables. In this latter case, for instance, we just
try experiments, and determine how much better a man can
remember any utterances after eight hearings than after
seven1.

1 See in Mind (x. 454) Mr Jacob's Ebbinghaus as described in his work
account of the researches of Herr Ueber das Geddchtniss.

200 The Rule of Succession. [CHAP. vm.

Now this case furnishes a very close parallel to our
supposed attempt to measure the increase of intensity of
belief after repeated recurrence. That is, if it were possible
to experiment in this order of mental phenomena, we ought
simply to repeat a phenomenon a certain number of times
and then ascertain by actual introspection or by some simple
test, how fast the belief was increasing. Thus viewed the
problem seems to me a hopeless one. The difficulties are
serious enough, when we are trying to measure our simple
sensations, of laying aside the effects of past training, and of
attempting, as it were, to leave the mind open and passive
to mere reception of stimuli. But if we were to attempt
in this way to measure our belief these difficulties would
become quite insuperable. We can no more divest our
selves of past training here than we can of intelligence or
thought. I do not see how any one could possibly avoid
classing the observed recurrences with others which he had
experienced, and of being thus guided by special analogies
and inductions instead of trusting solely to De Morgan's
'pure induction'. The same considerations tend to rebut
another form of defence for the rule in question. It is
urged, for instance, that we may at least resort to it in
those cases in which we are in entire ignorance as to the
number and nature of the antecedents. This is a position to
which I can hardly conceive it possible that we should ever
be reduced. However remote or exceptional may be the
phenomenon selected we may yet bring it into relation with
some accepted generalizations and thus draw our conclusions
from these rather than from purely a priori considera
tions.

§ 10. Since then past acquisitions cannot be laid aside
or allowed for, the only remaining resource would be to
experiment upon the infant mind. One would not like

SECT. 10.] The Rule of Succession. 201

to pronounce that any line of enquiry is impossible ; but
the difficulties would certainly be enormous. And interesting
as the facts would be, supposing that we had succeeded
in securing them, they would not be of the slightest im
portance in Logic. However the question were settled : —
whether, for instance, we proved that the sentiment or
emotion of belief grew up slowly and gradually from a sort
of zero point under the impress of repetition of experience ;
or whether we proved that a single occurrence produced
complete belief in the repetition of the event, so that
experience gradually untaught us and weakened our con
victions ; — in no case would the mature mind gain any aid
as to what it ought to believe.

I cannot but think that some such view as this must
occasionally underlie the acceptance which this rule has re
ceived. For instance, Laplace, though unhesitatingly adopt
ing it as a real, that is, objective rule of inference, has gone
into so much physiological and psychological matter towards
the end of his discussion (Essai philosophique) as to suggest
that what he had in view was the natural history of belief
rather than its subsequent justification.

Again, the curious doctrine adopted by Jevons, that the
principles of Induction rest entirely upon the theory of
Probability, — a very different doctrine from that which is
conveyed by saying that all knowledge of facts is probable
only, i.e. not necessary, — seems unintelligible except on some
such interpretation. We shall have more to say on this
subject in our next chapter. It will be enough here to
remark that in our present reflective and rational stage
we find that every inference in Probability involves some
appeal to, or support from, Induction, but that it is im
possible to base either upon the other. However far back
we try to push our way, and however disposed we might be

202 The Rule of Succession. [CHAP. vm.

to account for our ultimate beliefs by Association, it seems
to me that so long as we consider ourselves to be dealing
with rules of inference we must still distinguish between
Induction and Probability.

CHAPTER IX.

INDUCTION AND ITS CONNECTION WITH PROBABILITY.

§ 1. WE were occupied, during the last chapter, with the
examination of a rule, the object of which was to enable
us to make inferences about instances as yet unexamined.
It was professedly, therefore, a rule of an inductive cha
racter. But, in the form in which it is commonly expressed,
it was found to fail utterly. It is reasonable therefore to
enquire at this point whether Probability is entirely a formal
or deductive science, or whether, on the other hand, we are
able, by means of it, to make valid inferences about instances
as yet unexamined. This question has been already in part
answered by implication in the course of the last two chap
ters. It is proposed in the present chapter to devote a fuller
investigation to this subject, and to describe, as minutely as
limits will allow, the nature of the connection between Pro
bability and Induction. We shall find it advisable for clear
ness of conception to commence our enquiry at a somewhat
early stage. We will travel over the ground, however, as
rapidly as possible, until we approach the boundary of what
can properly be termed Probability.

§ 2. Let us then conceive some one setting to work to
investigate nature, under its broadest aspect, with the view
of systematizing the facts of experience that are known, and
thence (in case he should find that this is possible) discover-

204 Induction. [CHAP. ix.

ing others which are at present unknown. He observes a
multitude of phenomena, physical and mental, contemporary
and successive. He enquires what connections are there
between them ? what rules can be found, so that some of
these things being observed I can infer others from them?
We suppose him, let it be observed, deliberately resolving to
investigate the things themselves, and not to be turned
aside by any prior enquiry as to there being laws under
which the mind is compelled to judge of the things. This
may arise either from a disbelief in the existence of any
independent and necessary mental laws, and a consequent
conviction that the mind is perfectly competent to observe
and believe anything that experience offers, and should'
believe nothing else, or simply from a preference for investi
gations of the latter kind. In other words, we suppose him
to reject Formal Logic, and to apply himself to a study of
objective existences.

It must not for a moment be supposed that we are here
doing more than conceiving a fictitious case for the purpose
of more vividly setting before the reader the nature of the
inductive process, the assumptions it has to make, and the
character of the materials to which it is applied. It is not
psychologically possible that any one should come to the study
of nature with all his mental faculties in full perfection, but
void of all materials of knowledge, and free from any bias as
to the uniformities which might be found to prevail around
him. In practice, of course, the form and the matter — the
laws of belief or association, and the objects to which they
are applied — act and react upon one another, and neither
can exist in any but a low degree without presupposing the
existence of the other. But the supposition is perfectly legi
timate for the purpose of calling attention to the require
ments of such a system of Logic, and is indeed nothing more

SECT. 4.] Induction. 205

than what has to be done at almost every step in psycho
logical enquiry1.

§ 3. His task at first might be conceived to be a slow
and tedious one. It would consist of a gradual accumula
tion of individual instances, as marked out from one another
by various points of distinction, and connected with one
another by points of resemblance. These would have to be
respectively distinguished and associated in the mind, and
the consequent results would then be summed up in general
propositions, from which inferences could afterwards be
drawn. These inferences could, of course, contain no new
facts, they would only be repetitions of what he or others
had previously observed. All that we should have so far
done would have been to make our classifications of things
and then to appeal to them again. We should therefore be
keeping well within the province of ordinary logic, the pro
cesses of which (whatever their ultimate explanation) may
of course always be expressed, in accordance with Aristotle's
Dictum, as ways of determining whether or not we can show
that one given class is included wholly or partly within
another, or excluded from it, as the case may be.

§ 4. But a very short course of observation would sug
gest the possibility of a wide extension of his information.
Experience itself would soon detect that events were con
nected together in a regular way; he would ascertain that
there are 'laws of nature.' Coming with no d priori neces
sity of believing in them, he would soon find that as a matter

1 Some of my readers maybe fa- his experience to gain, and speculates
miliar with a very striking digression on the gradual acquisition of his
in Buffon's Natural History (Natural knowledge. Whatever may be thought
Hist, of Man, § vin.), in which he of his particular conclusions the pas-
supposes the first man in full pos- sage is very interesting and sugges-
session of his faculties, but with all tive to any student of Psychology.

206

Induction. [CHAP. IX.

of fact they do exist, though he could not feel any certainty
as to the extent of their prevalence. The discovery of this
arrangement in nature would at once alter the plan of his pro
ceedings, and set the tone to the whole range of his methods
of investigation. His main work now would be to find out
by what means he could best discover these laws of nature.

An illustration may assist. Suppose I were engaged in
breaking up a vast piece of rock, say slate, into small pieces.
I should begin by wearily working through it inch by inch.
But I should soon find the process completely changed owing
to the existence of cleavage. By this arrangement of things
a very few blows would do the work— not, as I might pos
sibly have at first supposed, to the extent of a few inches—
but right through the whole mass. In other words, by the
process itself of cutting, as shown in experience, and by
nothing else, a constitution would be detected in the things
that would make that process vastly more easy and exten
sive. Such a discovery would of course change our tactics.
Our principal object would thenceforth be to ascertain the
extent and direction of this cleavage.

Something resembling this is found in Induction. The
discovery of laws of nature enables the mind to dart with its
inferences from a few facts completely through a whole class
of objects, and thus to acquire results the successive indivi
dual attainment of which would have involved long and
wearisome investigation, and would indeed in multitudes
of instances have been out of the question. We have no
demonstrative proof that this state of things is universal;
but having found it prevail extensively, we go on with the
resolution at least to try for it everywhere else, and we are
not disappointed. From propositions obtained in this way,
or rather from the original facts on which these propositions
rest, we can make new inferences, not indeed with absolute

SECT. 6.] Induction. 207

certainty, but with a degree of conviction that is of the
utmost practical use. We have gained the great step of
being able to make trustworthy generalizations. We con
clude, for instance, not merely that John and Henry die,
but that all men die.

§ 5. The above brief investigation contains, it is hoped,
a tolerably correct outline of the nature of the Inductive /
inference, as it presents itself in Material or Scientific Logic. I
It involves the distinction drawn by Mill, and with which V
the reader of his System of Logic will be familiar, between /
an inference drawn according to a formula and one drawn \
from a formula. We do in reality make our inference from v
the data afforded by experience directly to the conclusion ;
it is a mere arrangement of convenience to do so by passing
through the generalization. But it is one of such extreme
convenience, and one so necessarily forced upon us when we
are appealing to our own past experience or to that of others
for the grounds of our conclusion, that practically we find it

the best plan to divide the process of inference into two~1 **-

- i ft

parts. The first part is concerned with establishing the \ '
generalization ; the second (which contains the rules of ordi- Ji
nary logic) determines what conclusions can be drawn from
this generalization.

§ 6. We may now see our way to ascertaining the pro
vince of Probability and its relation to kindred sciences.
Inductive Logic gives rules for discovering such generaliza
tions as those spoken of above, and for testing their correct
ness. If they are expressed in universal propositions it is
the part of ordinary logic to determine what inferences can
be made from and by them; if, on the other hand, they are
expressed in proportional propositions, that is, propositions
of the kind described in our first chapter, they are handed
over to Probability. We find, for example, that three infants

208 Induction. [CHAP. ix.

out of ten die in their first four years. It belongs to Induc
tion to say whether we are justified in generalizing our obser
vation into the assertion, All infants die in that proportion.
When such a proposition is obtained, whatever may be the
value to be assigned to it, we recognize in it a series of a
familiar kind, and it is at once claimed by Probability.

In this latter case the division into two parts, the induc
tive and the ratiocinative, seems decidedly more than one of
convenience ; it is indeed imperatively necessary for clearness
of thought and cogency of treatment. It is true that in
almost every example that can be selected we shall find
both of the above elements existing together and combining
to determine the degree of our conviction, but when we come
to examine them closely it appears to me that the grounds
of their cogency, the kind of conviction they produce, and
consequently the rules which they give rise to, are so en
tirely distinct that they cannot possibly be harmonized into
a single consistent system.

The opinion therefore according to which certain In
ductive formulae are regarded as composing a portion of
Probability, and which finds utterance in the Rule of Suc
cession criticised in our last chapter, cannot, I think, be
maintained. It would be more correct to say, as stated
above, that Induction is quite distinct from Probability, yet
co-operates in almost all its inferences. By Induction we
determine, for example, whether, and how far, we can safely
generalize the proposition that four men in ten live to be
fifty-six ; supposing such a proposition to be safely generalized,
we hand it over to Probability to say what sort of inferences
can be deduced from it.

§ 7. So much then for the opinion which tends to regard
pure Induction as a subdivision of Probability. By the
majority of philosophical and logical writers a widely different

SECT. 7.] Induction. 209

view has of course been entertained. They are mostly dis
posed to distinguish these sciences very sharply from, not to
say to contrast them with, one another; the one being
accepted as philosophical or logical, and the other rejected
as mathematical. This may without offence be termed the
popular prejudice against Probability.

A somewhat different view, however, must be noticed
here, which, by a sort of reaction against the latter, seems
even to go beyond the former ; and which occasionally finds
expression in the statement that all inductive reasoning of
every kind is merely a matter of Probability. Two examples
of this may be given.

Beginning with the older authority, there is an often
quoted saying by Butler at the commencement of his Ana
logy, that ' probability is the very guide of life ' ; a saying
which seems frequently to be understood to signify that the
rules or principles of Probability are thus all-prevalent when
we are drawing conclusions in practical life. Judging by
the drift of the context, indeed, this seems a fair inter
pretation of his meaning, in so far of course as there could
be said to be any such thing as a science of Probability in
those days. Prof. Jevons, in his Principles of Science
(p. 197), has expressed a somewhat similar view, of course
in a way more consistent with the principles of modern
science, physical and mathematical. He says, "I am con
vinced that it is impossible to expound the methods of in
duction in a sound manner, without resting them on the
theory of Probability. Perfect knowledge alone can give
certainty, and in nature perfect knowledge would be infinite
knowledge, which is clearly beyond our capacities. We have,
therefore, to content ourselves with partial knowledge, —
knowledge mingled with ignorance, producing doubt1."

1 See also Dugald Stewart (Ed. by Hamilton; vn. pp. 115—119).

v. 14

210 Induction. [CHAP. IX.

§ 8. There are two senses in which this disposition to
merge the two sciences into one may be understood. Using
the word Probability in its vague popular signification,
nothing more may be intended than to call attention to the
fact, that in every case alike our conclusions are nothing
more than ' probable,' that is, that they are not, and cannot
be, absolutely certain. This must be fully admitted, for of
course no one acquainted with the complexity of physical
and other evidence would seriously maintain that absolute
ideal certainty can be attained in any branch of applied
logic. Hypothetical certainty, in abstract science, may be
possible, but not absolute certainty in the domain of the
concrete. This has been already noticed in a former chapter,
where, however, it was pointed out that whatever justifica
tion may exist, on the subjective view of logic, for regarding
this common prevalence of absence of certainty as warranting
us in fusing the sciences into one, no such justification is
admitted when we take the objective view.

§ 9. What may be meant, however, is that the grounds
of this absence of certainty are always of the same general
character. This argument, if admitted, would have real
force, and must therefore be briefly noticed. We have seen
abundantly that when we say of a conclusion within the
strict province of Probability, that it is not certain, all that
we mean is that in some proportion of cases only will such
conclusion be right, in the other cases it will be wrong.
Now when we say, in reference to any inductive conclusion,
that we feel uncertain about its absolute cogency, are we
conscious of the same interpretation ? It seems to me that
we are not. It is indeed quite possible that on ultimate
analysis it might be proved that experience of failure in
the past employment of our methods of investigation was
the main cause of our present want of perfect confidence in

SECT. 10.] Induction. 211

them. But this, as we have repeatedly insisted, does not
belong to the province of logical, but to that of Psycholo
gical enquiry. It is surely not the case that we are, as a rule,
consciously guided by such occasional or repeated instances
of past failure. In so far as they are at all influential, they
seem to do their work by infusing a vague want "of confi
dence which cannot be referred to any statistical grounds for
its justification, at least not in a quantitative way. Part of
our want of confidence is derived sympathetically from those
who have investigated the matter more nearly at first hand.
Here again, analysis might detect that a given proportion of
past failures lay at the root of the distrust, but it does not
show at the surface. Moreover, one reason why we cannot
feel perfectly certain about our inductions is, that the
memory has to be appealed to for some of our data ; and will
any one assert that the only reason why we do not place
absolute reliance on our memory of events long past is that
we have been deceived in that way before ?

In any other sense, therefore, than as a needful protest
against attaching too great demonstrative force to the con
clusions of Inductive Logic, it seems decidedly misleading to
speak of its reasonings as resting upon Probability.

§ 10. We may now see clearly the reasons for the
limits within which causation1 is necessarily required, but
beyond which it is not needed. To be able to generalize
a formula so as to extend it from the observed to the unob
served, it is clearly essential that there should be a certain
permanence in the order of nature ; this permanence is one
form of what is implied in the term causation. If the

1 Eequired that is for purposes of versal prevalence, or its all-import-
logical inference within the limits of ance for scientific purposes. The
Probability; it is not intended to im- subject is more fully discussed in a
ply any doubts as to its actual uni- future chapter.

14—2

212 Induction. [CHAP. ix.

circumstances under which men live and die remaining the
same, we did not feel warranted in inferring that four men
out of ten would continue to live to fifty, because in the case
of those whom we had observed this proportion had hitherto
done so, it is clear that we should be admit ting, that the
same antecedents need not be followed by the same con
sequents. This uniformity being what the Law of Causation
asserts, the truth of the law is clearly necessary to enable us
to obtain our generalizations : in other words, it is necessary
for the Inductive part of the process. But it seems to be
equally clear that causation is not necessary for that part of
the process which belongs to Probability. Provided only
that the truth of our generalizations is secured to us, in the
way just mentioned, what does it matter to us whether or
not the individual members are subject to causation ? For
it is not in reality about these individuals that we make
inferences. As this last point has been already fully treated
in Chapter VI., any further allusion to it need not be made here.
§ 11. The above description, or rather indication, of the
process of obtaining these generalizations must suffice for the
present. Let us now turn and consider the means by which
we are practically to make use of them when they are ob
tained. The point which we had reached in the course of the
investigations entered into in the sixth and seventh chapters
was this : — Given a series of a certain kind, we could draw
inferences about the members which composed it ; inferences,
that is, of a peculiar kind, the value and meaning of which
were fully discussed in their proper place.

We must now shift our point of view a little ; instead of
starting, as in the former chapters, with a determinate series
supposed to be given to us, let us assume that the individual
only is given, and that the work is imposed upon us of find
ing out the appropriate series. How are we to set about the

SECT. 12.] Induction. 213

task ? In the former case our data were of this kind : —
Eight out of ten men, aged fifty, will live eleven years more,
and we ascertained in what sense, and with what certainty,
we could infer that, say, John Smith, aged fifty, would live
to sixty-one.

§ 12. Let us then suppose, instead, that John Smith
presents himself, how should we in this case set about ob
taining a series for him ? In other words, how should we
collect the appropriate statistics? It should be borne in
mind that when we are attempting to make real inferences
about things as yet unknown, it is in this form that the
problem will practically present itself.

At first sight the answer to this question may seem to be
obtained by a very simple process, viz. by counting how
many men of the age of John Smith, respectively do and do
not live for eleven years. In reality however the process is
far from being so simple as it appears. For it must be re
membered that each individual thing has not one distinct
and appropriate class or group, to which, and to which alone,
it properly belongs. We may indeed be practically in the
habit of considering it under such a single aspect, and it may
therefore seem to us more familiar when it occupies a place
in one series rather than in another ; but such a practice is
merely customary on our part, not obligatory. It is obvious
that every individual thing or event has an indefinite
number of properties or attributes observable in it, and
might therefore be considered as belonging to an indefinite
number of different classes of things. By belonging to any
one class it of course becomes at the same time a member of
all the higher classes, the genera, of which that class was a
species. But, moreover, by virtue of each accidental attri
bute which it possesses, it becomes a member of a class
intersecting, so to say, some of the other classes. John Smith

214 Induction. [CHAP. ix.

is a consumptive man say, and a native of a northern climate.
Being a man he is of course included in the class of ver
tebrates, also in that of animals, as well as in any higher
such classes that there may be. The property of being con
sumptive refers him to another class, narrower than any of
the above ; whilst that of being born in a northern climate
refers him to a new and distinct class, not conterminous with
any of the rest, for there are things born in the north which
are not men.

§ 13. When therefore John Smith presents himself to
our notice without, so to say, any particular label attached to
him informing us under which of his various aspects he is to
be viewed, the process of thus referring him to a class be
comes to a great extent arbitrary. If he had been indicated
to us by a general name, that, of course, would have been
some clue ; for the name having a determinate connotation
would specify at any rate a fixed group of attributes within
which our selection was to be confined. But names and
attributes being connected together, we are here supposed
to be just as much in ignorance what name he is to be
called by, as what group out of all his innumerable attributes
is to be taken account of; for to tell us one of these things
would be precisely the same in effect as to tell us the other.
In saying that it is thus arbitrary under which class he is
placed, we mean, of course, that there are no logical grounds
of decision ; the selection must be determined by some ex
traneous considerations. Mere inspection of the individual
would simply show us that he could equally be referred
to an indefinite number of classes, but would in itself give
no inducement to prefer, for our special purpose, one of these
classes to another.

This variety of classes to which the individual may be
referred owing to his possession of a multiplicity of attri-

SECT. 14.] Induction. 215

butes, has an important bearing on the process of inference
which was indicated in the earlier sections of this chapter,
and which we must now examine in more special reference
to our particular subject.

§ 14. It will serve to bring out more clearly the nature
of some of those peculiarities of the step which we are now
about to take in the case of Probability, if we first examine
the form which the corresponding step assumes in the case
of ordinary Logic. Suppose then that we wished to ascertain
whether a certain John Smith, a man of thirty, who is
amongst other things a resident in India, and distinctly
affected with cancer, will continue to survive there for
twenty years longer. The terms in which the man is thus
introduced to us refer him to different classes in the way
already indicated. Corresponding to these classes there will
be a number of propositions which have been obtained by
previous observations and inductions, and which we may
therefore assume to be available and ready at hand when
we want to make use of them. Let us conceive them to
be such as these following : — Some men live to fifty ; some
Indian residents live to fifty ; no man suffering thus from
cancer lives for five years. From the first and second of these
premises nothing whatever can be inferred, for they are both1
particular propositions, and therefore lead to no conclusion
in this case. The third answers our enquiry decisively.

To the logical reader it will hardly be necessary to point
out that the process here under consideration is that of
finding middle terms which shall serve to connect the
subject and predicate of our conclusion. This subject and
predicate in the case in question, are the individual before

1 As particular propositions they corresponds to a larger proportion
are both of course identical in form. than in the latter, is a distinction
The fact that the ' some ' in the former alien to pure Logic.

216 Induction. [CHAP. IX.

us and his death within the stated period. Regarded by
themselves there is nothing in common between them, and
therefore no link by which they may be connected or dis
connected with each other. The various classes above
referred to are a set of such middle terms, and the proposi
tions belonging to them are a corresponding set of major
premises. By the help of any one of them we are enabled,
under suitable circumstances, to connect together the subject
and predicate of the conclusion, that is, to infer whether the
man will or will not live twenty years.

§ 15. Now in the performance of such a logical process
there are two considerations to which the reader's attention
must for a moment be directed. They are simple enough in
this case, but will need careful explanation in the correspond
ing case in Probability. In the first place, it is clear that
whenever we can make any inference at all, we can do so
with absolute certainty. Logic, within its own domain,
knows nothing of hesitation or doubt. If the middle term
is appropriate it serves to connect the extremes in such a
way as to preclude all uncertainty about the conclusion ;
if it is not, there is so far an end of the matter : no conclu
sion can be drawn, and we are therefore left where we were.
Assuming our premises to be correct, we either know our
conclusion for certain, or we know nothing whatever about
it. In the second place, it should be noticed that none of
the possible alternatives in the shape of such major premises
as those given above can ever contradict any of the others,
or be at all inconsistent with them. Regarded as isolated
propositions, there is of course nothing to secure such har
mony ; they have very different predicates, and may seem
quite out of each other's reach for either support or opposi
tion. But by means of the other premise they are in each
case brought into relation with one another, and the general

SECT. 16.] Induction. 217

interests of truth and consistency prevent them therefore
from contradicting one another. As isolated propositions
it might have been the case that all men live to fifty, and
that no Indian residents do so, but having recognised that
some men are residents in India, we see at once that these
premises are inconsistent, and therefore that one or other
of them must be rejected. In all applied logic this necessity
of avoiding self-contradiction is so obvious and imperious
that no one would think it necessary to lay down the formal
postulate that all such possible major premises are to be
mutually consistent. To suppose that this postulate is not
complied with, would be in effect to make two or more con
tradictory assumptions about matters of fact.

§ 16. But now observe the difference when we attempt
to take the corresponding step in Probability. For ordinary
propositions, universal or particular, substitute statistical
propositions of what we have been in the habit of calling
the ' proportional ' kind. In other words, instead of asking
whether the man will live for twenty years, let us ask whether
he will live for one year ? We shall be unable to find any
universal propositions which will cover the case, but we may
without difficulty obtain an abundance of appropriate pro
portional ones. They will be of the following description :—
Of men aged 30, 98 in 100 live another year; of residents in
India a smaller proportion survive, let us for example say
90 in 100 ; of men suffering from cancer a smaller proportion
still, let us say 20 in 100.

Now in both of the respects to which attention has just
been drawn, propositions of this kind offer a marked con
trast with those last considered. In the first place, they do
not, like ordinary propositions, either assert unequivocally
yes or no, or else refuse to open their lips ; but they give
instead a sort of qualified or hesitating answer concerning

218 Induction. [CHAP. ix.

the individuals included in them. This is of course nothing
more than the familiar characteristic of what may be called
'probability propositions/ But it leads up to, and indeed
renders possible, the second and more important point;
viz. that these various answers, though they cannot directly
and formally contradict each other (this their nature as pro
portional propositions, will not as a rule permit), may yet, in
a way which will now have to be pointed out, be found to be
more or less in conflict with each other.

Hence it follows that in the attempt to draw a conclusion
from premises of the kind in question, we may be placed
in a position of some perplexity; but it is a perplexity
which may present itself in two forms, a mild and an aggra
vated form. We will notice them in turn.

§ 17. The mild form occurs when the different classes
to which the individual case may be appropriately referred
are successively included one within another ; for here our
sets of statistics, though leading to different results, will
not often be found to be very seriously at variance with
one another. All that comes of it is that as we ascend in the
scale by appealing to higher and higher genera, the sta
tistics grow continually less appropriate to the particular
case in point, and such information therefore as they afford
becomes gradually less explicit and accurate.

The question that we originally wanted to determine,
be it remembered, is whether John Smith will die within
one year. But all knowledge of this fact being unattain
able, owing to the absence of suitable inductions, we felt
justified (with the explanation, and under the restrictions
mentioned in Chap. VI.), in substituting, as the only available
equivalent for such individual knowledge, the answer to the
following statistical enquiry, What proportion of men in his
circumstances die ?

SECT. 19.] Induction. 210

§ 18. But then at once there begins to arise some doubt
and ambiguity as to what exactly is to be understood by his
circumstances. We may know very well what these circum
stances are in themselves, and yet be in perplexity as to
how many of them we ought to take into account when
endeavouring to estimate his fate. We might conceivably,
for a beginning, choose to confine our attention to those
properties only which he has in common with all animals.
If so, and statistics on the subject were attainable, they
would presumably be of some such character as this, Ninety-
nine animals out of a hundred die within a year. Unusual as
such a reference would be, we should, logically speaking, be
doing nothing more than taking a wider class than the one
we were accustomed to. Similarly we might, if we pleased,
take our stand at the class of vertebrates, or at that of
mammalia, if zoologists were able to give us the requisite
information. Of course we reject these wide classes and
prefer a narrower one. If asked why we reject them, the
natural answer is that they are so general, and resemble the
particular case before us in so few points, that we should be
exceedingly likely to go astray in trusting to them. Though
accuracy cannot be insured, we may at least avoid any need
less exaggeration of the relative number and magnitude of
our errors.

§ 19. The above answer is quite valid ; but whilst cau
tioning us against appealing to too wide a class, it seems to
suggest that we cannot go wrong in the opposite direction,
that is in taking too narrow a class. And yet we do avoid
any such extremes. John Smith is not only an Englishman ;
he may also be a native of such a part of England, be living
in such a Presidency, and so on. An indefinite number of
such additional characteristics might be brought out into
notice, many of which at any rate have some bearing upon

220 Induction. [CHAP. IX.

the question of vitality. Why do we reject any consideration
of these narrower classes ? We do reject them, but it is for
what may be termed a practical rather than a theoretical
reason. As was explained in the first chapters, it is essential
that our series should contain a considerable number of terms
if they are to be of any service to us. Now many of the
attributes of any individual are so rare that to take them
into account would be at variance with the fundamental
assumption of our science, viz. that we are properly concerned
only with the averages of large numbers. The more special
and minute our statistics the better, provided only that we
can get enough of them, and so make up the requisite large
number of instances. This is, however, impossible in many
cases. We are therefore obliged to neglect one attribute
after another, and so to enlarge the contents of our class ; at
the avowed risk of somewhat increased variety and unsuit-
ability in the members of it, for at each step of this kind we
diverge more and more from the sort of instances that we
really want. We continue to do so, until we no longer gain
more in quantity than we lose in quality. We finally take
our stand at the point where we first obtain statistics drawn
from a sufficiently large range of observation to secure the
requisite degree of stability and uniformity.

§ 20. In such an example as the one just mentioned,
where one of the successive classes — man — is a well-defined
natural kind or species, there is such a complete break in
each direction at this point, that every one is prompted to
take his stand here. On the one hand, no enquirer would
ever think of introducing any reference to the higher classes
with fewer attributes, such as animal or organized being:
and on the other hand, the inferior classes, created by our
taking notice of his employment or place of residence, &c.,
do not as a rule differ sufficiently in their characteristics

SECT. 21.] Induction. 221

from the class man to make it worth our while to attend
to them.

Now and then indeed these characteristics do rise into
importance, and whenever this is the case we concentrate
our attention upon the class to which they correspond, that
is, the class which is marked off by their presence. Thus,
for instance, the quality of consumptiveness separates any
one off so widely from the majority of his fellow-men in all
questions pertaining to mortality, that statistics about the
lives of consumptive men differ materially from those which
refer to men in general. And we see the result ; if a con
sumptive man can effect an insurance at all, he must do it
for a much higher premium, calculated upon his special
circumstances. In other words, the attribute is sufficiently
important to mark off a fresh class or series. So with in
surance against accident. It is not indeed attempted to
make a special rate of insurance for the members of each
separate trade, but the differences of risk to which they are
liable oblige us to take such facts to some degree into
account. Hence, trades are roughly divided into two or
three classes, such as the ordinary, the hazardous, and the
extra-hazardous, each having to pay its own rate of premium.

§ 21. Where one or other of the classes thus corresponds
to natural kinds, or involves distinctions of co-ordinate im
portance with those of natural kinds, the process is not
difficult ; there is almost always some one of these classes
which is so universally recognised to be the appropriate one,
that most persons are quite unaware of there being any
necessity for a process of selection. Except in the cases
where a man has a sickly constitution, or follows a dangerous
employment, we seldom have occasion to collect statistics for
him from any class but that of men in general of his age in
the country.

222 Induction. [CHAP. IX.

When, however, these successive classes are not ready
marked out for us by nature, and thence arranged in easily
distinguishable groups, the process is more obviously arbi
trary. Suppose we were considering the chance of a man's
house being burnt down, with what collection of attributes
should we rest content in this instance ? Should we include
all kinds of buildings, or only dwelling-houses, or confine
ourselves to those where there is much wood, or those which
have stoves ? All these attributes, and a multitude of others
may be present, and, if so, they are all circumstances which
help to modify our judgment. We must be guided here by
the statistics which we happen to be able to obtain in
sufficient numbers. Here again, rough distinctions of this
kind are practically drawn in Insurance Offices, by dividing
risks into ordinary, hazardous, and extra-hazardous. We
examine our case, refer it to one or other of these classes,
and then form our judgment upon its prospects by the sta
tistics appropriate to its class.

§ 22. So much for what may be called the mild form in
which the ambiguity occurs ; but there is an aggravated form
in which it may show itself, and which at first sight seems
to place us in far greater perplexity.

Suppose that the different classes mentioned above are
not included successively one within the other. We may
then be quite at a loss which of the statistical tables to
employ. Let us assume, for example, that nine out of ten
Englishmen are injured by residence in Madeira, but that
nine out of ten consumptive persons are benefited by such a
residence. These statistics, though fanciful, are conceivable
and perfectly compatible. John Smith is a consumptive
Englishman ; are we to recommend a visit to Madeira in his
case or not ? In other words, what inferences are we to
draw about the probability of his death ? Both of the sta-

SECT. 23.] Induction. 223

tistical tables apply to his case, but they would lead us to
directly contradictory conclusions. This does not mean, of
course, contradictory precisely in the logical sense of that
word, for one of these propositions does not assert that an
event must happen and the other deny that it must ; but
contradictory in the sense that one would cause us in some
considerable degree to believe what the other would cause us
in some considerable degree to disbelieve. This refers, of
course, to the individual events ; the statistics are by suppo
sition in no degree contradictory. Without further data,
therefore, we can come to no decision.

§ 23. Practically, of course, if we were forced to a deci
sion with only these data before us, we should make our
choice by the consideration that the state of a man's lungs
has probably more to do with his health than the place of
his birth has ; that is, we should conclude that the duration
of life of consumptive Englishmen corresponds much more
closely with that of consumptive persons in general than
with that of their healthy countrymen. But this is, of
course, to import empirical considerations into the question.
The data, as they are given to us, and if we confine our
selves to them, leave us in absolute uncertainty upon the
point. It may be that the consumptive Englishmen almost
all die when transported into the other climate ; it may be
that they almost all recover. If they die, this is in obvious
accordance with the first set of statistics ; it will be found in
accordance with the second set through the fact of the
foreign consumptives profiting by the change of climate in
more than what might be termed their due proportion.
A similar explanation will apply to the other alternative,
viz. to the supposition that the consumptive Englishmen
mostly recover. The problem is, therefore, left absolutely
indeterminate, for we cannot here appeal to any general rule

224 Induction. [CHAP. ix.

so simple and so obviously applicable as that which, in a
former case, recommended us always to prefer the more
special statistics, when sufficiently extensive, to those which
are wider and more general. We have no means here of
knowing whether one set is more special than the other.

And in this no difficulty can be found, so long as we
confine ourselves to a just view of the subject. Let me
again recall to the reader's mind what our present position
is; we have substituted for knowledge of the individual
(finding that unattainable) a knowledge of what occurs in
the average of similar cases. This step had to be taken the
moment the problem was handed over to Probability. But
the conception of similarity in the cases introduces us to a
perplexity; we manage indeed to evade it in many in
stances, but here it is inevitably forced upon our notice.
There are here two aspects of this similarity, and they
introduce us to two distinct averages. Two assertions are
made as to what happens in the long run, and both of these
assertions, by supposition, are verified. Of their truth there
need be no doubt, for both were supposed to be obtained
from experience.

§ 24. It may perhaps be supposed that such an example
as this is a reductio ad absurdum of the principle upon which
Life and other Insurances are founded. But a moment's
consideration will show that this is quite a mistake, and
that the principle of insurance is just as applicable to
examples of this kind as to any other. An office need find
no difficulty in the case supposed. They might (for a reason
to be mentioned presently, they probably would not) insure
the individual without inconsistency at a rate determined
by either average. They might say to him, "You are an
Englishman. Out of the multitude of English who come to
us nine in ten die if they go to Madeira. We will insure

SECT. 25.] Induction. 225

you at a rate assigned by these statistics, knowing that in
the long run all will come right so far as we are concerned.
You are also consumptive, it is true, and we do not know
what proportion of the English are consumptive, nor what
proportion of English consumptives die in Madeira. But
this does not really matter for our purpose. The formula,
nine in ten die, is in reality calculated by taking into account
these unknown proportions; for, though we do not know
them in themselves, statistics tell us all that we care to
know about their results. In other words, whatever un
known elements may exist, must, in regard to all the effects
which they can produce, have been already taken into
account, so that our ignorance about them cannot in the
least degree invalidate such conclusions as we are able to
draw. And this is sufficient for our purpose." But precisely
the same language might be held to him if he presented
himself as a consumptive man ; that is to say, the office
could safely carry on its proceedings upon either alternative.
This would, of course, be a very imperfect state for the
matter to be left in. The only rational plan would be to
isolate the case of consumptive Englishmen, so as to make
a separate calculation for their circumstances. This cal
culation would then at once supersede all other tables so
far as they were concerned; for though, in the end, it could
not arrogate to itself any superiority over the others, it
would in the mean time be marked by fewer and slighter
aberrations from the truth.

§ 25. The real reason why the Insurance office could
not long work on the above terms is of a very different
kind from that which some readers might contemplate, and
belongs to a class of considerations which have been much
neglected in the attempts to construct sciences of the dif
ferent branches of human conduct. It is nothing else than
V- 15

226 Induction. [CHAP. ix.

that annoying contingency to which prophets since the time
of Jonah have been subject, of uttering suicidal prophecies ;
of publishing conclusions which are perfectly certain when
every condition and cause but one have been taken into
account, that one being the effect of the prophecy itself
upon those to whom it refers.

In our example above, the office (in so far as the parti
cular cases in Madeira are concerned) would get on very well
until the consumptive Englishmen in question found out
what much better terms they could make by announcing
themselves as consumptives, and paying the premium ap
propriate to that class, instead of announcing themselves as
Englishmen. But if they did this they would of course be
disturbing the statistics. The tables were based upon the
assumption that a certain fixed proportion (it does not
matter what proportion) of the English lives would continue
to be consumptive lives, which, under the supposed circum
stances, would probably soon cease to be true. When it is
said that nine Englishmen out of ten die in Madeira, it is
meant that of those who come to the office, as the phrase is,
at random, or in their fair proportions, nine-tenths die. The
consumptives are supposed to go there just like red-haired
men, or poets, or any other special class. Or they might go
in any proportions greater or less than those of other classes,
so long as they adhered to the same proportion throughout.
The tables are then calculated on the continuance of this
state of things; the practical contradiction is in supposing
such a state of things to continue after the people had once
had a look at the tables. If we merely make the assump
tion that the publication of these tables made no such altera
tion in the conduct of those to whom it referred, no hitch of
this kind need occur.

§ 26. The assumptions here made, as has been said, are

SECT. 26.] Induction. 227

not in any way contradictory, but they need some explana
tion. It will readily be seen that, taken together, they are
inconsistent with the supposition that each of these classes is
homogeneous, that is, that the statistical proportions which
hold of the whole of either of them will also hold of any
portion of them which we may take. There are certain
individuals (viz. the consumptive Englishmen) who belong
to each class, and of course the two different sets of statistics
cannot both be true of them taken by themselves. They
might coincide in their characteristics with either class, but
not with both ; probably in most practical cases they will
coincide with neither, but be of a somewhat intermediate
character. Now when it is said of any such heterogeneous
body that, say, nine-tenths die, what is meant (or rather
implied) is that the class might be broken up into smaller
subdivisions of a more homogeneous character, in some of
which, of course, more than nine-tenths die, whilst in others
less, the differences depending upon their character, consti
tution, profession, &c. ; the number of such divisions and the
amount of their divergence from one another being perhaps
very considerable.

Now when we speak of either class as a whole and say
that nine- tenths die, the most natural and soundest mean
ing is that that would be the proportion if all without
exception went abroad, or (what comes to the same thing) if
each of these various subdivisions was represented in fair
proportion to its numbers. Or it might only be meant that
they go in some other proportion, depending upon their
tastes, pursuits, and so on. But whatever meaning be adopted
one condition is necessary, viz. that the proportion of each
class that went at the time the statistics were drawn up
must be adhered to throughout. When the class is homo
geneous this is not needed, but when it is heterogeneous the

15—2

228 Induction. [CHAP. ix.

statistics would be interfered with unless this condition were
secured.

We are here supposed to have two sets of statistics, one
for the English and one for the consumptives, so that the
consumptive English are in a sense counted twice over. If
their mortality is of an intermediate amount, therefore, they
serve to keep down the mortality of one class and to keep
up that of the other. If the statistics are supposed to be
exhaustive, by referring to the whole of each class, it follows
that actually the same individuals must be counted each
time ; but if representatives only of each class are taken, the
same individuals need not be inserted in each set of tables.

§ 27. When therefore they come to insure (our remarks
are still confined to our supposed Madeira case), we have
some English consumptives counted as English, and paying
the high rate ; and others counted as consumptives and pay
ing the low rate. Logically indeed we may suppose them all
entered in each class, and paying therefore each rate. What
we have said above is that any individual may be conceived
to present himself for either of these classes. Conceive that
some one else pays his premium for him, so that it is a
matter of indifference to him personally at which rate he
insures, and there is nothing to prevent some of the class (or
for that matter all) going to one class, and others (or all
again) going to the other class.

So long therefore as we make the logically possible
though practically absurd supposition that some men will
continue to pay a higher rate than they need, there is no
thing to prevent the English consumptives (some or all) from
insuring in each category and paying its appropriate pre
mium. As soon as they gave any thought to the matter, of
course they would, in the case supposed, all prefer to insure
as consumptives. But their doing this would disturb each set

SECT. 28.] Induction. 229

of statistics. The English mortality in Madeira would in
stantly become heavier, so far as the Insurance company was
concerned, by the loss of all their best lives; whilst the con
sumptive statistics (unless all the English consumptives had
already been taken for insurance) would be in the same way
deteriorated1. A slight readjustment therefore of each scale
of insurance would then be needed ; this is the disturbance
mentioned just above. It must be clearly understood, how
ever, that it is not our original statistics which have proved
to be inconsistent, but simply that there were practical
obstacles to carrying out a system of insurance upon them.

§ 28. Examples subject to the difficulty now under
consideration will doubtless seem perplexing to the student
unacquainted with the subject. They are difficult to recon
cile with any other view of the science than that insisted on
throughout this Essay, viz. that we are only concerned with
averages. It will perhaps be urged that there are two
different values of the man s life in these cases, and that
they cannot both be true. Why not? The ' value' of his
life is simply the number of years to which men in his
circumstances do, on the average, attain ; we have the man
set before us under two different circumstances; what wonder,
therefore, that these should offer different averages? In such
an objection it is forgotten that we have had to substitute
for the unattainable result about the individual, the really
attainable result about a set of men as much like him as
possible. The difficulty and apparent contradiction only
arise when people will try to find some justification for their
belief in the individual case. What can we possibly con-

1 The reason is obvious. The whereas the worst consumptive lives

healthiest English lives in Madeira there (viz. the English) are now in-

(viz. the consumptive ones) have now creased in relative numbers,
ceased to be reckoned as English;

230 Induction. [CHAP. IX.

elude, it may be asked, about this particular man John
Smith's prospects when we are thus offered two different
values for his life ? Nothing whatever, it must be replied ;
nor could we in reality draw a conclusion, be it remembered,
in the former case, when we were practically confined to one
set of statistics. There also we had what we called the
'value' of his life, and since we only knew of one such value,
we came to regard it as in some sense appropriate to him as
an individual. Here, on the other hand, we have two values,
belonging to different series, and as these values are really
different it may be complained that they are discordant, but
such a complaint can only be made when we do what we
have no right to do; viz. assign a value to the individual
which shall admit of individual justification.

§ 29. Is it then perfectly arbitrary what series or class
of instances we select by which to judge ? By no means ; it
has been stated repeatedly that in choosing a series, we must
seek for one the members of which shall resemble our indi
vidual in as many of his attributes as possible, subject only
to the restriction that it must be a sufficiently extensive
series. What is meant is, that in the above case, where we
have two series, we cannot fairly call them contradictory; the
only valid charge is one of incompleteness or insufficiency for
their purpose, a charge which applies in exactly the same
sense, be it remembered, to all statistics which comprise
genera unnecessarily wider than the species with which we
are concerned. The only difference between the two differ
ent classes of cases is, that in the one instance we are on a
path which we know will lead at the last, through many
errors, towards the truth (in the sense in which truth can be
attained here), and we took it for want of a better. In the
other instance we have two such paths, perfectly different
paths, either of which however will lead us towards the truth

SECT. 30.] Induction. 231

as before. Contradiction can only seem to arise when it is
attempted to justify each separate step on our paths, as well
as their ultimate tendency.

Still it cannot be denied that these objections are a
serious drawback to the completeness and validity of any
anticipations which are merely founded upon statistical fre
quency, at any rate in an early stage of experience, when
but few statistics have been collected. Such knowledge as
Probability can give is not in any individual case of a high
order, being subject to the characteristic infirmity of re
peated error ; but even when measured by its own stand
ard it commences at a very low stage of proficiency. The
errors are then relatively very numerous and large compared
with what they may ultimately be reduced to.

§ 30. Here as elsewhere there is a continuous process
of specialization going on. The needs of a gradually widen
ing experience are perpetually calling upon us to subdivide
classes which are found to be too heterogeneous. Sometimes
the only complaint that has to be made is that the class to
which we are obliged to refer is found to be somewhat too
broad to suit our purpose, and that it might be subdivided
with convenience. This is the case, as has been shown above,
when an Insurance office finds that its increasing business
makes it possible and desirable to separate off the men who
follow some particular trades from the rest of their fellow-
countrymen. Similarly in every other department in which
statistics are made use of. This increased demand for speci-
ficness leads, in fact, as naturally in this direction, as does
the progress of civilization to the subdivision of trades in
any town or country. So in reference to the other kind of
perplexity mentioned above. Nothing is more common in
those sciences or practical arts, in which deduction is but
little available, and where in consequence our knowledge is

232 Induction. [CHAP. IX.

for the most part of the empirical kind, than to meet with
suggestions which point more or less directly in contrary
directions. Whenever some new substance is discovered or
brought into more general use, those who have to deal with
it must be familiar with such a state of things. The medical
man who has to employ a new drug may often find him
self confronted by the two distinct recommendations, that on
the one hand it should be employed for certain diseases, and
that on the other hand it should not be tried on certain con
stitutions. A man with such a constitution, but suffering
from such a disease, presents himself; which recommenda
tion is the doctor to follow ? He feels at once obliged to
set to work to collect narrower and more special statistics,
in order to escape from such an ambiguity.

§ 31. In this and a multitude of analogous cases
afforded by the more practical arts it is not of course neces
sary that numerical data should be quoted and appealed
to ; it is sufficient that the judgment is more or less con
sciously determined by them. All that is necessary to make
the examples appropriate is that we should admit that in
their case statistical data are our ultimate appeal in the
present state of knowledge. Of course if the empirical
laws can be resolved into their component causes we may
appeal to direct deduction, and in this case the employ
ment of statistics, and consequently the use of the theory of
Probability, may be superseded.

In this direction therefore, as time proceeds, the advance
of statistical refinement by the incessant subdivision of classes
to meet the developing wants of man is plain enough. But
if we glance backwards to a more primitive stage, we shall
soon see in what a very imperfect state the operation com
mences. At this early stage, however, Probability and In
duction are so closely connected together as to be very apt to

SECT. 32.] Induction. 233

be merged into one, or at any rate to have their functions
confounded.

§ 32. Since the generalization of our statistics is found to
belong to Induction, this process of generalization may be
regarded as prior to, or at least independent of, Probability.
We have, moreover, already discussed (in Chapter vi.) the
step corresponding to what are termed immediate inferences,
and (in Chapter vn.) that corresponding to syllogistic infer
ences. Our present position therefore is that in which we
may consider ourselves in possession of any number of gene
ralizations, but wish to employ them so as to make inferences
about a given individual; just as in one department of
common logic we are engaged in finding middle terms to
establish the desired conclusion. In this latter case the
process is found to be extremely simple, no accumulation of
different middle terms being able to lead to any real ambi
guity or contradiction. In Probability, however, the case is
different. Here, if we attempt to draw inferences about the
individual case before us, as often is attempted— in the Rule
of Succession for example— we shall encounter the full force
of this ambiguity and contradiction. Treat the question,
however, fairly, and all difficulty disappears. Our inference
really is not about the individuals as individuals, but about
series or successions of them. We wished to know whether
John Smith will die within the year; this, however, cannot
be known. But John Smith, by the possession of many
attributes, belongs to many different series. The multi
plicity of middle terms, therefore, is what ought to be
expected. We can know whether a succession of men, resi
dents in India, consumptives, &c. die within a year. We
may make our selection, therefore, amongst these, and in the
long run the belief and consequent conduct of ourselves and
other persons (as described in Chapter vi.) will become

234 Induction. [CHAP. ix.

capable of justification. With regard to choosing one of
these series rather than another, we have two opposing
principles of guidance. On the one hand, the more special
the series the better ; for, though not more right in the end,
we shall thus be more nearly right all along. But, on the
other hand, if we try to make the series too special, we shall
generally meet the practical objection arising from insuffi
cient statistics.

CHAPTER X.

CHANCE AS OPPOSED TO CAUSATION AND DESIGN.

§ 1. THE remarks in the previous chapter will have served
to clear the way for an enquiry which probably excites more
popular interest than any other within the range of our subject,
viz. the determination whether such and such events are to
be attributed to Chance on the one hand, or to Causation or
Design on the other. As the principal difficulty seems to
arise from the ambiguity with which the problem is generally
conceived and stated, owing to the extreme generality of the
conceptions involved, it becomes necessary to distinguish
clearly between the several distinct issues which are apt to
be involved.

I. There is, to begin with, a very old objection, founded
on the assumption which our science is supposed to make of
the existence of Chance. The objection against chance is
of course many centuries older than the Theory of Pro
bability ; and as it seems a nearly obsolete objection at the
present day we need not pause long for its consideration.
If we spelt the word with a capital C, and maintained that
it was representative of some distinct creative or adminis
trative agency, we should presumably be guilty of some form
of Manicheism. But the only rational meaning of the ob-

236 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. X.

jection would appear to be that the principles of the science
compel us to assume that events (some events, only, that is)
happen without causes, and are thereby removed from the
customary control of the Deity. As repeatedly pointed out
already this is altogether a mistake. The science of Pro
bability makes no assumption whatever about the way in
which events are brought about, whether by causation or
without it. All 'that we undertake to do is to establish and
explain a body of rules which are applicable to classes of
cases in which we do not or cannot make inferences about
the individuals. The objection therefore must be some
what differently stated, and appears finally to reduce itself
to this; — that the assumptions upon which the science of
Probability rests, are riot inconsistent with a disbelief in
causation within certain limits; causation being of course
understood simply in the sense of regular sequence. So
stated the objection seems perfectly valid, or rather the facts
on which it is based must be admitted ; though what con
nection there would be between such lack of causation and
absence of Divine superintendence I quite fail to see.

As this Theological objection died away the men of
physical science, and those who sympathized with them,
began to enforce the same protest ; and similar cautions are
still to be found from time to time in modern treatises.
Hume, for instance, in his short essay on Probability, com
mences with the remark, " though there be no such thing as
chance in the world, our ignorance of the real cause of any
event has the same influence on the understanding, &c."
De Morgan indeed goes so far as to declare that "the
foundations of the theory of Probability have ceased to exist
in the mind that has formed the conception," " that anything
ever did happen or will happen without some particular
reason why it should have been precisely what it was and

SECT. 2.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 237

not anything else1." Similar remarks might be quoted from
Laplace and others.

§ 2. In the particular form of the controversy above
referred to, and which is mostly found in the region of the
natural and physical sciences, the contention that chance
and causation are irreconcileable occupies rather a defensive
position ; the main fact insisted on being that, whenever in
these subjects we may happen to be ignorant of the details
we have no warrant for assuming as a consequence that the
details are uncaused. But this supposed irreconcileability
is sometimes urged in a much more aggressive spirit in refer
ence to social enquiries. Here the attempt is often made to
prove causation in the details, from the known and admitted
regularity in the averages. A considerable amount of con
troversy was excited some years ago upon this topic, in great
part originated by the vigorous and outspoken support of the
necessitarian side by Buckle in his History of Civilization.

It should be remarked that in these cases the attempt is
sometimes made as it were to startle the reader into acqui
escence by the singularity of the examples chosen. Instances
are selected which, though they possess no greater logical
value, are, if one may so express it, emotionally more effective.
Every reader of Buckle's History, for instance, will remember
the stress which he laid upon the observed fact, that the number
of suicides in London remains about the same, year by year ;
and he may remember also the sort of panic with which the
promulgation of this fact was accompanied in many quarters.
So too the way in which Laplace notices that the number of
undirected letters annually sent to the Post Office remains
about the same, and the comments of Dugald Stewart upon
this particular uniformity, seem to imply that they regarded

1 Essay on Probabilities, p. 114.

238 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

this instance as more remarkable than many analogous ones
taken from other quarters.

That there is a certain foundation of truth in the reason
ings in support of which the above examples are advanced,
cannot be denied, but their authors appear to me very much
to overrate the sort of opposition that exists between the
theory of Chances and the doctrine of Causation. As regards
first that wider conception of order or regularity which we
have termed uniformity, anything which might be called
objective chance would certainly be at variance with this in
one respect. In Probability ultimate regularity is always
postulated j in tossing a die, if not merely the individual
throws were uncertain in their results, but even the average
also, owing to the nature of the die, or the number of the
marks upon it, being arbitrarily interfered with, of course no
kind of science would attempt to take any account of it.

§ 3. So much must undoubtedly be granted ; but must
the same admission be made as regards the succession of the
individual events ? Can causation, in the sense of invariable
succession (for we are here shifting on to this narrower
ground), be denied, not indeed without suspicion of scientific
heterodoxy, but at any rate without throwing uncertainty
upon the foundations of Probability ? De Morgan, as we
have seen, strongly maintains that this cannot be so. I find
myself unable to agree with him here, but this disagreement
springs not so much from differences of detail, as from those
of the point of view in which we regard the science. He
always appears to incline to the opinion that the indivi
dual judgment in probability is to admit of justification ;
that when we say, for instance, that the odds in favour of
some event are three to two, that we can explain and justify
our statement without any necessary reference to a series or
class of such events. It is not easy to see how this can be

SECT. 4.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 239

done in any case, but the obstacles would doubtless be
greater even than they are, if knowledge of the individual
event were not merely unattained, but, owing to the absence
of any causal connection, essentially unattainable. On the
theory adopted in this work we simply postulate ignorance
of the details, but it is not regarded as of any importance
on what sort of grounds this ignorance is based. It may
be that knowledge is out of the question from the nature
of the case, the causative link, so to say, being missing. It
may be that such links are known to exist, but that either
we cannot ascertain them, or should find it troublesome to
do so. It is the fact of this ignorance that makes us appeal
to the theory of Probability, the grounds of it are of no
importance.

§ 4. On the view here adopted we are concerned only
with averages, or with the single event as deduced from an
average and conceived to form one of a series. We start
with the assumption, grounded on experience, that there is
uniformity in this average, and, so long as this is secured to
us, we can afford to be perfectly indifferent to the fate, as
regards causation, of the individuals which compose the
average. The question then assumes the following form : —
Is this assumption, of average regularity in the aggregate,
inconsistent with the admission of what may be termed
causeless irregularity in the details ? It does not seem to me
that it would be at all easy to prove that this is so. As
a matter of fact the two beliefs have constantly co-existed in
the same minds. This may not count for much, but it sug
gests that if there be a contradiction between them it is by
no means palpable and obvious. Millions, for instance, have
believed in the general uniformity of the seasons taken one
with another, who certainly did not believe in, and would
very likely have been ready distinctly to deny, the existence

240 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

of necessary sequences in the various phenomena which com
pose what we call a season. So with cards and dice ; almost
every gambler must have recognized that judgment and
foresight are of use in the long run, but writers on chance
seem to think that gamblers need a good deal of reasoning to
convince them that each separate throw is in its nature es
sentially predictable.

§ 5. In its application to moral and social subjects,
what gives this controversy its main interest is its real or
supposed bearing upon the vexed question of the freedom
of the will; for in this region Causation, and Fatalism or
Necessitarianism, are regarded as one and the same thing.

Here, as in the last case, that wide and somewhat vague
kind of regularity that we have called Uniformity, must be
admitted as a notorious fact. Statistics have put it out of
the power of any reasonably informed person to feel any
hesitation upon this point. Some idea has already been
gained, in the earlier chapters, of the nature and amount
of the evidence which might be furnished of this fact, and
any quantity more might be supplied from the works of
professed writers upon the subject. If, therefore, Free-will be
so interpreted as to imply such essential irregularity as defies
prediction both in the average, and also in the single case,
then the negation of free-will follows, not as a remote logical
consequence, but as an obvious inference from indisputable
facts of experience.

Few persons, however, would go so far as to interpret it
in this sense. All that troubles them is the fear that some
how this general regularity may be found to carry with it
causation, certainly in the sense of regular invariable se
quence, and probably also with the further association of
compulsion. Rejecting the latter association as utterly
unphilosophical, I cannot even see that the former conse-

SECT. 6.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 241

quence can be admitted as really proved, though it doubtless
gams some confirmation from this source.

§ 6. The nature of the argument against free-will
drawn from statistics, at least in the form in which it is very
commonly expressed, seems to me exceedingly defective
The antecedents and consequents, in the case of our voli
tions, must clearly be supposed to be very nearly immediately
in succession, if anything approaching to causation is to be
established : whereas in statistical enquiries the data are
often widely separate, if indeed they do not apply merely
to single groups of actions or results. For instance, in the
case of the misdirected letters, what it is attempted to prove
is that each writer was so much the 'victim of circumstances '
use a common but misleading expression) that he could
not have done otherwise than he did under his circumstances
t really no accumulation of figures to prove that the
number of such letters remains the same year by year, can
have much bearing upon this doctrine, even though they
were accompanied by corresponding figures which should
connect the forgetfulness thus indicated with some other
characteristics in the writers. So with the number of
suicides. If 250 people do, or lately did, annually put an
end to themselves in London, the fact, as it thus stands by
.tself, may be one of importance to the philanthropist and
statesman, but it needs bringing into much closer relation
with psychological elements if it is to convince us that the
actions of men are always instances of inflexible order. In
fact, instead of having secured our A and B here in closest
intimacy of succession to one another,— to employ the sym
bolic notation commonly used in works on Inductive Logic
to illustrate the causal connection,— we find them sepa
rated by a considerable interval ; often indeed we merely
have an A or & B by itself.

16

242 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

§ 7. Again, another deficiency in such reasoning seems
to be the laying undue weight upon the mere regularity or
persistency of the statistics. These may lead to very im
portant results, but they are not exactly what is wanted
for the purpose of proving anything against the freedom
of the will ; it is not indeed easy to see what connection
this has with such facts as that the annual number of thefts
or of suicides remains at pretty nearly the same figure.
Statistical uniformity seems to me to establish nothing else,
at least directly, in the case of human actions, than it does
in that of physical characteristics. Take but one instance,
that of the misdirected letters. We were already aware
that the height, weight, chest measurement, and so on, of
a large number of persons preserved a tolerably regular
average amidst innumerable deflections, and we were pre
pared by analogy to anticipate the same regularity in their
mental characteristics. All that we gain, by counting the
numbers of letters which are posted without addresses, is
a certain amount of direct evidence that this is the case.
Just as observations of the former kind had already shown
that statistics of the strength and stature of the human
body grouped themselves about a mean, so do those of the
latter that a similar state of things prevails in respect of the
readiness and general trustworthiness of the memory. The
evidence is not so direct and conclusive in the latter case,
for the memory is not singled out and subjected to measure
ment by itself, but is taken in combination with innumerable
other influencing circumstances. Still there can be little
doubt that the statistics tell on the whole in this direction,
and that by duly varying and extending them they may
obtain considerable probative force.

The fact is that Probability has nothing more to do with
Natural Theology, either in its favour or against it, than the

SECT. 8.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 243

general principles of Logic or Induction have. It is simply a
body of rules for drawing inferences about classes~oT events
wnlch are distinguished by a certain quality. The believer
in a Deity will, by the study of nature, be led to form an
opinion about His works, and so to a certain extent about
His attributes. But it is surely unreasonable to propose
that he should abandon his belief because the sequence of
events, — not, observe, their general tendency towards happi
ness or misery, good or evil, — is brought about in a way
different from what he had expected ; whether it be by dis
playing order where he had expected irregularity, or by
involving the machinery of secondary causes where he had
expected immediate agency.

§ 8. It is both amusing and instructive to consider
what very different feelings might have been excited in our
minds by this co-existence of, what may be called, ignorance
of individuals and knowledge of aggregates, if they had pre
sented themselves to our observation in a reverse order.
Being utterly unable to make assured predictions about a
.single life, or the conduct of individuals, people are some
times startled, and occasionally even dismayed, at the un
expected discovery that such predictions can be confidently
made when we are speaking of large numbers. And so
some are prompted to exclaim, This is denying Providence !
it is utter Fatalism ! But let us assume, for a moment, that
our familiarity with the subject had been experienced, in the
first instance, in reference to the aggregates instead of the
individual lives. It is difficult, perhaps, to carry out such a
supposition completely; though we may readily conceive
something approaching to it in the case of an ignorant clerk
in a Life Assurance Office, who had never thought of life, ex
cept as having such a ' value ' at such an age, and who had
hardly estimated it except in the form of averages. Might

16—2

244 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

we not suppose him, in some moment of reflectiveness, being-
astonished and dismayed at the sudden realization of the
utter uncertainty in which the single life is involved ? And
might not his exclamation in turn be, Why this is denying
Providence ! It is utter chaos and chance ! A belief in a
Creator and Administrator of the world is not confined to
any particular assumption about the nature of the immediate
sequence of events, but those who have been accustomed
hitherto to regard the events under one of the aspects above
referred to, will often for a time feel at a loss how to connect
them with the other.

§ 9. So far we have been touching on a very general
question ; viz. the relation of the fundamental postulates of
Probability to the conception of Order or Uniformity in the
world, physical or moral. The difficulties which thence arise
are mainly theological, metaphysical or psychological. What
we must now consider are problems of a more detailed or
logical character. They are prominently these two ; (1) the
distinction between chance arrangement and causal arrange
ment in physical phenomena ; • and (2) the distinction be
tween chance arrangement and designed arrangement where
we are supposed to be contemplating rational agency as.
acting on one side at least.

II. The first of these questions raises the antithesis-
between chance and causation, not as a general characteristic
pervading all phenomena, but in reference to some specified
occurrence : — Is this a case of chance or not ? The most
strenuous supporters of the universal prevalence of causation
and order admit that the question is a relevant one, and
they must therefore be supposed to have some rule for
testing the answers to it.

Suppose, for instance, a man is seized with a fit in a
house where he has gone to dine, and dies there ; and some

SECT. 10.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 245

one remarks that that was the very house in which he was
born. We begin to wonder if this was an odd coincidence
and nothing more. But if our informant goes on to tell us
that the house was an old family one, and was occupied by
the brother of the deceased, we should feel at once that
these facts put the matter in a rather different light. Or
again, as Cournot suggests, if we hear that two brothers
have been killed in battle on the same day, it makes a great
difference in our estimation of the case whether they were
killed fighting in the same engagement or whether one fell
in the north of France and the other in the south. The
latter we should at once class with mere coincidences, whereas
the former might admit of explanation.

§ 10. The problem, as thus conceived, seems to be one
rather of Inductive Logic than of Probability, because there
is not the slightest attempt to calculate chances. But it
deserves some notice here. Of course no accurate thinker
who was under the sway of modern physical notions would
for a moment doubt that each of the two elements in question
had its own ' cause ' behind it, from which (assuming perfect
knowledge) it might have been confidently inferred. No
more would he doubt, I apprehend, that if we could take a
sufficiently minute and comprehensive view, and penetrate
sufficiently far back into the past, we should reach a stage at
which (again assuming perfect knowledge) the coexistence of
the two events could equally have been foreseen. The
employment of the word casual therefore does not imply any
rejection of a cause ; but it does nevertheless correspond to a
distinction of some practical importance. We call a coinci
dence casual, I apprehend, when we mean to imply that no
knowledge of one of the two elements, which we can suppose
to be practically attainable, would enable us to expect the
other. We know of no generalization which covers them

246 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

both, except of course such as are taken for granted to be
inoperative. In such an application it seems that the word
' casual ' is not used in antithesis to ' causal ' or to ' designed ',
but rather to that broader conception of order or regularity
to which I should apply the term Uniformity. The casual
coincidence is one which we cannot bring under any special
generalization; certain, probable, or even plausible.

A slightly different way of expressing this distinction is
to regard these ' mere coincidences ' as being simply cases in
point of independent events, in the sense in which in
dependence was described in a former chapter. We saw
that any two events, A and J5, were so described when each
happens with precisely the same relative statistical frequency
whether the other happens or not. This state of things
seems to hold good of the successions of heads and tails in
tossing coins, as in that of male and female births in a
town, or that of the digits in many mathematical tables.
Thus we suppose that when men are picked up in the street
and taken into a house to die, there will not be in the long
run any preferential selection for or against the house in
which they were born. And all that we necessarily mean to
claim when we deny of such an occurrence, in any particular
case, that it is a mere coincidence, is that that particular
case must be taken out of the common list and transferred
to one in which there is some such preferential selection.

§11. III. The next problem is a somewhat more in
tricate one, and will therefore require rather careful sub
division. It involves the antithesis between Chance and
Design. That is, we are not now (as in the preceding case)
considering objects in their physical aspect alone, and taking
account only of the relative frequency of their coexistence or
sequence ; but we are considering the agency by which they
are produced, and we are enquiring whether that agency

SECT. 11.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 247

trusted to what we call chance, or whether it employed what
we call design.

The reader must clearly understand that we are not now
discussing the mere question of fact whether a certain
assigned arrangement is what we call a chance one. This,
as was fully pointed out in the fourth chapter, can be settled
by mere inspection, provided the materials are extensive
enough. What we are now proposing to do is to carry on
the enquiry from the point at which we then had to leave it
off, by solving the question, Given a certain arrangement, is
it more likely that this was produced by design, or by some
of the methods commonly called chance methods ? The dis
tinction will be obvious if we revert to the succession of
figures which constitute the ratio TT. As I have said, this
arrangement, regarded as a mere succession of digits, appears
to fulfil perfectly the characteristics of a chance arrange
ment. If we were to omit the first four or five digits,
which are familiar to most of us, we might safely defy any
one to whom it was shown to say that it was not got at by
simply drawing figures from a bag. He might look at it for
his whole life without detecting that it was anything but the
result of such a chance selection. And rightly so, because
regarded as a mere arrangement it is a chance one : it fulfils
all the requirements of such an arrangement1. The question

Doubts have been expressed means. If such a question were

about the truly random character asked in relation to any unusual

of the digits in this case (v. De divergence from the a priori chance

Morgan, Budget of Paradoxes, p. in a case of throwing dice, say, we

291), and Jevons has gone so far as should probably substitute for it the

to ask (Principles of Science, p. 529), following, as being more appropriate

"Why should the value of TT, when to our science:— Assign the degree

expressed to a great number of of improbability of the event in

figures, contain the digit 7 much less question; i.e. its statistical rarity,

frequently than any other digit!" And we should then proceed to

I do not quite understand what this judge, in the way indicated in the

248

Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

we are now proceeding to discuss is this : Given any such
arrangement how are we to determine the process by which
it was arrived at ?

We are supposed to have some event before us which
might have been produced in either of two alternative
ways, i. e. by chance or by some kind of deliberate design ;
and we are asked to determine the odds in favour of one
or other of these alternatives. It is therefore a problem in
Inverse Probability and is liable to all the difficulties to
which problems of this class are apt to be exposed.

text, whether this improbability gave in the chapter on Eandomness. We

rise to any grounds of suspicion.

The calculation is simple. The
actual number of 7's, in the 708
digits, is 53 : whilst the fair average
would be 71. The question is, What
is the chance of such a departure
from the average in 708 turns? By
the usual methods of calculation
(v. Galloway on Probability} the
chances against an excess or defect
of 18 are about 44 : 1, in respect of
any specified digit. But of course
what we want to decide are the
chances against some one of the ten
showing this divergence. This I
estimate as being approximately
determined by the fraction (fl-)10,
viz. '8. This represents odds of only
about 4 : 1 against such an occur
rence, which is nothing remarkable.
As a matter of fact several digits in
the two other magnitudes which
Mr Shanks had calculated to the
same length, viz. Tan-1i and
Tan-1-^-^, show the same diver
gencies (v. Proc. Roy. Soc. xxi. 319).
I may call attention here to a
point which should have been noticed

must be cautious when we decide
upon the random character by mere
inspection. It is very instructive
here to compare the digits in TT with
those within the 'period' of a circu
lating decimal of very long period.
That of l-f-7699, which yields the
full period of 7698 figures, was cal
culated some years ago by two Cam
bridge graduates (Mr Lunn and Mr
Suffield), and privately printed. If we
confine our examination to a portion
of the succession the random cha
racter seems plausible ; i.e. the digits,
and their various combinations, come
out in nearly, but not exactly, equal
numbers. So if we take batches of
10; the averages hover nicely about
45. But if we took the whole period
which 'circulates,' we should find
these characteristics overdone, and
the random character would dis
appear. That is, instead of a merely
ultimate approximation to equality
we should have (as far as this is
possible) an absolute attainment
of it.

SECT. 12.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 249

§ 12. For the theoretic solution of such a question we
require the two following data :

(1) The relative frequency of the two classes of agencies,
viz. that which is to act in a chance way and that which
is to act designedly.

(2) The probability that each of these agencies, if it
were ^the really operative one, would produce the event in
question.

The latter of these data can generally be secured without
any difficulty. The determination of the various contin
gencies on the chance hypothesis ought not, if the example
were a suitable one, to offer any other than arithmetical
difficulties. And as regards the design alternative, it is
generally taken for granted that if this had been operative
it would certainly have produced the result aimed at. For
instance, if ten pence are found on a table, all with head
uppermost, and it be asked whether chance or design had
been at work here ; we feel no difficulty up to a certain
point. Had the pence been tossed we should have got ten
heads only once in 1024 throws; but had they been placed
designedly the result would have been achieved with cer
tainty.

But the other postulate, viz. that of the relative preva
lence of these two classes of agencies, opens up a far more
serious class of difficulties. Cases can be found no doubt,
though they are not very frequent, in which this question
can be answered approximately, and then there is no further
trouble. For instance, if in a school class-list I were to see
the four names Brown, Jones, Robinson, Smith, standing
in this order, it might occur to me to enquire whether this
arrangement were alphabetical or one of merit. In our
enlarged sense of the terms this is equivalent to chance
and design as the alternatives ; for, since the initial letter of

250 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

a boy's name has no known connection with his attainments,
the successive arrangement of these letters on any other
than the alphabetical plan will display the random features,
just as we found to be the case with the digits of an incom
mensurable magnitude. The odds are 23 to 1 against 4
names coming undesignedly in alphabetical order ; they are
equivalent to certainty in favour of their doing so if this
order had been designed. As regards the relative frequency
of the two kinds of orders in school examinations I do not
know that statistics are at hand, though they could easily
be procured if necessary, but it is pretty certain that the
majority adopt the order of merit. Put for hypothesis the
proportion as high as 9 to 1, and it would still be found more
likely than not that in the case in question the order was
really an alphabetical one.

§ 13. But in the vast majority of cases we have no
such statistics at hand, and then we find ourselves exposed
to very serious ambiguities. These may be divided into
two distinct classes, the nature of which will best be seen
by the discussion of examples.

In the first place we are especially liable to the draw
back already described in a former chapter as rendering
mere statistics so untrustworthy, which consists in the fact
that the proportions are so apt to be disturbed almost from
moment to moment by the possession of fresh hints or infor
mation. We saw for instance why it was that statistics of
mortality were so very unserviceable in the midst of a
disease or in the crisis of a battle. Suppose now that on
coming into a room I see on the table ten coins lying face
uppermost, and am asked what was the likelihood that the
arrangement was brought about by design. Everything
turns upon special knowledge of the circumstances of the
case. Who had been in the room ? Were they children,

SECT. 15.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 251

or coin-collectors, or persons who might have been supposed
to have indulged in tossing for sport or for gambling pur
poses ? Were the coins new or old ones ? a distinction of
this kind would be very pertinent when we were considering
the existence of any motive for arranging them the same
way uppermost. And so on ; we feel that our statistics are
at the mercy of any momentary fragment of information.

§ 14. But there is another consideration besides this.
Not only should we be thus influenced by what may be'
called external circumstances of a general kind, such as the
character and position of the agents, we should also be in
fluenced by what we supposed to be the conventional1 estimate
with which this or that particular chance arrangement was
then regarded. Thus from time to time as new games of
cards become popular new combinations acquire significance :
and ^ therefore when the question of design takes the form of
possible cheating a knowledge of the current estimate of
such combinations becomes exceedingly important.

§ 15. The full significance of these difficulties will best
be apprehended by the discussion of a case which is not
fictitious or invented for the purpose, but which has actually
given rise to serious dispute. Some years ago Prof. Piazzi
Smyth published a work2 upon the great pyramid of Ghizeh,
the general object of which was to show that that building
contained, in its magnitude, proportions and contents, a
number of almost imperishable natural standards of length,
volume, &c. Amongst other things it was determined that

1 Of course this conventional esti- or seven heads and three tails, &c.
mate is nothing different in kind Its distinction only consists in its
irorn that which may attach to any almost universal acceptance as re
order or succession. Ten heads in markable.

succession is intrinsically or ob- > Our Inheritance in the Great

jectively indistinguishable in cha- Pyramid, Ed. m. 1877.
racter from alternate heads and tails,

252 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. X.

the value of TT was accurately (the degree of accuracy is not,
I think, assigned) indicated by the ratio of the sides to the
height. The contention was that this result could not be
accidental but must have been designed.

As regards the estimation of the value of the chance
hypothesis the calculation is not quite so clear as in the
case of dice or cards. We cannot indeed suppose that,
for a given length of base, any height can be equally possible.
We must limit ourselves to a certain range here ; for if too
high the building would be insecure, and if too low it would
be ridiculous. Again, we must decide to how close an
approximation the measurements are made. If they are
guaranteed to the hundredth of an inch the coincidence
would be of a quite different order from one where the
guarantee extended only to an inch. Suppose that this
has been decided, and that we have ascertained that out
of 10,000 possible heights for a pyramid of given base just
that one has been selected which would most nearly yield
the ratio of the radius to the circumference of a circle.

The remaining consideration would be the relative fre
quency of the ' design ' alternative, — what is called its a
priori probability, — that is, the relative frequency with
which such builders can be supposed to have aimed at that
ratio ; with the obvious implied assumption that if they did
aim at it they would certainly secure it. Considering our
extreme ignorance of the attainments of the builders it is
obvious that no attempt at numerical appreciation is here
possible. If indeed the ' design ' was interpreted to mean
conscious resolve to produce that ratio, instead of mere re
solve to employ some method which happened to produce
it, few persons would feel much hesitation. Not only do
we feel tolerably certain that the builders did not know the
value of TT, except in the rude way in which all artificers

SECT. 15.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 253

must know it ; but we can see no rational motive, if they
did know it, which should induce them to perpetuate it
in their building. If, however, to adopt an ingenious sug
gestion1, we suppose that the builder may have proceeded
m the following fashion, the matter assumes a different
aspect. Suppose that having decided on the height of his
pyramid he drew a circle with that as radius : that, laying
down a cord along the line of this circle, he drew this cord
out into a square, which square marked the base of the
building. Hardly any simpler means could be devised in
a comparatively rude age; and it is obvious that the cir
cumference of the base, being equal to the length of the
cord, would bear exactly the admitted ratio to the height.
In other words, the exact attainment of a geometric value
does not imply a knowledge of that ratio, but merely of some
method which involves and displays it. A teredo can bore,
as well as any of us, a hole which displays the geometric pro
perties of a circle, but we do not credit it with correspond
ing knowledge.

As before said, all numerical appreciation of the like
lihood of the design alternative is out of the question. But,
if the precision is equal to what Mr Smyth claimed, I sup
pose that most persons (with the above suggestion before
them) will think it somewhat more likely that the coinci
dence was not a chance one.

1 Made in Nature (Jan. 24, 1878) lengths of the four straight sides
by Mr J. G. Jackson. It must be of the actual and practical square
remarked that Mr Smyth's alter- base." As regards the alternatives
native statement of his case leads up of chance and design, here, it must
to that explanation:— "The vertical be remembered in justice to Mr
height of the great pyramid is the Smyth's argument that the anti-
radius of a theoretical circle the thesis he admits to chance is not
length of whose curved circumference human, but divine design,
is exactly equal to the sum of the

254 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

§ 16. There still remains a serious, and highly interesting
speculative consideration. In the above argument we took
it for granted, in calculating the chance alternative, that
only one of the 10,000 possible values was favourable ; that
is, we took it for granted that the ratio 77- was the only one
whose claims, so to say, were before the court. But it is
clear that if we had obtained just double this ratio the result
would have been of similar significance, for it would have
been simply the ratio of the circumference to the diameter.
In fact, Mr Smyth's selected ratio, — the height to twice the
breadth of the base as compared with the diameter to the
circumference, — is obviously only one of a plurality of ratios.
Again ; if the measured results had shown that the ratio of
the height to one side of the base was 1 : A/2 (i.e. that of a
side to a diagonal of a square) or 1 : A/3 (i.e. that of a side
to a diagonal of a cube) would not such results equally show
evidence of design ? Proceeding in this way, we might
suggest one known mathematical ratio after another until
most of the 10,000 supposed possible values had been taken
into account. We might then argue thus : since almost
every possible height of the pyramid would correspond to
some mathematical ratio, a builder, ignorant of them all
alike, would be not at all unlikely to stumble upon one or
other of them : why then attribute design to him in one case
rather than another ?

§ 17. The answer to this objection has been already
hinted at. Everything turns upon the conventional estimate
•of one result as compared with another. Revert, for sim
plicity, to the coins. Ten heads is just as likely as alternate
heads and tails, or five heads followed by five tails ; or, in
fact, as any one of the remaining 1023 possible cases. But
universal convention has picked out a run of ten as being
remarkable. Here, of course, the convention seems a very

SECT. 17.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 255

natural and indeed inevitable one, but in other cases it is
wholly arbitrary. For instance, in cards, "queen of spades
and knave of diamonds" is exactly as uncommon as any
other such pair: moreover, till bezique was introduced it
offered presumably no superior interest over any other
specified pair. But during the time when that game was
very popular this combination was brought into the category
f coincidences in which interest was felt; and, given dis
honesty amongst the players, its chance of being designed
stood at once on a much better footing1.

Returning then to the pyramid, we see that in balancing
the claims of chance and design we must, in fairness to the
ter, reckon to its account several other values as well as
that of TT, e.g. V2 and V3, and a few more such simple and
familiar ratios, as well as some of their multiples. But
though the number of such values which might be reckoned
on the ground that they are actually known to us, is infinite,'
yet the number that ought to be reckoned, on the ground
that they could have been familiar to the builders of a
pyramid, are very few. The order of probability for or against
the existence of design will not therefore be seriously altered
here by such considerations2.

1 See Cournot, Essai sur le* fonde- more court cards than chance could

ments de nos connaissances . Vol. i. be expected to assign him; and that

' 2 ' in consequence his average gains for

deserves notice that con- several years in succession were un-

siderahons of this kind have found usually large. The counsel for the

their way into the Law Courts defence urged that still larger gains

though of course without- any at- had been secured by other players

tempt at numerical valuation. Thus, without suspicion of unfairness -

m the celebrated De Eos trial, in (I cannot find that it was explained

3 far as the evidence was indirect, over how large an area of experience

one mam ground of suspicion seems these instances had been sought •

have been that Lord De Eos, nor how far the magnitude of the

when dealing at whist, obtained far stakes, as distinguished from the

256 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

§ 18. Up to this point it will be observed that what we
have been balancing against each other are two forms of
agency, — of human agency, that is, — one acting through
chance, and the other by direct design. In this case we
know where we are, for we can thoroughly understand agency
of this kind. The problem is indeed but seldom numerically
soluble, and in most cases not soluble at all, but it is at any
rate capable of being clearly stated. We know the kind of
answer to be expected and the reasons which would serve to
determine it, if they were attainable.

The next stage in the enquiry would be that of balancing
ordinary human chance agency against, — I will not call it
direct spiritualist agency, for that would be narrowing the
hypothesis unnecessarily, — but against all other possible
causes. Some of the investigations of the Society for
Psychical Research will furnish an admirable illustration of
what is intended by this statement. There is a full dis
cussion of these applications in a recent essay by Mr F. Y.
Edgeworth1 ; but as his account of the matter is connected
with other calculations arid diagrams I can only quote it in
part. But I am in substantial agreement with him.

"It is recorded that 1833 guesses were made by a 'per
cipient ' as to the suit of cards which the ' agent ' had fixed
upon. The number of successful guesses was 510, consider
ably above 458, the number which, as being the quarter of
1833, would, on the supposition of pure chance, be more
likely than any other number. Now, by the Law of Error,
we are able approximately to determine the probability of

number of successes, accounted for Feb. 11, 1837.)

that of the actual gains),— and that l Metretike. At the end of this

large allowance must be made for volume will be found a useful list

skill where the actual gains were of a number of other publications

computed. (See the Times' report, by the same author on allied topics.

SECT. 19.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 257

such an excess occurring by chance. It is equal to the ex
tremity of the tail of a probability-curve such as [those we
have already had occasion to examine].... The proportion
of this extremity of the tail to the whole body is "003 to 1.
That fraction, then, is the probability of a chance shot
striking that extremity of the tail ; the probability that, if
the guessing were governed by pure chance, a number of
successful guesses equal or greater than 510 would occur":
odds, that is, of about 332 to 1 against such occurrence.

§ 19. Mr Edgeworth holds, as strongly as I do, that for pur
poses of calculation, in any strict sense of the word, we ought
to have some determination of the data on the non-chance side
of the hypothesis. We ought to know its relative frequency
of occurrence, and the relative frequency with which it
attains its aims. I am also in agreement with him that
" what that other cause may be, — whether some trick, or
unconscious illusion, or thought-transference of the sort which
is vindicated by the investigators — it is for common-sense
and ordinary Logic to consider."

I am in agreement therefore with those who think that
though we cannot form a quantitative opinion we can in
certain cases form a tolerably decisive one. Of course if we
allow the last word to the supporters of the chance hypo
thesis we can never reach proof, for it will always be open to
them to revise and re-fix the antecedent probability of the
counter hypothesis. What we may fairly require is that
those who deny the chance explanation should assign some
sort of minimum value to the probability of occurrence on
the other supposition, and we can then try to surmount this
by increasing the rarity of the actually produced phenomenon
on the chance hypothesis. If, for instance, they declare that
in their estimation the odds against any other than the chance
agency being at work are greater than 332 to 1, we must
v. 17

258 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

try to secure a yet uncommoner occurrence than that in
question. If the supporters of thought-transference have
the courage of their convictions, — as they most assuredly
have, — they would not shrink from accepting this test. I
am inclined to think that even at present, on such evidence
as that above, the probability that the results were got at by
ordinary guessiog is very small.

§ 20. The problems discussed in the preceding sections
are at least intelligible even if they are not always resol
vable. But before finishing this chapter we must take notice
of some speculations upon this part of the subject which do not
seem to keep quite within the limits of what is intelligible.
Take for instance the question discussed by Arbuthnott (in
a paper in the Phil. Transactions, Vol. xxvii.) under the
title " An Argument for Divine Providence, taken from the
constant Regularity observed in the birth of both sexes." Had
his argument been of the ordinary teleological kind ; that
is, had he simply maintained that the existent ratio of ap
proximate equality, with a six per cent, surplusage of males,
was a beneficent one, there would have been nothing here to
object against. But what he contemplated was just such a
balance of alternate hypotheses between chance and design
as we are here considering. His conclusion in his own words
is, " it is art, not chance, that governs."

It is difficult to render such an argument precise without
rendering it simply ridiculous. Strictly understood it can
surely bear only one of two interpretations. On the one
hand we may be personifying Chance : regarding it as an
agent which must be reckoned with as being quite capable
of having produced man, or at any rate having arranged the
proportion of the sexes. And then the decision must be
drawn, as between this agent and the Creator, which of the
two produced the existent arrangement. If so, and Chance

SECT. 21.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 259

be defined as any agent which produces a chance or random
arrangement, I am afraid there can be little doubt that it
was this agent that was at work in the case in question.
The arrangement of male and female births presents, so far
as we can see, one of the most perfect examples of chance :
there is ultimate uniformity emerging out of individual
irregularity : all the ' runs ' or successions of each alternative
are duly represented : the fact of, say, five sons having been
already born in a family does not seem to have any certain
effect in diminishing the likelihood of the next being a son,
and so on. Such a nearly perfect instance of ' independent
events' is comparatively very rare in physical phenomena.
It is all that we can claim from a chance arrangement1. The
only other interpretation I can see is to suggest that there
was but one agent who might, like any one of us, have either
tossed up or designed, and we have to ascertain which course
he probably adopted in the case in question. Here too, if
we are to judge of his mode of action by the tests we should
apply to any work of our own, it would certainly look very
much as if he had adopted some scheme of tossing.

§ 21. The simple fact is that any rational attempt to

1 That is, if we look simply to a preponderance, agencies are at
statistical results, as Arbuthnott did, once set in motion which tend to
and as we should do if we were ex- redress the balance. This is a modi-
amining the tosses of a penny. If fication and improvement of the older
the remarkable theory of Dr Diising theory, that the relative age of the
(Die Regulierung des Geschlechts- parents has something to do with
verlmltnisses . . . Jena, 1834) be con- the sex of the offspring,
firmed, the matter would assume Quetelet (Letters, p. 61) has at-
a somewhat different aspect. He at- tempted to prove a proposition about
tempts to show, both on physio- the succession of male and female
logical grounds, and by analysis of births by certain experiments sup-
statistics referring to men and posed to be tried upon an urn with
animals, that there is a decidedly black and white balls in it. But
compensatory process at work. That this is going too far. (See the note
is, if for any cause either sex attains at the end of this chapter.)

17—2

260 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

decide between chance and design as agencies must be con
fined to the case of finite intelligences. One of the im
portant determining elements here, as we have seen, is the
state of knowledge of the agent, and the conventional esti
mate entertained about this or that particular arrangement;
and these can be appreciated only when we are dealing with
beings like ourselves.

For instance, to return to that much debated question
about the arrangement of the stars, there can hardly be any
doubt that what Mitchell —who started the discussion -had
in view was the decision between Chance and Design. He
says (Trans. Roy. Soc. 1767) "The argument I intend to
make use of... is of that kind which infers either design or
some general law from a general analogy and from the great
ness of the odds against things having been in the present
situation if it was not owing to some such cause." And he
concludes that had the stars "been scattered by mere chance
as it might happen" there would be "odds of near 500000
to 1 that no six stars out of that number [1500], scattered at
random in the whole heavens, would be within so small a
distance from each other as the Pleiades are." Under any
such interpretation the controversy seems to me to be idle.
I do not for a moment dispute that there is some force in
the ordinary teleological argument which seeks to trace signs
of goodness and wisdom in the general tendency of things.
But what do we possibly understand about the nature of
creation, or the designs of the Creator, which should enable
us to decide about the likelihood of his putting the stars in
one shape rather than in another, or which should allow any
significance to "mere chance" as contrasted with his sup
posed all-pervading agency ?

§ 22. Reduced to intelligible terms the two following
questions seem to me to emerge from the controversy :—

SECT. 23.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 261

(I) The stars being distributed through space, some of
them would of course be nearly in a straight line behind
others when looked at from our planet. Supposing that
they were tolerably uniformly distributed, we could calculate
about how many of them would thus be seen in apparent
close proximity to one another. The question is then put,
Are there more of them near to each other, two and two,
than such calculation would account for ? The answer is that
there are many more. So far as I can see the only direct
inference that can be drawn from this is that they are not
uniformly distributed, but have a tendency to go in pairs.
This, however, is a perfectly sound and reasonable applica
tion of the theory. Any further conclusions, such as that
these pairs of stars will form systems, as it were, to them
selves, revolving about one another, and for all practical pur
poses unaffected by the rest of the sidereal system, are of
course derived from astronomical considerations1. Probability
confines itself to the simple answer that the distribution is
not uniform ; it cannot pretend to say whether, and by what
physical process, these binary systems of stars have been
'caused'2.

§ 23 (II). The second question is this, Does the distri
bution of the stars, after allowing for the case of the binary

1 It is precisely analogous to the speak of the probability of a "pliysi-
conclusion that the flowers of the cal connect ion" between these double
daisies (as distinguished from the stars. The phrase seems mislead-
planta, v. p. 109) are not distributed ing, for on the usual hypothesis of
at random, but have a tendency to universal gravitation all stars are
go in groups of two or more. Mere physically connected, by gravitation,
observation shows this: and then, It is therefore better, as above, to
from our knowledge of the growth of make it simply a question of relative
plants we may infer that these little proximity, and to leave it to astro-
groups spring from the same root. norny to infer what follows from un-

2 In this discussion, writers often usual proximity.

262 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

stars just mentioned, resemble that which would be pro
duced by human agency sprinkling things 'at random'?
(We are speaking, of course, of their distribution as it ap
pears to us, on the visible heavens, for this is nearly all that
we can observe; but if they extend beyond the telescopic
range in every direction, this would lead to practically much
the same discussion as if we considered their actual arrange
ment in space.) We have fully discussed, in a former chap
ter, the meaning of 'randomness.' Applying it to the case
before us, the question becomes this, Is the distribution
tolerably uniform on the whole, but with innumerable indi
vidual deflections ? That is, when we compare large areas,
are the ratios of the number of stars in each equal area
approximately equal, whilst, as we compare smaller and
smaller areas, do the relative numbers become more and
more irregular? With certain exceptions, such as that of
the Milky Way and other nebular clusters, this seems to be
pretty much the case, at any rate as regards the bulk of the
stars1.

1 Professor Forbes in the paper
in the Philosophical Magazine al
ready referred to (Ch. vii. § 18) gave
several diagrams to show what were
the actual arrangements of a random
distribution. He scattered peas over
a chess-board, and then counted the
number which rested on each square.
His figures seem to show that the
general appearance of the stars is
much the same as that produced by
such a plan of scattering.

Some recent investigations by
Mr K. A. Proctor seem to show,
however, that there are at least two
exceptions to this tolerably uniform
distribution. (1) He has ascertained

that the stars are decidedly more
thickly aggregated in the Milky Way
than elsewhere. So far as this is to
be relied on the argument is the
same as in the case of the double
stars ; it tends to prove that the
proximity of the stars in the Milky
Way is not merely apparent, but
actual. (2) He has ascertained that
there are two large areas, in the
North and South hemispheres, in
which the stars are much more
thickly aggregated than elsewhere.
Here, it seems to me, Probability
proves nothing : we are simply deny
ing that the distribution is uniform.
What may follow in the way of in-

SECT. 23.] Chance, Causation, and Design. 2G3

All further questions: the decision, for instance, for or
against any form of the Nebular Hypothesis : or, admitting
this, the decision whether such and such parts of the visible
heavens have sprung from the same nebula, must be left to
Astronomy to adjudicate.

NOTE ON THE PROPOBTIONS OF THE SEXES.

The following remarks were rather too long for convenient insertion on
p. 259, and are therefore appended here.

The 'random' character of male and female births has generally been
rested almost entirely on statistics of place and time. But what is more
wanted, surely, is the proportion displayed when we compare a number of
families. This seems so obvious that I cannot but suppose that the investi
gation must have been already made somewhere, though I have not found
any trace of it in the most likely quarters. Thus Prof. Lexis (Massener-
scheinungen) when supporting his view that the proportion between the
sexes at birth is almost the only instance known to him, in natural pheno
mena, of true normal dispersion about a mean, rests his conclusions on the
ordinary statistics of the registers of different countries.

It certainly needs proof that the same characteristics will hold good
when the family is taken as the unit, especially as some theories (e.g. that
of Sadler) would imply that ' runs' of boys or girls would be proportionally
commoner than pure chance would assign. Lexis has shown that this is
most markedly ttte case with twins: i.e., to use an obviously intelligible
notation, (M for male, F for female), that M.M. and F.F. are very much
commoner in proportion than M.F.

I have collected statistics including over 13,000 male and female births,
arranged in families of four and upwards. They were taken from the
pedigrees in the Herald's Visitations, and therefore represent as a rule a
somewhat select class, viz. the families of the eldest sons of English country
gentlemen in the sixteenth century. They are not sufficiently extensive yet
for publication, but I give a summary of the results to indicate their tendency
so far. The upper line of figures in each case gives the observed results : i.e.

ferences as to the physical process of says on Astronomy, p. 297. Also a

causation by which the stars have series of Essays in The Universe and

been disposed is a question for the the coming Transits.
Astronomer. See Mr Proctor's Es-

264 Chance, Causation, and Design. [CHAP. x.

in the Case of a family of four, the numbers which had four male, three male
and one female, two male and two female, and so on. The lower line gives
the calculated results; i.e. the corresponding numbers which would have
been obtained had batches of M.s and F.s been drawn from a bag in which
they were mixed in the ratio assigned by the total observed numbers for
those families.

512 families of 4 ;
yielding
1188 M. : 860 F.

512 families of 5 ;
yielding
1402 M.: 1158 F.

512 families of 6;
yielding
1612 M. : 1460 F.

m4 m3/ m2/2 mf3 /4
81 + 148 + 161 + 98 + 24 (observed.)
57 + 168 + 184 + 88 + 15 (calculated.)

m5 w4/ m3/2 ra2/3 w/4 f5
50 + 82 + 161 + 143 + 61 + 15 (obs.)
25 + 103 + 172 + 143 + 59 + 10 (calc.)

?tt6 w5/ ?7i4/2 m3/3 w2/4 mf5 /6
30 + 48 + 115 + 146 + 126 + 40 + 7 (obs.)
10 + 56 + 133 + 159 + 108 + 41 + 5 (calc.)

The numbers for the larger families are as yet too small to be worth
giving, but they show the same tendency. It will be seen that in every case
the observed central values are less than the calculated; and that the
observed extreme values are much greater than the calculated. The results
seem to suggest (so far) that a family cannot be likened to a chance drawing
of the requisite number from one bag. A better analogy would be to suppose
two bags, one with M.s in excess and the other with F.s in less excess, and
that some persons draw from one and some from the other. But fuller
statistics are needed.

It will be observed that the total excess of male births is large. This
may arise from undue omission of females ; but I have carefully confined
myself to the two or three last generations, in each pedigree, for greater
security,

CHAPTER XL

O.Y CERTAIN CONSEQUENCES OF THE OBJECTIVE TREAT
MENT OF A SCIENCE OF INFERENCE *.

§ 1. STUDENTS of Logic are familiar with that broad
distinction between the two methods of treatment to which
the names of Material and Conceptualist may be applied.
The distinction was one which had been gradually growing
up under other names before it was emphasized, and treated
as a distinction within the field of Logic proper, by the pub
lication of Mill's well known work. No one, for instance,
can read Whewell's treatises on Induction, or Herschel's
Discourse, without seeing that they are treating of much the
same subject matter, and regarding it in much the same
way, as that which Mill discussed under the name of Logic,
though they were not disposed to give it that name. That
is, these writers throughout took it for granted that what
they had to do was to systematise the facts of nature in
their objective form, and under their widest possible treat
ment, and to expound the principal modes of inference and
the principal practical aids in the investigation of these

1 In the previous edition a large detailed discussion of the Law of

part of this chapter was devoted to Causation, as I hope before very long

the general consideration of the dis- to express my opinions on these sub-

tinction between a Material and a jects more fully, and more appro -

Conceptualist view of Logic. I have priately, in a treatise on the general

omitted most of this here, as also a principles of Inductive Logic,
large part of a chapter devoted to the

266 Objective Treatment of Logic. [CHAP. XL

modes of inference, which reason could suggest and which
experience could justify. What Mill did was to bring these
methods into close relation with such portions of the old
scholastic Logic as he felt able to retain, to work them out
into much fuller detail, to systematize them by giving them
a certain philosophical and psychological foundation, — and
to entitle the result Logic.

The practical treatment of a science will seldom corre
spond closely to the ideal which its supporters propose to
themselves, and still seldomer to that which its antagonists
insist upon demanding from the supporters. If we were to
take our account of the distinction between the two views of
Logic expounded respectively by Hamilton and by Mill,
from Mill and Hamilton respectively, we should certainly
not find it easy to bring them under one common definition.
By such a test, the material Logic would be regarded as
nothing more than a somewhat arbitrary selection from the
domain of Physical Science in general, and the conceptualist
Logic nothing more than a somewhat arbitrary selection from
the domain of Psychology. The former would omit all con
sideration of the laws of thought and the latter all considera
tion of the truth or falsehood of our conclusions.

Of course, in practice, such extremes as these are soon
seen to be avoidable, and in spite of all controversial exagge
rations the expounders of the opposite views do contrive to
retain a large area of speculation in common. I do not pro
pose here to examine in detail the restrictions by which this
accommodation is brought about, or the very real and im
portant distinctions of method, aim, tests, and limits which
in spite of all approach to agreement are still found to subsist.
To attempt this would be to open up rather too wide an
enquiry to be suitable in a treatise on one subdivision onlv
of the general science of Inference.

SECT. 3.] Objective Treatment of Logic. 267

§ 2. One subdivision of this enquiry is however really
forced upon our notice. It does become important to con
sider the restrictions to which the ultra-material account of
the province of Logic has to be subjected, because we shall
thus have our attention drawn to an aspect of the subject
which, slight and fleeting as it is within the region of Induc
tion becomes very prominent and comparatively permanent
in that of Probability. According to this_.ultra-material view,
Inductive Logic would generally be considered to have no
thing to do with anything but objective facts : its duty is to
start from facts and to confine itself to such methods as will
yield nothing but facts. What is doubtful it either estab
lishes or ib lets alone for the present, what is unattainable
it rejects, and in this way it proceeds to build up by slow
accretion a vast fabric of certain knowledge.

But of course all this is supposed to be done by human
minds, and therefore if we enquire whether notions or con
cepts. — call them what we will, — have no place in such a
scheme it must necessarily be admitted that they have some
place. The facts which form our starting point must be
grasped by an intelligent being before inference can be built
upon them; and the 'facts' which form the conclusion have
often, at any rate for some time, no place anywhere else than
in the mind of man. But no one can read Mill's treatise, for .•&
instance, without noticing how slight is his reference to this
aspect of the question. He remarks, in almost contemptuous
indifference, that the man who digs must of course have a
notion of the ground he digs and of the spade he puts into
it, but he evidently considers that these 'notions' need not
much more occupy the attention of the speculative logician,
in so far as his mere inferences are concerned, than they
occupy that of the husbandman.
/ § 3. It must be admitted that there is some warrant

268 Objective Treatment of Logic. [CHAP. XL

I' for this omission of all reference to the subjective side of
I inference so long as we are dealing with Inductive Logic.
The inductive discoverer is of course in a very different
position. If he is worthy of the name his mind at every
moment will be teeming with notions which he would be as
far as any one from calling facts : he is busy making them
such to the best of his power. But the logician who follows
in his steps, and whose business it is to explain and justify
what his leader has discovered, is rather apt to overlook this
mental or uncertain stage. What he mostly deals in are the
'complete inductions' and 'well-grounded generalizations'
and so forth, or the exploded errors which contradict them:
the prisoners and the corpses respectively, which the real
discoverer leaves on the field behind him whilst he presses
on to complete his victory. The whole method of science, —
expository as contrasted with militant, — is to emphasize the
distinction between fact and non-fact, and to treat of little
else but these two. In other words a treatise on Inductive
Logic can be written without any occasion being found to
define what is meant by a notion or concept, or even to employ

such terms.

-\

§ 4. And yet, when we come to look more closely, signs
may be detected even within the field of Inductive Logic,
of an occasional breaking down of the sharp distinction in
question ; we may meet now and then with entities (to use
the widest term attainable) in reference to which it would
be hard to say that they are either facts or conceptions.
For instance, Inductive Logic has often occasion to make use
of ^Hypotheses : to which of the above two classes are these
to" be referred ? They do not seem in strictness to belong to
either ; nor are they, as will presently be pointed out, by any
means a solitary instance of the kind.

It is true that within the province of Inductive Logic

SECT. 4.] Objective Treatment of Logic. 269

these hypotheses do not give much trouble on this score.
However vague may be the form in which they first present
themselves to the philosopher's mind, they have not much
business to come before us in our capacity of logicians until
they are well on their way, so to say, towards becoming
facts: until they are beginning to harden into that firm
tangible shape in which they will eventually appear. We
generally have some such recommendations given to us as
that our hypotheses shall be well-grounded and reasonable.
This seems only another way of telling us that however
freely the philosopher may make his guesses in the privacy
of his own study, he had better not bring them out into
public until they can with fair propriety be termed facts,
even though the name be given with some qualification, as
by terming them ' probable facts.' The reason, therefore,
why we do not take much account of this intermediate state
in the hypothesis, when we are dealing with the inductive
processes, is that here at any rate it plays only a temporary
part ; its appearance in that guise is but very fugitive. If
the hypothesis be a sound one, it will soon take its place as
an admitted fact ; if not, it will soon be rejected altogether.
Its state as a hypothesis is not a normal one, and therefore
we have not much occasion to scrutinize its characteristics.
In so saying, it must of course be understood that we are
speaking as inductive logicians ; the philosopher in his work
shop ought, as already remarked, to be familiar enough with
the hypothesis in every stage of its existence from its origin ;
but the logician's duty is different, dealing as he does with
proof rather than with the processes of original investigation
and discovery.

"We might indeed even go further, and say that in many
cases the hypothesis does not present itself to the reader,
that is to the recipient of the knowledge, until it has ceased

270 Objective Treatment of Logic. [CHAP. xi.

to deserve that name at all. It may be first suggested to
him along with the proof which establishes it, he not having
had occasion to think of it before. It thus comes at a single
step out of the obscurity of the unknown into the full pos
session of its rights as a fact, skipping practically the inter
mediate or hypothetical stage altogether. The original in
vestigator himself may have long pondered over it, and kept
it present to his mind, in this its dubious stage, but finally
have given it to the world with that amount of evidence
which raises it at once in the minds of others to the level of
commonly accepted facts.

Still this doubtful stage exists in every hypothesis,
though for logical purposes, and to most minds, it exists
in a very fugitive way only. When attention has been
directed to it, it may be also detected elsewhere in Logic.
Take the case, for instance, of the reference of names.
Mill gives the examples of the sun, and a battle, as dis
tinguished from the ideas of them which we, or children,
may entertain. Here the distinction is plain and obvious
enough. But if, on the other hand, we take the case of
things whose existence is doubtful or disputed, the difficulty
above mentioned begins to show itself. The case of merely
extinct things, or such as have not yet come into existence,
offers indeed no trouble, since of course actually present
existence is not necessary to constitute a fact. The usual
distinction may even be retained also in the case of mythical
existences. Centaur and Griffin have as universally recog
nised a significance amongst the poets, painters, and heralds
as lion and leopard have. Hence we may claim, even here,
that our conceptions shall be ' truthful,' ' consistent with
fact/ and so on, by which we mean that they are to be in
accordance with universal convention upon such subjects.
Necessary and universal accordance is sometimes claimed

SECT. 6.] Objective Treatment of Logic. 271

to be all that is meant by 'objective/ and since universal
accordance is attainable in the case of the notoriously fic
titious, our fundamental distinction between fact and con
ception, and our determination that our terms shall refer to
what is objective rather than to what is subjective, may with
some degree of strain be still conceived to be tenable even here.

§ 5. But when we come to the case of disputed phe
nomena the difficulty re-emerges. A supposed planet or
new mineral, a doubtful fact in history, a disputed theological
doctrine, are but a few examples out of many that might be
offered. What some persons strenuously assert, others as
strenuously deny, and whatever hope there may be of speedy
agreement in the case of physical phenomena, experience
shows that there is not much prospect of this in the case of
those which are moral and historical, to say nothing of theo
logical. So long as those who are in agreement confine their
intercourse to themselves, their ' facts ' are accepted as such,
but as soon as they come to communicate with others all
distinction between fact and conception is lost at once, the
' facts ' of one party being mere groundless ' conceptions ' to
their opponents. There is therefore, I think, in these cases
a real difficulty in carrying out distinctly and consistently
the account which the Materialist logician offers as to the
reference of names. It need hardly be pointed out that
what thus applies to names or terms applies equally to
propositions in which particular or general statements are
made involving names.

§ 6. But when we step into Probability, and treat this
from the same material or Phenomenal point of view, we can
no longer neglect the question which is thus presented to us.
The difficulty cannot here be rejected, as referring to what is
merely temporary or occasional. The intermediate condition
between conjecture and fact, so far from being temporary

272 Objective Treatment of Logic. [CHAP. XL

or occasional only, is here normal. It is just the condition
which is specially characteristic of Probability. Hence it
follows that however decidedly we may reject the Con-
ceptualist theory we cannot altogether reject the use of
Conceptualist language. If we can prove that a given man
will die next year, or attain sufficiently near to proof to
leave us practically certain on the point, we may speak of
his death as a (future) fact. But if we merely contemplate
his death as probable? This is the sort of inference, or
substitute for inference, with which Probability is specially
concerned. We may, if we so please, speak of 'probable
facts,' but if we examine the meaning of the words we
may find them not merely obscure, but self- contradictory.
Doubtless there are facts here, in the fullest sense of the
term, namely the statistics upon which our opinion is ulti
mately based, for these are known and admitted by all who
have looked into the matter. The same language may also
be applied to that extension of these statistics by induction
which is involved in the assertion that similar statistics
will be found to prevail elsewhere, for these also may right
fully claim universal acceptance. But these statements, as
was abundantly shown in the earlier chapters, stand on a
very different footing from a statement concerning the in
dividual event ; the establishment and discussion of the
former belong by rights to Induction, and only the latter
to Probability.

§ 7. It is true that for want of appropriate terms to
express such things we are often induced, indeed compelled,
to apply the same name of 'facts' to such individual contin
gencies. We should not, for instance, hesitate to speak of
the fact of the man dying being probable, possible, unlikely,
or whatever it might be. But I cannot help regarding such
expressions as a strictly incorrect usage arising out of a

SECT. 8.] Objective Treatment of Logic. 273

deficiency of appropriate technical terms. It is doubtless
certain that one or other of the two alternatives must happen,
but this alternative certainty is not the subject of our con
templation ; what we have before us is the single alternative,
which is notoriously uncertain. It is this, and this only,
which is at present under notice, and whose occurrence has
to be estimated. We have surely no right to dignify this
with the name of a fact, under any qualifications, when the
opposite alternative has claims, not perhaps actually equal to,
but at any rate not much inferior to its own. Such language,
as already remarked, may be quite right in Inductive logic,
where we are only concerned with conjectures of such a high
degree of likelihood that their non-occurrence need not be
taken into practical account, and which are moreover regard
ed as merely temporary. But in Probability the conjecture
may have any degree of likelihood about it ; it may be just
as likely as the other alternative, nay it may be much less
likely. In these latter cases, for instance, if the chances are
very much against the man's death, it is surely an abuse of
language to speak of the 'fact' of his dying, even though we
qualify it by declaring it to be highly improbable. The
subject-matter essential to Probability being the uncertain,
we can never with propriety employ upon it language which
in its original and correct application is only appropriate to
what is actually or approximately certain.

§ 8. It should be remembered also that this state of
things, thus characteristic of Probability, is permanent there.
So long as they remain under the treatment of that science
our conjectures, or whatever we like to call them, never
develop into facts. I calculate, for instance, the chance that
a die will give ace, or that a man will live beyond a certain
age. Such an approximation to knowledge as is thus ac
quired is as much as we can ever afterwards hope to get,
V. 18

274 Objective Treatment of Logic. [CHAP. xi.

unless we resort to other methods of enquiry. We do not, as
in Induction, feel ourselves on the brink of some experi
mental or other proof which at any moment may raise it
into certainty. It is nothing but a conjecture of a certain
degree of strength, and such it will ever remain, so long as
Probability is left to deal with it. If anything more is ever
to be made out of it we must appeal to direct experience, or
to some kind of inductive proof. As we have so often said,
individual facts can never be determined here, but merely
ultimate tendencies and averages of many events. I may,
indeed, by a second appeal to Probability improve the
character of my conjecture, through being able to refer it to
a narrower and better class of statistics ; but its essential
nature remains throughout what it was.

It appears to me therefore that the account of the Material
ist view of logic indicated at the commencement of this
chapter, though substantially sound, needs some slight recon
sideration and restatement. It answers admirably so far as
ordinary Induction is concerned, but needs some revision
if it is to be equally applicable to that wider view of
the nature and processes of acquiring knowledge wherein
the science of logic is considered to involve Probability
also as well as Induction.

§ 9. Briefly then it is this. We regard the scientific
thinker, whether he be the original investigator who dis
covers, or the logician who analyses and describes the proofs
that may be offered, as surrounded by a world of objective
phenomena extending indefinitely both ways in time, and in
every direction in space. Most of them are, and always will
remain, unknown. If we speak of them as facts we mean
that they are potential objects of human knowledge, that
under appropriate circumstances men could come to deter
minate and final agreement about them. The scientific or

SECT. 9.] Objective Treatment of Logic. 275

material logician has to superintend the process of converting
as much as possible of these unknown phenomena into what
are known, of aggregating them, as we have said above, about
the nucleus of certain data which experience and observation
had to start with. In so doing his principal resources are
the Methods of Induction, of which something has been
said in a former chapter; another resource is found in the
Theory of Probability, and another in Deduction.

Now, however such language may be objected to as
savouring of Conceptualism, I can see no better compendious
way of describing these processes than by saying that we are
engaged in getting at conceptions of these external pheno
mena, and as far as possible converting these conceptions
into facts. What is the natural history of 'facts' if we trace
them back to their origin ? They first come into being as
• mere guesses or conjectures, as contemplated possibilities
whose correspondence with reality is either altogether dis
believed or regarded as entirely doubtful. In this stage, of
course, their contrast with facts is sharp enough. How they
arise it does not belong to Logic but to Psychology to say.
Logic indeed has little or nothing to do with them whilst
they are in this form. Everyone is busy all his life in enter
taining such guesses upon various subjects, the superiority of
the philosopher over the common man being mainly found in
the quality of his guesses, and in the skill and persistence
with which he sifts and examines them. In the next stage

o

they mostly go by the name of theories or hypotheses, when
they are comprehensive in their scope, or are in any way on
a scale of grandeur and importance : when however they are
of a trivial kind, or refer to details, we really have no distinc
tive or appropriate name for them, and must be content
therefore to call them 'conceptions.' Through this stage
they flit with great rapidity in Inductive Logic ; often the

18—2

276 Objective Treatment of Logic. [CHAP. XT.

logician keeps them back until their evidence is so strong
that they come before the world at once in the full dignity
of facts. Hence, as already remarked, this stage of their
career is not much dwelt upon in Logic. But the whole
business of Probability is to discuss and estimate them at
this point. Consequently, so far as this science is concerned,
the explanation of the Material logician as to the reference
of names and propositions has to be modified.

§ 10. The best way therefore of describing our position
in Probability is as follows : — We are entertaining a concep
tion of some event, past, present, or future. From the nature
of the case this conception is all that can be actually enter
tained by the mind. In its present condition it would be
incorrect to call it a fact, though we would willingly, if we
could, convert it into such by making certain of it one way
or the other. But so long as our conclusions are to be
effected by considerations of Probability only, we cannot do
this. The utmost we can do is to estimate or evaluate it.
The whole function of Probability is to give rules for so
doing. By means of reference to statistics or by direct
deduction, as the case may be, we are enabled to say how
much this conception is to be believed, that is in what pro
portion out of the total number of cases we shall be right
in so doing. Our position, therefore, in these cases seems
distinctly that of entertaining a conception, and the process
of inference is that of ascertaining to what extent we are
justified in adding this conception to the already received
body of truth and fact.

So long, then, as we are confined to Probability these
conceptions remain such. But if we turn to Induction we
see that they are meant to go a step further. Their final
stage is not reached until they have ripened into facts, and
so taken their place amongst uncontested truths. This is

SECT. 11.] Objective Treatment of Logic. 277

their final destination in Logic, and our task is not accom
plished until they have reached it.

§ 11. Such language as this in which we speak of our
position in Probability as being that of entertaining a con
ception, and being occupied in determining what degree of
belief is to be assigned to it, may savour of Conceptualism,
but is in spirit perfectly different from it. Our ultimate
reference is always to facts. We start from them as our data,
and reach them again eventually in our results whenever it
is possible.' In Probability, of course, we cannot do this in
the individual result, but even then (as shown in Ch. vi.) we
always justify our conclusions by appeal to facts, viz. to what
happens in the long run.

The discussion which has been thus given to this part of
the subject may seem somewhat tedious, but it was so ob
viously forced upon us when considering the distinction
between the two main views of Logic, that it was impossible
to pass it over without fear of misapprehension and confu
sion. Moreover, as will be seen in the course of the next
chapter, several important conclusions could not have been
properly explained and justified without first taking pains
to make this part of our ground perfectly plain and satis
factory.

CHAPTER XII.

CONSEQUENCES OF THE FOREGOING DISTINCTIONS.

§ 1. WE are now in a position to explain and justify some
important conclusions which, if not direct consequences of
the distinctions laid down in the last chapter, will at any
rate be more readily appreciated and accepted after that
exposition.

In the first place, it will be seen that in Probability time
has nothing to do with the question ; in other words, it does
not matter whether the event, whose probability we are dis
cussing, be past, present, or future. The problem before us,
in its simplest form, is this : — Statistics (extended by Induc
tion, and practically often gained by Deduction) inform us
that a certain event has happened, does happen, or will
happen, in a certain way in a certain proportion of cases,
We form a conception of that event, and regard it as possible -f
but we want to do more ; we want to know how much we
ought to expect it (under the explanations given in a for
mer chapter about quantity of belief). There is therefore a
sort of relative futurity about the event, inasmuch as our
knowledge of the fact, and therefore our justification or
otherwise of the correctness of our surmise, almost neces
sarily comes after the surmise was formed ; but the futurity
is only relative. The evidence by which the question is to
be settled may not be forthcoming yet, or we may have it by

SECT. 2.] Probability before and after the event. 279

us but only consult it afterwards. It is from the fact of the
futurity being, as above described, only relative, that I have
preferred to speak of the conception of the event rather than
of the anticipation of it. The latter term, which in some re
spects would have seemed more intelligible and appropriate,
is open to the objection, that it does rather, in popular esti
mation, convey the notion of an absolute as opposed to a
relative futurity.

§ 2. For example ; a die is thrown. Once in six times
it gives ace ; if therefore we assume, without examination,
that the throw is ace, we shall be right once in six times.
In so doing we may, according to the usual plan, go forwards
in time ; that is, form our opinion about the throw before -
hand, when no one can tell what it will be. Or we might go
backwards; that is, form an opinion about dice that had
been cast on some occasion in time past, and then correct
our opinion by the testimony of some one who had been a
witness of the throws. In either case the mental operation
is precisely the same ; an opinion formed merely oh statisti
cal grounds is afterwards corrected by specific evidence. The
opinion may have been formed upon a past, present, or future
event ; the evidence which corrects it afterwards may be our
own eyesight, or the testimony of others, or any kind of in
ference ; by the evidence is merely meant such subsequent
examination of the case as is assumed to set the matter at
rest. It is quite possible, of course, that this specific evi
dence should never be forthcoming ; the conception in that
case remains as a conception, and never obtains that degree
of conviction which qualifies it to be regarded as a ' fact.'
This is clearly the case with all past throws of dice the re
sults of which do not happen to have been recorded.

In discussing games of chance there are obvious advan
tages in confining ourselves to what is really, as well as

280 Probability before and after the event. [CHAP. xn.

relatively, future, for in that case direct information concern
ing the contemplated result being impossible, all persons are
on precisely the same footing of comparative ignorance, and
must form their opinion entirely from the known or inferred
frequency of occurrence of the event in question. On the
other hand, if the event be passed, there is almost always evi
dence of some kind and of some value, however slight, to
inform us what the event really was ; if this evidence is not
actually at hand, we can generally, by waiting a little, obtain
something that shall be at least of some use to us in forming
our opinion. Practically therefore we generally confine our
selves, in anticipations of this kind, to what is really future,
and so in popular estimation futurity becomes indissolubly
associated with probability.

§ 3. There is however an error closely connected with
the above view of the subject, or at least an inaccuracy of
expression which is constantly liable to lead to error, which
has found wide acceptance, and has been sanctioned by
writers of the greatest authority. For instance, both Butler,
in his Analogy, and Mill, have drawn attention, under one
form of expression or another, to the distinction between im
probability before the event and improbability after the
event, which they consider to be perfectly different things.
That this phraseology indicates a distinction of importance
cannot be denied, but it seems to me that the language in
which it is often expressed requires to be amended.

Butler's remarks on this subject occur in his Analogy, in
the chapter on miracles. Admitting that there is a strong
presumption against miracles (his equivalent for the ordi
nary expression, an 'improbability before the event') he
strives to obtain assent for them by showing that other
events, which also have a strong presumption against them,
are received on what is in reality very slight evidence. He

SECT. 4.] Probability before and after the event. 281

says, " There is a very strong presumption against common
speculative truths, and against the most ordinary facts, be
fore the proof of them ; which yet is overcome by almost any
proof. There is a presumption of millions to one against the
story of Csesar, or of any other man. For, suppose a number
of common facts so and so circumstanced, of which one had
no kind of proof, should happen to come into one's thoughts,
every one would without any possible doubt conclude them
to be false. And the like may be said of a single common
fact."

§ 4. These remarks have been a good deal criticized,
and they certainly seem to me misleading and obscure in
their reference. If one may judge by the context, and by
another passage in which the same argument is afterwards
referred to1, it would certainly appear that Butler drew no
distinction between miraculous accounts, and other accounts
which, to use any of the various expressions in common use,
are unlikely or improbable or have a presumption against
them ; and concluded that since some of the latter were in
stantly accepted upon somewhat mediocre testimony, it was
altogether irrational to reject the former when similarly or
better supported2. This subject will come again under our
notice, and demand fuller discussion, in the chapter on the
Credibility of extraordinary stories. It will suffice here to

1 " Is it not self-evident that inter- to common natural events; or to

nal improbabilities of all kinds weak- events which, though uncommon,

en external proof? Doubtless, but are similar to what we daily expe-

to what practical purpose can this be rience ; but to the extraordinary

alleged here, when it has been proved phenomena of nature. And then

before, that real internal improbabi- the comparison will be between the

lities, which rise even to moral cer- presumption against miracles, and

tainty, are overcome by the most the presumption against such un-

ordinary testimony." Part II. ch. in. common appearances, suppose as

- " Miracles must not be compared comets," Part II. ch. n.

282 Probability before and after the event [CHAP. xn.

remark that, however satisfactory such a view of the matter
might be to some theologians, no antagonist of miracles
would for a moment accept it. He would naturally object
that, instead of the miraculous element being (as Butler
considers) "a small additional presumption" against the
narrative, it involved the events in a totally distinct class of
incredibility ; that it multiplied, rather than merely added
to, the difficulties and objections in the way of accepting
the account.

Mill's remarks (Logic, Bk. in. ch. xxv. § 4) are of a dif
ferent character. Discussing the grounds of disbelief he
speaks of people making the mistake of " overlooking the
distinction between (what may be called) improbability
before the fact, and improbability after it, two different
properties, the latter of which is always a ground of dis
belief, the former not always." He instances the throwing
of a die. It is improbable beforehand that it should turn
up ace, and yet afterwards, " there is no reason for disbe
lieving it if any credible witness asserts it." So again, " the
chances are greatly against A. B.'s dying, yet if any one tells
us that he died yesterday we believe it."

§ 5. That there is some difficulty about such problems
as these must be admitted. The fact that so many people
find them a source of perplexity, and that such various
explanations are offered to solve the perplexity, are a suf
ficient proof of this1. The considerations of the last chapter,

1 For instance, Sir J. F. Stephen babilities and chances. The proba

explains it by drawing a distinction bility of an event is its capability of

between chances and probabilities, being proved. Its chance is the

which he says that Butler has con- numerical proportion between the

fused together; "the objection that number of possible cases — supposed

very ordinary proof will overcome a to be equally favourable— favourable

presumption of millions to one is to its occurrence; and the number

based upon a confusion between pro- of possible cases unfavourable to its

SECT. 6.] Probability before and after the event. 283

however, over-technical and even scholastic as some of the
language in which it was expressed may have seemed to the
reader, will I hope guide us to a more satisfactory way of
regarding the matter.

When we speak of an improbable event, it must be
remembered that, objectively considered, an event can only
be more or less rare ; the extreme degree of rarity being of
course that in which the event does not occur at all. Now,
as was shown in the last chapter, our position, when forming
judgments of the time in question, is that of entertaining
a conception or conjecture (call it what we will), and as
signing a certain weight of trustworthiness to it. The real
distinction, therefore, between the two classes of examples
respectively, which are adduced both by Butler aod by Mill,
consists in the way in which those conceptions are obtained ;
they being obtained in one case by the process of guessing,
and in the other by that of giving heed to the reports of
witnesses.

§ 6. Take Butler's instance first. In the ' presumption
before the proof we have represented to us a man thinking
of the story of Caesar, that is, making a guess about certain
historical events without any definite grounds for it, and
then speculating as to what value is to be attached to the
probability of its truth. Such a guess is of course, as he
says, concluded to be false. But what does he understand
by the 'presumption after the proof? That a story not
adopted at random, but actually suggested and supported by
witnesses, should be true. The latter might be accepted,
whilst the former would undoubtedly be rejected; but all
that this proves, or rather illustrates, is that the testimony

occurrence " (General view of the Cri- 1851), employs the terms improba-
minal Law of England, p. 255). bility and incredibility to mark the
Donkin, again (Phil. Magazine, June, same distinction.

284 Probability before and after the event. [CHAP. xn.

of almost any witness is in most cases vastly better than
a mere guess1. We may in both cases alike speak of 'the
event ' if we will ; in fact, as was admitted in the last
chapter, common language will not readily lend itself to any
other way of speaking. But it should be clearly under
stood that, phrase it how we will, what is really present to
the man's mind, and what is to have its probable value
assigned to it, is the conception of an event, in the sense in
which that expression has already been explained. And
surely no two conceptions can have a much more important
distinction put between them than that which is involved in
supposing one to rest on a mere guess, and the other on the
report of a witness. Precisely the same remarks apply to
the example given by Mill. Before A. B.'s death our
opinion upon the subject was nothing but a guess of our
own founded upon life statistics ; after his death it was
founded upon the evidence of some one who presumably
had tolerable opportunities of knowing what the facts really
were.

§ 7. That the distinction before us has no essential con
nection whatever with time is indeed obvious on a moment's
consideration. Conceive for a moment that some one had
opportunities of knowing whether A. B. would die or not.
If he told us that A. B. would die to-morrow, we should in
that case be just as ready to believe him as when he tells us
that A. B. has died. If we continued to feel any doubt
about the statement (supposing always that we had full

1 In the extreme case of the wit- again in Chapter xvn. It may be
ness himself merely guessing, or remarked that there are several sub-
being as untrustworthy as if he tleties here which cannot be ade-
merely guessed, the two stones will quately noticed without some previ-
of course stand on precisely the same ous investigation into the question
footing. This case will be noticed of the credibility of witnesses.

SECT. 8.] Probability before and after the event. 285

confidence about his veracity in matters into which he had
duly enquired), it would be because we thought that in his
case, as in ours, it was equivalent to a guess, and nothing
more. So with the event when past, the fact of its being-
past makes no difference whatever; until the credible wit
ness informs us of what he knows to have occurred, we
should doubt it if it happened to come into our minds, just
as much as if it were future.

The distinction, therefore, between probability before the
event and probability after the event seems to resolve itself
simply into this ; — before the event we often have no better
means of information than to appeal to statistics in some
form or other, and so to guess amongst the various possible
alternatives ; after the event the guess may most commonly
be improved or superseded by appeal to specific evidence,
in the shape of testimony or observation. Hence, naturally,
our estimate in the latter case is commonly of much more
value. But if these characteristics were anyhow inverted ;
if, that is, we were to confine ourselves to guessing about the
past, and if we could find any additional evidence about the
future, the respective values of the different estimates would
also be inverted. The difference between these values has
no necessary connection with time, but depends entirely
upon the different grounds upon which our conception or
conjecture about the event in question rests.

§ 8. The following imaginary example will serve to
bring out the point indicated above. Conceive a people with
very short memories, and who preserved no kind of record to
perpetuate their hold upon the events which happened
amongst them1. The whole region of the past would then be

1 According to Dante, something cardinals and others whom he there
resembling this prevailed amongst meets are able to give information
the occupants of the Inferno. The about many events which were yet

286 Probability before and after the event. [CHAP. xn.

to them what much of the future is to us ; viz. a region of
guesses and conjectures, one in reference to which they
could only judge upon general considerations of probability,
rather than by direct and specific evidence. But conceive
also that they had amongst them a race of prophets who
could succeed in foretelling the future with as near an
approach to accuracy and trustworthiness as our various
histories, and biographies, and recollections, can attain in
respect to the past. The present and usual functions of
direct evidence or testimony, and of probability, would then
be simply inverted ; and so in consequence would the pre
sent accidental characteristics of improbability before and
after the event. It would then be the latter which would
by comparison be regarded as ' not always a ground of dis
belief,' whereas in the case of the former we should then
have it maintained that it always was so.

§ 9. The origin of the mistake just discussed is worth
enquiring into. I take it to be as follows. It is often the
case, as above remarked, when we are speculating about
a future event, and almost always the case when that future
event is taken from a game of chance, that all persons are in
precisely the same condition of ignorance in respect to it.
The limit of available information is confined to statistics,
and amounts to the knowledge that the unknown event
must assume some one of various alternative forms. The
conjecture, therefore, of any one man about it is as valuable
as that of any other. But in regard to the past the case is
very different. Here we are not in the habit of relying
upon statistical information. Hence the conjectures of dif
ferent men are of extremely different values ; in the case of
many they amount to what we call positive knowledge.

to happen upon earth, but they had actually had happened,
to ask it for many events which

SECT. 10.] Probability before and after the event. 287

This puts a broad distinction, in popular estimation, between
what may be called the objective certainty of the past and of
the future, a distinction, however, which from the standing-
point of a science of inference ought to have no existence.

In consequence of this, when we apply to the past and
the future respectively the somewhat ambiguous expression
' the chance of the event,' it commonly comes to bear very
different significations. Applied to the future it bears its
proper meaning, namely, the value to be assigned to a con
jecture upon statistical grounds. It does so, because in this
case hardly any one has more to judge by than such con
jectures. But applied to the past it shifts its meaning,
owing to the fact that whereas some men have conjectures
only, others have positive knowledge. By the chance of the
event is now often meant, not the value to be assigned to a
conjecture founded on statistics, but to such a conjecture
derived from and enforced by any body else's conjecture, that
is by his knowledge and his testimony.

§ 10. There is a class of cases in apparent opposition to
some of the statements in this chapter, but which will be
found, when examined closely, decidedly to confirm them.
I am walking, say, in a remote part of the country, and sud
denly meet with a friend. At this I am naturally surprised.
Yet if the view be correct that we cannot properly speak
about events in themselves being probable or improbable,
but only say this of our conjectures about them, how do we
explain this ? We had formed no conjecture beforehand,
for we were not thinking about anything of the kind, but
yet few would fail to feel surprise at such an incident.

The reply might fairly be made that we had formed
such anticipations tacitly. On any such occasion every
one unconsciously divides things into those which are known
to him and those which are not. During a considerable

288 Probability before and after the event. [CHAP. xn.

previous period a countless number of persons had met us,
and all fallen into the list of the unknown to us. There
was nothing to remind us of having formed the anticipa
tion or distinction at all, until it was suddenly called out
into vivid consciousness by the exceptional event. The
words which we should instinctively use in our surprise seem
to show this:— 'Who would have thought of seeing you
here?' viz. Who would have given any weight to the latent
thought if it had been called out into consciousness before
hand ? We put our words into the past tense, showing that
we have had the distinction lurking in our minds all the
time. We always have a multitude of such ready-made
classes of events in our minds, and when a thing happens to
fall into one of those classes which are very small we cannot
help noticing the fact.

Or suppose I am one of a regiment into which a shot
flies, and it strikes me, and me only. At this I am sur
prised, and why ? Our common language will guide us to the
reason. ' How strange that it should just have hit me of all
men !' We are thinking of the very natural two-fold division
of mankind into, ourselves, and everybody else ; our surprise
is again, as it were, retrospective, and in reference to this
division. No anticipation was distinctly formed, because
we did not think beforehand of the event, but the event,
when it has happened, is at once assigned to its appropriate

class.

§ 11. This view is confirmed by the following considera
tions. Tell the story to a friend, and he will be a little
surprised, but less so than we were, his division in this
particular case being, — his friends (of whom we are but one),
and the rest of mankind. It is not a necessary division, but
it is the one which will be most likely suggested to him.

Tell it again to a perfect stranger, and his division being

SECT. 12.] Probability before and after the event. 289

different (viz. we falling into the majority) we shall fail to
make him perceive that there is anything at all remarkable
in the event.

It is not of course attempted in these remarks to justify
our surprise in every case in which it exists. Different
persons might be differently affected in the cases supposed,
and the examples are therefore given mainly for illustration.
Still on principles already discussed (Ch. vi. § 32) we might
expect to find something like a general justification of the
amount of surprise.

§ 12. The answer commonly given in these cases is
confined to attempting to show that the surprise should not
arise, rather than to explaining how it does arise. It takes
the following form, — ' You have no right to be surprised, for
nothing remarkable has really occurred. If this particular
thing had not happened something equally improbable
must. If the shot had not hit you or your friend, it must
have hit some one else who was a priori as unlikely to be
hit/

For one thing this answer does not explain the fact
that almost every one is surprised in such cases, and sur
prised somewhat in the different proportions mentioned
above. Moreover it has the inherent unsatisfactoriness
of admitting that something improbable has really hap
pened, but getting over the difficulty by saying that all the
other alternatives were equally improbable. A natural in
ference from this is that there is a class of things, in them
selves really improbable, which can yet be established upon
very slight evidence. Butler accepted this inference, and
worked it out to the strange conclusion given above. Mill
attempts to avoid it by the consideration of the very differ
ent values to be assigned to improbability before and after
the event. Some further discussion of this point will be

v. 19

290 The Relativity of Probability. [CHAP. xil.

found in the chapter on Fallacies, and in that on the Credi
bility of Extraordinary Stories.

§ 13. In connection with the subject at present under
discussion we will now take notice of a distinction which we
shall often find insisted on in works on Probability, but to
which apparently needless importance has been attached.
It is frequently said that probability is relative, in the sense
that it has a different value to different persons according
to their respective information upon the subject in ques
tion. For example, two persons, A and B, are going to draw
a ball from a bag containing 4 balls : A knows that the
balls are black and white, but does not know more;
B knows that three are black and one white. It would
be said that the probability of a white ball to A is J, and
to£i.

When however we regard the subject from the material
standing point, there really does not seem to me much more
in this than the principle, equally true in every other science,
that our inferences will vary according to the data we as
sume. We might on logical grounds with almost equal
propriety speak of the area of a field or the height of a
mountain being relative, and therefore having one value to
one person and another to another. The real meaning of the
example cited above is this : A supposes that he is choosing
white at random out of a series which in the long run would
give white and black equally often ; B supposes that he
is choosing white out of a series which in the long run would
give three black to one white. By the application, there
fore, of a precisely similar rule they draw different conclu
sions; but so they would under the same circumstances in
any other science. If two men are measuring the height of
a mountain, and one supposes his base to be 1000 feet,
whilst the other takes it to be 1001, they would of course

SECT. 14.] The Relativity of Probability. 291

form different opinions about the height. The science of
mensuration is not supposed to have anything to do with
the truth of the data, but assumes them to have been cor
rectly taken ; why should not this be equally the case with
Probability, making of course due allowance for the peculiar
character of the data with which it is concerned ?

§ 14. This view of the relativeness of probability is
connected, as it appears to me, with the subjective view of
the science, and is indeed characteristic of it. It seems a
fair illustration of the weak side of that view, that it should
lead us to lay any stress on such an expression. As was
fully explained in the last chapter, in proportion as we work
out the Conceptualist principle we are led away from the
fundamental question of the material logic, viz. Is our belief
actually correct, or not ? and, if the former, to what extent
and degree is it correct ? We are directed rather to ask,
What belief does any one as a matter of fact hold ? And,
since the belief thus entertained naturally varies according
to the circumstances and other sources of information of the
person in question, its relativeness comes to be admitted as
inevitable, or at least it is not to be wondered at if such
should be the case.

On our view of Probability, therefore, its ' relativeness ' in
any given case is a misleading expression, and it will be
found much preferable to speak of the effect produced by
variations in the nature and amount of the data which we
have before us. Now it must be admitted that there are
frequently cases in our science in which such variations are
peculiarly likely to be found. For instance, I am expecting
a friend who is a passenger in an ocean steamer. There are
a hundred passengers on board, and the crew also numbers
a hundred. I read in the papers that one person was lost by
falling overboard ; my anticipation that it was my friend who

19—2

292 The Relativity of Probability. [CHAP. xn.

was lost is but small, of course. On turning to another
paper, I see that the man who was lost was a passenger, not
one of the crew ; my slight anxiety is at once doubled. But
another account adds that it was an Englishman, and on
that line at that season the English passengers are known
to be few ; I at once begin to entertain decided fears. And
so on, every trifling bit of information instantly affecting my
expectations.

§ 15. Now since it is peculiarly characteristic of Proba
bility, as distinguished from Induction, to be thus at the
mercy, so to say, of every little fact that may be floating
about when we are in the act of forming our opinion, what
can be the harm (it may be urged) of expressing this state
of things by terming our state of expectation relative ?

There seem to me to be two objections. In the first place,
as just mentioned, we are induced to reject such an expres
sion on grounds of consistency. It is inconsistent with the
general spirit and treatment of the subject hitherto adopted,
and tends to divorce Probability from Inductive logic instead
of regarding them as cognate sciences. We are aiming at
truth, as far as that goal can be reached by our road, and
therefore we dislike to regard our conclusions as relative in
any other sense than that in which truth itself may be said
to be relative.

In the second place, this condition of unstable assent,
this constant liability to have our judgment affected, to any
degree and at any moment, by the accession of new know
ledge, though doubtless characteristic of Probability, does
not seem to me characteristic of it in its sounder and more
legitimate applications. It seems rather appropriate to a
precipitate judgment formed in accordance with the rulesr
than a strict example of their natural employment. Such
precipitate judgments may occur in the case of ordinary de-

SECT. 16.] The Relativity of Probability. 293

ductive conclusions. In the practical exigencies of life we
are constantly in the habit of forming a hasty opinion with
nearly full confidence, at any rate temporarily, upon the
strength of evidence which we must well know at the time
cannot be final. We wait a short time, and something else
turns up which induces us to alter our opinion, perhaps to
reverse it. Here our conclusions may have been perfectly
sound under the given circumstances, that is, they may be
such as every one else would have drawn who was bound to
make up his mind upon the data before us, and they are
unquestionably 'relative' judgments in the sense now under
discussion. And yet, I think, every one would shrink from
so terming them who wished systematically to carry out the
view that Logic was to be regarded as an organon of truth.

§ 16. In the examples of Probability which we have
hitherto employed, we have for the most part assumed that
there was a certain body of statistics set before us on which
our conclusion was to rest. It was assumed, on the one
hand, that no direct specific evidence could be got, so that
the judgment was really to be one of Probability, and to rest
on these statistics ; in other words, that nothing better than
them was available for us. But it was equally assumed, on
the other hand, that these statistics were open to the obser
vation of every one, so that we need not have to put up with
anything inferior to them in forming our opinion. In other
words, we have been assuming that here, as in the case of
most other sciences, those who have to draw a conclusion
start from the same footing of opportunity and information.
This, for instance, clearly is or ought to be the case when
we are concerned with games of chance ; ignorance or mis
apprehension of the common data is never contemplated
there. So with the statistics of life, or other insurance : so
long as our judgment is to be accurate (after its fashion) or

294 The Relativity of Probability. [CHAP. xn.

justifiable, the common tables of mortality are all that any
one has to go by.

§ 17. It is true that in the case of a man's prospect of
death we should each qualify our judgment by what we
knew or reasonably supposed as to his health, habits, pro
fession, and so on, and should thus arrive at varying esti
mates. But no one could justify his own estimate without
appealing explicitly or implicitly to the statistical grounds on
which he had relied, and if these were not previously avail
able to other persons, he must now set them before their
notice. In other words, the judgments we entertain, here as
elsewhere, are only relative so long as we rest them on
grounds peculiar to ourselves. The process of justification,
which I consider to be essential to logic, has a tendency to
correct such individualities of judgment, and to set all ob
servers on the same basis as regards their data.

It is better therefore to regard the conclusions of Proba
bility as being absolute and objective, in the same sense as,
though doubtless in a far less degree than, they are in Induc
tion. Fully admitting that our conclusions will in many
cases vary exceedingly from time to time by fresh accessions
of knowledge, it is preferable to regard such fluctuations of
assent as partaking of the nature of precipitate judgments,
founded on special statistics, instead of depending only on
those which are common to all observers. In calling such
judgments precipitate it is not implied that there is any
blame in entertaining them, but simply that, for one reason
or another, we have been induced to form them without
waiting for the possession of the full amount of evidence,
statistical or otherwise, which might ultimately be looked
for. This explanation will suit the facts equally well, and is
more consistent with the general philosophical position main
tained in this work.

CHAPTER XIII.

ON THE CONCEPTION AND TREATMENT OF MODALITY.

§ 1. THE reader who knows anything of the scholastic
Logic will have perceived before now that we have been
touching in a variety of places upon that most thorny and
repulsive of districts in the logical territory ; — modality. It
will be advisable, however, to put together, somewhat more
definitely, what has to be said upon the subject. I propose,
therefore, to devote this chapter to a brief account of the
principal varieties of treatment which the modals have re
ceived at the hands of professed logicians.

It must be remarked at the outset that the sense in
which modality and modal propositions have been at various
times understood, is by no means fixed and invariably the
same. This diversity of view has arisen partly from cor
responding differences in the view taken of the province and
nature of logic, and partly from differences in the philo
sophical and scientific opinions entertained as to the con
stitution and order of nature. In later times, moreover,
another very powerful agent in bringing about a change in
the treatment of the subject must be recognized in the
gradual and steady growth of the theory of Probability, as
worked out by the mathematicians from their own point of
view.

§ 2. In spite, however, of these differences of treatment,
there has always been some community of subject-matter in
the discussions upon this topic. There has almost always

296 Modality. [CHAP. xm.

been some reference to quantity of belief; enough perhaps
to justify De Morgan's1 remark, that Probability was "the
unknown God whom the schoolmen ignorant ly worshipped
when they so dealt with this species of enunciation, that it
was said to be beyond human determination whether they
most tortured the modals, or the modals them." But this
reference to quantity of belief has sometimes been direct and
immediate, sometimes indirect and arising out of the nature
of the subject-matter of the proposition. The fact is, that
that distinction between the purely subjective and purely ob
jective views of logic, which I have endeavoured to bring out
into prominence in the eleventh chapter, was not by any
means clearly recognized in early times, nor indeed before
the time of Kant, and the view to be taken of modality
naturally shared in the consequent confusion. This will, I
hope, be made clear in the course of the following chapter,
which is intended to give a brief sketch of the principal
different ways in which the modality of propositions has
been treated in logic. As it is not proposed to give any
thing like a regular history of the subject, there will be no
necessity to adhere to any strict sequence of time, or to
discuss the opinions of any writers, except those who may be
taken as representative of tolerably distinct views. The
outcome of such investigation will be, I hope, to convince
the reader (if, indeed, he had not come to that conviction
before), that the logicians, after having had a long and fair
trial, have failed to make anything satisfactory out of this
subject of the modals by their methods of enquiry and treat
ment ; and that it ought, therefore, to be banished entirely
from that science, and relegated to Probability.

§ 3. From the earliest study of the syllogistic process
it was seen that, complete as that process is within its own

1 Formal Logic, p. 232.

SECT. 4.] Modality. 297

domain, the domain, at any rate under its simplest treatment,
is a very limited one. Propositions of the pure form, — All
(or some) A is (or is not) B, — are found in practice to form
but a small portion even of our categorical statements. We
are perpetually meeting with others which express the re
lation of B to A with various degrees of necessity or pro
bability ; e. g. A must be J9, A may be B : or the effect of
such facts upon our judgment, e.g. I am perfectly certain
that A is B, I think that A may be B ; with many others of
a more or less similar type. The question at once arises,
How are such propositions to be treated ? It does not seem
to have occurred to the old logicians, as to some of their suc
cessors in modern times, simply to reject all consideration of
this topic. Their faith in the truth and completeness of
their system of inference was far too firm for them to sup
pose it possible that forms of proposition universally recog
nized as significant in popular speech, and forms of inference
universally recognized there as valid, were to be omitted
because they were inconvenient or complicated.

§ 4. One very simple plan suggests itself, and has in
deed been repeatedly advocated, viz. just to transfer all that
is characteristic of such propositions into that convenient re
ceptacle for what is troublesome elsewhere, the predicate1.
Has not another so-called modality been thus got rid of2?

1 This appears to be the purport draws apparently no such distinction

of some statements in a very con- as that between the true and false

fused passage in Whately's Logic modality referred to in the next note.

(Bk. II., ch. iv. § 1). "A modal What is really surprising is that

proposition may be stated as a pure even Hamilton puts the two (the true

one by attaching the mode to one of and the false modality) upon the

the terms, and the proposition will same footing. "In regard to these

in all respects fall under the forego- [the former] the case is precisely the

ing rules;... 'It is probable that all same; the mode is merely a part of

knowledge is useful ;' ' probably use- the predicate." Logic, i. 257.
ful' is here the predicate." He 2 I allude of course to such ex-

298 Modality. [CHAP. XIIL

and has it not been attempted by the same device to abolish
the distinctive characteristic of negative propositions, viz. by
shifting the negative particle into the predicate ? It must
be admitted that, up to a certain point, something may be
done in this way. Given the reasoning, 'Those who take
arsenic will probably die ; A has taken it, therefore he will
probably die ; ' it is easy to convert this into an ordinary
syllogism of the pure type, by simply wording the major,
' Those who take arsenic are people-who-will-probably-die/
when the conclusion follows in the same form, 'A is one
who-will-probably-die.' But this device will only carry us
a very little way. Suppose that the minor premise also is
of the same modal description, e.g. 'A has probably taken
arsenic,' and it will be seen that we cannot relegate the
modality here also to the predicate without being brought to
a stop by finding that there are four terms in the syllogism.

But even if there were not this particular objection, it
does not appear that anything is to be gained in the way of
intelligibility or method by such a device as the above. For

amples as *A killed B unjustly,' in 'material modality' and the genuine

which the killing of B by A was kind ' formal modality '. The former

sometimes said to be asserted not included all the cases in which the

simply but with a modification. modification belonged by right either

(Hamilton's Logic, i. 256.) It is to the predicate or to the subject ;

obvious that the modification in the latter was reserved for the cases

such cases is by rights merely a in which the modification affected

part of the predicate, there being no the real conjunction of the predicate

formal distinction between 'A is the with the subject. (Keckermann.

killer of B' and 'A is the unjust Systema Logics, Lib. n. ch. 3.) It

killer of B.' Indeed some logicians was, I believe, a common scholastic

who were too conservative to reject distinction.

the generic name of modality in this For some account of the dispute

application adopted the common ex- as to whether the negative particle

pedient of introducing a specific dis- was to be considered to belong to

tinction which did away with its the copula or to the predicate, see

meaning, terming the spurious kind Hamilton's Logic, i. 253.

SECT. 5.] Modality. 299

what is meant by a modal predicate, by the predicate
' probably mortal,' for instance, in the proposition 'All poison
ings by arsenic are probably mortal' ? If the analogy with
ordinary pure propositions is to hold good, it must be a
predicate referring to the whole of the subject, for the sub
ject is distributed. But then we are at once launched into
the difficulties discussed in a former chapter (Ch. vi. §§ 19 —
25), when we attempt to justify or verify the application of
the predicate. We have to enquire (at least on the view
adopted in this work) whether the application of the pre
dicate ' probably mortal ' to the whole of the subject, really
means at bottom anything else than that the predicate
' mortal ' is to be applied to a portion (more than half) of the
members denoted by the subject. When the transference of
the modality to the predicate raises such intricate questions
as to the sense in which the predicate is to be interpreted,
there is surely nothing gained by the step.

§ 5. A second, and more summary way of shelving all
difficulties of the subject, so far at least as logic, or the
writers upon logic, are concerned, is found by simply denying
that modality has any connection whatever with logic. This
is the course adopted by many modern writers, for instance,
by Hamilton and Mansel, in reference to whom one cannot
help remarking that an unduly large portion of their logical
writings seems occupied with telling us what does not belong
to logic. They justify their rejection on the ground that
the mode belongs to the matter, and must be determined by
a consideration of the matter, and therefore is extralogical.
To a certain extent I agree with their grounds of rejection,
for (as explained in Chapter vi.) it is not easy to see how
the degree of modality of any proposition, whether premise
or conclusion, can be justified without appeal to the matter.
But then questions of justification, in any adequate sense of

300 Modality. [CHAP. xm.

the term, belong to a range of considerations somewhat alien
to Hamilton's and Hansel's way of regarding the science.
The complete justification of our inferences is a matter
which involves their truth or falsehood, a point with which
these writers do not much concern themselves, being only
occupied with the consistency of our reasonings, not with
their conformity with fact. Were I speaking as a Hamil-
tonian I should say that modality is formal rather than
material, for though we cannot justify the degree of our
belief of a proposition without appeal to the matter, we can
to a moderate degree of accuracy estimate it without any
such appeal ; and this would seem to be quite enough to
warrant its being regarded as formal.

It must be admitted that Hamilton's account of the
matter when he is recommending the rejection of the modals,
is not by any means clear and consistent. He not only fails,
as already remarked, to distinguish between the formal and
the material (in other words, the true and the false) mo
dality ; but when treating of the former he fails to distinguish
between the extremely diverse aspects of modality when
viewed from the Aristotelian and the Kantian stand-points.
Of the amount and significance of this difference we shall
speak presently, but it may be just pointed out here that
Hamilton begins (Vol. i. p. 257) by rejecting the modals on
the ground that the distinctions between the necessary, the
contingent, the possible, and the impossible, must be wholly
rested on an appeal to the matter of the propositions, in
which he is, I think, quite correct. But then a little further
on (p. 260), in explaining ' the meaning of three terms which
are used in relation to pure and modal propositions,' he gives
the widely different Kantian, or threefold division into the
apodeictic, the assertory, and the problematic. He does not
take the precaution of pointing out to his hearers the very

SECT. 6.] Modality. 301

different general views of logic from which these two accounts
of modality spring1.

§ 6. There is one kind of modal syllogism which it
would seem unreasonable to reject on the ground of its not
being formal, and which we may notice in passing. The
premise ' Any A is probably B,' is equivalent to ' Most A are
B! Now it is obvious that from two such premises as ' Most
A are Bt' 'Most A are C,' we can deduce the consequence,
' Some C are B! Since this holds good whatever may be
the nature of A, B, and C, it is, according to ordinary usage
of the term, a formal syllogism. Mansel, however, refuses to
admit that any such syllogisms belong to formal logic. His
reasons are given in a rather elaborate review2 and criticism
of some of the logical works of De Morgan, to whom the
introduction of 'numerically definite syllogisms' is mainly
due. Mansel does not take the particular example given
above, as he is discussing a somewhat more comprehensive
algebraic form. He examines it in a special numerical
example3:— 18 out of 21 Fs are X; 15 out of 21 Fs are Z;
the conclusion that 12 Zs are X is rejected from formal logic
on the ground that the arithmetical judgment involved is
synthetical, not analytical, and rests upon an intuition of
quantity. We cannot enter upon any examination of these

1 He has also given a short 2 Letters, Lectures and Reviews,

discussion of the subject elsewhere p. 61. Elsewhere in the review (p.

(Discussions, Ed. n. p. 702), in which 45) he gives what appears to me a

a somewhat different view is taken. somewhat different decision.

The modes are indeed here admitted 3 It must be remembered that

into logic, but only in so far as they this is not one of the proportional

fall by subdivision under the relation propositions with which we have

of genus and species, which is of been concerned in previous chapters :

course tantamount to their entire it is meant that there are exactly 21

rejection ; for they then differ in no Fs, of which just 18 are X, not that

essential way from any other exam- on the average 18 out of 21 may be

pies of that relation. so regarded.

302 Modality. [CHAP. xm.

reasons here ; but it may merely be remarked that his
criticism demands the acceptance of the Kantian doctrines
as to the nature of arithmetical judgments, and that it would
be better to base the rejection not on the ground that the
syllogism is not formal, but on the ground that it is not
analytical.

§ 7. There is another and practical way of getting rid
of the perplexities of modal reasoning which must be noticed
here. It is the resource of ordinary reasoners rather than the
decision of professed logicians1, and, like the first method of
evasion already pointed out in this chapter, is of very partial
application. It consists in treating the premises, during the
process of reasoning, as if they were pure, and then re-
introducing the modality into the conclusion, as a sort of
qualification of its full certainty. When each of the pre
mises is nearly certain, or when from any cause we are not
concerned with the extent of their departure from full cer
tainty, this rough expedient will answer well enough. It is,
I apprehend, the process which passes through the minds of
most persons in such cases, in so far as they reason consciously.
They would, presumably, in such an example as that pre
viously given (§ 4), proceed as if the premises that < those
who take arsenic will die,' and that 'the man in question
has taken it,' were quite true, instead of being only probably
true, and they would consequently draw the conclusion that
4 he would die/ But bearing in mind that the premises are
not certain, they would remember that the conclusion was
only to be held with a qualified assent. This they would

1 I consider however, as I have this, though they looked at the mat-
said further on (p. 320), that the treat- ter from a different point of view,
ment in the older logics of Probable and expressed it in very different
syllogisms, and Dialectic syllogisms, language,
came to somewhat the same thing as

SECT. 8.] Modality. 303

express quite correctly, if the mere nature and not the
degree of that assent is taken into account, by saying that
'he is likely to die.' In this case the modality is rejected
temporarily from the premises to be reintroduced into the
conclusion.

It is obvious that such a process as this is of a very
rough and imperfect kind. It does, in fact, omit from accu
rate consideration just the one point now under discussion.
It takes no account of the varying shades of expression by
which the degree of departure from perfect conviction is
indicated, which is of course the very thing with which
modality is intended to occupy itself. At best, therefore, it
could only claim to be an extremely rude way of deciding
questions, the accurate and scientific methods of treating
which are demanded of us.

§ 8. In any employment of applied logic we have of
course to go through such a process as that just mentioned.
Outside of pure mathematics it can hardly ever be the case
that the premises from which we reason are held with abso
lute conviction. Hence there must be a lapse from absolute
conviction in the conclusion. But we reason on the hypo
thesis that the premises are true, and any trifling defection
from certainty, of which we may be conscious, is mentally
reserved as a qualification to the conclusion. But such con
siderations as these belong rather to ordinary applied logic ;
they amount to nothing more than a caution or hint to be
borne in mind when the rules of the syllogism, or of in
duction, are applied in practice. When, however, we are
treating of modality, the extent of the defection from full
certainty is supposed to be sufficiently great for our language
to indicate and appreciate it. What we then want is of
course a scientific discussion of the principles in accordance
with which this departure is to be measured and expressed,

304 Modality. [CHAP. xin.

both in our premises and in our conclusion. Such a plan
therefore for treating modality, as the one under discussion,
is just as much a banishment of it from the field of real
logical enquiry, as if we had determined avowedly to reject it
from consideration.

§ 9. Before proceeding to a discussion of the various
ways in which modality may be treated by those who admit
it into logic, something must be said to clear up a possi
ble source of confusion in this part of the subject. In the
cases with which we have hitherto been mostly concerned,
in the earlier chapters of this work, the characteristic of
modality (for in this chapter we may with propriety use this
logical term) has generally been found in singular and par
ticular propositions. It presented itself when we had to
judge of individual cases from a knowledge of the average,
and was an expression of the fact that the proposition re
lating to these individuals referred to a portion only of the
whole class from which the average was taken. Given that
of men of fifty-five, three out of five will die in the course of
twenty years, we have had to do with propositions of the
vague form, ' It is probable that AB (of that age) will die,'
or of the more precise form, ' It is three to two that AB will
die,' within the specified time. Here the modal proposition
naturally presents itself in the form of a singular or par
ticular proposition.

§ 10. But when we turn to ordinary logic we may find
universal propositions spoken of as modal. This must mostly
be the case with those which are termed necessary or im
possible, but it may also be the case with the probable. We
may meet with the form 'All X is probably F.' Adopting
the same explanation here as has been throughout adopted in
analogous cases, we must say that what is meant by the
modality of such a proposition is the proportional number of

SECT. 11.] Modality. 305

times in which the universal proposition would be correctly
made. And in this there is, so far, no difficulty. The only
difference is that whereas the justification of the former, viz.
the particular or individual kind of modal, was obtainable
within the limits of the universal proposition which included
it, the justification of the modality of a universal proposition
has to be sought in a group or succession of other propo
sitions. The proposition has to be referred to some group of
similar ones and we have to consider the proportion of cases
in which it will be true. But this distinction is not at all
fundamental.

It is quite true that universal propositions from their
nature are much less likely than individual ones to be justi
fied, in practice, by such appeal. But, as has been already
frequently pointed out, we are not concerned with the way
in which our propositions are practically obtained, nor with
the way in which men might find it most natural to test
them ; but with that ultimate justification to which we ap
peal in the last resort, and which has been abundantly shown
to be of a statistical character. When, therefore, we say that
' it is probable that all X is F,' what we mean is, that in
more than half the cases we come across we should be right
in so judging, and in less than half the cases we should be
wrong.

§ 11. It is at this step that the possible ambiguity is
encountered. When we talk of the chance that All X is F,
we contemplate or imply the complementary chance that it is
not so. Now this latter alternative is not free from am
biguity. It might happen, for instance, in the cases of failure,
that no X is F, or it might happen that some X, only, is not
F; for both of these suppositions contradict the original pro
position, and are therefore instances of its failure. In prac
tice, no doubt, we should have various recognized rules and
v. 20

306 Modality. [CHAP. XIIT.

inductions to fall back upon in order to decide between these
alternatives, though, of course, the appeal to them would be
in strictness extralogical. But the mere existence of such an
ambiguity, and the fact that it can only be cleared up by
appeal to the subject-matter, are in themselves no real
difficulty in the application of the conception of modality to
universal propositions as well as to individual ones.

§ 12. Having noticed some of the ways in which the
introduction of modality into logic has been evaded or re
jected, we must now enter into a brief account of its treat
ment by those who have more or less deliberately admitted
its claims to acceptance.

The first enquiry will be, What opinions have been held
as to the nature of modality ? that is, Is it primarily an af
fection of the matter of the proposition, and, if not, what is it
exactly ? In reference to this enquiry it appears to me, as
already remarked, that amongst the earlier logicians no such
clear and consistent distinction between the subjective and
objective views of logic as is now commonly maintained, can
be detected1. The result of this appears in their treatment
of modality. This always had some reference to the sub
jective side of the proposition, viz. in this case to the nature
or quantity of the belief with which it was entertained ; but
it is equally clear that this characteristic was not estimated
at first hand, so to say, and in itself, but rather from a con
sideration of the matter determining what it should be. The
commonly accepted scholastic or Aristotelian division, for
instance, is into the necessary, the contingent, the possible,
and the impossible. This is clearly a division according to

1 The distinction is however by sity, says, " certitudo ad cognitionem

no means entirely neglected. Thus spectat : necessitas vero est in re"

Smiglecius, when discussing the mo- (Disputationes ; Disp. xin., Quasst.

dal affections of certainty and iieces- xn.).

SECT. 13.] Modality. 307

the matter almost entirely, for on the purely mental side the
necessary and the impossible would be just the same ; one
implying full conviction of the truth of a proposition, and the
other of that of its contradictory. So too, on the same side, it
would not be easy to distinguish between the contingent and
the possible. On the view in question, therefore, the modality
of a proposition was determined by a reference to the nature
of the subject-matter. In some propositions the nature of
the subject-matter decided that the predicate was necessarily
joined to the subject ; in others that it was impossible that
they should be joined ; and so on.

§ 13. The artificial character of such a four-fold division
will be too obvious to modern minds for it to be necessary to
criticize it. A very slight study of nature and consequent
appreciation of inductive evidence suffice to convince us that
those uniformities upon which all connections of phenomena,
whether called necessary or contingent, depend, demand ex
tremely profound and extensive enquiry ; that they admit of
no such simple division into clearly marked groups; and
that, therefore, the pure logician had better not meddle with
them1.

The following extract from Grote's Aristotle (Vol. I. p.
192) will serve to show the origin of this four-fold division,
its conformity with the science of the day, and consequently
its utter want of conformity with that of our own time : —
•" The distinction of Problematical and Necessary Propositions
•corresponds, in the mind of Aristotle, to that capital and
•characteristic doctrine of his Ontology and Physics, already
touched on in this chapter. He thought, as we have seen,
that in the vast circumferential region of the Kosmos, from

1 It may be remarked that Whate- gent matter, without any apparent
ly (Logic, Bk. n. ch. n. § 2) speaks suspicion that they belong entirely
of necessary, impossible and contin- to an obsolete point of view.

20—2

308 Modality. [CHAP. XIIL

the outer sidereal sphere down to the lunar sphere, celestial
substance was a necessary existence and energy, sempiternal
and uniform in its rotations and influence ; and that through
its beneficent influence, pervading the concavity between the
lunar sphere and the terrestrial centre (which included the
four elements with their compounds) there prevailed a regu
larizing tendency called Nature; modified, however, and
partly counteracted by independent and irregular forces called
Spontaneity and Chance, essentially unknowable and unpre
dictable. The irregular sequences thus named by Aristotle
were the objective correlate of the Problematical Proposition
in Logic. In these sublunary sequences, as to future time,
may or may not, was all that could be attained, even by the
highest knowledge ; certainty, either of affirmation or nega
tion, was out of the question. On the other hand, the neces
sary and uniform energies of the celestial substance, formed
the objective correlate of the Necessary Proposition in Logic ;
this substance was not merely an existence, but an existence
necessary and unchangeable... he considers the Problematical
Proposition in Logic to be not purely subjective, as an
expression of the speaker's ignorance, but something more,
namely, to correlate with an objective essentially unknowable
to all."

§ 14. Even after this philosophy began to pass awayr
the divisions of modality originally founded upon it might
have proved, as De Morgan has remarked1, of considerable
service in mediseval times. As he says, people were much
more frequently required to decide in one way or the other
upon a single testimony, without there being a sufficiency of
specific knowledge to test the statements made. The old
logician " did not know but that any day of the week might
bring from Cathay or Tartary an account of men who ran on
1 Formal Logic, p. 233.

SECT. 15.] Modality. 309

four wheels of flesh and blood, or grew planted in the ground,
like Polydorus in the ^Eneid, as well evidenced as a great
many nearly as marvellous stories." Hence, in default of
better inductions, it might have been convenient to make
rough classifications of the facts which were and which were
not to be accepted on testimony (the necessary, the impos
sible, &c.), and to employ these provisional inductions (which
is all we should now regard them) as testing the stories
which reached him. Propositions belonging to the class of
the impossible might be regarded as having an antecedent
presumption against them so great as to prevail over almost
any testimony worth taking account of, and so on.

§ 15. But this old four-fold division of modals con
tinued to be accepted and perpetuated by the logicians long
after all philosophical justification for it had passed away.
So far as I have been able to ascertain, scarcely any logician
of repute or popularity before Kant, was bold enough to
make any important change in the way of regarding them1.
Even the Port-Royal Logic, founded as it is on Cartesianism,
repeats the traditional statements, though with extreme
brevity. This adherence to the old forms led, it need not be
remarked, to considerable inconsistency and confusion in
many cases. These forms were founded, as we have seen, on
an objective view of the province of logic, and this view was

1 The subject was sometimes al- tant are referred to in one passage

together omitted, as by Wolf. He (Philosophia Rationalis sive Logica,

says a good deal however about pro- § 593).

bable propositions and syllogisms, Lambert stands quite apart. In

and, like Leibnitz before him, looked this respect, as in most others where

forward to a " logica probabilium" mathematical conceptions and sym-

as something new and desirable. I bols are involved, his logical attitude

imagine that he had been influenced is thoroughly unconventional. See,

by the writers on Chances, as of the for instance, his chapter ' Von dem

few who had already treated that Wahrscheinlichen', in his Neites

subject nearly all the most impor- Organon.

310 Modality. [CHAP. xm.

by no means rigidly carried out in many cases. In fact it-
was beginning to be abandoned, to an extent and in direc
tions which we have not opportunity here to discuss, before
the influence of Kant was felt. Many, for instance, added to
the list of the four, by including the true and the false;
occasionally also the probable, the supposed, and the certain
were added. This seems to show some tendency towards
abandoning the objective for the subjective view, or at least
indicates a hesitation between them.

§ 16. With Kant's view of modality almost every one is-
familiar. He divides judgments, under this head, into the
apodeictic, the assertory, and the problematic. We shall have
to say something about the number and mutual relations of
these divisions presently ; we are now only concerned with
the general view which they carry out. In this respect it will
be obvious at once what a complete change of position has
been reached. The 'necessary' and the 'impossible' de
manded an appeal to the matter of a proposition in order to
recognize them ; the ' apodeictic ' and the ' assertory ', on the
other hand, may be true of almost any matter, for they
demand nothing but an appeal to our consciousness in order
to distinguish between them. Moreover, the distinction
between the assertory and the problematic is so entirely
subjective and personal, that it may vary not only between
one person and another, but in the case of the same person
at different times. What one man knows to be true, another
may happen to be in doubt about. The apodeictic judgment
is one which we not only accept, but which we find ourselves
unable to reverse in thought ; the assertory is simply ac
cepted ; the problematic is one about which we feel in
doubt.

This way of looking at the matter is the necessary out
come of the conoeptualist or Kantian view of logic. It has

SECT. 17.] Modality. 311

been followed by many logicians, not only by those who may
be called followers of Kant, but by almost all who have felt
his influence. Ueberweg, for instance, who is altogether at
issue with Kant on some fundamental points, adopts it.

§ 17. The next question to be discussed is, How many
subdivisions of modality are to be recognized ? The Aristo
telian or scholastic logicians, as we have seen, adopted a four
fold division. The exact relations of some of these to each
other, especially the possible and the contingent, is an ex
tremely obscure point, and one about which the commenta
tors are by no means agreed. As, however, it seems tolerably
clear that it was not consciously intended by the use of these
four terms to exhibit a graduated scale of intensity of con
viction, their correspondence with the province of modern
probability is but slight, and the discussion of them, there
fore, becomes rather a matter of special or antiquarian in
terest. De Morgan, indeed (Formal Logic, p. 232), says that
the schoolmen understood by contingent more likely than
not, and by possible less likely than not. I do not know
on what authority this statement rests, but it credits them
with a much nearer approach to the modern views of proba
bility than one would have expected, and decidedly nearer than
that of most of their successors1. The general conclusion at
which I have arrived, after a reasonable amount of investiga
tion, is that there were two prevalent views on the subject.
Some (e.g. Burgersdyck, Bk. I. ch. 32) admitted that there
were at bottom only two kinds of modality ; the contingent
and the possible being equipollent, as also the necessary and
the impossible, provided the one asserts and the other
denies. This is the view to which those would naturally
be led who looked mainly to the nature of the subject-matter.

1 I cannot find the slightest authority for the statement in the
elaborate history of Logic by Prantl.

312 Modality. [CHAP. xm.

On the other hand, those who looked mainly at the form of
expression, would be led by the analogy of the four forms of
proposition, and the necessity that each of them should stand
in definite opposition to each other, to insist upon a distinc
tion between the four modals1. They, therefore, endeavoured
to introduce a distinction by maintaining (e.g. Crackanthorpe,
Bk. ill. ch. 11) that the contingent is that which now is but
may not be, and the possible that which now is not but may
be. A few appear to have made the distinction corre
spondent to that between the physically and the logically
possible.

§ 18. When we get to the Kantian division we have
reached much clearer ground. The meaning of each of these
terms is quite explicit, and it is also beyond doubt that they
have a more definite tendency in the direction of assigning a
graduated scale of conviction. So long as they are regarded
from a metaphysical rather than a logical standing point,
there is much to be said in their favour. If we use intro
spection merely, confining ourselves to a study of the judg
ments themselves, to the exclusion of the grounds on which
they rest, there certainly does seem a clear and well-marked
distinction between judgments which we cannot even con
ceive to be reversed in thought ; those which we could
reverse, but which we accept as true ; and those which we
merely entertain as possible.

Regarded, however, as a logical division, Kant's arrange
ment seems to me of very little service. For such logical
purposes indeed, as we are now concerned with, it really
seems to resolve itself into a two-fold division. The dis
tinction between the apodeictic and the assert ory will be

1 "Hi quatuor modi magnam titateet qualitate varietate" (Wallis's
censeri solent analogiam habere cum Instit. Logic. Bk. 11. ch. 8).
quadruplici proposition um in quan-

SECT. 19.] Modality. 313

admitted, I presume, even by those who accept the meta
physical or psychological theory upon which it rests, to be a
•difference which concerns, not the quantity of belief with
which the judgments are entertained, but rather the violence
which would have to be done to the mind by the attempt to
upset them. Each is fully believed, but the one can, and
the other cannot, be controverted. The belief with which an
assertory judgment is entertained is full belief, else it would
not differ from the problematic ; and therefore in regard to
the quantity of belief, as distinguished from the quality or
character of it, there is no difference between it and the apo-
deictic. It is as though, to offer an illustration, the index
had been already moved to the top of the scale in the as
sertory judgment, and all that was done to convert this into
an apodeictic one, was to clamp it there. The only logical
difference which then remains is that between problematic
and assertory, the former comprehending all the judgments
as to the truth of which we have any degree of doubt, and
the latter those of which we have no doubt. The whole
range of the former, therefore, with which Probability is
appropriately occupied, is thrown undivided into a single
compartment. We can hardly speak of a ' division ' where
one class includes everything up to the boundary line, and
the other is confined to that boundary line. Practically,
therefore, on this view, modality, as the mathematical stu
dent of Probability would expect to find it, as completely
disappears as if it were intended to reject it.

§ 19. By less consistent and systematic thinkers, and
by those in whom ingenuity was an over prominent feature,
.a variety of other arrangements have been accepted or pro
posed. There is, of course, some justification for such attempts
in the laudable desire to bring our logical forms into better
harmony with ordinary thought and language. In practice,

314 Modality. [CHAP. xm.

as was pointed out in an earlier chapter, every one recog
nizes a great variety of modal forms, such as 'likely,' 'very
likely,' 'almost certainly/ and so on almost without limit in
each direction. It was doubtless supposed that, by neglect
ing to make use of technical equivalents for some of these
forms, we should lose our logical control over certain possible
kinds of inference, and so far fall short even of the precision
of ordinary thought.

With regard to such additional forms, it appears to me
that all those which have been introduced by writers who-
were uninfluenced by the Theory of Probability, have done
little else than create additional confusion, as such writers do-
not attempt to marshal their terms in order, or to ascertain
their mutual relations. Omitting, of course, forms obviously
of material modality, we have already mentioned the true
and the false ; the probable, the supposed, and the certain.
These subdivisions seem to have reached their climax at a
very early stage in Occam (Prantl, III. 380), who held that a,
proposition might be modally affected by being ' vera, scita,.
falsa, ignota, scrip ta, prolata, concepta, credita, opinata, du-
bitata.'

§ 20. Since the growth of the science of Probability,
logicians have had better opportunities of knowing what
they had to aim at ; and, though it cannot be said that their
attempts have been really successful, these are at any rate a
decided improvement upon those of their predecessors. Dr
Thomson1, for instance, gives a nine-fold division. He says
that, arranging the degrees of modality in an ascending
scale, we find that a judgment may be either possible,
doubtful, probable, morally certain for the thinker himself,
morally certain for a class or school, morally certain for all,
physically certain with a limit, physically certain without
1 Laws of Thought, § 118.

SECT. 21.] Modality. 315

limitation, and mathematically certain. Many other divi
sions might doubtless be mentioned, but, as every mathema
tician will recognize, the attempt to secure any general
agreement in such a matter of arrangement is quite hopeless.
It is here that the beneficial influence of the mathematical
theory of Probability is to be gratefully acknowledged. As
soon as this came to be studied it must have been perceived
that in attempting to mark off clearly from one another
certain gradations of belief, we should be seeking for breaches,
in a continuous magnitude. In the advance from a slight
presumption to a strong presumption, and from that to moral
certainty, we are making a gradual ascent, in the course of
which there are no natural halting-places. The proof of this
continuity need not be entered upon here, for the materials
for it will have been gathered from almost every chapter of
this work. The reader need merely be reminded that the
grounds of our belief, in all cases which admit of number and
measurement, are clearly seen to be of this description ; and
that therefore unless the belief itself is to be divorced from
the grounds on which it rests, what thus holds as to their
characteristics must hold also as to its own.

It follows, therefore, that modality in the old sense of the
word, wherein an attempt was made to obtain certain natural
divisions in the scale of conviction, must be finally abandoned.
All that it endeavoured to do can now be done incomparably
better by the theory of Probability, with its numerical scale
which admits of indefinite subdivision. None of the old sys
tems of division can be regarded as a really natural one ;
those which admit but few divisions being found to leave the
whole range of the probable in one unbroken class, and those
which adopt many divisions lapsing into unavoidable vague
ness and uncertainty.

§ 21. Corresponding to the distinction between pure

SI 6 Modality. [CHAP. xm.

and modal propositions, but even more complicated and
unsatisfactory in its treatment, was that between pure and
modal syllogisms. The thing discussed in the case of the
latter was, of course, the effect produced upon the conclusion
in respect of modality, by the modal affection of one or both
premises. It is only when we reach such considerations as
these that we are at all getting on to the ground appropriate
to Probability; but it is obvious that very little could be
•done with such rude materials, and the inherent clumsiness
and complication of the whole modal system come 'out very
clearly here. It was in reference probably to this complica
tion that some of the bitter sayings1 of the schoolmen and
others which have been recorded, were uttered.

Aristotle has given an intricate investigation of this sub
ject, and his followers naturally were led along a similar
track. It would be quite foreign to my purpose in the slight
sketch in this chapter to attempt to give any account of
these enquiries, even were I competent to do so ; for, as has
been pointed out, the connection between the Aristotelian
modals and the modern view of the nature of Probability,
though real, is exceedingly slight. It need only be remarked
that what was complicated enough with four modals to be
taken account of, grows intricate beyond all endurance when
such as the 'probable' and the 'true' and the 'false' have
also to be assigned a place in the list. The following exam
ples2 will show the kind of discussions with which the logi-

1 "Haud scio magis ne doctri- 2 Smiglecii Disputationes, Ingol-

nam modalium scholastic! exercue- stadt, 1618.

rint, quam ea illos vexarit. Certe See also Prantl's Geschichte der

usque adeo sudatum hie fuit, ut die- Logik (under Occam and Buridan)

terio locus sit datus ; De modalibus for accounts of the excessive com-

non gustabit asinus." Keckermann, plication which the subtlety of those

fiyst. Log. Bk. u. ch. 3. learned schoolmen evolved out of

such suitable materials.

SECT. 23.] Modality. 317

cians exercised themselves. 'Whether, with one premise
certain, and the other probable, a certain conclusion may be
inferred ' : ' Whether, from the impossible, the necessary can
be inferred'; 'Whether, with one premise necessary and the
other de inesse, the conclusion is necessary', and so on,
endlessly.

§ 22. On the Kantian view of modality the discussion
of such kinds of syllogisms becomes at once decidedly more-
simple (for here but three modes are recognized), arid also
somewhat more closely connected with strict Probability, (for
the modes are more nearly of the nature of gradations of
conviction). But, on the other hand, there is less justification
for their introduction, as logicians might really be expected
to know that what they are aiming to effect by their clumsy
contrivances is the very thing which Probability can carry
out to the highest desired degree of accuracy. The former
methods are as coarse and inaccurate, compared with the
latter, as were the roughest measurements of Babylonian
night-watchers compared with^the refined calculations of the
modern astronomer. It is indeed only some of the general
adherents of the Kantian Logic who enter upon any such
considerations as these ; some, such as Hamilton and Mansel,
entirely reject them, as we have seen. By those who do
treat of the subject, such conclusions as the following are laid
down ; that when both premises are apodeictic the conclusion
will be the same ; so when both are assertory or problematic.
If one is apodeictic and the other assertory, . the latter, or
' weaker,' is all that is to be admitted for the conclusion ;
and so on. The English reader will find some account of
these rules in Ueberweg's Logic1.

§ 23. But although those modals, regarded as instru
ments of accurate thought, have been thus superseded by the
1 Translation by T. M. Lindsay, p. 439.

318 Modality. [CHAP. xni.

precise arithmetical expressions of Probability, the question
still remains whether what may be termed our popular modal
expressions could not be improved and adapted to more
accurate use. It is true that the attempt to separate them
from one another by any fundamental distinctions is futile,
for the magnitude of which they take cognizance is, as we
have remarked, continuous ; but considering the enormous
importance of accurate terminology, and of recognizing
numerical distinctions wherever possible, it would be a real
advance if any agreement could be arrived at with regard to
the use of modal expressions. We have already noticed (ch.
II. § 16) some suggestions by Mr Galton as to the possibility
of a natural system of classification, resting upon the regu
larity with which most kinds of magnitudes tend to group
themselves about a mean. It might be proposed, for in
stance, that we should agree to apply the term 'good'
to the first quarter, measuring from the best downwards ;
* indifferent' to the middle half, and 'bad' to the last quarter.
There seems no reason why a similarly improved terminology
should not some day be introduced into the ordinary modal
language of common life. It might be agreed, for instance,
that ' very improbable ' should as far as possible be confined
to those events which had odds of (say) more than 99 to 1
against them ; and so on, with other similar expressions.
There would, no doubt, be difficulties in the way, for in all
applications of classification we have to surmount the two
fold obstacles which lie in the way, firstly (to use Kant's
expression) of the faculty of making rules, and secondly of
that of subsumption under rules. That is to say, even if we
had agreed upon our classes, there would still be much doubt
and dispute, in the case of things which did not readily lend
themselves to be counted or measured, as to whether the
odds were more or less than the assigned quantity.

SECT. 24.] Modality. 319

It is true that when we know the odds for or against an
event, we can always state them explicitly without the neces
sity of first agreeing as to the usage of terms which shall
imply them. But there would often be circumlocution and
pedantry in so doing, and as long as modal terms are in
practical use it would seem that there could be no harm, and
might be great good, in arriving at some agreement as to the
degree of probability which they should be generally under
stood to indicate. Bentham, as is well known, in despair of
ever obtaining anything accurate out of the language of com
mon life on this subject, was in favour of a direct appeal to
the numerical standard. He proposed the employment, in
judicial trials, of an instrument, graduated from 0 to 10, on
which scale the witness was to be asked to indicate the de
gree of his belief of the facts to which he testified : similarly
the judge might express the force with which he held his
conclusion. The use of such a numerical scale, however, was
to be optional only, not compulsory, as Bentbam admitted
that many persons might feel at a loss thus to measure the
degree of their belief. (Rationale of Judicial Evidence,
Bk. L, Ch. vi.)

§ 24. Throughout this chapter we have regarded the
modals as the nearest counterpart to modern Probability
which was afforded by the old systems of logic. The reason
for so regarding them is, that they represented some slight
attempt, rude as it was, to recognize and measure certain
gradations in the degree of our conviction, and to examine
the bearing of such considerations upon our logical inferences.

But although it is amongst the modals that the germs of
the methods of Probability are thus to be sought ; the true
subject-matter of our science, that is, the classes of objects
with which it is most appropriately concerned, are rather
represented by another part of the scholastic logic. This

320

Modality.

[CHAR xm.

was the branch commonly called Dialectic, in the old sense
of that term. Dialectic, according to Aristotle, seems to
have been a sort of sister art to Rhetoric. It was concerned
with syllogisms differing in no way from demonstrative syl
logisms, except that their premises were probable instead of
certain. Premises of this kind he termed topics, and the
syllogisms which dealt with them enthymemes. They were
said to start from ' signs and likelihoods ' rather than from
axioms1.

§ 25. The terms in which such reasonings are com
monly described sound very much like those applicable to
Probability, as we now understand it. When we hear of
likelihood, and of probable syllogisms, our first impression
might be that the inferences involved would be of a similar
character2. This, however, would be erroneous. In the

1 "The et/cos and o-rj/meiov them
selves are propositions ; the former
stating a general probability, the
latter a fact, which is known to be
an indication, more or less certain,
of the truth of some further state
ment, whether of a single fact, or
of a general belief. The former is a
general proposition, nearly, though
not quite, universal ; as, ' most men
who envy hate ' ; the latter is a
singular proposition, which however
is not regarded as a sign, except
relatively to some other proposition,
which it is supposed may be inferred
from it." (Hansel's Aldrich ; Appen
dix F, where an account will be
found of the Aristotelian enthy-
meme, and dialectic syllogism. Also,
of course, in Grote's Aristotle, Topics,
and elsewhere.)

2 " Nam in hoc etiam differt de-

monstratio, seu demonstrativa argu-
mentatio. a probabili, quia in ilia,
tarn conclusio quam praemissae neces-
sariae sunt ; in probabili autem argu-
mentatione sicut conclusio ut proba-
bilis infertur ita prsemissae ut pro-
babiles afferuntur" (Crackanthorpe,
Bk. v., Ch. 1) ; almost the words with
which De Morgan distinguishes be
tween logic and probability in a
passage already cited (see Ch. vi. § 3).
Perhaps it was a development of
some such view as this that Leibnitz
looked forward to. " J'ai dit plus d'une
fois qu'il faudrait une nouvelle espece
de Logique, qui traiteroit des degre's
de Probability, puisqu'Aristote dans
ses Topiques n'a rien moins fait que
cela" (Nouveaux essais, Lib. iv. ch.
xvi). It is possible, indeed, that he
may have had in his mind more what
we now understand by the mathema-

SECT. 26.] Modality. . 321

first place the province of this Dialectic was much too wide,
for it covered in addition the whole field of what we should
now term Scientific or Material Induction. The distinctive
characteristic of the dialectic premises was their want of
certainty, and of such uncertain premises Probability (as I
have frequently insisted) takes account of one class only,
Induction concerning itself with another class. Again, not the
slightest attempt was made to enter upon the enquiry, How
uncertain are the premises ? It is only when this is at
tempted that we can be considered to enter upon the field of
Probability, and it is because, after a rude fashion, the modals
attempted to grapple with this problem, that we have regarded
them as in any way occupied with our special subject-matter.
§ 26. Amongst the older logics with which I have made
any acquaintance, that of Crackanthorpe gives the fullest dis
cussion upon this subject. He divides his treatment of the
syllogism into two parts, occupied respectively with the ' de
monstrative ' and the ' probable ' syllogism. To the latter a
whole book is devoted. In this the nature and consequences
of thirteen different ' loci ' l are investigated, though it is not
very clear in what sense they can every one of them be re
garded as being ' probable.'

tical theory of Probability, but in the the term. Crackanthorpe says of
infancy of a science it is of course them, " sed duci a loco probabiliter
hard to say whether any particular arguendi, hoc vere proprium est Ar-
subject is definitely contemplated or gumentationis probabilis ; et in hoc
not. Leibnitz (as Todhunter has a Demonstratione differt, quia De-
shown in his history) took the great- monstrator utitur solummodo qua-
est interest in such chance problems tuor Locis eisque necessariis.... Prae-
as had yet been discussed. ter hos autem, ex quibus quoque
1 By loci were understood certain probabiliter arguere licet, sunt multo
general classes of premises. They plures Loci arguendi probabiliter;
stood, in fact, to the major premise ut a Genere, a Specie, ab Adjuncto,
in somewhat the same relation that ab Oppositis, et similia" (Logica,
the Category or Predicament did to Lib. v., ch. n.).

v. 21

322 Modality. [CHAP. xm.

It is doubtless true, that if the old logicians had been
in possession of such premises as modern Probability is con
cerned with, and had adhered to their own way of treating
them, they would have had to place them amongst such loci,
and thus to make the consideration of them a part of their
Dialectic. But inasmuch as there does not seem to have
been the slightest attempt on their part to do more here
than recognize the fact of the premises being probable ; that
is, since it was not attempted to measure their probability
and that of the conclusion, I cannot but regard this part of
Logic as having only the very slightest relation to Proba
bility as now conceived. It seems to me little more than
one of the ways (described at the commencement of this
chapter) by which the problem of Modality is not indeed re
jected, but practically evaded.

§ 27. As Logic is not the only science which is directly
and prominently occupied with questions about belief and
evidence, so the difficulties which have arisen there have
been by no means unknown elsewhere. In respect of the
modals, this seems to have been manifestly the case in Juris
prudence. Some remarks, therefore, may be conveniently
made here upon this application of the subject, though of
course with the brevity suitable on the part of a layman who
has to touch upon professional topics.

Recall for a moment what are the essentials of modality.
These I understand to be the attempt to mark off from one
another, without any resort to numerical notation, varying
degrees of conviction or belief, and to determine the conse
quent effect of premises, thus affected, upon our conclusions.
Moreover, as we cannot construct or retain a scale of any
kind without employing a standard from and by which to
measure it, the attainment and recognition of a standard of
certainty, or of one of the other degrees of conviction, is

SECT. 28.] Modality. 323

almost inseparably involved in the same enquiry. In this
sense of the term, modal difficulties have certainly shown
themselves in the department of Law. There have been
similar attempts here, encountered by similar difficulties, to
-come to some definite agreement as to a scale of arrange
ment of the degrees of our assent. It is of course much
more practicable to secure such agreement in the case of a
special science, confined more or less to the experts, than in
subjects into which all classes of outsiders have almost equal
right of entry. The range of application under the former
circumstances is narrower, and the professional experts have
acquired habits and traditions by which the standards may
be retained in considerable integrity. It does not appear,
however, according to all accounts, as if any very striking
success had been attained in this direction by the lawyers.

§ 28. The difficulty in its scientific, or strictly jurispru-
dential shape, seems to have shown itself principally in the
attempt to arrange legal evidence into classes in respect of
the degree of its cogency. This, I understand, was the case
in the Roman law, and in some of the continental systems of
jurisprudence which took their rise from the Roman law.
''The direct evidence of so many witnesses was plena pro-
batio. Then came minus plena probatio, then semiplend
major and semiplend minor; and by adding together a
certain number of half-proofs — for instance, by the pro
duction of a tradesman's account-books, phis his supple
mentary oath— full proof might be made out. It was on
this principle that torture was employed to obtain a con
fession. The confession was evidence suppletory to the cir
cumstances which were held to justify its employment1."

According to Bentham2, the corresponding scale in the

1 Stephen's General View of the 2 Rationale of Judicial Evidence;

Criminal Law of England, p. 241. Bk. i. ch. vi.

21—2

324 Modality. [CHAP. xm.

English school was : — Positive proof, Violent presumption,
Probable presumption, Light or Rash presumption. Though
admitted by Blackstone and others, I understand that these
divisions are not at all generally accepted at the present
day.

§ 29. In the above we are reminded rather of modal
syllogisms. The principal practical form in which the diffi
culty underlying the simple modal propositions presents
itself, is in the attempt to obtain some criterion of judicial
certainty. By ' certainty ' here we mean, of course, not what
the metaphysicians term apodeictic1, for that can seldom or
never be secured in practical affairs, but such a degree of
conviction, short of this, as every reasonable person will feel
to be sufficient for all his wants. Here again, one would
think, the quest must appear, to accurate thinkers, an utterly
hopeless one ; an effort to discover natural breaks in a con
tinuous magnitude. There cannot indeed be the least doubt
that, amongst limited classes of keen and practised intellects,
a standard of certainty, as of everything else, might be re
tained and handed down with considerable accuracy : this is
possible in matters of taste and opinion where personal pecu
liarities of judgment are far more liable to cause disagreement
and confusion. But then such a consensus is almost entirely
an affair of tact and custom ; whereas what is wanted in the
case in question is some criterion to which the comparatively
uninitiated may be able to appeal. The standard, therefore,
must not merely be retained by recollection, but be generally
recognizable by its characteristics. If such a criterion could

1 Though this is claimed by some eingestanden. Denn \venn auch alle

Kantian logicians; — Nie darf an Zeugnisse und die iibrigen Anzeigen

einem angeblichen Verbrecher die wider ihn waren, so bleibt doch das

gesetzliche Strafe vollzogen werden, Gegentheil immer moglich" (Krug,

bevor er nicht selbst das Verbrechen Denklehre, § 131).

SECT. 30.] Modality. 325

be secured, its importance could hardly be overrated. But
so far as one may judge from the speeches of counsel, the
charges of judges, and the verdicts of juries, nothing really
deserving the name is ever attained.

§ 30. The nearest approach, perhaps, to a recognized
standard is to be found in the frequent assurance that juries
are not bound to convict only in case they have no doubt of
the guilt of the accused; for the absolute exclusion of all
doubt, the utter impossibility of suggesting any counter
hypothesis which this assumes, is unattainable in human
affairs. But, it is frequently said, they are to convict if
they have no ' reasonable doubt/ no such doubt, that is,
as would be ' a hindrance to acting in the important affairs
of life.' As a caution against seeking after unattainable
certainty, such advice may be very useful ; but it need
hardly be remarked that the certainty upon which we act in
the important affairs of life is no fixed standard, but varies
exceedingly according to the nature of those affairs. The
greater the reward at stake, the greater the risk we are
prepared to run, and conversely. Hardly any degree of cer
tainty can exist, upon the security of which we should not
be prepared to act under appropriate circumstances1.

Some writers indeed altogether deny that any standard,
in the common sense of the word, either is, or ought to be,
aimed at in legal proceedings. For instance, Sir J. F.

1 As Mr C. J. Monro puts it : not do this would very often prevent
" Suppose that a man is suspected of a Chancery judge from appointing
murdering his daughter. Evidence the man guardian to a ward of the
which would not convict him before court ; evidence which would not
an ordinary jury might make a grand affect the judge's mind might make
jury find a true bill ; evidence which a father think twice on his death-
would not do this might make a bed before he appointed the man
coroner's jury bring in a verdict guardian to his daughter."
against him ; evidence which would

326 Modality. [CHAP. XIIL

Stephen, in his work on English Criminal Law1, after
noticing and rejecting such standards as that last indi
cated, comes to the conclusion that the only standard recog
nized by our law is that which induces juries to convict : —
"What is judicial proof? That which being permitted by
law to be given in evidence, induces twelve men, chosen
according to the Jury Act, to say that, having heard it, their
minds are satisfied of the truth of the proposition which it
affirms. They may be prejudiced, they may be timid, they
may be rash, they may be ignorant; but the oath, the
number, and the property qualification, are intended, as far
as possible, to neutralize these disadvantages, and answer
precisely to the conditions imposed upon standards of value
or length." (p. 263.)

To admit this is much about the same thing as to abandon
such a standard as unattainable. Evidence which induces-
a jury to convict may doubtless be a standard to me and
others of what we ought to consider 'reasonably certain/
provided of course that the various juries are tolerably uni
form in their conclusions. But it clearly cannot be proposed
as a standard to the juries themselves ; if their decisions are
to be consistent and uniform, they want some external indi
cation to guide them. When a man is asking, How certain
ought I to feel? to give such an answer as the above is,
surely, merely telling him that he is to be as certain as

1 The portions of this work which what should satisfy them. He corn-
treat of the nature of proof in gene- pares the legislative standard of cer-
ral, and of judicial proof in particu- tainty with that of value ; this latter
lar, are well worth reading by every is declared to be a certain weight of
logical student. It appears to me, gold, irrespective of the rarity or
however, that the author goes much commonness of that metal. So with
too far in the direction of regarding certainty ; if people grow more credu-
proof as subjective, that is as what lous the intrinsic value of the stand-
does satisfy people, rather than as ard will vary.

SECT. 31.] Modality. 327

he is. If, indeed, juries composed a close profession, they
might, as was said above, retain a traditional standard. But
being, as they are, a selection from the ordinary lay public,
their own decisions in the past can hardly be held up to
them as a direction what they are to do in future.

§ 31. It would appear therefore that we may fairly say
that the English law, at any rate, definitely rejects the main
assumption upon which the logical doctrine of modality and
its legal counterpart are based : the assumption, namely, that
different grades of conviction can be marked off from one
another with sufficient accuracy for us to be able to refer
individual cases to their corresponding classes. And that
with regard to the collateral question of fixing a standard of
certainty, it will go no further than pronouncing, or im
plying, that we are to be content with nothing short of, but
need not go beyond, ' reasonable certainty.'

This is a statement of the standard, with which the
logician and scientific man can easily quarrel ; and they
may with much reason maintain that it has not the slightest
claim to accuracy, even if it had one to strict intelligibility.
If a man wishes to know whether his present degree of cer
tainty is reasonable, whither is he to appeal ? He can
scarcely compare his mental state with that which is ex
perienced in 'the important affairs of life,' for these, as
already remarked, would indicate no fixed value. At the
same time, one cannot suppose that such an expression is
destitute of all signification. People would not continue to
use language, especially in matters of paramount importance
and interest, without meaning something by it. We are
driven therefore to conclude that ' reasonable certainty ' does
in a rude sort of way represent a traditional standard to
which it is attempted to adhere. As already remarked, this
is perfectly practicable in the case of any class of professional

328 Modality. [CHAP. xm.

men, and therefore not altogether impossible in the case of
those who are often and closely brought into connection with
such a class. Though it is hard to believe that any such
expressions, when used for purposes of ordinary life, attain
at all near enough to any conventional standard to be worth
discussion ; yet in the special case of a jury, acting under
the direct influence of a judge, it seems quite possible that
their deliberate assertion that they are ' fully convinced '
may reach somewhat more nearly to a tolerably fixed standard
than ordinary outsiders would at first think likely.

§ 32. Are there then any means by which we could
ascertain what this standard is ; in other words, by which we
could determine what is the real worth, in respect of accu
racy, of this ' reasonable certainty ' which the juries are sup
posed to secure ? In the absence of authoritative declara
tions upon the subject, the student of Logic and Probability
would naturally resort to two means, with a momentary
notice of which we will conclude this enquiry.

The first of these would aim at determining the standard
of judicial certainty indirectly, by simply determining the
statistical frequency with which the decisions (say) of a jury
were found to be correct. This may seem to be a hopeless
task ; and so indeed it is, but not so much on any theoretic
insufficiency of the determining elements as on account of
the numerous arbitrary assumptions which attach to most
of the problems which deal with the probability of testimony
and judgments. It is not necessary for this purpose that we
should have an infallible superior court which revised the
decisions of the one under consideration1 ; it is sufficient if a

1 The question will be more fully to the simplest possible elements by

discussed in a future chapter, but a supposing only two judges or courts,

few words may be inserted here by of the same average correctness of

way of indication. Keduce the case decision. Let this be indicated by

SECT. 32.] Modality. 329

large number of ordinary representative cases are submitted
to a court consisting even of exactly similar materials to the
one whose decisions we wish to test. Provided always that we
make the monstrous assumption that the judgments of men
about matters which deeply affect them are ' independent '
in the sense in which the tosses of pence are independent,
then the statistics of mere agreement and disagreement will
serve our purpose. We might be able to say, for instance,
that a jury of a given number, deciding by a given majority,
were right nine times out of ten in their verdict. Conclu
sions of this kind, in reference to the French courts, are
what Poisson has attempted at the end of his great work on
the Probability of Judgments ; though I do not suppose that
he attached much numerical accuracy to his results.

A scarcely more hopeful means would be found by a
reference to certain cases of legal ' presumptions.' A ' con
clusive presumption ' is denned as follows : — " Conclusive, or
as they are elsewhere termed imperative or absolute pre
sumptions of law, are rules determining the quantity of evi
dence requisite for the support of any particular averment
which is not permitted to be overcome by any proof that the
fact is otherwise1." A large number of such presumptions
will be found described in the text-books, but they seem to
refer to matters far too vague, for the most part, to admit of
any reduction to statistical frequency of occurrence. It is
indeed maintained by some authorities that any assignment
of degree of Probability is not their present object, but that
they are simply meant to exclude the troublesome delays

x. Then the chance of their agree- ment is confirmed by the second, we

ing is x'2 + (l — x)2, for they agree if have the means of determining or.

both are right or both wrong. If 1 Taylor on Evidence : the latter

the statistical frequency of this agree- part of the extract does not seem

ment is known, — that is, the fre- very clear,
quency with which the first judg-

330 Modality. [CHAP. xin.

that would ensue if everything were considered open to
doubt and question. Moreover, even if they did assign a,
degree of certainty this would rather be an indication of
what legislators or judges thought reasonable than of what
was so considered by the juries themselves.

There are indeed presumptions as to the time after which
a man, if not heard of, is supposed to be dead (capable of
disproof, of course, by his reappearance). If this time varied
with the age of the man in question, we should at once have
some such standard as we desire, for a reference to the Life
tables would fix his probable duration of life, and so deter
mine indirectly the measure of probability which satisfied
the law. But this is not the case ; the period chosen is
entirely irrespective of age. The nearest case in point (and
that does not amount to much) which I have been able to
ascertain is that of the age after which it has been pre
sumed that a woman was incapable of bearing children.
This was the age of 53. A certain approach to a statistical
assignment of the chances in this case is to be found in
Quetelet's Physique Sociale (Vol. I. p. 184, note). According
to the authorities which he there quotes it would seem that
in about one birth in 5500 the mother was of the age of 50
or upwards. This does not quite assign the degree of what
may be called the a priori chance against the occurrence of a
birth at that age, because the fact of having commenced a.
family at an early age represents some diminution of the
probability of continuing it into later life. But it serves to
give some indication of what may be called the odds against
such an event.

It need not be remarked that any such clues as these to
the measure of judicial certainty are far too slight to be of
any real value. They only deserve passing notice as a pos
sible logical solution of the problem in question, or rather as.

SECT. 32.] Modality. 331

an indication of the mode in which, in theory, such a solution
would have to be sought, were the English law, on these
subjects, a perfectly consistent scheme of scientific evidence.
This is the mode in which one would, under those circum
stances, attempt to extract from its proceedings an admission
of the exact measure of that standard of certainty which it
adopted, but which it declined openly to enunciate.

CHAPTER XIV.

FALLACIES,

§ 1. IN works on Logic a chapter is generally devoted
to the discussion of Fallacies, that is, to the description
and classification of the different ways in which the rules
of Logic may be transgressed. The analogy of Probability
to Logic is sufficiently close to make it advisable to adopt
the same plan here. In describing his own opinions an
author is, of course, perpetually obliged to describe and
criticise those of others which he considers erroneous. But
some of the most widely spread errors find no supporters
worth mentioning, and exist only in vague popular misap
prehension. It will be found the best arrangement, there
fore, at the risk of occasional repetition, to collect a few of
the errors that occur most frequently, and as far as possible
to trace them to their sources; but it will hardly be worth
the trouble to attempt any regular system of arrangement
and classification. We shall mainly confine ourselves, in
accordance with the special province of this work, to problems
which involve questions of logical interest, or to those
which refer to the application of Probability to moral and
social science. We shall avoid the discussion of isolated
problems in games of chance and skill except when some
error of principle seems to be involved in them.

SECT. 2.] Fallacies. 33S

§ 2. (I.) One of the most fertile sources of error and
confusion upon the subject has been already several times
alluded to, and in part discussed in a previous chapter.
This consists in choosing the class to which to refer an
event, and therefore judging of the rarity of the event and
the consequent improbability of foretelling it, after it lias
happened, and then transferring the impressions we expe
rience to a supposed contemplation of the event beforehand.
The process in itself is perfectly legitimate (however unne
cessary it may be), since time does not in strictness enter
at all into questions of Probability. No error therefore
need arise in this way, if we were careful as to the clas^
which we thus selected; but such carefulness is often neg
lected.

An illustration may afford help here. A man onci
pointed to a small target chalked upon a door, the targe
having a bullet hole through the centre of it, and surprise(
some spectators by declaring that he had fired that sho
from an old fowling-piece at a distance of a hundred yards.
His statement was true enough, but he suppressed a rather
important fact. The shot had really been aimed in a general
way at the barn-door, and had hit it; the target was after
wards chalked round the spot where the bullet struck. A
deception analogous to this is, I think, often practised uncon
sciously in other matters. We judge of events on a similar
principle, feeling and expressing surprise in an equally un
reasonable way, .and deciding as to their occurrence on
grounds which are really merely a subsequent adjunct of our
own. Butler's remarks about 'the story of Ca3sar,' discussed
already in the twelfth chapter, are of this character. He
selects a series of events from history, and then imagines a
person guessing them correctly who at the time had not the
history before him. As I have already pointed out, it is one

334 Fallacies. [CHAP..XIV.

thing to be unlikely to guess an event rightly without
specific evidence; it is another and very different thing to
appreciate the truth of a story which is founded partly or
entirely upon evidence. But it is a great mistake to transfer
tc one of these ways of viewing the matter the mental im
pressions which properly belong to the other. It is like
drawing the target afterwards, and then being surprised to
find that the shot lies in the centre of it.

§ 3. One aspect of this fallacy has been already dis
cussed, but it will serve to clear up difficulties which are
often felt upon the subject if we reexamine the question
under a somewhat more general form.

In the class of examples under discussion we are generally
presented with an individual which is not indeed definitely
referred to a class, but in regard to which we have no great
difficulty in choosing the appropriate class. Now suppose
we were contemplating such an event as the throwing of
jdxes with a pair of dice four times running. Such a throw
would be termed a very unlikely event, as the odds against
its happening would be 36 x 36 x 36 x 36 - 1 to 1 or 1679615
to 1. The meaning of these phrases, as has been abundantly
pointed out, is simply that the event in question occurs very
rarely; that, stated with numerical accuracy, it occurs once in
1679616 times.

§ 4. But now let us make the assumption that the
throw has actually occurred; let us put ourselves into the
position of contemplating sixes four times running when it is
known or reported that this throw has happened. The same
phrase, namely that the event is a very unlikely one, will
often be used in relation to it, but we shall find that this
phrase may be employed to indicate, on one occasion or
another, extremely different meanings.

(1) There is, firstly, the most correct meaning. The

SECT. 6.] Fallacies. 335

«vent, it is true, has happened, and we know what it is, and
therefore, we have not really any occasion to resort to the
rules of Probability; but we can nevertheless conceive our
selves as being in the position of a person who does not
know, and who has only Probability to appeal to. By calling
the chances 1679615 to 1 against the throw we then mean
to imply the fact, that inasmuch as such a throw occurs only
once in 1679616 times, our guess, were we to guess, would
be correct only once in the same number of times; provided,
that is, that it is a fair guisss, based simply on these statis
tical grounds.

§ 5. (2) But there is a second and very different con
ception sometimes introduced, especially when the event in
question is supposed to be known, not as above by the evi
dence of our experience, but by the report of a witness. We
may then mean by the 'chances against the event' (as was
pointed out in Chapter xii.) not the proportional number of
times we should be right in guessing the event, but the
proportional number of times the witness will be right in
reporting it. The bases of our inference are here shifted
on to new ground. In the former case the statistics were
the throws and their respective frequency, now they are the
witnesses' statements and their respective truthfulness.

§ 6. (3) But there is yet another meaning sometimes
intended to be conveyed when persons talk of the chances
against such an event as the throw in question. They may
mean — not, Here is an event, how often should I have
guessed it ? — nor, Here is a report, how often will it be
correct ? — but something different from either, namely, Here
is an event, how often will it be found to be produced by
some one particular kind of cause ?

When, for example, a man hears of dice giving the same
throw several times running, and speaks of this as very

336 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

extraordinary, we shall often find that he is not merely
thinking of the improbability of his guess being right, or of
the report being true, but, that along with this, he is intro
ducing the question of the throw having been produced by
fair dice. There is, of course, no reason whatever why such
a question as this should not also be referred to Probability,,
provided always that we could find the appropriate statistics
by which to judge. These statistics would be composed, not
of throws of the particular dice, nor of reports of the parti
cular witness, but of the occasions on which such a throw as.
the one in question respectively had, and had not, been
produced fairly. The objection to entering upon this view
of the question would be that no such statistics are obtain
able, and that if they were, we should prefer to form our
opinion (on principles to be described in Chapter XVI.) from
the special circumstances of the case rather than from an
appeal to the average.

§ 7. The reader will easily be able to supply examples,
in illustration of the distinctions just given ; we will briefly
examine but one. I hide a banknote in a certain book in a
large library, and leave the room. A person tells me that^
after I went out, a stranger came in, walked straight up to
that particular book, and took it away with him. Many
people on hearing this account would reply, How extremely
improbable ! On analysing the phrase, I think we shall
find that certainly two, and possibly all three, of the above
meanings might be involved in this exclamation. (1) What
may be meant is this, — Assuming that the report is true,
and the stranger innocent, a rare event has occurred. Many
books might have been thus taken without that particular
one being selected. I should not therefore have expected
the event, and when it has happened I am surprised. Now
a man has a perfect right to be surprised, but he has no

SECT. 8.] Fallacies. 337

logical right (so long as we confine ourselves to this view) to
make his surprise a ground for disbelieving the event. To
do this is to fall into the fallacy described at the commence
ment of this chapter. The fact of my not having been likely
to have guessed a thing beforehand is no reason in itself for
doubting it when I am informed of it. (2) Or I may stop
short of the events reported, and apply the rules of Proba
bility to the report itself. If so, what I mean is that such a
story as this now before me is of a kind very generally false,
and that I cannot therefore attach much credit to it now.
(3) Or I may accept the truth of the report, but doubt the
fact of the stranger having taken the book at random. If
so, what I mean is, that of men who take books in the way
described, only a small proportion will be found to have
taken them really at random ; the majority will do so because
they had by some means ascertained, or come to suspect,
what there was inside the book.

Each of the above three meanings is a possible and a
legitimate meaning. The only requisite is that we should be
careful to ascertain which of them is present to the mind, so
as to select the appropriate statistics. The first makes in
itself the most legitimate use of Probability ; the drawback
being that at the time in question the functions of Pro
bability are superseded by the event being otherwise known.
The second or third, therefore, is the more likely meaning to
be present to the mind, for in these cases Probability, if it
could be practically made use of, would, at the time in
question, be a means of drawing really important inferences.
The drawbacks are the difficulty of finding such statistics,
and the extreme disturbing influence upon these statistics of
the circumstances of the special case.

§ 8. (II.) Closely connected with the tendency just
mentioned is that which prompts us to confound a true
v. 22

338 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

chance selection with one which is more or less picked.
When we are dealing with familiar objects in a concrete
way, especially when the greater rarity corresponds to su
periority of quality, almost every one has learnt to recognize
the distinction. No one, for instance, on observing a fine
body of troops in a foreign town, but would be prompted to
ask whether they came from an average regiment or from
one that was picked. When however the distinction refers
to unfamiliar objects, and especially when only comparative
rarity seems to be involved, the fallacy may assume a rather
subtle and misleading form, and seems to deserve special
notice by the consideration of a few examples.

Sometimes the result is not so much an actual fallacy as
a slight misreckoning of the order of probability of the event
under consideration. For instance, in the Pyramid question,
we saw that it made some difference whether we considered
that TT alone was to be taken into account or whether we
put this constant into a class with a small number of other
similar ones. Tn deciding, however, whether or not there is
anything remarkable in the actual falling short of the
representation of the number 7 in the evaluation of TT
(v. p. 248) the whole question turns upon considerations of
this kind. The only enquiry raised is whether there is any
thing remarkable in this departure from the mean, and the
answer depends upon whether we suppose that we are re
ferring to a predetermined digit, or to whatever digit of the
ten happens to be most above or below the average. Or,
take the case raised by Cournot (Exposition de la Theorie
des Chances, §§ 102, 114), that a certain deviation from the
mean in the case of Departmental returns of the proportion
between male and female births is significant and indicative
of a difference in kind, provided that we select at random a
single French Department ; but that the same deviation may

SECT. 9.] Fallacies. 339

be accidental if it is the maximum of the respective returns
for several Departments1. The answer may be given one
way or the other according as we bear this consideration in
mind.

§ 9. We are peculiarly liable to be misled in this way
when we are endeavouring to determine the cause of some
phenomenon, by mere statistics, in entire ignorance as to the
direction in which the cause should be expected. In such
cases an ingenious person who chooses to look about over a
large field can never fail to hit upon an explanation which is
plausible in the sense that it fits in with the hitherto ob
served facts. With a tithe of the trouble which Mr Piazzi
Smyth expended upon the measurement of the great pyramid,
I think I would undertake to find plausible intimations of
several of the important constants and standards which he
discovered there, in the dimensions of the desk at which I am
writing. The oddest instance of this sort of conclusion is
perhaps to be found in the researches of a writer who has
discovered2 that there is a connection of a striking kind
between the respective successes of the Oxford and the
Cambridge boat in the annual race, and the greater and less
frequency of sun-spots.

Of course our usual practical resource in such cases is to
make appeal to our previous knowledge of the subject in
question, which enables us to reject as absurd a great number
of hypotheses which can nevertheless make a fair show when
they are allowed to rest upon a limited amount of adroitly
selected instances. But it must be remembered that if any
theory chooses to appeal to statistics, to statistics it must be
suffered to go for judgment. Even the boat race theory

1 Discussed by Mr F.Y.Edgeworth, 2 Journal of the Statistical Soc.

in the Phil. Mag. for April, 1887. (Vol. XLII. p. 328) Dare one suspect

a joke?

22—2

340 Fallacies. [CHAP, xiv,

could be established (if sound) on this ground alone. That
is, if it really could be shown that experience in the long run
confirmed the preponderance of successes on one side or the
other according to the relative frequency of the sun-spots,
we should have to accept the fact that the two classes of
events were not really independent. One of the two, which
ever it may be, must be suspected of causing or influencing
the other; or both must be caused or influenced by some
common circumstances.

§ 10. (III.) The fallacy described at the commencement
of this chapter arose from determining to judge of an ob
served or reported event by the rules of Probability, but
employing a wrong set of statistics in the process of judging.
Another fallacy, closely connected with this, arises from the
practice of taking some only of the characteristics of such an
event, and arbitrarily confining to these the appeal to Pro
bability. Suppose I toss up twelve pence, and find that eleven
of them give heads. Many persons on witnessing such an occur
rence would experience a feeling which they would express by
the remark, How near that was to getting all heads ! And if
any thing very important were staked on the throw they
would be much excited at the occurrence. But in what
sense were we near to twelve ? There is a not uncommon
error, I apprehend, which consists in unconsciously regarding
the eleven heads as a thing which is already somehow
secured, so that one might as it were keep them, and then
take our chance for securing the remaining one. The eleven
are mentally set aside, looked upon as certain (for they have
already happened), and we then introduce the notion of
chance merely for the twelfth. But this twelfth, having
also happened, has no better claim to such a distinction than
any of the others. If we will introduce the notion of chance
in the case of the one that gave tail we must do the same in

SECT. 11.] Fallacies. 341

the case of all the others as well. In other words, if the
tosser be dissatisfied at the appearance of the one tail, and
wish to cancel it and try his luck again, he must toss up the
whole lot of pence again fairly together. In this case, of
course, so far from his having a better prospect for the next
throw he may think himself in very good luck if he makes
again as good a throw as the one he rejected. What he is
doing is confounding this case with that in which the throws
are really successive. If eleven heads have been tossed up in
turn, we are of course within an even chance of getting a
twelfth ; but the circumstances are quite different in the
instance proposed.

§ 11. In the above example the error is transparent.
But in forming a judgment upon matters of greater com
plexity than dice and pence, especially in the case of what are
called ' narrow escapes/ a mistake of an analogous kind is, I
apprehend, far from uncommon. A person, for example, who
has just experienced a narrow escape will often be filled
with surprise and anxiety amounting almost to terror. The
event being past, these feelings are, at the time, in strictness
inappropriate. If, as is quite possible, they are merely in
stinctive, or the result of association, they do not fall within
the province of any kind of Logic. If, however, as seems
more likely, they partially arise from a supposed transference
of ourselves into that point of past time at which the event
was just about to happen, and the production by imagina
tion of the feelings we should then expect to experience,
this process partakes of the nature of an inference, and can
be right or wrong. In other words, the alarm may be pro
portionate or disproportionate to the amount of danger that
might fairly have been reckoned upon in such a hypothetical
anticipation. If the supposed transfer were completely
carried out, there would be no fallacy ; but it is often very

342 Fallacies. [CHAR XIY.

incompletely done, some of the component parts of the event
being supposed to be determined or ' arranged ' (to use a
sporting phrase) in the form in which we now know that
they actually have happened, and only the remaining ones
being fairly contemplated as future chances.

A man, for example, is out with a friend, whose rifle goes
off by accident, and the bullet passes through his hat. He
trembles with anxiety at thinking what might have hap
pened, and perhaps remarks, 'How very near I was to being*
killed!' Now we may safely assume that he means some
thing more than that a shot passed very close to him. He
has some vague idea that, as he would probably say, 'his
chance of being killed then was very great.' His surprise
and terror may be in great part physical and instinctive,
arising simply from the knowledge that the shot had passed
very near him. But his mental state may be analysed, and
we shall then most likely find, at bottom, a fallacy of the
kind described above. To speak or think of chance in con
nection with the incident, is to refer the particular incident
to a class of incidents of a similar character, and then to con
sider the comparative frequency with which the contem
plated result ensues. Now the series which we may suppose
to be most naturally selected in this case is one composed of
shooting excursions with his friend; up to this point the
proceedings are assumed to be designed, beyond it only,
in the subsequent event, was there accident, Once in a
thousand times perhaps on such occasions the gun will go
off accidentally; one in a thousand only of those discharges
will be directed near his friend's head. If we will make the
accident a matter of Probability, we ought by rights in this
way (to adopt the language of the first example), to 'toss up
again ' fairly. But we do not do this ; we seem to assume for
certain that the shot goes within an inch of our heads, de-

SECT. 12.] Fallacies. 343

tach that from the notion of chance at all, and then begin to
introduce this notion again for possible deflections from that
saving inch.

§ 12. (IV.) We will now notice a fallacy connected with
the subjects of betting and gambling. Many or most of the
popular misapprehensions on this subject imply such utter
ignorance and confusion as to the foundations of the science
that it would be needless to discuss them here. The follow
ing however is of a far more plausible kind, and has been a
source of perplexity to persons of considerable acuteness.

The case, put into the simplest form, is as follows1.
Suppose that a person A is playing against B, B being
either another individual or a group of individuals, • say a
gambling bank. They begin by tossing for a shilling, and
A maintains that he is in possession of a device which will
insure his winning. If he does win on the first occasion he
has clearly gained his point so far. If he loses, he stakes
next time two shillings instead of one. The result of course
is that if he wins on the second occasion he replaces his
former loss, and is left with one shilling profit as well. So
he goes on, doubling his stake after every loss, with the
obvious result that on the first occasion of success he makes
good all his previous losses, and is left with a shilling over.
But such an occasion must come sooner or later, by the
assumptions of chance on which the game is founded. Hence
it follows that he can insure, sooner or later, being left a
final winner. Moreover he may win to any amount; firstly
from the obvious consideration that he might make his
initial stake as large as he pleased, a hundred pounds, for

1 It appears to have been long Edinburgh, for 1823) which discusses

known to gamblers under the name certain points connected with it, but

of the Martingale. There is a paper scarcely touches on the subject of the

by Babbage (Trans, of Royal Soc. of sections which follow.

344 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

instance, instead of a shilling; and secondly, because what
he has done once he may do again. He may put his shilling
by, and have a second spell of play, long or short as the case
may be, with the same termination to it. Accordingly by
mere persistency he may accumulate any sum of money he
pleases, in apparent defiance of all that is meant by luck.

§ 13. I have classed this opinion among fallacies, as the
present is the most convenient opportunity of discussing it,
though in strictness it should rather be termed a paradox,
since the conclusion is perfectly sound. The only fallacy
consists in regarding such a way of obtaining the result as
mysterious. On the contrary, there is nothing more easy
than to insure ultimate success under the given conditions.
The point is worth enquiry, from the principles it involves,
and because the answers commonly given do not quite meet
the difficulty. It is sometimes urged, for instance, that no
bank would or does allow the speculator to choose at will the
amount of his stake, but puts a limit to the amount for
which it will consent to play. This is quite true, but is of
course no answer to the hypothetical enquiry before us, which
assumes that such a state of things is allowed. Again, it has
been urged that the possibility in question turns entirely
upon the fact that credit must be supposed to be given, for
otherwise the fortune of the player may not hold out until
his turn of luck arrives: — that, in fact, sooner or later, if he
goes on long enough, his fortune will not hold out long
enough, and all his gains will be swept away. It is quite
true that credit is a condition of success, but it is in no sense
the cause. We may suppose both parties to agree at the
outset that there shall be no payments until the game be
ended, A having the right to decide when it shall be con
sidered to be ended. It still remains true that whereas in
ordinary gambling, i.e. with fixed or haphazard stakes, A

SECT. 14.] Fallacies. 345

could not ensure winning eventually to any extent, he can
do so if he adopt such a scheme as the one in question. And
this is the state of things which seems to call for explanation.

§ 14. What causes perplexity here is the supposed fact
that in some mysterious way certainty has been conjured out
of uncertainty ; that in a game where the detailed events are
utterly inscrutable, and where the average, by supposition,
shows no preference for either side, one party is nevertheless
succeeding somehow in steadily drawing the luck his own
way. It looks as if it were a parallel case with that of a
man who should succeed by some device in permanently
securing more than half of the tosses with a penny which
was nevertheless to be regarded as a perfectly fair one.

This is quite a mistake. The real fact is that A does
not expose his gains to chance at all; all that he so exposes
is the number of times he has to wait until he gains. Put
such a case as this. I offer to give a man any sum of money
he chooses to mention provided he will at once give it back
again to me with one pound more. It does not need much
acuteness to see that it is a matter of indifference to me
whether he chooses to mention one pound, or ten, or a
hundred. Now suppose that instead of leaving it to his
choice which of these sums is to be selected each time, the
two parties agree to leave it to chance. Let them, for
instance, draw a number out of a bag each time, and let that
be the sum which A gives to B under the prescribed condi
tions. The case is not altered. A still gains his pound each
time, for the introduction of the element of chance has not
in any way touched this. All that it does is to make this
pound the result of an uncertain subtraction, sometimes 10
minus 9, sometimes 50 minus 49, and so on. It is these
numbers only, not their difference, which he submits to luck,
and this is of no consequence whatever.

346 Fallacies. [CHAP, xiv.

To suggest to any individual or company that they
should consent to go- on playing upon such terms as these
would be too barefaced a proposal. And yet the case in
question is identical in principle, and almost identical in
form, with this. To offer to give a man any sum he likes to
name provided he gives you back again that same sum plus
one, and to offer him any number of terms he pleases of the
series 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, &c., provided you have the next term of
the set, are equivalent. The only difference is that in the
latter case the result is attained with somewhat more of
arithmetical parade. Similarly equivalent are the processes
in case we prefer to leave it to chance, instead of to choice,
to decide what sum or what number of terms shall be fixed
upon. This latter is what is really done in the case in
question. A man who consents to go on doubling his stake
every time he wins, is leaving nothing else to chance than
the determination of the particular number of terms of such
a geometrical series which shall be allowed to pass before he
stops.

§ 15. It may be added that there is no special virtue in
the particular series in question, viz. that in accordance with
which the stake is doubled each time. All that is needed is
that the last term of the series should more than balance all
the preceding ones. Any other series which increased faster
than this geometrical one, would answer the purpose as well
or better. Nor is it necessary, again, that the game should
be an even or ' fair' one. Chance, be it remembered, affects
nothing here but the number of terms to which the series
attains on each occasion, its final result being always arith
metically fixed. When a penny is tossed up it is only on
one of every two occasions that the series runs to more than
two terms, and so his fixed gains come in pretty regularly.
But unless he was playing for a limited time only, it would

SECT. 16.] Fallacies. 347

not affect him if the series ran to two hundred terms; it
would merely take him somewhat longer to win his stakes.
A man might safely, for instance, continue to lay an even
bet that he would get the single prize in a lottery of a thou
sand tickets, provided he thus doubled, or more than doubled,
his stake each time, and unlimited credit was given.

§ 16. So regarded, the problem is simple enough, but
there are two points in it to which attention may conveni
ently be directed.

In the first place, it serves very pointedly to remind us of
the distinction between a series of events (in this case the
tosses of the penny) which really are subjects of chance, and
our conduct founded upon these events, which may or may
not be so subject1. It is quite possible that this latter may
be so contrived as to be in many respects a matter of abso
lute certainty, — a consideration, I presume, familiar enough
to professional betting men. Why is the ordinary way of
betting on the throws of a penny fair to both parties? Be
cause a 'fair' series is 'fairly' treated. The heads and tails
occur at random, but on an average equally often, and the
stakes are either fixed or also arranged at random. If a man
backs heads every time for the same amount, he will of
course in the long run neither win nor lose. Neither will he
if he varies the stake every time, provided he does not vary
it in such a way as to make its amount dependent on the
fact of his having won or lost the time before. But he
may, if he pleases, and the other party consents, so arrange
his stakes (as in the case in question) that Chance, if one
might so express it, does not get a fair chance. Here the
human elements of choice and design have been so brought
to bear upon a series of events which, regarded by them-

1 Attention will be further directed to this distinction in the chapter on
Insurance and Gambling.

348 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

selves, exhibit nothing but the physical characteristics of
chance, that the latter elements disappear, and we get a
result which is arithmetically certain. Other analogous
instances might be suggested, but the one before us has the
merit of most ingeniously disguising the actual process.

§ 17. The meaning of the remark just made will be
better seen by a comparison with the following case. It has
been attempted1 to explain the preponderance of male births
over female by assuming that the chances of the two are
equal, but that the general desire to have a male heir tends
to induce many unions to persist until the occurrence of this
event, and no longer. It is supposed that in this way there
would be a slight preponderance of families which consisted
of one son only, or of two sons and one daughter, and so forth.

This is quite fallacious (as had been noticed by Laplace,
in his Essai)\ and there could not be a better instance
chosen than this to show just what we can do and what we
cannot do in the way of altering the luck in a real chance-
succession of events. To suppose that the number of actual
births could be influenced in the way in question is exactly
the same thing as to suppose that a number of gamblers
could increase the ratio of heads to tails, to something over
one-half, by each handing the coin to his neighbour as soon
as he had thrown a head : that they have only to leave off as
soon as head has appeared; an absurdity which we need not
pause to explain at this stage. The essential point about
the ' Martingale ' is that, whereas the occurrence of the
events on which the stakes are laid is unaffected, the stakes
themselves can be so adjusted as to make the luck swing one
way.

1 As by Prevost in the Bibliothe- parently accepted, by Quetelet (Phy-
que Universelle de Geneve, Oct. 1829. sique Sociale i. 171).
The explanation is noted, and ap-

SECT. 19.] Fallacies. 349

§ 18. In the second place, this example brings before us
what has had to be so often mentioned already, namely, that
the series of Probability are in strictness supposed to be
interminable. If therefore we allow either party to call
upon us to stop, especially at a point which just happens to
suit him, we may get results decidedly opposed to the
integrity of the theory. In the case before us it is a neces
sary stipulation for A that he may be allowed to leave off
when he wishes, that is at one of the points at which the
throw is in his favour. Without this stipulation he may be
left a loser to any amount.

Introduce the supposition that one party may arbitrarily
call for a stoppage when it suits him and refuse to permit it
sooner, and almost any system of what would be otherwise fair
play may be converted into a very one-sided arrangement.
Indeed, in the case in question, A need not adopt this device
of doubling the stakes every time he loses. He may play
with a fixed stake, and nevertheless insure that one party
shall win any assigned sum, assuming that the game is even
and that he is permitted to play on credit.

§ 19. (V.) A common mistake is to assume that a very
unlikely thing will not happen at all. It is a mistake which,
when thus stated in words, is too obvious to be committed,
for the meaning of an unlikely thing is one that happens at
rare intervals; if it were not assumed that the event would
happen sometimes it would not be called unlikely, but im
possible. This is an error which could scarcely occur except
in vague popular misapprehension, and is so abundantly re
futed in works on Probability, that it need only be touched
upon briefly here. It follows of course, from our definition
of Probability, that to speak of a very rare combination of
events as one that is 'sure never to happen,' is to use lan
guage incorrectly. Such a phrase may pass current as a

350 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

loose popular exaggeration, but in strictness it involves a
contradiction. The truth about such rare events cannot be
better described than in the following quotation from De
Morgan1: —

"It is said that no person ever does arrive at such ex
tremely improbable cases as the one just cited [drawing the
same ball five times running out of a bag containing twenty
balls]. That a given individual should never throw an ace
twelve times running on a single die, is by far the most
likely; indeed, so remote are the chances of such an event
in any twelve trials (more than 2,000,000,000 to 1 against it)
that it is unlikely the experience of any given country, in
any given century, should furnish it. But let us stop for a
moment, and ask ourselves to what this argument applies.
A person who rarely touches dice will hardly believe that
doublets sometimes occur three times running; one who han
dles them frequently knows that such is sometimes the fact.
Every very practised user of those implements has seen still
rarer sequences. Now suppose that a society of persons had
thrown the dice so often as to secure a run of six aces ob
served and recorded, the preceding argument would still be
used against twelve. And if another society had practised
long enough to see twelve aces following each other, they
might still employ the same method of doubting as to a run
of twenty-four; and so on, ad infinitum. The power of ima
gining cases which contain long combinations so much ex
ceeds that of exhibiting and arranging them, that it is easy
to assign a telegraph which should make a separate signal
for every grain of sand in a globe as large as the visible uni
verse, upon the hypothesis of the most space-penetrating
astronomer. The fallacy of the preceding objection lies in
supposing events in number beyond our experience, composed

1 Essay on Probabilities, p. 126.

SECT. 20.] Fallacies. 351

entirely of sequences such as fall within our experience. It
makes the past necessarily contain the whole, as to the qua
lity of its components; and judges by samples. Now the
least cautious buyer of grain requires to examine a handful
before he judges of a bushel, and a bushel before he judges
of a load. But relatively to such enormous numbers of com
binations as are frequently proposed, our experience does not
deserve the title of a handful as compared with a bushel, or
even of a single grain."

§ 20. The origin of this inveterate mistake is not diffi
cult to be accounted for. It arises, no doubt, from the exi
gencies of our practical life. No man can bear in mind
every contingency to which he may be exposed. If therefore
we are ever to do anything at all in the world, a large num
ber of the rarer contingencies must be left entirely out of
account. And the necessity of this oblivion is strengthened
by the shortness of our life. Mathematically speaking, it
Avould be said to be certain that any one who lives long
enough will be bitten by a mad dog, for the event is not an
impossible, but only an improbable one, and must therefore
come to pass in time. But this and an indefinite number
of other disagreeable contingencies have on most occasions
to be entirely ignored in practice, and thence they come
almost necessarily to drop equally out of our thought and
expectation. And when the event is one in itself of no im
portance, like a rare throw of the dice, a great effort of
imagination may be required, on the part of persons not ac
customed to abstract mathematical calculation, to enable
them to realize the throw as being even possible.

Attempts have sometimes been made to estimate what
extremity of unlikelihood ought to be considered as equi
valent to this practical zero point of belief. In so far as
such attempts are carried out by logicians, or by those who

352 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

are unwilling to resort to mathematical valuation of chances,
they must be regarded as merely a special form of the modal
difficulties discussed in the last chapter, and need not there
fore be reconsidered here ; but a word or two may be added
concerning the views of some who have looked at the matter
from the mathematician's point of view.

The principal of these is perhaps Buffon. He has ar
rived at the estimate (Arithmetique Morale § vm.) that this
practical zero is equivalent to a chance of yo",t>w. ^ke
grounds for selecting this fraction are found in the fact that,
according to the tables of mortality accessible to him, it
represents the chance of a man of 56 dying in the course of
the next day. But since no man under common circum
stances takes the chance into the slightest consideration, it
follows that it is practically estimated as having no value.

It is obvious that this result is almost entirely arbitrary,
and in fact his reasons cannot be regarded as anything more
than a slender justification from experience for adopting a
conveniently simple fraction ; a justification however which
would apparently have been equally available in the case of
any other fractions lying within wide limits of the one
selected1.

§ 21. There is one particular form of this error, which,
from the importance occasionally attached to it, deserves
perhaps more special examination. As stated above, there
can be no doubt that, however unlikely an event may be, if
we (loosely speaking) vary the circumstances sufficiently, or

1 This theoretical or absolute neg- tion will be found described in Mr
lect of what is very rare must not be Merriman's Least Squares (p. 166).
confused with the practical neglect But this rests on the understanding
sometimes recommended by astro- that a smaller balance of error would
nomical and other observers. A thus result in the long run. The
criterion, known as Chauvenet's, for very rare event is deliberately re-
indicating the limits of such rejec- jected, not overlooked.

SECT. 21.] Fallacies. 353

if, in other words, we keep on trying long enough, we shall
meet with such an event at last. If we toss up a pair of
dice a few times we shall get doublets ; if we try longer with
three we shall get triplets, and so on. However unusual the
event may be, even were it sixes a thousand times running,
it will come some time or other if we have only patience and
vitality enough. Now apply this result to the letters of the
alphabet. Suppose that one letter at a time is drawn from
a bag which contains them all, and is then replaced. If the
letters were written down one after another as they occurred,
it would commonly be expected that they would be found to
make mere nonsense, and would never arrange themselves
into the words of any language known to men. No more
they would in general, but it is a commonly accepted result
of the theory, and one which we may assume the reader to
be ready to admit without further discussion, that, if the
process were continued long enough, words making sense
would appear; nay more, that any book we chose to men
tion, — Milton's Paradise Lost or the plays of Shakespeare,
for example, — would be produced in this way at last. It
would take more days than we have space in this volume to
represent in figures, to make tolerably certain of obtaining
the former of these works by thus drawing letters out of a
bag, but the desired result would be obtained at length1.

1 The process of calculation may combinations is favourable, if we

be readily indicated. There are, say, reject variations of spelling. Hence

about 350,000 letters in the work in unity divided by this number would

question. Since any of the 26 letters represent the chance of getting the

of the alphabet may be drawn each desired result by successive random

time, the possible number of com- selection of the required number of

binations would be 26 350'000; a num- 350,000 letters.

ber which, as may easily be inferred If this chance is thought too small,

from a table of logarithms, would and any one asks how often the

demand for its expression nearly above random selection must be re-

500,000 figures. Only one of these peated in order to give him odds of 2

v. 23

354 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

Now many people have not unnaturally thought it de
rogatory to genius to suggest that its productions could
have also been obtained by chance, whilst others have gone
on to argue, If this be the case, might not the world itself in
this manner have been produced by chance ?

§ 22. We will begin with the comparatively simple, de
terminate, and intelligible problem of the possible production
of the works of a great human genius by chance. With
regard to this possibility, it may be a consolation to some
timid minds to be reminded that the power of producing the
works of a Shakespeare, in time, is not confined to consum
mate genius and to mere chance. There is a third alterna
tive, viz. that of purely mechanical procedure. Any one,
down almost to an idiot, might do it, if he took sufficient
time about the task. For suppose that the required number
of letters were procured and arranged, not by chance, but
designedly, and according to rules suggested by the theory
of permutations : the letters of the alphabet and the number
of them to be employed being finite, every order in which
they could occur would come in its due turn, and therefore
every thing which can be expressed in language would be
arrived at some time or other.

There is really nothing that need shock any one in such
a result. Its possibility arises from the following cause.

to 1 in favour of success, this also shown algebraically to be equivalent
can be easily shown. If the chance to odds of about 2 to 1. That is,

1 when we have drawn the requisite
of an event on each occasion is - , „ . , J . „ , .

n quantity of letters a number of times

the chance of getting it once at least equal to the inconceivably great
n — 1\H number above represented, it is still

in n trials is l-(^— J \ for we oniy 2 to 1 that we shall have se-

shall do this unless we fail n times cured what we want: — and then we

running. When (as in the case in have to recognize it.
question) n is very large, this may be

SECT. 23.] Fallacies. 355

The number of letters, and therefore of words, at our disposal
is limited ; whatever therefore we may desire to express
in language necessarily becomes subject to corresponding
limitation. The possible variations of thought are literally
infinite, so are those of spoken language (by intonation of
the voice, &c.) ; but when we come to words there is a limit
ation, the nature of which is distinctly conceivable by the
mind, though the restriction is one that in practice will
never be appreciable, owing to the fact that the number of
combinations which may be produced is so enormous as to
surpass all power of the imagination to realize1. The answer
therefore is plain, and it is one that will apply to many other
cases as well, that to put a finite limit upon the number of
ways in which a thing can be done, is to determine that any
one who is able and willing to try long enough shall succeed
in doing it. If a great genius condescends to perform it
under these circumstances, he must submit to the possibility
of having his claims rivalled or disputed by the chance-man
and idiot. If Shakespeare were limited to the use of eight
or nine assigned words, the time within which the latter
agents might claim equality with him would not be very
great. As it is, having had the range of the English lan
guage at his disposal, his reputation is not in danger of being
assailed by any such methods.

§ 23. The case of the possible production of the world
by chance leads us into an altogether different region of dis
cussion. We are not here dealing with figures the nature
and use of which are within the fair powers of the under
standing, however the imagination may break down in at
tempting to realize the smallest fraction of their full signi-

1 The longest life which could utter insignificance in the face of
reasonably be attributed to any Ian- such periods of time as are being
guage would of course dwindle into here arithmetically contemplated.

23—2

356 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

ficance. The understanding itself is wandering out of its.
proper province, for the conditions of the problem cannot be
assigned. When we draw letters out of a bag we know very
well what we are doing ; but what is really meant by pro
ducing a world by chance ? By analogy of the former case,
we may assume that some kind of agent is presupposed ; —
perhaps therefore the following supposition is less absurd
than any other. Imagine some being, not a Creator but a
sort of Demiurgus, who has had a quantity of materials put
into his hands, and he assigns them their collocations and
their laws of action, blindly and at haphazard : what are the
odds that such a world as we actually experience should have
been brought about in this way ?

If it were worth while seriously to set about answering
such a question, and if some one would furnish us with the
number of the letters of such an alphabet, and the length of
the work to be written with them, we could proceed to indi
cate the result. But so much as this may surely be affirmed
about it ; — that, far from merely finding the length of this
small volume insufficient for containing the figures in which
the adverse odds would be given, all the paper which the
world has hitherto produced would be used up before we had
got far on our way in writing them down.

§ 24. The most seductive form in which the difficulty
about the occurrence of very rare events generally presents
itself is probably this. 'You admit (some persons will be
disposed to say) that such an event may sometimes happen ;
nay, that it does sometimes happen in the infinite course of
time. How then am I to know that this occasion is not one
of these possible occurrences ? ' To this, one answer only can
be given, — the same which must always be given where
statistics and probability are concerned, — ' The present may
be such an occasion, but it is inconceivably unlikely that it

SECT., 25.] Fallacies. 357

should be one. Amongst countless billions of times in which
you, and such as you, urge this, one person only will be
justified ; and it is not likely that you are that one, or that
this is that occasion.'

§ 25. There is another form of this practical inability to
distinguish between one high number and another in the
estimation of chances, which deserves passing notice from its
importance in arguments about heredity. People will often
urge an objection to the doctrine that qualities, mental and
bodily, are transmitted from the parents to the offspring, on
the ground that there are a multitude of instances to the
contrary, in fact a great majority of such instances. To
raise this objection implies an utter want of appreciation of
the very great odds which possibly may exist, and which the
argument in support of heredity implies do exist against any
given person being distinguished for intellectual or other
eminence. This is doubtless partly a matter of definition,
depending upon the degree of rarity which we consider to be
implied by eminence ; but taking any reasonable sense of the
term, we shall readily see that a very great proportion of
failures may still leave an enormous preponderance of evi
dence in favour of the heredity doctrine. Take, for instance,
that degree of eminence which is implied by being one of
four thousand. This is a considerable distinction, though,
since there are about two thousand such persons to be found
amongst the total adult male population of Great Britain, it
is far from implying any conspicuous genius. Now suppose
that in examining the cases of a large number of the chil
dren of such persons, we had found that 199 out of 200 of
them failed to reach the same distinction. Many persons
would conclude that this was pretty conclusive evidence
against any hereditary transmission. To be able to adduce
only one favourable, as against 199 hostile instances, would

358 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

to them represent the entire break-down of any such theory.
The error, of course, is obvious enough, and one which, with
the figures thus before him, hardly any one could fail to
avoid. But if one may judge from common conversation
and other such sources of information, it is found in practice
exceedingly difficult adequately to retain the conviction that
even though only one in 200 instances were favourable,
this would represent odds of about 20 to 1 in favour of the
theory. If hereditary transmission did not prevail, only one
in 4000 sons would thus rival their fathers; but we find
actually, let us say (we are of course taking imaginary pro
portions here), that one in 200 does. Hence, if the statistics
are large enough to be satisfactory, there has been some
influence at work which has improved the chances of mere
coincidence in the ratio of 20 to 1. We are in fact so little
able to realise the meaning of very large numbers, — that is,
to retain the ratios in the mind, where large numbers are
concerned, — that unless we repeatedly check ourselves by
arithmetical considerations we are too apt to treat and esti
mate all beyond certain limits as equally vast and vague.

§ 26. (VI.) In discussing the nature of the connexion
between Probability and Induction, we examined the claims
of a rule commonly given for inferring the probability that
an event which had been repeatedly observed would recur
again. I endeavoured to show that all attempts to obtain
and prove such a rule were necessarily futile ; if these reasons
were conclusive the employment of such a rule must of
course be regarded as fallacious. A few examples may con
veniently be added here, tending to show how instead of
there being merely a single rule of succession we might better
divide the possible forms into three classes.

(1) In some cases when a thing has been observed to
happen several times it becomes in consequence more likely

SECT. 27.] Fallacies. 359

that the thing should happen again. This agrees with the
ordinary form of the rule, and is probably the case of most
frequent occurrence. The necessary vagueness of expression
when we talk of the ' happening of a thing ' makes it quite
impossible to tolerate the rule in this general form, but if we
specialize it a little we shall find it assume a more familiar
shape. If, for example, we have observed two or more pro
perties to be frequently associated together in a succession of
individuals, we shall conclude with some force that they will
be found to be so connected in future. The strength of our
conviction however will depend not merely on the number
of observed coincidences, but on far more complicated con
siderations ; for a discussion of which the reader must be
referred to regular treatises on Inductive evidence. Or again,
if we have observed one of two events succeed the other
several times, the occurrence of the former will excite in
most cases some degree of expectation of the latter. As
before, however, the degree of our expectation is not to be
assigned by any simple formula ; it will depend in part upon
the supposed intimacy with which the events are connected.
To attempt to lay down definite rules upon the subject
would lead to a discussion upon laws of causation, and the
circumstances under which their existence may be inferred,
and therefore any further consideration of the matter must
be abandoned here.

§ 27. (2) Or, secondly, the past recurrence may in it
self give no valid grounds for inference about the future ;
this is the case which most properly belongs to Probability1.

1 We are here assuming of course assuming that e.g. the die is known

that the ultimate limit to which our to be a fair one; if this is not known

average tends is known, either from but a possible bias has to be inferred

knowledge of the causes or from pre- from its observed performances, the

vious extensive experience. We are case falls under the former head.

360 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

That it does so belong will be easily seen if we bear in mind
the fundamental conception of the science. We are there
introduced to a series, — for purposes of inference an indefi
nitely extended series, — of terms, about the details of which,
information, except on certain points, is not given ; our know
ledge being confined to the statistical fact, that, say, one in
ten of them has some attribute which we will call X. Sup
pose now that five of these terms in succession have been X,
what hint does this give about the sixth being also an XI
Clearly none at all ; this past fact tells us nothing ; the for
mula for our inference is still precisely what it was before,
that one in ten being X it is one to nine that the next term
is X. And however many terms in succession had been of
one kind, precisely the same formula would still be given.

§ 28. The way in which events will justify the answer
given by this formula is often misunderstood. For the
benefit therefore of those unacquainted with some of the
conceptions familiar to mathematicians, a few words of ex
planation may be added. Suppose then that we have had
X twelve times in succession. This is clearly an anomalous
state of things. To suppose anything like this continuing
to occur would be obviously in opposition to the statistics,
which assert that in the long run only one in ten is X.
But how is this anomaly got over? In other words, how
do we obviate the conclusion that JT's must occur more
frequently than once in ten times, after such a long succes
sion of them as we have now had ? Many people seem to
believe that there must be a diminution of X's afterwards
to counterbalance their past preponderance. This however
would be quite a mistake ; the proportion in which they
occur in future must remain the same throughout ; it cannot
be altered if we are to adhere to our statistical formula.
The fact is that the rectification of the exceptional disturb-

SECT. 28.] Fallacies. 361

ance in the proportion will be brought about simply by the
continual influx of fresh terms in the series. These will in
the long run neutralize the disturbance, not by any special
adaptation, as it were, for the purpose, but by the mere
weight of their overwhelming numbers. At every stage
therefore, in the succession, whatever might have been the
number and nature of the preceding terms, it will still be
true to say that one in ten of the terms will be an X.

If we had to do only with a finite number of terms,
however large that number might be, such a disturbance as
we have spoken of would, it is true, need a special alteration
in the subsequent proportions to neutralize its effects. But
when we have to do with an infinite number of terms, this
is not the case ; the ' limit ' of the series, which is what we
then have to deal with, is unaffected by these temporary
disturbances. In the continued progress of the series we
shall find, as a matter of fact, more and more of such dis
turbances, and these of a more and more exceptional character.
But whatever the point we may occupy at any time, if we
look forward or backward into the indefinite extension of the
series, we shall still see that the ultimate limit to the pro
portion in which its terms are arranged remains the same ;
and it is with this limit, as above mentioned, that we are
concerned in the strict rules of Probability.

The most familiar example, perhaps, of this kind is that
of tossing up a penny. Suppose we have had four heads in
succession; people1 have tolerably realized by now that ' head
the fifth time ' is still an even chance, as ' head ' was each

1 Except indeed the gamblers. Ac- it will not be repeated at the next

cording to a gambling acquaintance coup: this is the groundwork of all

whom Houdin, the conjurer, describes theories of probabilities and is term-

himself as having met at Spa, "the ed the maturity of chances" (Card-

oftener a particular combination has sharping exposed, p. 85).
occurred the more certain it is that

362 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

time before, and will be ever after. The preceding para
graph explains how it is that these occasional disturbances
in the average become neutralized in the long run.

§ 29. (3) There are other cases which, though rare,
are by no means unknown, in which such an inference as
that obtained from the Rule of Succession would be the di
rect reverse of the truth. The oftener a thing happens, it
may be, the more unlikely it is to happen again. This is the
case whenever we are drawing things from a limited source
(as balls from a bag without replacing them), or whenever
the act of repetition itself tends to prevent the succession
(as in giving false alarms).

I am quite ready to admit that we believe the results de
scribed in the last two classes on the strength of some such
general Inductive rule, or rather principle, as that involved
in the first. But it would be a great error to confound this
with an admission of the validity of the rule in each special
instance. We are speaking about the application of the rule
to individual cases, or classes of cases ; this is quite a dis
tinct thing, as was pointed out in a previous chapter, from
giving the grounds on which we rest the rule itself. If a
man were to lay it down as a universal rule, that the testi
mony of all persons was to be believed, and we adduced an
instance of a man having lied, it would not be considered
that he saved his rule by showing that we believed that it
was a lie on the word of other persons. But it is perfectly
consistent to give as a merely general, but not universal,
rule, that the testimony of men is credible ; then to separate
off a second class of men whose word is not to be trusted,
and finally, if any one wants to know our ground for the
second rule, to rest it upon the first. If we were speaking
of necessary laws, such a conflict as this would be as
hopeless as the old ' Cretan ' puzzle in logic ; but in in-

SECT. 31.] Fallacies. 363

stances of Inductive and Analogical extension it is perfectly
harmless.

§ 30. A familiar example will serve to bring out the
three different possible conclusions mentioned above. We
have observed it rain on ten successive days. A and B con
clude respectively for and against rain on the eleventh day ;
C maintains that the past rain affords no data whatever for
an opinion. Which is right ? We really cannot determine
a priori. An appeal must be made to direct observation, or
means must be found for deciding on independent grounds
to which class we are to refer the instance. If, for example,
it were known that every country produces its own rain, we
should choose the third rule, for it would be a case of drawing
from a limited supply. If again we had reasons to believe
that the rain for our country might be produced anywhere
on the globe, we should probably conclude that the past
rainfall threw no light whatever on the prospect of a con
tinuance of wet weather, and therefore take the second.
Or if, finally, we knew that rain came in long spells or sea
sons, as in the tropics, then the occurrence of ten wet days
in succession would make us believe that we had entered on
one of these seasons, and that therefore the next day would
probably resemble the preceding ten.

Since then all these forms of such an Inductive rule are
possible, and we have often no a priori grounds for preferring
one to another, it would seem to be unreasonable to attempt
to establish any universal formula of anticipation. All that
we can do is to ascertain what are the circumstances under
which one or other of these rules is, as a matter of fact,
found to be applicable, and to make use of it under those
circumstances.

§ 31. (VII.) In the cases discussed in (V.) the almost
infinitely small chances with which we were concerned were

364 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

rightly neglected from all practical consideration, however
proper it might be, on speculative grounds, to keep our minds
open to their actual existence. But it has often occurred to
me that there is a common error in neglecting to take them into
account when they may, though individually small, make up
for their minuteness by their number. As the mathematician
would express it, they may occasionally be capable of being
integrated into a finite or even considerable magnitude.

For instance, we may be confronted with a difficulty out
of which there appears to be only one appreciably possible
mode of escape. The attempt is made to force us into
accepting this, however great the odds apparently are against
it, on the ground that improbable as it may seem, it is at
any rate vastly more probable than any of the others. I
can quite admit that, on practical grounds, we may often find
it reasonable to adopt this course ; for we can only act on
one supposition, and we naturally and rightly choose, out
of a quantity of improbabilities, the least improbable. But
when we are not forced to act, no such decisive preference is
demanded of us. It is then perfectly reasonable to refuse
assent to the proposed explanation ; even to say distinctly
that we do not believe it, and at the same time to decline,
at present, to accept any other explanation. We remain, in
fact, in a state of suspense of judgment, a state perfectly
right and reasonable so long as no action demanding a spe
cific choice is forced upon us. One alternative may be
decidedly probable as compared with any other individually,
but decidedly improbable as compared with all others col
lectively. This in itself is intelligible enough ; what people
often fail to see is that there is no necessary contradiction
between saying and feeling this, and yet being prepared
vigorously to act, when action is forced upon us, as though
this alternative were really the true one.

SECT. 33.] Fallacies. 365

§ 32. To take a specific instance, this way of regarding
the matter has often occurred to me in disputes upon ' Spi
ritualist ' manifestations. Assent is urged upon us because,
it is said, no other possible solution can be suggested. It
may be quite true that apparently overwhelming difficulties
may lie as against each separate alternative solution ; but is
it always sufficiently realized how numerous such solutions
may be ? No matter that each individually may be almost
incredible : they ought all to be massed together and thrown
into the scale against the proffered solution, when the only
question asked is, Are we to accept this solution ? There is
no unfairness in such a course. We are perfectly ready to
adopt the same plan against any other individual alterna
tive, whenever any person takes to claiming this as the
solution of the difficulty. We are looking at the matter
from a purely logical point of view, and are quite willing, so
far, to place every solution, spiritualist or otherwise, upon the
same footing. The partisans of every alternative are in
somewhat the same position as the members of a deliberative
assembly, in which no one will support the motion of any
other member. Every one can aid effectively in rejecting
every other motion, but no one can succeed in passing his
own. Pressure of urgent necessity may possibly force them
out of this state of practical inaction, by, so to say, breaking
through the opposition at some point of least resistance ; but
unless aided by some such pressure they are left in a state of
hopeless dead-lock.

§ 33. Assuming that the spiritualistic solution admits
of, and is to receive, scientific treatment, this, it seems to
me, is the conclusion to which one might sometimes be led
in the face of the evidence offered. We might have to say to
every individual explanation, It is incredible, I cannot accept
it ; and unless circumstances should (which it is hardly pos-

366 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

sible that they should) force us to a hasty decision,— a deci
sion, remember, which need indicate no preference of the
judgment beyond what is just sufficient to turn the scale in its
favour as against any other single alternative, — we leave the
matter thus in abeyance. It will very likely be urged that
one of the explanations (assuming that all the possible ones
had been included) must be true ; this we readily admit.
It will probably also be urged that (on the often-quoted
principle of Butler) we ought forthwith to accept the one
which, as compared with the others, is the most plausible,
whatever its absolute worth may be. This seems distinctly
an error. To say that such and such an explanation is the
one we should accept, if circumstances compelled us to anti
cipate our decision, is quite compatible with its present
rejection. The only rational position surely is that of
admitting that the truth is somewhere amongst the various
alternatives, but confessing plainly that we have no such
preference for one over another as to permit our saying any
thing else than that we disbelieve each one of them.

§ 34. (VIII.) The very common fallacy of 'judging by
the event,' as it is generally termed, deserves passing notice
here, as it clearly belongs to Probability rather than to Logic ;
though its nature is so obvious to those who have grasped the
general principles of our science, that a very few words of
remark will suffice. In one sense every proposition must
consent to be judged by the event, since this is merely, in
other words, submitting it to the test of experience. But
there is the widest difference between the test appropriate
to a universal proposition and that appropriate to a merely
proportional or statistical one. The former is subverted by a
single exception ; the latter not merely admits exceptions,
but implies them. Nothing, however, is more common than
to blame advice (in others) because it has happened to turn

SECT. 35.] Fallacies. 367

out unfortunately, or to claim credit for it (in oneself) because
it has happened to succeed. Of course if the conclusion was
avowedly one of a probable kind we must be prepared with
complacency to accept a hostile event, or even a succession of
them ; it is not until the succession shows a disposition to
continue over long chat suspicion and doubt should arise, and
then only by a comparison of the degree of the assigned
probability, and the magnitude of the departure from it
which experience exhibits. For any single failure the reply
must be, ' the advice was sound ' (supposing, that is, that it
was to be justified in the long run), 'and I shall offer it again
under the same circumstances.'

§ 35. The distinction drawn in the above instance
deserves careful consideration ; for owing to the wide differ
ence between the kind of propositions dealt with in Proba
bility and in ordinary Logic, and the consequent difference in
the nature of the proof offered, it is quite possible for argu
ments of the same general appearance to be valid in the
former and fallacious in the latter, and conversely.

For instance, take the well-known fallacy which consists
in simply converting a universal affirmative, i.e. in passing
from All A is B to All B is A. When, as in common Logic,
the conclusion is to be as certain as the premise, there is not
a word to be said for such a step. But if we look at the
process with the more indulgent eye of Induction or Proba
bility we see that a very fair case may sometimes be made
out for it. The mere fact that ' Some B is A ' raises a cer
tain presumption that any particular B taken at random will
be an A. There is some reason, at any rate, for the belief,
though in the absence of statistics as to the relative fre
quency of A and B we are unable to assign a value to this
belief. I suspect that there may be many cases in which a
man has inferred that some particular B is an A on the

368 Fallacies. [CHAP. xiv.

ground that All A is B, who might justly plead in his behalf
that he never meant it to be a necessary, but only a pro
bable inference. The same remarks will of course apply
also to the logical fallacy of Undistributed Middle.

Now for a case of the opposite kind, i.e. one in which
Probability fails us, whereas the circumstances seem closely
analogous to those in which ordinary inference would be
able to make a stand. Suppose that I know that one letter
in a million is lost when in charge of the post. I write to a
friend and get no answer. Have I any reason to suppose
that the fault lies with him ? Here is an event (viz. the
loss of the letter) which has certainly happened ; and we sup
pose that, of the only two causes to which it can be assigned,
the ' value,' i.e. statistical frequency, of one is accurately
assigned, does it not seem natural to suppose that something
can be inferred as to the likelihood that the other cause had
been operative ? To say that nothing can be known about
its adequacy under these circumstances looks at first sight
like asserting that an equation in which there is only one
unknown term is theoretically insoluble.

As examples of this kind have been amply discussed in
the chapter upon Inverse rules of Probability I need do no
more here than remind the reader that no conclusion what
ever can be drawn as to the likelihood that the fault lay
with my friend rather than with the Post Office. Unless we
either know, or make some assumption about, the frequency
with which he neglects to answer the letters he receives, the
problem remains insoluble.

The reason why the apparent analogy, indicated above,
to an equation with only one unknown quantity, fails to hold
good, is that for the purposes of Probability there are really
two unknown quantities. What we deal with are propor
tional or statistical propositions. Now we are only told that

SECT. 35.] Fallacies. 369

in the instance in question the letter was lost, not that they
were found to be lost in such and such a proportion of cases.
Had this latter information been given to us we should really
have had but one unknown quantity to determine, viz. the
relative frequency with which my correspondent neglects to
answer his letters, and we could then have determined this
with the greatest ease.

v.

CHAPTER XV.

INSURANCE AND GAMBLING.

§ 1. IF the reader will recall to mind the fundamental
postulate of the Science of Probability, established and ex
plained in the first few chapters, and so abundantly illus
trated since, he will readily recognize that the two opposite
characteristics of individual irregularity and average regu
larity will naturally be differently estimated by different
minds. To some persons the elements of uncertainty may
be so painful, either in themselves or in their consequences,
that they are anxious to adopt some means of diminishing
them. To others the ultimate regularity of life, at any rate
within certain departments, its monotony as they consider it,
may be so wearisome that they equally wish to effect some
alteration and improvement in its characteristics. We shall
discuss briefly these mental tendencies, and the most simple
and obvious modes of satisfying them.

To some persons, as we have said, the world is all too full
of change and irregularity and consequent uncertainty. Civi
lization has done much to diminish these characteristics in
certain directions, but it has unquestionably aggravated them
in other directions, and it might not be very easy to say with
certainty in which of these respects its operation has been, at
present, on the whole most effective. The diminution of
irregularity is exemplified, amongst other things, in the case
of the staple products which supply our necessary food and

SECT. 2.] Insurance and Gambling. 371

clothing. With respect to them, famine and scarcity are by
comparison almost unknown now, at any rate in tolerably
civilized communities. As a consequence of this, and of the
vast improvements in the means of transporting goods and
conveying intelligence, the fluctuations in the price of such
articles are much less than they once were. In other direc
tions, however, the reverse has been the case. Fashion, for
instance, now induces so many people in every large com
munity simultaneously to desire the same thing, that great
fluctuations in value may ensue. Moreover a whole group of
causes (to enter upon any discussion of which would be to
trench upon the ground of Political Economy) combine to
produce great and frequent variations in matters concerning
credit and the currency, which formerly had no existence.
Bankruptcy, for instance, is from the nature of the case,
almost wholly a creation of modern times. We will not at
tempt to strike any balance between these opposite results
of modern civilization, beyond remarking that in matters of
prime importance the actual uncertainties have been pro
bably on the whole diminished, whereas in those which affect
the pocket rather than the life, they have been rather in
creased. It might also be argued with some plausibility
that in cases where the actual uncertainties have not become
greater, they have for all practical purposes done so, by their
consequences frequently becoming more serious, or by our
estimate of these consequences becoming higher.

§ 2. However the above question, as to the ultimate
balance of gain or loss, should be decided, there can be no
doubt that many persons find the present amount of uncer
tainty in some of the affairs of life greater than suits their
taste. How are they to diminish it ? Something of course
may be done, as regards the individual cases, by prudence
and foresight. Our houses may be built with a view not to

24—2

372 Insurance and Gambling. [CHAP, xv,

take fire so readily, or precautions may be taken that there
shall be fire-engines at hand. In the warding off of death
from disease and accident, something may be done by every
one who chooses to live prudently. Precautions of the above
kind, however, do not introduce any questions of Probability.
These latter considerations only come in when we begin to
invoke the regularity of the average to save us from the
irregularities of the details. We cannot, it is true, remove
the uncertainty in itself, but we can so act that the conse
quences of that uncertainty shall be less to us, or to those in
whom we are interested. Take the case of Life Insurance.
A professional man who has nothing but the income he earns
to depend upon, knows that the whole of that income may
vanish in a moment by his death. This is a state of things
which he cannot prevent; and if he were the only one in
such a position, or were unable or unwilling to combine with
his fellow-men, there would be nothing more to be done in
the matter except to live within his income as much as pos
sible, and so leave a margin of savings.

§ 3. There is however an easy mode of escape for him.
All that he has to do is to agree with a number of others,
who are in the same position as himself, to make up, so to
say, a common purse. They may resolve that those of their
number who live to work beyond the average length of life
shall contribute to support the families of those who die
earlier. If a few only concurred in such a resolution they
would not gain very much, for they would still be removed
by but a slight step from that uncertainty which they are
seeking to escape. What is essential is that a considerable
number should thus combine so as to get the benefit of that
comparative regularity which the average, as is well known,
almost always tends to exhibit.

§ 4. The above simple considerations really contain the

SECT. 4.] Insurance and Gambling. 373

essence of all insurance. Such points as the fact that the
agreement for indemnity extends only to a certain definite
sum of money; and that instead of calling for an occasional
general contribution at the time of the death of each member
they substitute a fixed annual premium, out of the proceeds
of which the payment is to be made, are merely accidents of
convenience and arrangement. Insurance is simply equiva
lent to a mutual contract amongst those who dread the con
sequences of the uncertainty of their life or employment,
that they will employ the aggregate regularity to neutralize
as far as possible the individual irregularity. They know
that for every one who gains by such a contract another will
lose as much; or if one gains a great deal many must have
lost a little. They know also that hardly any of their num
ber can expect to find the arrangement a 'fair' one, in the
sense that they just get back again what they have paid in
premiums, after deducting the necessary expenses of man
agement; but they deliberately prefer this state of things.
They consist of a body of persons who think it decidedly
better to leave behind them a comparatively fixed fortune,
rather than one which is extremely uncertain in amount;
although they are perfectly aware that, owing to the un
avoidable expenses of managing the affairs of such a society,
the comparatively fixed sum, so to be left, will be a trifle less
than the average fortunes which would have been left had
no such system of insurance been adopted.

As this is not a regular treatise upon Insurance no more
need be said upon the exact nature of such societies, beyond
pointing out that they are of various different kinds. Some
times they really are what we have compared them with,
viz. mutual agreements amongst a group of persons to make
up each other's losses to a certain extent. Into this category
fall the Mutual Insurance Societies, Benefit Societies, Trades

374 Insurance and Gambling. [CHAP. xv.

Unions (in respect of some of their functions), together with
innumerable other societies which go by various names.
Sometimes they are companies worked by proprietors or
shareholders for a profit, like any other industrial enter
prise. This is the case, I believe, with the majority of the
ordinary Life Insurance Societies. Sometimes, again, it is
the State which undertakes the management, as in the case
of our Post Office Insurance business.

§ 5. It is clear that there is no necessary limit to the
range of application of this principle1. It is quite conceiv
able that the majority of the inhabitants of some nation
might be so enamoured of security that they should devise
a grand insurance society to cover almost every concern in
life. They could not indeed abolish uncertainty, for the
conditions of life are very far from permitting this, but they
could without much difficulty get rid of the worst of the
consequences of it. They might determine to insure not
merely their lives, houses, ships, and other things in re
spect of which sudden and total loss is possible, but also
to insure their business ; in the sense of avoiding not only

1 The question of the advisability moderate loss and contingent great

of inoculation against the small-pox, loss. In the seventeenth century it

which gave rise to much discussion seems to have been an occasional

amongst the writers on Probability practice, before a journey into the

during the last century, is a case in Mediterranean, to insure against

point of the same principles applied capture by Moorish pirates, with a

to a very different kind of instance. view to secure having the ransom

The loss against which the insurance paid. (See, for an account of some

was directed was death by small-pox, extraordinary developments of the

the premium paid was the illness insurance principle, Walford's In-

and other inconvenience, and the surance Guide and Handbook. It is

very small risk of death, from the not written in a very scientific spi-

inoculation. The disputes which rit, but it contains much informa-

thence arose amongst writers on the tion on all matters connected with

subject involved the same difficulties insurance.)
as to the balance between certain

SECT. 5.] Insurance and Gambling. 375

bankruptcy, but even casual bad years, on the same principle
of commutation. Unfamiliar as such an aim may appear
when introduced in this language, it is nevertheless one
which under a name of suspicious import to the conservative
classes has had a good deal of attention directed to it. It is
really scarcely anything else than Communism, which might
indeed be defined as a universal and compulsory1 insurance
society which is to take account of all departments of busi
ness, and, in some at least of its forms, to invade the province
of social and domestic life as well.

Although nothing so comprehensive as this is likely to
be practically carried out on any very large scale, it deserves
notice that the principle itself is steadily spreading in every
direction in matters of detail. It is, for instance, the great
complaint against Trades Unions that they too often seek to
secure these results in respect of the equalization of the
workmen's wages, thus insuring to some degree against in
competence, as they rightly and wisely do against illness and
loss of work. Again, there is the Tradesman's Mutual Pro
tection Society, which insures against the occasional loss
entailed by the necessity of having to conduct prosecutions
at law. There are societies in many towns for the prose
cution of petty thefts, with the object of escaping the same
uncertain and perhaps serious loss. Amongst instances of
insurance for the people rather than by them, there is of
course the giant example of the English Poor Law, in
which the resemblance to an initial Communistic system
becomes very marked. The poor are insured against loss
1 All that is meant by the above forcing it, the matter would of course
comparison is that the ideal aimed assume a very different aspect,
at by Communism is similar to that Similarly with the action of Trades
of Insurance. If we look at the Unionism referred to in the next
processes by which it would be paragraph,
carried out, and the means for en-

376 Insurance and Gambling. [CHAP. xv.

of work arising not only from illness and old age, but from
any cause except wilful idleness. They do not, it is true,
pay the whole premium, but since they mostly bear some
portion of the burden of municipal and county taxation
they must certainly be considered as paying a part of
the premium. In some branches also of the public and
private services the system is adopted of deducting a per
centage from the wage or salary, for the purpose of a
semi-compulsory insurance against death, illness or super
annuation.

§ 6. Closely connected with Insurance, as an application
of Probability, though of course by contrast, stands Gambling.
Though we cannot, in strictness, term either of these prac
tices the converse of the other, it seems nevertheless correct
to say that they spring from opposite mental tendencies.
Some persons, as has been said, find life too monotonous for
their taste, or rather the region of what can be predicted
with certainty is too large and predominant in their estima
tion. They can easily adopt two courses for securing the
changes they desire. They may, for one thing, aggravate
and intensify the results of events which are comparatively
incapable of prevision, these events not being in themselves
of sufficient importance to excite any strong emotions. The
most obvious way of doing this is by betting upon them.
Or again, they may invent games or other pursuits, the
individual contingencies of which are entirely removed from
all possible human prevision, and then make heavy money
consequences depend upon these contingencies. This is
gambling proper, carried on mostly by means of cards and
dice and the roulette.

The gambling spirit, as we have said, seeks for the ex
citement of uncertainty and variety. When therefore people
make a long continued practice of playing, especially if the

SECT. 7.] Insurance and Gambling. 377

stakes for which they play are moderate in comparison with
their fortune, this uncertainty from the nature of the case
begins to diminish. The thoroughly practised gambler, if
he possesses more than usual skill (in games where skill
counts for something), must be regarded as a man following
a profession, though a profession for the most part of a risky
and exciting kind, to say nothing of its ignoble and often
dishonest character. If, on the other hand, his skill is below
the average, or the game is one in which skill does not tell
and the odds are slightly in favour of his antagonist, as in
the gaming tables, one light in which he can be regarded
is that of a man who is following a favourite amusement;
if this amusement involves a constant annual outlay on his
part, that is nothing more than what has to be said of most
other amusements.

§ 7. We cannot, of course, give such a rational expla
nation as the above in every case. There are plenty of
novices, and plenty of fanatics, who go on steadily losing in
the full conviction that they will eventually come out win
ners. But it is hard to believe that such ignorance, or such
intellectual twist, can really be so widely prevalent as would
be requisite to constitute them the rule rather than the ex
ception. There must surely be some very general impulse
which is gratified by such resources, and it is not easy to see
what else this can be than a love of that variety and con
sequent excitement which can only be found in perfection
where exact prevision is impossible.

It is of course very difficult to make any generalization
here as to the comparative prevalence of various motives
amongst mankind; but when one considers what is the
difference which most quiet ordinary whist players feel
between a game for 'love' and one in which there is a
small stake, one cannot but assign a high value to the

378 Insurance and Gambling. [CHAP. xv.

influence of a wish to emphasize the excitement of loss
and gain.

I would not for a moment underrate the practical dangers
which are found to attend the practice of gambling. It
is remarked that the gambler, if he continues to play for a
long time, is under an almost irresistible impulse to increase
his stakes, and so re-introduce the element of uncertainty.
It is in fact this tendency to be thus led on, which makes
the principal danger and mischief of the practice. Risk and
uncertainty are still such normal characteristics of even civi
lized life, that the mere extension of such tendencies into
new fields does not in itself offer any very alarming pros
pect. It is only to be deprecated in so far as there is a
danger, which experience shows to be no trifling one, that
the fascination found in the pursuit should lead men into
following it up into excessive lengths1.

§ 8. The above general treatment of Gambling and
Insurance seems to me the only rational and sound prin
ciple of division ; — namely, that on which the different prac
tices which, under various names, are known as gambling
or insurance, are arranged in accordance with the spirit of
which they are the outcome, and therefore of the results
which they are designed to secure. If we were to attempt

1 One of the best discussions that sum-total of what they distribute in
I have recently seen on these sub- prizes is less than that of what they
jects, by a writer at once thoroughly receive in payments. The difference,
competent and well informed, is in in respect of information deliberate-
Mr Proctor's Chance and Luck. It ly withheld and false reports wilfully
appears to me however that he runs spread, between most of the lotteries
into an extreme in his denunciation that have been supported, and the
not of the folly but of the dishonesty bubble companies which justly de-
of all gambling. Surely also it is a serve the name of swindles, ought to
strained use of language to speak of prevent the same name being applied
all lotteries as 'unfair' and even to both,
'swindling' on the ground that the

SECT. 8.] Insurance and Gambling. 379

to judge and arrange them according to the names which
they currently bear, we should find ourselves led to no
kind of systematic division whatever; the fact being that
since they all alike involve, as their essential characteristic,
payments and receipts, one or both of which are necessarily
uncertain in their date or amount, the names may often be
interchanged.

For instance, a lottery and an ordinary insurance society
against accident, if we merely look to the processes per
formed in them, are to all intents and purposes identical.
In each alike there is a small payment which is certain in
amount, and a great receipt which is uncertain in amount.
A great many persons pay the small premium, whereas a
few only of their number obtain a prize, the rest getting
no return whatever for their outlay. In each case alike,
also, the aggregate receipts and losses are intended to
balance each other, after allowing for the profits of those
who carry on the undertaking. But of course when we
take into account the occasions upon which the insurers
get their prizes, we see that there is all the difference in the
world between receiving them at haphazard, as in a lottery,
and receiving them as a partial set-off to a broken limb or
injured constitution, as in the insurance society.

Again, the language of betting may be easily made to
cover almost every kind of insurance. Indeed De Morgan
has described life insurance as a bet which the individual
makes with the company, that he will not live beyond a
certain age. If he dies young, he is pecuniarily a gainer, if
he dies late he is a loser1. Here, too, though the expression
1 "A fire insurance is a simple transaction in which the results of
bet between the office and the party, a future event are to bring gain or
and a life insurance is a collection loss." Penny Cyclopcedia, under the
of wagers. There is something of head of Wager.
the principle of a wager in every

380 Insurance and Gambling. [CHAP. XV.

is technically quite correct (since any such deliberate risk of
money, upon an unproductive venture, may fall under the
definition of a bet), there is the broadest distinction between
betting with no other view whatever than that of risking
money, and betting with the view of diminishing risk and
loss as much as possible. In fact, if the language of sporting
life is to be introduced into the matter, we ought, I presume,
to speak of the insurer as ' hedging ' against his death.

§ 9. Again, in Tontines we have a system of what is
often called Insurance, and in certain points rightly so,
but which is to all intents and purposes simply and abso
lutely a gambling transaction. They have been entirely
abandoned, I believe, for some time, but were once rather
popular, especially in France. On this plan the State, or
whatever society manages the business, does not gain any
thing until the last member of the Tontine is dead. As the
number of the survivors diminishes, the same sum-total of
annuities still continues to be paid amongst them, as long as
any are left alive, so that each receives a gradually increasing
sum. Hence those who die early, instead of receiving the
most, as on the ordinary plan, receive the least ; for at the
death of each member the annuity ceases absolutely, so far
as he and his relations are concerned. The whole affair
therefore is to all intents and purposes a gigantic system
of betting, to see which can live the longest ; the State
being the common stake-holder, and receiving a heavy com
mission for its superintendence, this commission being natur
ally its sole motive for encouraging such a transaction. It is
recorded of one of the French Tontines1 that a widow of 97
was left, as the last survivor, to receive an annuity of 73,500
livres during the rest of the life which she could manage to
drag on after that age ; — she having originally subscribed a
1 Encyclopedic Methodique, under the head of Tontines.

SECT. 10.] Insurance and Gambling. 381

single sum of 300 livres only. It is obvious that such a system
as this, though it may sometimes go by the name of insur
ance, is utterly opposed to the spirit of true insurance,
since it tends to aggravate existing inequalities of fortune
instead of to mitigate them. The insurer here bets that
he will die old ; in ordinary insurance he bets that he will
die young.

Again, to take one final instance, common opinion often
regards the bank or company which keeps a rouge et noir
table, and the individuals who risk their money at it, as being
both alike engaged in gambling. So they may be, tech
nically, but for all practical purposes such a bank is as sure
and safe a business as that of any ordinary insurance society,
and probably far steadier in its receipts than the majority of
ordinary trades in a manufacturing or commercial city. The
bank goes in for many and small transactions, in proportion
to its capital ; their customers, very often, in proportion to
their incomes go in for very heavy transactions. That the
former comes out a gainer year after year depends, of course,
upon the fact that the tables are notoriously slightly in their
favour. But the steadiness of these gains when compared
with the unsteadiness of the individual losses depends simply
upon, — in fact, is merely an illustration of, — the one great
permanent contrast which lies at the basis of all reasoning
in Probability.

§ 10. We have so far regarded Insurance and Gambling
as being each the product of a natural impulse, and as having
each, if we look merely to experience, a great mass of human
judgment in its favour. The popular moral judgment, however,
which applauds the one and condemns the other rests in great
part upon an assumption, which has doubtless much truth
in it, but which is often interpreted with an absoluteness which
leads to error in each direction ;— the duty of insurance being

382 Insurance and Gambling. [CHAP. xv.

too peremptorily urged upon every one, and the practice of
gambling too universally regarded as involving a sacrifice of
real self-interest, as being in fact little better than a per
sistent blunder. The assumption in question seems to be
extracted from the acknowledged advantages of insurance,
and then invoked to condemn the practice of gambling. But
in so doing the fact does not seem to be sufficiently recog
nized that the latter practice, if we merely look to the ex
tent and antiquity of the tacit vote of mankind in its favour,
might surely claim to carry the day.

It is of course obvious that in all cases with which we
are concerned, the aggregate wealth is unaltered; money
being merely transferred from one person to another. The
loss of one is precisely equivalent to the gain of another.
At least this is the approximation to the truth with which we
find it convenient to start1. Now if the happiness which is
yielded by wealth were always in direct proportion to its
amount, it is not easy to see why insurance should be advo
cated or gambling condemned. In the case of the latter this
is obvious enough. I have lost £50, say, but others (one or
more as the case may be) have gained it, and the increase
of their happiness would exactly balance the diminution of
mine. In the case of Insurance there is a slight complica
tion, arising from the fact that the falling in of the policy
does not happen at random (otherwise, as already pointed

1 Of course, if we introduce con- otherwise be the case. Again, in

siderations of Political Economy, the case of gambling, a large loss of

corrections will have to be made. capital by any one will almost neces-

For one thing, every Insurance Office sarily involve an actual destruction

is, as De Morgan repeatedly insists, of wealth; to say nothing of the

a Savings Bank as well as an Insur- fact that, practically, gambling often

ance Office. The Office invests the causes a constant transfer of wealth

premiums, and can therefore afford from productive to unproductive pur-

to pay a larger sum than would poses.

SECT. 11.] Insurance and Gambling. 383

out, it would be simply a lottery), but is made contingent
upon some kind of loss, which it is intended as far as possible
to balance. I insure myself on a railway journey, break my
leg in an accident, and, having paid threepence for my
ticket, receive say £200 compensation from the insurance
company. The same remarks, however, apply here ; the
happiness I acquire by this £200 would only just balance the
aggregate loss of the 16,000 who have paid their threepences
and received no return for them, were happiness always
directly proportional to wealth.

§ 11. The practice of Insurance does not, I think, give
rise to many questions of theoretic interest, and need not
therefore detain us longer. The fact is that it has hardly
yet been applied sufficiently long and widely, or to matters
which admit of sufficiently accurate statistical treatment,
except in one department. This, of course, is Life Insurance ;
but the subject is one which requires constant attention to
details of statistics, and is (rightly) mainly carried out in
strict accordance with routine. As an illustration of this
we need merely refer to the works of De Morgan, — a profes
sional actuary as well as a writer on the theory of Probability,
— who has found but little opportunity to aid his speculative
treatment of Probability by examples drawn from this class
of considerations.

With Gambling it is otherwise. Not only have a variety
of interesting single problems been discussed (of which the
Petersburg problem is the best known) but several specula
tive questions of considerable importance have been raised.
One of these concerns the disadvantages of the practice of
gambling. There have been a number of writers who, not
content with dwelling upon the obvious moral and indirect
mischief which results, in the shape of over-excitement,
consequent greed, withdrawal from the steady business

384 Insurance and Gambling. [CHAP. xv.

habits which alone insure prosperity in the long run, diver
sion of wealth into dishonest hands, &c., have endeavoured
to demonstrate the necessary loss caused by the practice.

§ 12. These attempts may be divided into two classes.
There are (1) those which appeal to merely numerical con
siderations, and (2) those which introduce what is called the
' moral ' as distinguished from the mathematical value of a
future contingency.

(1) For instance, an ingenious attempt has been made
by Mr Whitworth to prove that gambling is necessarily
disadvantageous on purely mathematical grounds.

When two persons play against each other one of the two
must be ruined sooner or later, even though the game be a
fair one, supposing that they go on playing long enough; the
one with the smaller income having of course the worst
chance of being the lucky survivor. If one of them has a
finite, and the other an infinite income, it must clearly be
the former who will be the ultimate sufferer if they go on
long enough. It is then maintained that this is in fact every
individual gambler's position, "no one is restricted to gamb
ling with one single opponent; the speculator deals with the
public at large, with a world whose resources are practically
unlimited. There is a prospect that his operations may
terminate to his own disadvantage, through his having no
thing more to stake ; but there is no prospect that it will
terminate to his advantage through the exhaustion of the
resources of the world. Every one who gambles is carrying
on an unequal warfare: he is ranged with a restricted capital
against an adversary whose means are infinite1."

In the above argument it is surely overlooked that the
adversaries against whom he plays are not one body with a
common purse, like the bank in a gambling establishment.

1 Choice and Chance, Ed. n. p. 208.

SECT. 13.] Insurance and Gambling. 385

Each of these adversaries is in exactly the same position as
he himself is, and a precisely similar proof might be em
ployed to show that each of them must be eventually ruined
which is of course a reduction to absurdity. Gambling can
only transfer money from one player to another, and there
fore none of it can be actually lost.

§ 13. What really becomes of the money, when they
play to extremity, is not difficult to see. First suppose a
limited number of players. If they go on long enough, the
money will at last all find its way into the pocket of some
one of their number. If their fortunes were originally equal,
each stands the same chance of being the lucky survivor;
in which case we cannot assert, on any numerical grounds,
that the prospect of the play is disadvantageous to any one
of them. If their fortunes were unequal, the one who had
the largest sum to begin with can be shown to have the
best chance, according to some assignable law, of being left
the final winner; in which case it must be just as advan
tageous for him, as it was disadvantageous for his less wealthy
competitors.

When, instead of a limited number of players, we sup
pose an unlimited number, each as he is ruined retiring
from the table and letting another come in, the results are
more complicated, but their general tendency can be readily
distinguished. If we supposed that no one retired except
when he was ruined, we should have a state of things in
which all the old players were growing gradually richer. In
this case the prospect before the new comers would steadily
grow worse and worse, for their chance of winning against
such rich opponents would be exceedingly small. But as
this is an unreasonable supposition, we ought rather to
assume that not only do the ruined victims retire, but also
that those who have gained fortunes of a certain amount
v. 25

386 Insurance and Gambling. [CHAP. xv.

retire also, so that the aggregate and average wealth of the
gambling body remains pretty steady. What chance any
given player has of being ruined, and how long he may
expect to hold out before being ruined, will depend of course
upon the initial incomes of the players, the rules of the
game, the stakes for which they play, and other considera
tions. But it is clear that for all that is lost by one, a
precisely equal sum must be gained by others, and that
therefore any particular gambler can only be cautioned be
forehand that his conduct is not to be recommended, by
appealing to some such suppositions as those already men
tioned in a former section.

§ 14. As an additional justification of this view the
reader may observe that the state of things in the last
example is one which, expressed in somewhat different
language and with a slight alteration of circumstances, is
being incessantly carried on upon a gigantic scale upon
every side of us. Call it the competition of merchants and
traders in a commercial country, and the general results are
familiar enough. It is true that in so far as skill comes into
the question, they are not properly gamblers; but in so far
as chance and risk do, they may be fairly so termed, and in
many branches of business this must necessarily be the case
to a very considerable extent. Whenever business is carried
on in a reckless way, the comparison is on general grounds
fair enough. In each case alike we find some retiring ruined,
and some making their fortunes; and in each case alike
also the chances, cceteris paribus, lie with those who have
the largest fortunes. Every one is, in a sense, struggling
against the collective commercial world, but since each of his
competitors is doing the same, we clearly could not caution
any of them (except indeed the poorer ones) that their efforts
must finally end in disadvantage.

SECT. 16.] Insurance and Gambling. 387

§ 15. If we wish to see this result displayed in its
most decisive form we may find a good analogy in a very
different class of events, viz. in the fate of surnames. We
are all gamblers in this respect, and the game is carried
out to the last farthing with a rigour unknown at New
market or Monte Carlo. In its complete treatment the
subject is a very intricate one1, but a simple example will
serve to display the general tendency. Suppose a colony
comprising 1000 couples of different surnames, and suppose
•that each of these has four children who grow up to marry.
Approximately, one in 16 of these families will consist of
girls only; and therefore, under ordinary conventions, about
62 of the names will have disappeared for ever after the
next generation. Four again out of 16 will have but one
boy, each of whom will of course be in the same position
as his father, viz. the sole representative of his name.
Accordingly in the next generation one in 16 of these names
will again drop out, and so the process continues. The
number which disappears in each successive generation be
comes smaller, as the stability of the survivors becomes
greater owing to their larger numbers. But there is no
check to the process.

§ 16. The analogy here is a very close one, the names
which thus disappear corresponding to the gamblers who
retire ruined and those which increase in number corre
sponding to the lucky winners. The ultimate goal in each
case alike, — of course an exceedingly remote one, — is the
exclusive survival of one at the expense of all the others.
That one surname does thus drop out after another must
have struck every one who has made any enquiry into family

1 It was, I believe, first treated as iv. 1875, where a complete mathe-
a serious problem by Mr Galton. matical solution is indicated by Mr
(See the Journal Anthrop. List. Vol. H. W. Watson.)

25—2

388 Insurance and Gambling. [CHAP. xv.

genealogy, and various fanciful accounts have been given
by those unfamiliar with the theory of probability. What
is often apt to be overlooked is the extreme slightness of
what may be termed the "turn of the tables" in favour
of the survival at each generation. In the above numerical
example we have made an extravagantly favourable sup
position, by assuming that the population doubles at every
generation. In an old and thickly populated country where
the numbers increase very slowly, we should be much nearer
the mark in assuming that the average effective family, —
that is, the average number of children who live to marry, —
was only two. In this case every family which was repre
sented at any time by but a single male would have but
three chances in four of surviving extinction, and of course
the process of thinning out would be a more rapid one.

§ 17. The most interesting class of attempts to prove
the disadvantages of gambling appeal to what is tech
nically called 'moral expectation' as distinguished from
'mathematical expectation.' The latter may be denned
simply as the average money value of the venture in
question; that is, it is the product of the amount to be
gained (or lost) and the chance of gaining (or losing) it.
For instance, if I bet four to one in sovereigns against the
occurrence of ace with a single die there would be, on the
average of many throws, a loss of four pounds against a gain
of five pounds on each set of six occurrences; i.e. there
would be an average gain of three shillings and fourpence
on each throw. This is called the true or mathematical
expectation. The so-called 'moral expectation', on the other
hand, is the subjective value of this mathematical expec
tation. That is, instead of reckoning a money fortune in
the ordinary way, as what it is, the attempt is made to
reckon it at what it is felt to be. The elements of compu-

SECT. 18.] Insurance and Gambling. 389

tatioii therefore become, not pounds and shillings, but sums
of pleasure enjoyed actually or in prospect. Accordingly
when reckoning the present value of a future gain, we must
now multiply, not the objective but the subjective value,
by the chance we have of securing that gain.

With regard to the exact relation of this moral fortune
to the physical various more or less arbitrary assumptions
have been made. One writer (Buffon) considers that the
moral value of any given sum varies inversely with the
total wealth of the person who gains it. Another (D. Ber
noulli) starting from a different assumption, which we shall
presently have to notice more particularly, makes the moral
value of a fortune vary as the logarithm of its actual amount1.
A third (Cramer) makes it vary with the square root of the
amount.

§ 18. Historically, these proposals have sprung from
the wish to reconcile the conclusions of the Petersburg
problem with the dictates of practical common sense; for,
by substituting the moral for the physical estimate the
total value of the expectation could be reduced to a finite
sum. On this ground therefore such proposals have no great
interest, for, as we have seen, there is no serious difficulty in
the problem when rightly understood.

These same proposals however have been employed in

1 Bernoulli himself does not seem every psychologist. It is what is

to have based his conclusions upon commonly called Fechner's Law,

actual experience. But it is a note- which he has established by aid of

worthy fact that the assumption with an enormous amount of careful ex-

which he starts, viz. that the sub- periment in the case of a number of

jective value of any small increment our simple sensations. But I do not

(dx) is inversely proportional to the believe that he has made any claim

sum then possessed (x), and which that such a law holds good in the

leads at once to the logarithmic law far more intricate dependence of

above mentioned, is identical with happiness upon wealth,
one which is now familiar enough to

390 Insurance and Gambling. [CHAP. xv.

order to prove that gambling is necessarily disadvantageous,
and this to both parties. Take, for instance, Bernoulli's sup
position. It can be readily shown that if two persons each
with a sum of £50 to start with choose to risk, say, £10 upon
an even wager there will be a loss of happiness as a result :
for the pleasure gained by the possessor of £60 will not
be equal to that which is lost by the man who leaves off
with £40'.

§ 19. This is the form of argument commonly adopted ;
but, as it stands, it does not seem conclusive. It may surely
be replied that all which is thus proved is that inequality is
bad, on the ground that two fortunes of £50 are better than
one of £60 and one of £40. Conceive for instance that the
original fortunes had been £60 and £40 respectively, the
event may result in an increase of happiness ; for this will
certainly be the case if the richer man loses and the fortunes
are thus equaj^^Jpt This is quite true; and we are therefore
obliged to show, — what can be very easily shown, — that if
the other alternative had taken place and the two fortunes
had been made still more unequal (viz. £65 and £35 respec
tively) the happiness thus lost would more than balance
what would have been gained by the equalization. And
since these two suppositions are equally likely there will be a
loss in the long run.

The consideration just adduced seems however to show

1 The formula expressive of this bet. Then the balance, as regards

, i . . x . happiness, must be drawn between

moral happiness is c log - ; where x

a . x

. s, •,• ,,. -

stands for the physical fortune pos- ° log a and ^ log ^T + *c log ~T '

sessed at the time, and a for that or logo;2 and log (% + y)(x-y),

small value of it at which happiness or x- and x'2 — y'2,

is supposed to disappear : c being an the former of which is necessarily

arbitrary constant. Let two persons, the greater.

whose fortune is x, risk y on an even

SECT. 20.] Insurance and Gambling. 391

that the common way of stating the conclusion is rather
misleading; and that, on the assumption in question as
to the law of dependence of happiness on wealth, it really is
the case that the effective element in rendering gambling
disadvantageous is its tendency to the increase of the in
equality in the distribution of wealth.

§ 20. This raises two questions, one of some speculative
interest in connection with our subject, and the other of
supreme importance in the conduct of life. The first is this :
quite apart from any particular assumption which we make
about moral fortunes or laws of variation of happiness, is
it the fact that gambling tends to increase the existing
inequalities of wealth ? Theoretically there is no doubt that
this is so. Take the simplest case and suppose two people
tossing for a pound. If their fortunes were equal to begin
with there must be resultant inequality. If they were
unequal there is an even chance of the inequality being
increased or diminished; but since the increase is propor
tionally greater than the decrease, the final result remains of
the same kind as when the fortunes were equal1. Taking a
more general view the same conclusion underlies all our
reasoning as to the averages of large numbers, viz. that the
resultant divergencies increase absolutely (however they
diminish relatively) as the numbers become greater. And of
course we refer to these absolute divergencies when we
are talking of the distribution of wealth.

1 This may be seen more clearly of the average; for there are only
as follows. Suppose two pair of two alternatives and these will be
gamblers, each pair consisting of equally frequent in the long run.
men possessing £50 and £30 re- It is obvious that we have had two
spectively. Now if we suppose the fortunes of £50 and two of £30 con-
richer man to win in one case and verted into one of £20, two of £40,
the poorer in the other these two and one of £60. And this is clearly
results will be a fair representation an increase of inequality.

392 Insurance and Gambling. [CHAP. xv.

§ 21. This is the theoretic conclusion. How far the
actual practice of gambling introduces counteracting agencies
must be left to the determination of those who are com
petent to pronounce. So far as outsiders are authorised
to judge from what they read in the newspapers and other
public sources of information, it would appear that these
counteracting agencies are very considerable, and that in
consequence it is a rather insecure argument to advance
against gambling. Many a large fortune has notoriously
been squandered on the race-course or in gambling saloons,
and most certainly a large portion, if not the major part,
has gone to swell the incomes of many who were by compari
son poor. But the solution of this question must clearly be
left to those who have better opportunities of knowing
the facts than is to be expected on the part of writers on
Probability.

§ 22. The general conclusion to be drawn is that those
who invoked this principle of moral fortune as an argument
against gambling were really raising a much more intricate
and far-reaching problem than they were aware of. What
they were at work upon was the question, What is the
distribution of wealth which tends to secure the maximum
of happiness ? Is this best secured by equality or inequality ?
Had they really followed out the doctrine on which their
denunciation of gambling was founded they ought to have
adopted the Socialist's ideal as being distinctly that which
tends to increase happiness. And they ought to have
brought under the same disapprobation which they ex
pressed against gambling all those tendencies of modern
civilized life which work in the same direction. For in
stance ; keen competition, speculative operations, extended
facilities of credit, mechanical inventions, enlargement of
business operations into vast firms : — all these, and other

SECT. 22.] Insurance and Gambling. 393

similar tendencies too numerous to mention here, have had
some influence in the way of adding to existing inequalities.
They are, or have been, in consequence denounced by
socialists : are we honestly to bring them to this test in
order to ascertain whether or not they are to be condemned ?
The reader who wishes to see what sort of problems this
assumption of ' moral fortune ' ought to introduce may be
recommended to read Mr F. Y. Edge worth's Mathematical
Psychics, the only work with which I am acquainted which
treats of these questions.

CHAPTER XVI.

THE APPLICATION OF PROBABILITY TO TESTIMONY.

§ 1. ON the principles which have been adopted in this
work, it becomes questionable whether several classes of
problems which may seem to have acquired a prescriptive
right to admission, will not have to be excluded from the
science of Probability. The most important, perhaps, of
these refer to what is commonly called the credibility of
testimony, estimated either at first hand and directly, or as
influencing a juryman, and so reaching us through his
sagacity and trustworthiness. Almost every treatise upon
the science contains a discussion of the principles according
to which credit is to be attached to combinations of the
reports of witnesses of various degrees of trustworthiness, or
the verdicts of juries consisting of larger or smaller numbers.
A great modern mathematician, Poisson, has written an
elaborate treatise expressly upon this subject ; whilst a con
siderable portion of the works of Laplace, De Morgan, and
others, is devoted to an examination of similar enquiries. It
would be presumptuous to differ from such authorities as
these, except upon the strongest grounds ; but I confess that
the extraordinary ingenuity and mathematical ability which
have been devoted to these problems, considered as questions
in Probability, fails to convince me that they ought to have
been so considered. The following are the principal grounds
for this opinion.

SECT. 3.] Testimony. 395

§ 2. It will be remembered that in the course of the
chapter on Induction we entered into a detailed investiga
tion of the process demanded of us when, instead of the
appropriate propositions from which the inference was to be
made being set before us, the individual presented himself,
and the task was imposed upon us of selecting the requisite
groups or series to which to refer him. In other words, in
stead of calculating the chance of an event from determinate
conditions of frequency of its occurrence (these being either
obtained by direct experience, or deductively inferred) we
have to select the conditions of frequency out of a plurality
of more or less suitable ones. When the problem is pre
sented to us at such a stage as this, we may of course assume
that the preliminary process of obtaining the statistics
which are extended into the proportional propositions has
been already performed ; we may suppose therefore that \ve
are already in possession of a quantity of such propositions,
our principal remaining doubt being as to which of them
we should then employ. This selection was shown to be
to a certain extent arbitrary ; for, owing to the fact of the
individual possessing a large number of different properties,
he became in consequence a member of different series or
groups, which might present different averages. We must
now examine, somewhat more fully than we did before,
the practical conditions under which any difficulty arising
from this source ceases to be of importance.

§ 3. One condition of this kind is very simple and ob
vious. It is that the different statistics with which we are
presented should not in reality offer materially different
results. If, for instance, we were enquiring into the pro
bability of a man aged forty dying within the year, we might
if we pleased take into account the fact of his having red
hair, or his having been born in a certain county or town.

396 Testimony. [CHAP. xvi.

Each of these circumstances would serve to specialize the
individual, and therefore to restrict the limits of the statistics
which were applicable to his case. But the consideration of
such qualities as these would either leave the average pre
cisely as it was, or produce such an unimportant alteration
in it as no one would think of taking into account. Though
we could hardly say with certainty of any conceivable
characteristic that it has absolutely no bearing on the
result, we may still feel very confident that the bearing of
such characteristics as these is utterly insignificant. Of
course in the extreme case of the things most perfectly
suited to the Calculus of Probability, viz. games of pure
chance, these subsidiary characteristics are quite irrelevant.
Any further particulars about the characteristics of the cards
in a really fair pack, beyond those which are familiar to all
the players, would convey no information whatever about the
result.

Or again; although the different sets of statistics may
not as above give almost identical results, yet they may do
what practically comes to very much the same thing, that
is, arrange themselves into a small number of groups, all of
the statistics in any one group practically coinciding in their
results. If for example a consumptive man desired to insure
his life, there would be a marked difference in the statistics
according as we took his peculiar state of health into account
or not. We should here have two sets of statistics, so clearly
marked off from one another that they might almost rank
with the distinctions of natural kinds, and which would in
consequence offer decidedly different results. If we were
to specialize still further, by taking into account insignificant
qualities like those mentioned in the last paragraph, we
might indeed get more limited sets of statistics applicable
to persons still more closely resembling the individual in

SECT. 4] Testimony. 397

question, but these would not differ sufficiently in their
results to make it worth our while to do so. In other words,
the different propositions which are applicable to the case in
point arrange themselves into a limited number of groups,
which, and which only, need be taken into account ; whence
the range of choice amongst them is very much diminished
in practice.

§ 4. The reasons for the conditions above described are
not difficult to detect. Where these conditions exist the
process of selecting a series or class to which to refer any
individual is very simple, and the selection is, for the par
ticular purposes of inference, final. In any case of insurance,
for example, the question we have to decide is of the very
simple kind ; Is A.B. a man of a certain age ? If so one in
fifty in his circumstances will die in the course of the year.
If any further questions have to be decided they would be of
the following description. Is A.B. a healthy man ? Does he
follow a dangerous trade ? But here too the classes in
question are but few, and the limits by which they are
bounded are tolerably precise ; so that the reference of an
individual to one or other of them is easy. And when we
have once chosen our class we remain untroubled by any
further considerations ; for since no other statistics are sup
posed to offer a materially different average, we have no
occasion to take account of any other properties than those
already noticed.

The case of games of chance, already referred to, offers
of course an instance of these conditions in an almost ideal
state of perfection ; the same circumstances which fit them
so eminently for the purposes of fair gambling, fitting them
equally to become examples in Probability. When a die is
to be thrown, all persons alike stand on precisely the same
footing of knowledge and of ignorance about the result ; the

398 Testimony. [CHAP. xvi.

only data to which any one could appeal being that each
face turns up on an average once in six times.

§ 5. Let us now examine how far the above conditions
are fulfilled in the case of problems which discuss what is
called the credibility of testimony. The following would be
a fair specimen of one of the elementary enquiries out of
which these problems are composed; — Here is a statement
made by a witness who lies once in ten times, what am I to
conclude about its truth? Objections might fairly be raised
against the possibility of thus assigning a man his place
upon a graduated scale of mendacity. This however we will
pass over, and will assume that the witness goes about the
world bearing stamped somehow on his face the appropriate
class to which he belongs, and consequently, the degree of
credit to which he has a claim on such general grounds.
But there are other and stronger reasons against the ad-
missibility of this class of problems.

§ 6. That which has been described in the previous
sections as the 'individual' which had to be assigned to an
appropriate class or series of statistics is, of course, in this
case, a statement. In the particular instance in question this
individual statement is already assigned to a class, that
namely of statements made by a witness of a given degree of
veracity ; but it is clearly optional with us whether or not we
choose to confine our attention to this class in forming our
judgment; at least it would be optional whenever we were
practically called on to form an opinion. But in the case of
this statement, as in that of the mortality of the man whose
insurance we were discussing, there are a multitude of other
properties observable, besides the one which is supposed to
mark the given class. Just as in the latter there were
(besides his age), the place of his birth, the nature of his
occupation, and so on; so in the former there are (besides its

SECT. 7.] Testimony. 399

being a statement by a certain kind of witness), the fact of its
being uttered at a certain time and place and under certain
circumstances. At the time the statement is made all these
qualities or attributes of the statement are present to us, and
we clearly have a right to take into account as many of them
as we please. Now the question at present before us seems to
be simply this ; — Are the considerations, which we might thus
introduce, as immaterial to the result in the case of the truth
of a statement of a witness, as the corresponding considera
tions are in the case of the insurance of a life? There can
surely be no hesitation in the reply to such a question.
Under ordinary circumstances we soon know all that we can
know about the conditions which determine us in judging of
the prospect of a man's death, and we therefore rest content
with general statistics of mortality; but no one who heard a
witness speak would think of simply appealing to his figure
of veracity, even supposing that this had been authoritatively
communicated to us. The circumstances under which the
statement is made instead of being insignificant, are of over
whelming importance. The appearance of the witness, the
tone of his voice, the fact of his having objects to gain,
together with a countless multitude of other circumstances
which would gradually come to light as we reflect upon the
matter, would make any sensible man discard the assigned
average from his consideration. He would, in fact, no more
think of judging in this way than he would of appealing to
the Carlisle or Northampton tables of mortality to determine
the probable length of life of a soldier who was already in
the midst of a battle.

§ 7. It cannot be replied that under these circumstances
we still refer the witness to a class, and judge of his veracity
by an average of a more limited kind; that we infer, for ex
ample, that of men who look and act like him under such

400 Testimony. [CHAP. xvi.

circumstances, a much larger proportion, say nine-tenths,
are found to lie. There is no appeal to a class in this way at
all, there is no immediate reference to statistics of any kind
whatever ; at least none which we are conscious of using at
the time, or to which we should think of resorting for justifi
cation afterwards. The decision seems to depend upon the
quickness of the observer's senses and of his apprehension
generally.

Statistics about the veracity of witnesses seem in fact to
be permanently as inappropriate as all other statistics occa
sionally may be. We may know accurately the percentage
of recoveries after amputation of the leg; but what surgeon
would think of forming his judgment solely by such tables
when he had a case before him ? We need not deny, of
course, that the opinion he might form about the patient's
prospects of recovery might ultimately rest upon the propor
tions of deaths and recoveries he might have previously wit
nessed. But if this were the case, these data are lying, as
one may say, obscurely in the background. He does not
appeal to them directly and immediately in forming his
judgment. There has been a far more important interme
diate process of apprehension and estimation of what is
essential to the case and what is not. Sharp senses, memory,
judgment, and practical sagacity have had to be called into
play, and there is not therefore the same direct conscious
and sole appeal to statistics that there was before. The
surgeon may have in his mind two or three instances in
which the operation performed was equally severe, but in
which the patient's constitution was different; the latter
element therefore has to be properly allowed for. There may
be other instances in which the constitution was similar, but
the operation more severe ; and so on. Hence, although the
ultimate appeal may be to the statistics, it is not so directly ;

SECT. 8.] Testimony. 401

their value has to be estimated through the somewhat hazy
medium of our judgment and memory, which places them
under a very different aspect.

§ 8. Any one who knows anything of the game of whist
may supply an apposite example of the distinction here
insisted on, by recalling to mind the alteration in the nature
of our inferences as the game progresses. At the commence
ment of the game our sole appeal is rightfully made to the
theory of Probability. All the rules upon which each player
acts, and therefore upon which he infers that the others will
act, rest upon the observed frequency (or rather upon the
frequency which calculation assures us will be observed) with
which such and such combinations of cards are found to
occur. Why are we told, if we have more than four trumps,
to lead them out at once ? Because we are convinced, on
pure grounds of probability, capable of being stated in the
strictest statistical form, that in a majority of instances we
shall draw our opponent's trumps, and therefore be left with
the command. Similarly with every other rule which is
recognized in the early part of the play.

But as the play progresses all this is changed, and
towards its conclusion there is but little reliance upon any
rules which either we or others could base upon statistical
frequency of occurrence, observed or inferred. A multitude
of other considerations have come in ; we begin to be in
fluenced partly by our knowledge of the character and
practice of our partner and opponents; partly by a rapid
combination of a multitude of judgments, founded upon
our observation of the actual course of play, the grounds
of which we could hardly realize or describe at the time
and which may have been forgotten since. That is, the
particular combination of cards, now before us, does not
readily fall into any well-marked class to which alone it can

v. 26

402 Testimony. [CHAP. xvi.

reasonably be referred by every one who has the facts before
him.

§ 9. A criticism somewhat resembling the above has
been given by Mill (Logic, Bk. in. Chap, xviii. § 3) upon
the applicability of the theory of Probability to the credi
bility of witnesses. But he has added other reasons which
do not appear to me to be equally valid ; he says " common
sense would dictate that it is impossible to strike a general
average of the veracity, and other qualifications for true
testimony, of mankind or any class of them ; and if it were
possible, such an average would be no guide, the credibility of
almost every witness being either below or above the average."
The latter objection would however apply with equal force
to estimating the length of a man's life from tables of mor
tality ; for the credibility of different witnesses can scarcely
have a wider range of variation than the length of different
lives. If statistics of credibility could be obtained, and
could be conveniently appealed to when they were obtained,
they might furnish us in the long run with as accurate
inferences as any other statistics of the same general de
scription. These statistics would however in practice natu
rally and rightly be neglected, because there can hardly fail
to be circumstances in each individual statement which would
more appropriately refer it to some new class depending on
different statistics, and affording a far better chance of our
being right in that particular case. In most instances of
the kind in question, indeed, such a change is thus produced
in the mode of formation of our opinion, that, as already
pointed out, the mental operation ceases to be in any proper
sense founded on appeal to statistics1.

1 It may be remarked also that principles of Probability in the
there is another reason which tends majority of the cases where testi-
to dissuade us from appealing to mony has to be estimated. It often,

SECT. 11.] Testimony. 403

§ 10. The Chance problems which are concerned with tes
timony are not altogether confined to such instances as those
hitherto referred to. Though we must, as it appears to me,
reject all attempts to estimate the credibility of any par
ticular witness, or to refer him to any assigned class in
respect of his trustworthiness, and consequently abandon as
unsuitable any of the numerous problems which start from
such data as 'a witness who is wrong once in ten times/
yet it does not follow that testimony may not to a slight
extent be treated by our science in a somewhat different
manner. We may be quite unable to estimate, except in
the roughest possible way, the veracity of any particular
witness, and yet it may be possible to form some kind of
opinion upon the veracity of certain classes of witnesses ;
to say, for instance, that Europeans are superior in this way
to Orientals. So we might attempt to explain why, and to
what extent, an opinion in which the judgments of ten per
sons, say jurors, concur, is superior to one in which five only
concur. Something may also be done towards laying down
the principles in accordance with which we are to decide
whether, and why, extraordinary stories deserve less credence
than ordinary ones, even if we cannot arrive at any precise
and definite decision upon the point. This last question is
further discussed in the course of the next chapter.

§ 11. The change of view in accordance with which it
follows that questions of the kind just mentioned need not
be entirely rejected from scientific consideration, presents it-

perhaps usually happens, that we on the average, but truth in each

are not absolutely forced to come individual instance, so that we had

to a decision ; at least so far as the rather not form an opinion at all

acquitting of an accused person may than form one of which we can only

be considered as avoiding a decision. say in its justification that it will

It may be of much greater import- tend to lead us right in the long

ance to us to attain not merely truth run.

26—2

404 Testimony. [CHAP. XVK

self in other directions also. It has, for instance, been already
pointed out that the individual characteristics of any sick
man's disease would be quite sufficiently important in most
cases to prevent any surgeon from judging about his recovery
by a genuine and direct appeal to statistics, however such
considerations might indirectly operate upon his judgment.
But if an opinion had to be formed about a considerable
number of cases, say in a large hospital, statistics might
again come prominently into play, and be rightly recognized
as the principal source of appeal. We should feel able to
compare one hospital, or one method of treatment, with
another. The ground of the difference is obvious. It arises
from the fact that the characteristics of the individuals,
which made us so ready to desert the average when we had
to judge of them separately, do not produce the same dis
turbance when we have to judge about a group of cases.
The averages then become the most secure and available
ground on which to form an opinion, and therefore Pro
bability again becomes applicable.

But although some resort to Probability may be ad
mitted in such cases as these, it nevertheless does not
appear to me that they can ever be regarded as particularly
appropriate examples to illustrate the methods and resources
of the theory. Indeed it is scarcely possible to resist the
conviction that the refinements of mathematical calculation
have here been pushed to lengths utterly unjustifiable, when
we bear in mind the impossibility of obtaining any corre
sponding degree of accuracy and precision in the data from
which we have to start. To cite but one instance. It would
be hard to find a case in which love of consistency has pre
vailed over common sense to such an extent as in the ad
mission of the conclusion that it is unimportant what are
the numbers for and against a particular statement, provided

SECT. 11.] Testimony. 405

the actual majority is the same. That is, the unanimous
judgment of a jury of eight is to count for the same as a
majority of ten to two in a jury of twelve. And yet this
conclusion is admitted by Poisson. The assumptions under
which it follows will be indicated in the course of the next
chapter.

Again, perfect independence amongst the witnesses or
jurors is an almost necessary postulate. But where can this
be secured ? To say nothing of direct collusion, human
beings are in almost all instances greatly under the influence
of sympathy in forming their opinions. This influence, under
the various names of political bias, class prejudice, local
feeling, and so on. always exists to a sufficient degree to
induce a cautious person to make many of those individual
corrections which we saw to be necessary when we were
estimating the trustworthiness, in any given case, of a single
witness ; that is, they are sufficient to destroy much, if not
all, of the confidence with which we resort to statistics and
averages in forming our judgment. Since then this Essay is
mainly devoted to explaining and establishing the general
principles of the science of Probability, we may very fairly
be excused from any further treatment of this subject, beyond
the brief discussions which are given in the next chapter.

CHAPTER XVII.

ON THE CREDIBILITY OF EXTEAOEDINARY STORIES.

§ 1. IT is now time to recur for fuller investigation to an
enquiry which has been already briefly touched upon more
than once ; that is, the validity of testimony to establish,
as it is frequently expressed, an otherwise improbable story.
It will be remembered that in a previous chapter (the
twelfth) we devoted some examination to an assertion, by
Butler, which seemed to be to some extent countenanced
by Mill, that a great improbability before the proof might
become but a very small improbability after the proof. In
opposition to this it was pointed out that the different
estimates which we undoubtedly formed of the credibility
of the examples adduced, had nothing to do with the
fact of the event being past or future, but arose from a
very different cause ; that the conception of the event
which we entertain at the moment (which is all that is then
and there actually present to us, and as to the correctness
of which as a representation of facts we have to make up our
minds) comes before us in two very different ways. In one
instance it was a mere guess of our own which we knew
from statistics would be right in a certain proportion of
cases ; in the other instance it was the assertion of a witness,
and therefore the appeal was not now primarily to statistics of
the event, but to the trustworthiness of the witness. The con-

SECT. 3.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 407

ception, or ' event ' if we will so term it, had in fact passed
out of the category of guesses (on statistical grounds), into
that of assertions (most likely resting on some specific evi
dence), and would therefore be naturally regarded in a very
different light.

§ 2. But it may seem as if this principle would lead us
to somewhat startling conclusions. For, by transferring the
appeal from the frequency with which the event occurs to
the trustworthiness of the witness who makes the assertion,
is it not implied that the probability or improbability of an
assertion depends solely upon the veracity of the witness ?
If so, ought not any story whatever to be believed when
it is asserted by a truthful person ?

In order to settle this question we must look a little
more closely into the circumstances under which such
testimony is commonly presented to us. As it is of course
necessary, for clearness of exposition, to take a numerical
example, let us suppose that a given statement is made by
a witness who, on the whole and in the long run, is right-
in what he says nine times out of ten1. Here then is an
average given to us, an average veracity that is, which
includes all the particular statements which the witness has
made or will make.

§ 3. Now it has been abundantly shown in a former
chapter (Ch. IX. §§ 14 — 32) that the mere fact of a par-

1 Beasons were given in the last another ; such a rough practical

chapter against the propriety of ap- distinction will be quite sufficient

plying the rules of Probability with for the purposes of this chapter,

any strictness to such examples as For convenience, and to illustrate

these. But although all approach the theory, the examples are best

to numerical accuracy is unattain- stated in a numerical form, but it

able, we do undoubtedly recognize is not intended thereby to imply

in ordinary life a distinction between that any such accuracy is really

the credibility of one witness and attainable in practice.

408 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP. xvn.

ticular average having been assigned, is no reason for our
being forced invariably to adhere to it, even in those cases
in which our most natural and appropriate ground of judg
ment is found in an appeal to statistics and averages.
The general average may constantly have to be corrected
in order to meet more accurately the circumstances of par
ticular cases. In statistics of mortality, for instance, instead
of resorting to the wider tables furnished by people in
general of a given age, we often prefer the narrower tables
furnished by men of a particular profession, abode, or mode
of life. The reader may however be conveniently reminded
here that in so doing we must not suppose that we are able,
by any such device, in any special or peculiar way to secure
truth. The general average, if persistently adhered to
throughout a sufficiently wide and varied experience, would
in the long run tend to give us the truth ; all the advantage
which the more special averages can secure for us is to give
us the same tendency to the truth with fewer and slighter
aberrations.

§ 4. Returning then to our witness, we know that if
we have a very great many statements from him upon all
possible subjects, we may feel convinced that in nine out of
ten of these he will tell us the truth, and that in the tenth
case he will go wrong. This is nothing more than a matter
of definition or consistency. But cannot we do better than
thus rely upon his general average ? Cannot we, in almost
any given case, specialize it by attending to various cha
racteristic circumstances in the nature of the statement
which he makes ; just as we specialize his prospects of
mortality by attending to circumstances in his constitution
or mode of life ?

Undoubtedly we may do this ; and in any of the practical
contingencies of life, supposing that we were at all guided

SECT. 5.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 409

by considerations of this nature, we should act very foolishly
if we did not adopt some such plan. Two methods of thus
correcting the average may be suggested : one of them being
that which practical sagacity would be most likely to employ,
the other that which is almost universally adopted by writers
on Probability. The former attempts to make the correction
by the following considerations : instead of relying upon the
witness' general average, we assign to it a sort of conjectural
correction to meet the case before us, founded on our expe
rience or observation ; that is, we appeal to experience to
establish that stories of such and such a kind are more or
less likely to be true, as the case may be, than stories in
general. The other proceeds upon a different and some
what more methodical plan. It is here endeavoured to
show, by an analysis of the nature and number of the
sources of error in the cases in question, that such and such
kinds of stories must be more or less likely to be correctly
reported, and this in certain numerical proportions.

§ 5. Before proceeding to a discussion of these methods
a distinction must be pointed out to which writers upon the
subject have not always attended, or at any rate to which
they have not generally sufficiently directed their readers'
attention1. There are, broadly speaking, two different ways
in which we may suppose testimony to be given. It may, in
the first place, take the form of a reply to an alternative
question, a question, that is, framed to be answered by yes
or no. Here, of course, the possible answers are mutually
contradictory, so that if one of them is not correct the other
must be so : — Has A happened, yes or no ? The common
mode of illustrating this kind of testimony numerically is by

1 I must plead guilty to this make the treatment of this part of
charge myself, in the first edition the subject obscure and imperfect,
of this work. The result was to and in some respects erroneous.

410 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories, [CHAP. xvn.

supposing a lottery with a prize and blanks, or a bag of balls
of two colours only, the witness knowing that there are only
two, or at any rate being confined to naming one or other of
them. If they are black and white, and he errs when black
is drawn, he must say ' white.' The reason for the promi
nence assigned to examples of this class is, probably, that
they correspond to the very important case of verdicts of
juries ; juries being supposed to have nothing else to do than
to say ' guilty' or ' not guilty.'

On the other hand, the testimony may take the form of a
more original statement or piece of information. Instead of
saying, Did A happen ? we may ask, What happened ? Here
if the witness speaks truth he must be supposed, as before,
to have but one way of doing so ; for the occurrence of some
specific event was of course contemplated. But if he errs he
has many ways of going wrong, possibly an infinite number.
Ordinarily however his possible false statements are assumed
to be limited in number, as must generally be more or less
the result in practice. This case is represented numerically
by supposing the balls in the bag not to be of two colours
only, but to be all distinct from each other; say by their
being all numbered successively. It may of course be ob
jected that a large number of the statements that are made
in the world are not in any way answers to questions, either
of the alternative or of the open kind. For instance, a man
simply asserts that he has drawn the seven of spades from a
pack of cards ; and we do not know perhaps whether he had
been asked ' Has that card been drawn ?' or ' What card has
been drawn?' or indeed whether he had been asked anything
at all. Still more might this be so in the case of any ordi
nary historical statement.

This objection is quite to the point, and must be recog
nized as constituting an additional difficulty. All that we

SECT. 6.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 411

can do is to endeavour, as best we may, to ascertain, from
the circumstances of the case, what number of alternatives*
the witness may be supposed to have had before him. When
he simply testifies to some matter well known to be in dis
pute, and does not go much into detail, we may fairly con
sider that there were practically only the two alternatives-
before him of saying ' yes ' or ' no.' When, on the other hand,
he tells a story of a more original kind, or (what comes to
much the same thing) goes into details, we must regard him
as having a wide comparative range of alternatives before
him.

These two classes of examples, viz. that of the black and
white balls, in which only one form of error is possible, and
the numbered balls, in which there may be many forms of
error, are the only two which we need notice. In practice it
would seem that they may gradually merge into each other,
according to the varying ways in which we choose to frame
our question. Besides asking, Did you see A strike B ? and,
What did you see ? we may introduce any number of inter
mediate leading questions, as, What did A do ? What did
he do to 5? and so on. In this way we may gradually narrow
the possible openings to wrong statement, and so approach
to the direct alternative question. But it is clear that all
these cases may be represented numerically by a supposed
diminution in the number of the balls which are thus distin
guished from each other.

§ 6. Of the two plans mentioned in § 4 we will begin
with the latter, as it is the only methodical and scientific one
which has been proposed. Suppose that there is a bag with
1000 balls, only one of which is white, the rest being all
black. A ball is drawn at random, and our witness whose
veracity is T% reports that the white ball was drawn. Take
a great many of his statements upon this particular subject,

412 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP. xvn.

say 10,000 ; that is, suppose that 10,000 balls having been
successively drawn out of this bag, or bags of exactly the
same kind, he makes his report in each case. His 10,000
statements being taken as a fair sample of his general ave
rage, we shall find, by supposition, that 9 out of every 10 of
them are true and the remaining one false. What will be
the nature of these false statements ? Under the circum
stances in question, he having only one way of going wrong,
the answer is easy. In the 10,000 drawings the white ball
would come out 10 times, and therefore be rightly asserted
9 times, whilst on the one of these occasions on which he
goes wrong he has nothing to say but ' black.' So with the
9990 occasions on which black is drawn; he is right and
says black on 8991 of them, and is wrong and therefore says
white on 999 of them. On the whole, therefore, we conclude
that out of every 1008 times on which he says that white is
drawn he is wrong 999 times and right only 9 times. That
is, his special veracity, as we may term it, for cases of this
description, has been reduced from -^ to TiJ97g. As it would
commonly be expressed, the latter fraction represents the
chance that this particular statement of his is true *.

1 The generalized algebraical form be presently made, the reader will

of this result is as follows. Let p notice that on making either of these

be the a priori probability of an expressions =p, we obtain in each

event, and x be the credibility of the case x = \. That is, a witness whose

witness. Then, if he asserts that veracity =\ leaves the a priori prob-

the event happened, the probability ability of an event (of this kind) un-

that it really did happen is affected.

If, on the other hand, we make

exPressions e(lual to x and

1 - x respectively, we obtain in each
whilst if he asserts that it did not case p = %. That is, when an event
happen the probability that it did (of this kind) is as likely to happen
happen is j? (1 -#) as not, the ordinary veracity of the

p(l - x) + (l-p)x witness in respect of it remains un-

In illustration of some remarks to affected.

SECT. 8.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 413

§ 7. We will now take the case in which the witness
has many ways of going wrong, instead of merely one. Sup
pose that the balls were all numbered, from 1 to 1,000, and
the witness knows this fact. A ball is drawn, and he tells
me that it was numbered 25, what are the odds that he is
right ? Proceeding as before, in 10,000 drawings this ball
would be obtained 10 times, and correctly named 9 times.
But on the 9990 occasions on which it was not drawn there
would be a difference, for the witness has now many open
ings for error before him. It is, however, generally considered
reasonable to assume that his errors will all take the form of
announcing wrong numbers; and that, there being no apparent
reason why he should choose one number rather than another,
he will be likely to announce all the wrong ones equally
often. Hence his 999 errors, instead of all leading him now
back again to one spot, will be uniformly spread over as
many distinct ways of going wrong. On one only of these
occasions, therefore, will he mention 25 as having been
drawn. It follows therefore that out of every 10 times that
he names 25 he is right 9 times ; so that in this case his
average or general truthfulness applies equally well to the
special case in point.

§ 8. With regard to the truth of these conclusions, it
must of course be admitted that if we grant the validity of
the assumptions about the limits within which the blunder
ing or mendacity of the witness are confined, and the com
plete impartiality with which his answers are disposed within
those limits, the reasoning is perfectly sound. But are not
these assumptions extremely arbitrary, that is, are not our
lotteries and bags of balls rendered perfectly precise in many
respects in which, in ordinary life, the conditions supposed to
correspond to them are so vague and uncertain that no such
method of reasoning becomes practically available ? Suppose

414 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP. XVII.

that a person whom I have long known, and of whose mea
sure of veracity and judgment I may be supposed therefore
to have acquired some knowledge, informs me that there is
something to my advantage if I choose to go to certain
trouble or expense in order to secure it. As regards the
general veracity of the witness, then, there is no difficulty;
we suppose that this is determined for us. But as regards
his story, difficulty arid vagueness emerge at every point.
What is the number of balls in the bag here ? What in fact
are the nature and contents of the bag out of which we sup
pose the drawing to have been made ? It does not seem
that the materials for any rational judgment exist here.
But if we are to get at any such amended figure of veracity
as those attained in the above example, these questions must
necessarily be answered with some degree of accuracy; for
the main point of the method consists in determining how
often the event must be considered not to happen, and thence
inferring how often the witness will be led wrongly to assert
that it has happened.

It is not of course denied that considerations of the kind
in question have some influence upon our decision, but only
that this influence could under any ordinary circumstances
be submitted to numerical determination. We are doubt
less liable to have information given to us that we have
come in for some kind of fortune, for instance, when no
such good luck has really befallen us ; and this not once
only but repeatedly. But who can give the faintest inti
mation of the nature and number of the occasions on which,
a blank being thus really drawn, a prize will nevertheless
be falsely announced ? It appears to me therefore that
numerical results of any practical value can seldom, if ever,
be looked for from this method of procedure.

§ 9. Our conclusion in the case of the lottery, or, what

SECT. 9.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 415

comes to the same thing, in the case of the bag with black
and white balls, has been questioned or objected to1 on the
ground that it is contrary to all experience to suppose that
the testimony of a moderately good witness could be so
enormously depreciated under such circumstances. I should
prefer to base the objection on the ground that experience
scarcely ever presents such circumstances as those supposed ;
but if we postulate their existence the given conclusion seems
correct enough. Assume that a man is merely required to
say yes or no ; assume also a group or succession of cases in
which no should rightly be said very much oftener than
yes. Then, assuming almost any general truthfulness of the
witness, we may easily suppose the (rightful occasions for
denial to be so much the more frequent that a majority of
his affirmative answers will actually occur as false ' noes '
rather than as correct ' ayes.' This of course lowers the
average value of his ' ayes/ and renders them comparatively
untrustworthy.

Consider the following example. I have a gardener whom
I trust as to all ordinary matters of fact. If he were to
tell me some morning that my dog had run away I should
fully believe him. He tells me however that the dog has
gone mad. Surely I should accept the statement with much
hesitation, and on the grounds indicated above. It is not
that he is more likely to be wrong when the dog is mad ;
but that experience shows that there are other complaints
(e.g. fits) which are far more common than madness, and
that most of the assertions of madness are erroneous asser
tions referring to these. This seems a somewhat parallel
case to that in which we find that most of the assertions
that a white ball had been drawn are really false assertions
referring to the drawing of a black ball. Practically I do

1 Todhunter's History, p. 400. Philosophical Magazine, July, 1864.

416 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP. xvn.

not think that any one would feel a difficulty in thus ex
orbitantly discounting some particular assertion of a witness
whom in most other respects he fully trusted.

§ 10. There is one particular case which has been re
garded as a difficulty in the way of this treatment of the
problem, but which seems to me to be a decided confirma
tion of it ; always, be it understood, within the very narrow
and artificial limits to which we must suppose ourselves to
be confined. This is the case of a witness whose veracity is
just one-half; that is, one who, when a mere yes or no is
demanded of him, is as often wrong as right. In the case of
any other assigned degree of veracity it is extremely difficult
to get anything approaching to a confirmation from prac
tical judgment and experience. We are not accustomed to
estimate the merits of witnesses in this way, and hardly ap
preciate what is meant by his numerical degree of truthful
ness. But as regards the man whose veracity is one-half, we
are (as Mr C. J. Monro has very ingeniously suggested) only
too well acquainted with such witnesses, though under a
somewhat different name ; for this is really nothing else than
the case of a person confidently answering a question about
a subject-matter of which he knows nothing, and can there
fore only give a mere guess.

Now in the case of the lottery with one prize, when the
witness whose veracity is one-half tells us that we have
gained the prize, we find on calculation that his testimony
goes for absolutely nothing ; the chances that we have got
the prize are just the same as they would be if he had never
opened his lips, viz. j^o- But clearly this is what ought
to be the result, for the witness who knows nothing about
the matter leaves it exactly as he found it. He is indeed,
in strictness, scarcely a witness at all ; for the natural func
tion of a witness is to examine the matter, and so to add

SECT. 11.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 417

confirmation, more or less, according to his judgment and
probity, but at any rate to offer an improvement upon the
mere guesser. If, however, we will give heed to his mere
guess we are doing just the same thing as if we were to guess
ourselves, in which case of course the odds that we are right
are simply measured by the frequency of occurrence of the
events.

We cannot quite so readily apply the same rule to the
other case, namely to that of the numbered balls, for there
the witness who is right every other time may really be a
very fair, or even excellent, witness. If he has many ways
of going wrong, and yet is right in half his statements, it is
clear that he must have taken some degree of care, and can
not have merely guessed. In a case of yes or no, any one can
be right every other time, but it is different where truth
is single and error is manifold. To represent the case of a
simply worthless witness when there were 1000 balls and
the drawing of one assigned ball was in question, we should
have to put his figure of veracity at T^. If this were
done we should of course get a similar result.

§ 11. It deserves notice therefore that the figure of
veracity, or fraction representing the general truthfulness
of a witness, is in a way relative, not absolute ; that is, it
depends upon, and varies with, the general character of the
answer which he is supposed to give. Two witnesses of
equal intrinsic veracity and worth, one of whom confined
himself to saying yes and no, whilst the other ventured to
make more original assertions, would be represented by
different fractions; the former having set himself a much
easier task than the latter. The real caution and truthful
ness of the witness are only one factor, therefore, in his
actual figure of veracity; the other factor consists of the
nature of his assertions, as just pointed out. The ordinary
v. 27

418 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP. xvn.

plan therefore, in such problems, of assigning an average
truthfulness to the witness, and accepting this alike in the
case of each of the two kinds of answers, though convenient,
seems scarcely sound. This consideration would however
be of much more importance were not the discussions upon
the subject mainly concerned with only one description of
answer, namely that of the ' yes or no ' kind.

§ 12. So much for the methodical way of treating such
a problem. The way in which it would be taken in hand by
those who had made no study of Probability is very different.
It would, I apprehend, strike them as follows. They would
say to themselves, Here is a story related by a witness who
tells the truth, say, nine times out of ten. But it is a story
of a kind which experience shows to be very generally made
untruly, say 99 times out of 100. Having then these oppo
site inducements to belief, they would attempt in some way
to strike a balance between them. Nothing in the nature of
a strict rule could be given to enable them to decide how
they might escape out of the difficulty. Probably, in so far
as they did not judge at haphazard, they would be guided
by still further resort to experience, or unconscious recol
lections of its previous teachings, in order to settle which
of the two opposing inductions was better entitled to carry
the day in the particular case before them. The reader
will readily see that any general solution of the problem,
when thus presented, is impossible. It is simply the now
familiar case (Chap. IX. §§ 14 — 32) of an individual which
belongs equally to two distinct, or even, in respect of their
characteristics, opposing classes. We cannot decide offhand
to which of the two its characteristics most naturally and
rightly refer it. A fresh induction is needed in order to
settle this point.

§ 13. Rules have indeed been suggested by various

SECT. 14.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 419

writers in order to extricate us from the difficulty. The con
troversy about miracles has probably been the most fertile
occasion for suggestions of this kind on one side or the
other. It is to this controversy, presumably, that the phrase
is due, so often employed in discussions upon similar sub
jects, ' a contest of opposite improbabilities.' What is meant
by such an expression is clearly this: that in forming a
judgment upon the truth of certain assertions we may find
that they are comprised in two very distinct classes, so that,
according as we regarded them as belonging to one or the
other of these distinct classes, our opinion as to their truth
would be very different. Such an assertion belongs to one
class, of course, by its being a statement of a particular
witness, or kind of witness ; it belongs to the other by its
being a particular kind of story, one of what is called an
improbable nature. Its belonging to the former class is so
far favourable to its truth, its belonging to the latter is so far
hostile to its truth. It seems to be assumed, in speaking of
a contest of opposite improbabilities, that when these different
sources of conviction co-exist together, they would each in
some way retain their probative force so as to produce a
contest, ending generally in a victory to one or other of
them. Hume, for instance, speaks of our deducting one
probability from the other, and apportioning our belief to
the remainder1. Thomson, in his Laws of Thought, speaks
of one probability as entirely superseding the other.

§ 14. It does not appear to me that the slightest philoso
phical value can be attached to any such rules as these.
They doubtless may, and indeed will, hold in individual

1 "When therefore these two opinion, either on one side or the

kinds of experience are contrary, we other, with that assurance which

have nothing to do but subtract the arises from the remainder." (Essay

one from the other, and embrace an on Miracles.)

27—2

420 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP. xvn.

cases, but they cannot lay claim to any generality. Even
the notion of a contest, as any necessary ingredient in the
case, must be laid aside. For let us refer again to the way
in which the perplexity arises, and we shall readily see, as
has just been remarked, that it is nothing more than a par
ticular exemplification of a difficulty which has already been
recognized as incapable of solution by any general a priori
method of treatment. All that we are supposed to have before
us is a statement. On this occasion it is made by a witness
who lies, say, once in ten times in the long run ; that is, who
mostly tells the truth. But on the other hand, it is a state
ment which experience, derived from a variety of witnesses on
various occasions, assures us is mostly false ; stated numerically
it is found, let us suppose, to be false 99 times in a hundred.
Now, as was shown in the chapter on Induction, we are
thus brought to a complete dead lock. Our science offers no
principles by which we can form an opinion, or attempt to
decide the matter one way or the other; for, as we found,
there are an indefinite number of conclusions which are all
equally possible. For instance, all the witness' extraordinary
assertions may be true, or they may all be false, or they may
be divided into the true and the false in any proportion
whatever. Having gone so far in our appeal to statistics as
to recognize that the witness is generally right, but that his
story is generally false, we cannot stop there. We ought to
make still further appeal to experience, and ascertain how it
stands with regard to his stories when they are of that
particular nature: or rather, for this would be to make a
needlessly narrow reference, how it stands with regard to
stories of that kind when advanced by witnesses of his-
general character, position, sympathies, and so on1.

1 Considerations of this kind have mathematical treatment of the sub-
indeed been introduced into the ject. The common algebraical solu-

SECT. 15.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 421

§ 15. That extraordinary stories are in many cases, pro
bably in a great majority of cases, less trustworthy than
others must be fully admitted. That is, if we were to make
two distinct classes of such stories respectively, we should
find that the same witness, or similar witnesses, were propor
tionally more often wrong when asserting the former than
when asserting the latter. But it does not by any means
appear to me that this must always be the case. We may
well conceive, for instance, that with some people the mere
fact of the story being of a very unusual character may make
them more careful in what they state, so as actually to add
to their veracity. If this were so we might be ready to
accept their extraordinary stories with even more readiness
than their ordinary ones.

Such a supposition as that just made does not seem to me
by any means forced. Put such a case as this : let us sup
pose that two persons, one of them a man of merely ordinary
probity and intelligence, the other a scientific naturalist,
make a statement about some common event. We believe

tion of the problem in § 5 (to begin Here t' and t measure respectively

with the simplest case) is of course his trustworthiness in usual and

as follows. Let p be the antecedent unusual events. As a formal solu-

probability of the event, and t the tion this certainly meets the objec-

measure of the truthfulness of the tions stated above in §§ 14 and 15.

witness; then the chance of his state- The determination however of t'

pt would demand, as I have remarked,

ment being true is . , ; . „ . .

pt+ (1 -p) (1 - t) continually renewed appeal to ex-

This supposes him to lie as much perience. In any case the practical

when the event does not happen as methods which would be adopted, if

when it does. But we may meet any plans of the kind indicated above

the cases supposed in the text by were resorted to, seem to me to differ

assuming that t' is the measure of very much from that adopted by the

his veracity when the event does mathematicians, in their spirit and

not happen, so that the above plan.

formula becomes

422 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP. xvu.

them both. Let them now each report some extraordinary
lusus naturae or monstrosity which they profess to have seen.
Most persons, we may presume, would receive the statement
of the naturalist in this latter case almost as readily as in
the former: whereas when the same story came from the
unscientific observer it would be received with considerable
hesitation. Whence arises the difference? From the con
viction that the naturalist will be far more careful, and
therefore to the full as accurate, in matters of this kind as
in those of the most ordinary description, whereas with the
other man we feel by no means the same confidence. Even
if any one is not prepared to go this length, he will probably
admit that the difference of credit which he would attach to
the two kinds of story, respectively, when they came from
the naturalist, would be much less than what it would be
when they came from the other man.

§ 16. Whilst we are on this part of the subject, it must
be pointed out that there is considerable ambiguity and
consequent confusion about the use of the term 'an extraor
dinary story.' Within the province of pure Probability it
ought to mean simply a story which asserts an unusual event.
At least this is the view which has been adopted and main
tained, it is hoped consistently, throughout this work. So
long as we adhere to this sense we know precisely what we
mean by the term. It has a purely objective reference; it
simply connotes a very low degree of relative statistical
frequency, actual or prospective. Out of a great number of
events we suppose a selection of some particular kind to be
contemplated, which occurs relatively very seldom, and this
is termed an unusual or extraordinary event. It follows, as
was abundantly shown in a former chapter, that owing to
the rarity of the event we are very little disposed to expect
its occurrence in any given case. Our guess about it, in case

SECT. 17.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 423

we thus anticipated it, would very seldom be justified, and
we are therefore apt to be much surprised when it does
occur. This, I take it, is the only legitimate sense of 'extra
ordinary' so far as Probability is concerned.

But there is another and very different use of the word,
which belongs to Induction, or rather to the science of
evidence in general, more than to that limited portion of it
termed Probability. In this sense the 'extraordinary,' and
still more the 'improbable,' event is not merely one of
extreme statistical rarity, which we could not expect to
guess aright, but which on moderate evidence we may pretty
readily accept; it is rather one which possesses, so to say, an
actual evidence-resisting power. It may be something which
affects the credibility of the witness at the fountain-head,
which makes, that is, his statements upon such a subject
essentially inferior to those on other subjects. This is the
case, for instance, with anything which excites his prejudices
or passions or superstitions. In these cases it would seem
unreasonable to attempt to estimate the credibility of the
witness by calculating (as in § 6) how often his errors would
mislead us through his having been wrongly brought to an.
affirmation instead of adhering correctly to a negation. We
should rather be disposed to put our correction on the wit
ness' average veracity at once.

§ 17. In true Probability, as has just been remarked,
every event has its own definitely recognizable degree of
frequency of occurrence. It may be excessively rare, rare to
any extreme we like to postulate, but still every one who
understands and admits the data upon which its occurrence
depends will be able to appreciate within what range of
experience it may be expected to present itself. We do not
expect it in any individual case, nor within any brief range,
but we do confidently expect it within an adequately exten-

424 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP. xvn.

sive range. How therefore can miraculous stories be simi
larly taken account of, when the disputants, on one side at
least, are not prepared to admit their actual occurrence any
where or at any time ? How can any arrangement of bags
and balls, or other mechanical or numerical illustrations of
unlikely events, be admitted as fairly illustrative of miracu
lous occurrences, or indeed of many of those which come
under the designation of ' very extraordinary ' or ' highly
improbable ' ? Those who contest the occurrence of a par
ticular miracle, as reported by this or that narrator, do not
admit that miracles are to be confidently expected sooner or
later. It is not a question as to whether what must happen
sometimes has happened some particular time, and therefore
no illustration of the kind can be regarded as apposite.

How unsuitable these merely rare events, however ex
cessive their rarity may be, are as examples of miraculous
events, will be evident from a single consideration. No one,
I presume, who admitted the occasional occurrence of an ex
ceedingly unusual combination, would be in much doubt if
he considered that he had actually seen it himself1. On the
other hand, few men of any really scientific turn would
readily accept a miracle even if it appeared to happen under
their very eyes. They might be staggered at the time, but

1 Laplace, for instance (Essai, ed. contains 77 figures, and is therefore

1825, p. 149), says that if we saw utterly inappreciable by the imagi-

100 dies (known of course to be fair nation. It must be admitted, though,

ones) all give the same face, we that there is something hypothetical

should be bewildered at the time, about such an example, for we could

and need confirmation from others, not really know that the dies were

but that, after due examination, no fair with a confidence even distantly

one would feel obliged to postulate approaching such prodigious odds,

hallucination in the matter. But In other words, it is difficult here to

the chance of this occurrence is keep apart those different aspects of

represented by a fraction whose the question discussed in Chap. xiv.

numerator is 1, and denominator §§ 28 — 33.

SECT. 18.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 425

they would probably soon come to discredit it afterwards,
or so explain it as to evacuate it of all that is meant by
miraculous.

§ 18. It appears to me therefore, on the whole, that
very little can be made of these problems of testimony in
the way in which it is generally intended that they should
be treated ; that is, in obtaining specific rules for the esti
mation of the testimony under any given circumstances.
Assuming that the veracity of the witness can be measured,
we encounter the real difficulty in the utter impossibility of
determining the limits within which the failures of the event
in question are to be considered to lie, and the degree of
explicitness with which the witness is supposed to answer
the enquiry addressed to him ; both of these being charac
teristics of which it is necessary to have a numerical esti
mate before we can consider ourselves in possession of the
requisite data.

Since therefore the practical resource of most persons,
viz. that of putting a direct and immediate correction, of
course of a somewhat conjectural nature, upon the general
trustworthiness of the witness, by a consideration of the
nature of the circumstances under which his statement is
made, is essentially unscientific and irreducible to rule ; it
really seems to me that there is something to be said in
favour of the simple plan of trusting in all cases alike to
the witness' general veracity1. That is, whether his story
is ordinary or extraordinary, we may resolve to put it on
the same footing of credibility, provided of course that the
event is fully recognized as one which does or may occa-

1 In the first edition this was that (as was shown in § 7) this

stated, as it now seems to me, in de- plan is really the best theoretical

cidedly too unqualified a manner. one which can be adopted in certain

It must be remembered, however, cases.

426 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP. xvu.

sionally happen. It is true that we shall thus go constantly
astray, and may do so to a great extent, so that if there
were any rational and precise method of specializing his
trustworthiness, according to the nature of his story, we
should be on much firmer ground. But at least we may
thus know what to expect on the average. Provided we
have a sufficient number and variety of statements from
him, and always take them at the same constant rate or
degree of trustworthiness, we may succeed in balancing and
correcting our conduct in the long run so as to avoid any
ruinous error.

§ 19. A few words may now be added about the combi
nation of testimony. No new principles are introduced here,
though the consequent complication is naturally greater. Let
us suppose two witnesses, the veracity of each being •£$.
Now suppose 100 statements made by the pair ; according to
the plan of proceeding adopted before, we should have them
both right 81 times and both wrong once, in the remaining
18 cases one being right and the other wrong. But since
they are both supposed to give the same account, what we
have to compare together are the number of occasions on
which they agree and are right, and the total number on which
they agree whether right or wrong. The ratio of the former
to the latter is the fraction which expresses the trustworthi
ness of their combination of testimony in the case in question.

In attempting to decide this point the only difficulty is
in determining how often they will be found to agree when
they are both wrong, for clearly they must agree when they
are both right. This enquiry turns of course upon the num
ber of ways in which they can succeed in going wrong.
Suppose first the case of a simple yes or no (as in § 6), and
take the same example, of a bag with 1000 balls, in which
one only is white. Proceeding as before, we should find that

SECT. 20.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 427

out of 100,000 drawings (the number required in order to
obtain a complete cycle of all possible occurrences, as well as
of all possible reports about them) the two witnesses agree
in a correct report of the appearance of white in 81, and
agree in a wrong report of it in 999. The Probability there
fore of the story when so attested is yfj^ 5 tne ^act therefore
of two such witnesses of equal veracity having concurred
makes the report nearly 9 times as likely as when it rested
upon the authority of only one of them 1.

§ 20. When however the witnesses have many ways of
going wrong, the fact of their agreeing makes the report far
more likely to be true. For instance, in the case of the 1000
numbered balls, it is very unlikely that when they both mis
take the number they should (without collusion) happen to
make the same misstatement. Whereas, in the last case,
every combined misstatement necessarily led them both to
the assertion that the event in question had happened, we
should now find that only once in 999 x 999 times would
they both be led to assert that some given number (say, as
before, 25) had been drawn. The odds in favour of the

1 It is on this principle that the right and m are wrong). And the

remarkable conclusion mentioned on chance of its being rightly asserted

p. 405 is based. Suppose an event &spym(l-y)n. Therefore the chance

whose probability is p ; and that, of that when we have an assertion

a number of witnesses of the same before us it is a true one is

veracity (?/), m assert that it hap- pym(l-y)n

pened, and n deny this. Generaliz- pym (i~jj)» + (1 -p) yn(l- y)m '

ing the arithmetical reasoning given

- ,, which is equal to
above we see that the chance of the

event being asserted varies as

(viz. as the chance that the event But this last expression represents

happens, and that m are right and n the probability of an assertion which

are wrong; plus the chance that it is unanimously supported by m-n

does not happen, and that n are such witnesses.

428 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP. xvn.

event in fact now become f$fi§, which are enormously
greater than when there was only one witness.

It appears therefore that when two, and of course still
more when many, witnesses agree in a statement in a matter
about which they might make many and various errors, the
combination of their favourable testimony adds enormously
to the likelihood of the event ; provided always that there
is no chance of collusion. And in the extreme case of the
opportunities for error being, as they well may be, practically
infinite in number, such combination would produce almost
perfect certainty. But then this condition, viz. absence of
collusion, very seldom can be secured. Practically our main
source of error and suspicion is in the possible existence of
some kind of collusion. Since we can seldom entirely get
rid of this danger, and when it exists it can never be sub
mitted to numerical calculation, it appears to me that combi
nation of testimony, in regard to detailed accounts, is yet
more unfitted for consideration in Probability than even that
of single testimony.

§ 21. The impossibility of any adequate or even appro
priate consideration of the credibility of miraculous stories
by the rules of Probability has been already noticed in § 17.
But, since the grounds of this impossibility are often very
insufficiently appreciated, a few pages may conveniently be
added here with a view to enforcing this point. If it be
regarded as a digression, the importance of the subject and
the persistency with which various writers have at one time
or another attempted to treat it by the rules of our science
must be the excuse for entering upon it.

A necessary preliminary will be to decide upon some defi
nition of a miracle. It will, we may suppose, be admitted by
most persons that in calling a miracle ' a suspension of a law
of causation,' we are giving what, though it may not amount

SECT. 22.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 429

to an adequate definition, is at least true as a description.
It is true, though it may not be the whole truth. Whatever
else the miracle may be, this is its physical aspect: this is the
point at which it comes into contact with the subject-matter
of science. If it were not considered that any suspension of
causation were involved, the event would be regarded merely
as an ordinary one to which some special significance was
attached, that is, as a type or symbol rather than a miracle.
It is this aspect moreover of the miracle which is now ex
posed to the main brunt of the attack, and in support of
which therefore the defence has generally been carried on.

Now it is obvious that this, like most other definitions or
descriptions, makes some assumption as to matters of fact,
and involves something of a theory. The assumption clearly
is, that laws of causation prevail universally, or almost uni
versally, throughout nature, so that infractions of them are
marked and exceptional. This assumption is made, but it
does not appear that anything more than this is necessarily
required; that is, there is nothing which need necessarily
make us side with either of the two principal schools which
are divided as to the nature of these laws of causation. The
definition will serve equally well whether we understand by
law nothing more than uniformity of antecedent and conse
quent, or whether we assert that there is some deeper and
more mysterious tie between the events than mere sequence.
The use of the term 'causation' in this minimum of signifi
cation is common to both schools, though the one might
consider it inadequate; we may speak, therefore, of 'suspen
sions of causation ' without committing ourselves to either.

§ 22. It should be observed that the aspect of the ques
tion suggested by this definition is one from which we can
hardly escape. Attempts indeed have been sometimes made
to avoid the necessity of any assumption as to the universal

430 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP, xv n.

prevalence of law and order in nature, by defining a miracle
from a different point of view. A miracle may be called, for
instance, ' an immediate exertion of creative power,' ' a sign
of a revelation,' or, still more vaguely, an 'extraordinary
event.' But nothing would be gained by adopting any such
definitions as these. However they might satisfy the theo
logian, the student of physical science would not rest content
with them for a moment. He would at once assert his own
belief, and that of other scientific men, in the existence of
universal law, and enquire what was the connection of the
definition with this doctrine. An answer would imperatively
be demanded to the question, Does the miracle, as you have
described it, imply an infraction of one of these laws, or does
it not ? And an answer must be given, unless indeed we
reject his assumption by denying our belief in the existence
of this universal law, in which case of course we put our
selves out of the pale of argument with him. The necessity
of having to recognize this fact is growing upon men day by
day, with the increased study of physical science. And since
this aspect of the question has to be met some time or other,
it is as well to place it in the front. The difficulty, in its
scientific form, is of course a modern one, for the doctrine out
of which it arises is modern. But it is only one instance, out
of many that might be mentioned, in which the growth of
some philosophical conception has gradually affected the
nature of the dispute, and at last shifted the position of the
battle-ground, in some discussion with which it might not at
first have appeared to have any connection whatever.

§ 23. So far our path is plain. Up to this point disciples
of very different schools may advance together; for in laying
down the above doctrine we have carefully abstained from
implying or admitting that it contains the whole truth. But
from this point two paths branch out before us, paths as

SECT. 24.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 431

different from each other in their character, origin, and
direction, as can well be conceived. As this enquiry is only
a digression, we may confine ourselves to stating briefly what
seem to be the characteristics of each, without attempting to
give the arguments which might be used in their support.

(I.) On the one hand, we may assume that this principle
of causation is the ultimate one. By so terming it, we do
not mean that it is one from which we consciously start in
our investigations, as we do from the axioms of geometry,
but rather that it is the final result towards which we find
ourselves drawn by a study of nature. Finding that,
throughout the scope of our enquiries, event follows event in
never-failing uniformity, and finding moreover (some might
add) that this experience is supported or even demanded by
a tendency or law of our nature (it does not matter here how
we describe it), we may come to regard this as the one
fundamental principle on which all our enquiries should rest.

(II.) Or, on the other hand, we may admit a class of
principles of a very different kind. Allowing that there is
this uniformity so far as our experience extends, we may yet
admit what can hardly be otherwise described than by
calling it a Superintending Providence, that is, a Scheme or
Order, in reference to which Design may be predicated
without using merely metaphorical language. To adopt an
aptly chosen distinction, it is not to be understood as over
ruling events, but rather as underlying them.

§ 24. Now it is quite clear that according as we come to
the discussion of any particular miracle or extraordinary
story under one or other of these prepossessions, the ques
tion of its credibility will assume a very different aspect. It
is sometimes overlooked that although a difference about
facts is one of the conditions of a bond fide argument, a dif
ference which reaches to ultimate principles is fatal to all

432 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP. xvn.

argument. The possibility of present conflict is banished in
such a case as absolutely as that of future concord. A large
amount of popular literature on the subject of miracles
seems to labour under this defect. Arguments are stated
and examined for and against the credibility of miraculous
stories without the disputants appearing to have any
adequate conception of the chasm which separates one side
from the other.

§ 25. The following illustration may serve in some
degree to show the sort of inconsistency of which we are
speaking. A sailor reports that in some remote coral island
of the Pacific, on which he had landed by himself, he had
found a number of stones on the beach disposed in the exact
form of a cross. Now if we conceive a debate to arise about
the truth of his story, in which it is attempted to decide the
matter simply by considerations about the validity of testi
mony, without introducing the question of the existence of
inhabitants, and the nature of their customs, we shall have
some notion of the unsatisfactory nature of many of the
current arguments about miracles. All illustrations of this
subject are imperfect, but a case like this, in which a sup
posed trace of human agency is detected interfering with the
orderly sequence of other and non-intelligent natural causes,
is as much to the point as any illustration can be. The
thing omitted here from the discussion is clearly the one im
portant thing. If we suppose that there is no inhabitant, we
shall probably disbelieve the story, or consider it to be
grossly exaggerated. If we suppose that there are inhabit
ants, the question is at once resolved into a different and
somewhat more intricate one. The credibility of the witness
is not the only element, but we should necessarily have to
take into consideration the character of the supposed inhab
itants, and the object of such an action on their part.

SECT. 27.] Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. 433

§ 26. Considerations of this character are doubtless
often introduced into the discussion, but it appears to me
that they are introduced to a very inadequate extent. It is
often urged, after Paley, ' Once believe in a God, and mira
cles are not incredible.' Such an admission surely demands
some modification and extension. It should rather be stated
thus, Believe in a God whose working may be traced through
out the whole moral and physical world. It amounts, in
fact, to this • — Admit that there may be a design which we
can trace somehow or other in the course of things ; admit
that we are not wholly confined to tracing the connection of
vents, or following out their effects, but that we can form
some idea, feeble and imperfect though it be, of a scheme1.
Paley 's advice sounds too much like saying, Admit that there
are fairies, and we can account for our cups being cracked.
The admission is not to be made in so off-hand a manner.
To any one labouring under the difficulty we are speaking
of, this belief in a God almost out of any constant relation to
nature, whom we then imagine to occasionally manifest him
self in a perhaps irregular manner, is altogether impossible.
The only form under which belief in the Deity can gain en
trance into his mind is as the controlling Spirit of an infinite
and orderly system. In fact, it appears to me, paradoxical
as the suggestion may appear, that it might even be more
easy for a person thoroughly imbued with the spirit of In
ductive science, though an atheist, to believe in a miracle
which formed a part of a vast system, than for such a person,
as a theist, to accept an isolated miracle.

§ 27. It is therefore with great prudence that Hume,
ind others after him, have practically insisted on commencing
a discussion of the credibility of the single miracle,

1 The stress which Butler lays upon this notion of a scheme is, I think,
me great merit of his Analogy.

v. 28

434 Credibility of Extraordinary Stories. [CHAP. xvil.

treating the question as though the Christian Revelation
could be adequately regarded as a succession of such events.
As well might one consider the living body to be represented
by the aggregate of the limbs which compose it. What is to
be complained of in so many popular discussions on the sub
ject is the entire absence of any recognition of the different
ground on which the attackers and defenders of miracles are
so often really standing. Proofs and illustrations are pro
duced in endless number, which involving, as they almost all
do in the mind of the disputants on one side at least, that
very principle of causation, the absence of which in the case
in question they are intended to establish, they fail in the
single essential point. To attempt to induce any one to dis
believe in the existence of physical causation, in a given
instance, by means of illustrations which to him seem only
additional examples of the principle in question, is like try
ing to make a dam, in order to stop the flow of a river, by
shovelling in snow. Such illustrations are plentiful in times
of controversy, but being in reality only modified forms of
that which they are applied to counteract, they change their
shape at their first contact with the disbeliever's mind, and
only help to swell the flood which they were intended to
check.

CHAPTER XVIII.

ON THE NATURE AND USE OF AN AVERAGE, AND ON THE
DIFFERENT KINDS OF AVERAGE1.

§ 1. WE have had such frequent occasion to refer to
averages, and to the kind of uniformity which they are apt
to display in contrast with individual objects or events, that
it will now be convenient to discuss somewhat more minutely
what are the different kinds of available average, and what
exactly are the functions they perform.

1 There is much need of some good
account, accessible to the ordinary
English reader, of the nature and
properties of the principal kinds of
Mean. The common text-books of
Algebra suggest that there are only
three such, viz. the arithmetical, the
geometrical and the harmonical : —
thus including two with which the
statistician has little or nothing to
do, and excluding two or more with
which he should have a great deal to
do. The best three references I can
give the reader are the following.
(1) The article Moyenne in the Dic-
tionnaire des Sciences Medicales, by
Dr Bertillon. This is written some
what from the Quetelet point of
view. (2) A paper by Feclmer in

the Abliandlungen d. Math.
Classe d. Ron. Sachs. Gesellschaft d.
Wiss. 1878; pp. 1—76. This con
tains a very interesting discussion,
especially for the statistician, of a
number of different kinds of mean.
His account of the median is re
markably full and valuable. But
little mathematical knowledge is de
manded. (3) A paper by Mr F. Y.
Edgeworth in the Camb. Phil. Trans.
for 1885, entitled Observations and
Statistics. This demands some ma
thematical knowledge. Instead of
dealing, as such investigations gene
rally do, with only one Law of Error
and with only one kind of mean, it
covers a wide field of investigation.

28—2

436 Averages. [CHAP. xvm.

The first vague notion of an average, as we now under
stand it, seems to me to involve little more than that of a
something intermediate to a number of objects. The objects
must of course resemble each other in certain respects, other
wise we should not think of classing them together ; • and
they must also differ in certain respects, otherwise we should
not distinguish between them. What the average does for
us, under this primitive form, is to enable us conveniently to
retain the group together as a whole. That is, it furnishes a
sort of representative value of the quantitative aspect of the
things in question, which will serve for certain purposes to
take the place of any single member of the group.

It would seem then that the first dawn of the conception
which science reduces to accuracy under the designation of
an average or mean, and then proceeds to subdivide into
various distinct species of means, presents itself as per
forming some of the functions of a general name. For what
is the main use of a general name ? It is to reduce a plu-
larity of objects to unity ; to group a number of things
together by reference to some qualities which they possess
in common. The ordinary general name rests upon a con
siderable variety of attributes, mostly of a qualitative
character, whereas the average, in so far as it serves the
same sort of purpose, rests rather upon a single quantitative
attribute. It directs attention to a certain kind and degree
of magnitude. When the grazier says of his sheep that ' one
with another they will fetch about 50 shillings,' or the
farmer buys a lot of poles which ' run to about 10 feet,' it is
true that they are not strictly using the equivalent of either
a general or a collective name. But they are coming very
near to such use, in picking out a sort of type or specimen of ]
the magnitude to which attention is to be directed, and in
classing the whole group by its resemblance to this type.

SECT. 2.] Averages. 437

The grazier is thinking of his sheep : not in a merely general
sense, as sheep, and therefore under that name or con
ception, but as sheep of a certain approximate money value.
Some will be more, some less, but they are all near enough
to the assigned value to be conveniently classed together as
if by a name. Many of our rough quantitative designations
seem to be of this kind, as when we speak of 'eight-day
clocks ' or ' twelve-stone men/ &c. ; unless of course we in
tend (as we sometimes do in these cases) to assign a maximum
or minimum value. It is not indeed easy to see how else we
could readily convey a merely general notion of the quanti
tative aspect of things, except by selecting a type as above,
or by assigning certain limits within which the things are
supposed to lie.

§ 2. So far there is not necessarily any idea introduced
of comparison, — of comparison, that is, of one group with
another, — by aid of such an average. As soon as we begin
to think of this we have to be more precise in saying what
we mean by an average. We can easily see that the number
of possible kinds of average, in the sense of intermediate
values, is very great ; is, in fact, indefinitely great. Out of
the general conception of an intermediate value, obtained by
some treatment of the original magnitudes, we can elicit as
many subdivisions as we please, by various modes of treat
ment. There are however only three or four which for our
purposes need be taken into account.

(1) In the first place there is the arithmetical average
)r mean. The rule for obtaining this is very simple : add
ill the magnitudes together, and divide the sum by their
lumber. This is the only kind of average with which the
inscientific mind is thoroughly familiar. But we must not
.et this simplicity and familiarity blind us to the fact that
ihere are definite reasons for the employment of this average,

438 Averages. [CHAP. XVIIL

and that it is therefore appropriate only in definite circum
stances. The reason why it affords a safe and accurate
intermediate value for the actual divergent values, is that
for many of the ordinary purposes of life, such as purchase
and sale, we come to exactly the same result, whether we
take account of those existent divergences, or suppose all
the objects equated to their average. What the grazier
must be understood to mean, if he wishes to be accurate, by
saying that the average price of his sheep is 50 shillings, is,
that so far as that flock is concerned (and so far as he is
concerned), it comes to exactly the same thing, whether they
are each sold at different prices, or are all sold at the ' aver
age ' price. Accordingly, wrhen he compares his sales of one
year with those of another ; when he says that last year the
sheep averaged 48 shillings against the 50 of this year ; the
employment of this representative or average value is a great
simplification, and is perfectly accurate for the purpose in
question.

§ 3. (2) Now consider this case. A certain population is
found to have doubled itself in 100 years : can we talk of an
' average ' increase here of 1 per cent, annually ? The cir
cumstances are not quite the same as in the former case, but
the analogy is sufficiently close for our purpose. The answer
is decidedly, No. If 100 articles of any kind are sold for £100,
we say that the average price is £1. By this we mean that
the total amount is the same whether the entire lot are sold
for £100, or whether we split the lot up into individuals
and sell each of these for £1. The average price here is a
convenient fictitious substitute, which can be applied for
each individual without altering the aggregate total. If
therefore the question be, Will a supposed increase of 1 p. c.
in each of the 100 years be equivalent to a total increase to
double the original amount ? we are proposing a closely 1

SECT. 3.] Averages. 439

analogous question. And the answer, as just remarked, must
be in the negative. An annual increase of 1 p. c. continued
for 100 years will more than double the total; it will multiply
it by about 27. The true annual increment required is mea
sured by 1(y2 ; that is, the population may be said to have
increased ' on the average ' 07 p. c. annually.

We are thus directed to the second kind of average dis
cussed in the ordinary text-books of algebra, viz. the geome
trical. When only two quantities are concerned, with a single
intermediate value between them, the geometrical mean con
stituting this last is best described as the mean proportional
between the two former. Thus, since 3 : J\5 :: ^15 : 5,
Jl5 is the geometrical mean between 3 and 5. When a
number of geometrical means have to be interposed between
two quantities, they are to be so chosen that every term in
the entire succession shall bear the same constant ratio to
its predecessor. Thus, in the example in the last paragraph,
99 intermediate steps were to be interposed between 1 and 2,
with the condition that the 100 ratios thus produced were to
be all equal.

It would seem therefore that wherever accurate quantita
tive results are concerned, the selection of the appropriate
kind of average must depend upon the answer to the ques
tion, What particular intermediate value may be safely
substituted for the actual variety of values, so far as the
precise object in view is concerned ? This is an aspect of
the subject which will have to be more fully considered in
the next chapter. But it may safely be laid down that for
purposes of general comparison, where accurate numerical
relations are not required, almost any kind of intermediate
value will answer our purpose, provided we adhere to the
same throughout. Thus, if we want to compare the statures
of the inhabitants of different counties or districts in Eng-

440 Averages. [CHAP. xvm.

land, or of Englishmen generally with those of Frenchmen,
or to ascertain whether the stature of some particular class
or district is increasing or diminishing, it really does not
seem to matter what sort of average we select provided, of
course, that we adhere to the same throughout our investi
gations. A very large amount of the work performed by
averages is of this merely comparative or non-quantitative
description ; or, at any rate, nothing more than this is really
required. This being so, we should naturally resort to the
arithmetical average ; partly because, having been long in
the field, it is universally understood and appealed to, and
partly because it happens to be remarkably simple and easy
to calculate.

§ 4. The arithmetical mean is for most ordinary pur
poses the simplest and best. Indeed, when we are dealing
with a small number of somewhat artificially selected magni
tudes, it is the only mean which any one would think of
employing. We should not, for instance, apply any other
method to the results of a few dozen measurements of lengths
or estimates of prices.

When, however, we come to consider the results of a very
large number of measurements of the kind which can be
grouped together into some sort of ' probability curve ' we
begin to find that there is more than one alternative before
us. Begin by recurring to the familiar curve represented
on p. 29 ; or, better still, to the initial form of it represented
in the next chapter (p. 476). We see that there are three
different ways in which we may describe the vertex of the
curve. We may call it the position of the maximum ordi-
nate ; or that of the centre of the curve ; or (as will be seen
hereafter) the point to which the arithmetical average of
all the different values of the variable magnitude directs us.
These three are all distinct ways of describing a position ;

SECT. 5.] Averages. 441

but when we are dealing with a symmetrical curve at all
resembling the binomial or exponential form they all three
coincide in giving the same result : as they obviously do in
the case in question.

As soon, however, as we come to consider the case of
asymmetrical, or lop-sided curves, the indications given by
these three methods will be as a rule quite distinct; and
therefore the two former of these deserve brief notice as
representing different kinds of means from the arithmetical
or ordinary one. We shall see that there is something about
each of them which recommends it to common sense as being
in some way natural and appropriate.

§ 5. (3) The first of these selects from amongst the
various different magnitudes that particular one which is
most frequently represented. It has not acquired any tech
nical designation1, except in so far as it is referred to, by
its graphical representation, as the "maximum ordinate"
method. But I suspect that some appeal to such a mean
or standard is really far from uncommon, and that if we
could draw out into clearness the conceptions latent in the
judgments of the comparatively uncultivated, we should find
that there were various classes of cases in which this mean
was naturally employed. Suppose, for instance, that there
was a fishery in which the fish varied very much in size

1 This kind of mean is called by tical average.

Fechner and others the " dichteste This mean ought to be called the
Werth." The most appropriate ap- 'probable' value (a name however in
peal to it that I have seen is by Prof. possession of another) on the ground
Lexis (Massenerscheinungen, p. 42) that it indicates the point of likeliest
where he shows that it indicates occurrence ; i.e. if we compare all
clearly a sort of normal length of the indefinitely small and equal units
human life, of about 70 years ; a of variation, the one corresponding
result which is almost entirely mask- to this will tend to be most fre
ed when we appeal to the arithme- quently represented.

442 Averages. [CHAP. xvm.

but in which the commonest size was somewhat near the
largest or the smallest. If the men were in the habit of
selling their fish by weight, it is probable that they would
before long begin to acquire some kind of notion of what
is meant by the arithmetical mean or average, and would
perceive that this was the most appropriate test. But if the
fish were sorted into sizes, and sold by numbers in each of
these sizes, I suspect that this appeal to a maximum ordi-
nate would begin to take the place of the other. That is,
the most numerous class would come to be selected as a
sort of type by which to compare the same fishery at one
time and another, or one fishery with others. There is also,
as we shall see in the next chapter, some scientific ground
for the preference of this kind of mean in peculiar cases;
viz. where the quantities with which we deal are true
' errors,' in the estimate of some magnitude, and where also
it is of much more importance to be exactly right, or very
nearly right, than to have merely a low average of error.

§ 6. (4) The remaining kind of mean is that which is
now coming to be called the "median." It is one with
which the writings of Mr Galton have done so much to
familiarize statisticians, and is best described as follows.
Conceive all the objects in question to be marshalled in the
order of their magnitude ; or, what comes to the same thing,
conceive them sorted into a number of equally numerous
classes ; then the middle one of the row, or the middle one
in the middle class, will be the median. I do not think
that this kind of mean is at all generally recognized at
present, but if Mr Galton's scheme of natural measurement
by what he calls " per-centiles " should come to be gener
ally adopted, such a test would become an important one.
There are some conspicuous advantages about this kind of
mean. For one thing, in most statistical enquiries, it is

SECT. 7.] Averages. 443

far the simplest to calculate ; and, what is more, the process
of determining it serves also to assign another important
element to be presently noticed, viz. the * probable error. '
Then again, as Fechner notes, whereas in the arithmetical
mean a few exceptional and extreme values will often cause
perplexity by their comparative preponderance, in the case
of the median (where their number only and not their ex
treme magnitude is taken into account) the importance of
such disturbance is diminished.

§ 7. A simple illustration will serve to indicate how these
three kinds of mean coalesce into one when we are dealing
with symmetrical Laws of Error, but become quite distinct
as soon as we come to consider those which are unsym-
metrical.

DYX

Suppose that, in measuring a magnitude along OBDC,
where the extreme limits are OB and OC, the law of error
is represented by the triangle BAC: the length OD will
be at once the arithmetical mean, the median, and the most
frequent length: its frequency being represented by the
maximum ordinate AD. But now suppose, on the other
hand, that the extreme lengths are OD and OC, and that
the triangle ADC represents the law of error. The most
frequent length will be the same as before, OD, marked by
the maximum ordinate AD. But the mean value will now
be OX, where DX = ^DC; and the median will be OY,

where DF=(l-

444 Averages. [CHAP. xvm.

Another example, taken from natural phenomena, may
be found in the heights of the barometer as taken at the
same hour on successive days. So far as 4857 of these may
be regarded as furnishing a sufficiently stable basis of ex
perience, it certainly seems that the resulting curve of fre
quency is asymmetrical. The mean height here was found
to be 29-98: the median was 30'01 : the most frequent
height was 30'05. The close approximation amongst these
is an indication that the asymmetry is slight1.

§ 8. It must be clearly understood that the average, of
whatever kind it may be, from the mere fact of its being a
single substitute for an actual plurality of observed values,
must let slip a considerable amount of information. In fact
it is only introduced for economy. It may entail no loss
when used for some one assigned purpose, as in our ex
ample about the sheep ; but for purposes in general it
cannot possibly take the place of the original diversity, by
yielding all the information which they contained. If all
this is to be retained we must resort to some other method.
Practically we generally do one of two things: either (1) we
put all the figures down in statistical tables, or (2) we ap
peal to a diagram. This last plan is convenient when the
data are very numerous, or when we wish to display or to
discover the nature of the law of facility under which they
range.

The mere assignment of an average lets drop nearly all
of this, confining itself to the indication of an intermediate

1 A diagram illustrative of this was noted. That is, 29 '9 includes
number of results was given in all values between 29 '900 and 29-999.
Nature (Sept. 1, 1887). In calculat- Thus the value most frequently en-
ing, as above, the different means, I tered in my tables was 30-0, but on
may remark that the original results the usual principles of interpolation
were given to three decimal places ; this is reckoned as 30-05.
but, in classing them, only one place

SECT. 9.] Averages. 445

value. It gives a "middle point" of some kind, but says
nothing whatever as to how the original magnitudes were
grouped about this point. For instance, whether two mag
nitudes had been respectively 25 and 27, or 15 and 37, they
would yield the same arithmetical average of 26.

§ 9. To break off at this stage would clearly be to leave
the problem in a very imperfect condition. We therefore
naturally seek for some simple test which shall indicate
how closely the separate results were grouped about their
average, so as to recover some part of the information which
had been let slip.

If any one were approaching this problem entirely anew, —
that is, if he had no knowledge of the mathematical exi
gencies which attend the theory of " Least Squares," — I ap
prehend that there is but one way in which he would set
about the business. He would say, The average which we
have already obtained gave us a rough indication, by as
signing an intermediate point amongst the original magni
tudes. If we want to supplement this by a rough indica
tion as to how near together these magnitudes lie, the
best way will be to treat their departures from the mean
(what are technically called the "errors") in precisely the
same way, viz. by assigning their average. Suppose there
are 13 men whose heights vary by equal differences from
5 feet to 6 feet, we should say that their average height
was 6G inches, and their average departure from this average
was 3T3g- inches.

Looked at from this point of view we should then pro
ceed to try how each of the above-named averages would
answer the purpose. Two of them, — viz. the arithmetical
mean and the median, — will answer perfectly; and, as we
shall immediately see, are frequently used for the purpose.
So too we could, if we pleased, employ the geometrical

446 Averages. [CHAP. xvm.

mean, though such employment would be tedious, owing
to the difficulty of calculation. The ' maximum ordinate '
clearly would not answer, since it would generally (v. the
diagram on p. 443) refer us back again to the average
already obtained, and therefore give no information.

The only point here about which any doubt could arise
concerns what is called in algebra the sign of the errors.
Two equal and opposite errors, added algebraically, would
cancel each other. But when, as here, we are regarding
the errors as substantive quantities, to be considered on
their own account, we attend only to their real magnitude,
and then these equal and opposite errors are to be put upon
exactly the same footing.

§ 10. Of the various means already discussed, two, as
just remarked, are in common use. One of these is fa
miliarly known, in astronomical and other calculations, as
the ' Mean Error,' and is so absolutely an application of the
same principle of the arithmetical mean to the errors, that
has been already applied to the original magnitudes, that it
needs no further explanation. Thus in the example in the
last section the mean of the heights was 66 inches, the
mean of the errors was 3T3g- inches.

The other is the Median, though here it is always known
under another name, i.e. as the 'Probable Error'; — a tech
nical and decidedly misleading term. It is briefly defined
as that error which we are as likely to exceed as to fall
short of: otherwise phrased, if we were to arrange all the
errors in the order of their magnitude, it corresponds to that
one of them which just bisects the row. It is therefore the
' median ' error : or, if we arrange all the magnitudes in suc
cessive order, and divide them into four equally numerous
classes, — what Mr Galton calls 'quartiles,' — the first and
third of the consequent divisions will mark the limits of

SECT. 11.] Averages. 447

the 'probable error' on each side, whilst the middle one will
mark the ' median.' This median, as was remarked, coincides,
in symmetrical curves, with the arithmetical mean.

It is best to stand by accepted nomenclature, but the
reader must understand that such an error is not in any
strict sense ' probable.' It is indeed highly improbable that
in any particular instance we should happen to get just this
error : in fact, if we chose to be precise and to regard it as
one exact magnitude out of an infinite number, it would be
infinitely unlikely that we should hit upon it. Nor can it be
said to be probable that we shall be within this limit of the
truth, for, by definition, we are just as likely to exceed as to
fall short. As already remarked (see note 011 p. 441), the
' maximum ordinate ' would have the best right to be regarded
as indicating the really most probable value.

§ 11. (5) The error of mean square. As previously
suggested, the plan which would naturally be adopted by
any one who had no concern with the higher mathematics of
the subject, would be to take the ' mean error ' for the pur
pose of the indication in view. But a very different kind of
average is generally adopted in practice to serve as a test of
the amount of divergence or dispersion. Suppose that we
have the magnitudes xv xv...xn\ their ordinary average is

1 (x + x + +x\ and their ' errors ' are the differences
n ^ 1

between this and xv xv. . .xn. Call these errors elt ev. . .en, then
the arithmetical mean of these errors (irrespective of sign) is

I (e 4. e + +e } The Error of Mean Square1, on the other

n ^ l 2

hand, is the square root of - (e? + e? +...+ O-

i There is some ambiguity in the commonly uses the expression 'Error
phraseology in use here. Thus Airy of Mean Square' to represent, as

448 Averages. [CHAR xvin.

The reasons for employing this latter kind of average in
preference to any of the others will be indicated in the fol
lowing chapter. At present we are concerned only with the
general logical nature of an average, and it is therefore1
sufficient to point out that any such intermediate value will
answer the purpose of giving a rough and summary indica
tion of the degree of closeness of approximation which our
various measures display to each other and to their common
average. If we were to speak respectively of the ' first ' and
the ' second average/ we might say that the former of these
assigns a rough single substitute for the plurality of original
values, whilst the latter gives a similar rough estimate of the
degree of their departure from the former.

§ 12. So far we have only been considering the general
nature of an average, and the principal kinds of average
practically in use. We must now enquire more particularly
what are the principal purposes for which averages are em
ployed.

In this respect the first thing we have to do is to raise
doubts in the reader's mind on a subject on which he
perhaps has not hitherto felt the slightest doubt. Every
one is more or lest familiar with the practice of appealing to
an average in order to secure accuracy. But distinctly what
we begin by doing is to sacrifice accuracy ; for in place of
the plurality of actual results we get a single result which

here, J^ . Galloway commonly !** °^.°* the exPressio» ' Mean

V n Error,' (widely in use in its more

speaks of the 'Mean Square of the natural signification,) as the equiva-

Errors' to represent ?? . I shall to^f>^.M.S.

n The technical term 'Fluctuation'

adhere to the former usage and re- is applied by Mr F. Y. Edgeworth to

present it briefly by E.M. S. Still ., . 2Se2

more unfortunate (to my thinking) ~vT '

is the employment, by Mr Merriman

SECT. 13.] Averages. 449

very possibly does not agree with any one of them. If I find
the temperature in different parts of a room to be different,
but say that the average temperature is 61°, there may per
haps be but few parts of the room where this exact tempera
ture is realized. And if I say that the average stature of
a certain small group of men is 68 inches, it is probable that
no one of them will present precisely this height.

The principal way in which accuracy can be thus secured
is when what we are really aiming at is not the magnitudes
before us but something else of which they are an indication.
If they are themselves ' inaccurate,'— we shall see presently
that this needs some explanation, — then the single average,
which in itself agrees perhaps with none of them, may be
much more nearly what we are actually in want of. We shall
find it convenient to subdivide this view of the subject into
two parts ; by considering first those cases in which quantita
tive considerations enter but slightly, and in which no deter
mination of the particular Law of Error involved is demanded,
and secondly those in which such determination cannot be
avoided. The latter are only noticed in passing here, as a
separate chapter is reserved for their fuller consideration.

§ 13. The process, as a practical one, is familiar enough
to almost everybody who has to work with measures of any
kind. Suppose, for instance, that I am measuring any object
with a brass rod which, as we know, expands and contracts
according to the temperature. The results will vary slightly,
being sometimes a little too great and sometimes a little too
small. All these variations are physical facts, and if what
we were concerned with was the properties of brass they
would be the one important fact for us. But when we are
Joncerned with the length of the object measured, these facts
Become superfluous and misleading. What we want to do is
o escape their influence, and this we are enabled to effect by
v. 29

450 Averages. [CHAP. xvni.

taking their (arithmetical) average, provided only they are
as often in excess as in defect1. For this purpose all that is
necessary is that equal excesses and defects should be
equally prevalent. It is not necessary to know what is the
law of variation, or even to be assured that it is of one par
ticular kind. Provided only that it is in the language of
the diagram on p. 29, symmetrical, then the arithmetical
average of a suitable and suitably varied number of measure
ments will be free from this source of disturbance. And
what holds good of this cause of variation will hold good of
all others which obey the same general conditions. In fact
the equal prevalence of equal and opposite errors seems to
be the sole and sufficient justification of the familiar process
of taking the average in order to secure accuracy.

§ 14 We must now make the distinction to which at
tention requires so often to be drawn in these subjects
between the cases in which there respectively is, and is not,
some objective magnitude aimed at : a distinction which the
common use of the same word " errors " is so apt to obscure. !
When we talked, in the case of the brass rod, of excesses
and defects being equal, we meant exactly what we said, viz.
that for every case in which the ' true ' length (i. e. that de- 1
termined by the authorized standard) is exceeded by a given
fraction of an inch, there will be a corresponding case in
which there is an equal defect.

On the other hand, when there is no such fixed objective
standard of reference, it would appear that all that we mean;
by equal excesses and defects is permanent symmetry of
arrangement. In the case of the measuring rod we were

1 Practically, of course, we should take this variation as a specimen of...

allow for the expansion or contrac- one of those disturbances which may

tion. But for purposes of logical be neutralised by resort to an ave-J

explanation we may conveniently rage.

SECT. 15.] Averages. 451

able to start with something which existed, so to say, before
its variations ; but in many cases any starting point which
we can find is solely determined by the average.

Suppose, for instance, we take a great number of ob
servations of the height of the barometer at a certain place,
at all times and seasons and in all weathers, we should
generally consider that the average of all these showed the
* true ' height for that place. What we really mean is that
the height at any moment is determined partly (and prin
cipally) by the height of the column of air above it, but partly
also by a number of other agencies such as local temperature,
moisture, wind, &c. These are sometimes more and some
times less effective, but their range being tolerably con
stant, and their distribution through this range being
tolerably symmetrical, the average of one large batch of
observations will be almost exactly the same as that of any
other. This constancy of the average is its truth. I am
quite aware that we find it difficult not to suppose that
there must be something more than this constancy, but we
are probably apt to be misled by the analogy of the other
class of cases, viz. those in which we are really aiming at
some sort of mark.

§ 15. As regards the practical methods available for
determining the various kinds of average there is very little
to be said ; as the arithmetical rules are simple and definite,
and involve nothing more than the inevitable drudgery
attendant upon dealing with long rows of figures. Perhaps
the most important contribution to this part of the subject is
furnished by Mr Gal ton's suggestion to substitute the median
for the mean, and thus to elicit the average with sufficient
accuracy by the mere act of grouping a number of objects
together. Thus he has given an ingenious suggestion for
obtaining the average height of a number of men without

29—2

452 Averages. [CHAP. xvm.

the trouble and risk of measuring them all. "A barbarian
chief might often be induced to marshall his men in the
order of their heights, or in that of the popular estimate of
their skill in any capacity; but it would require some ap
paratus and a great deal of time to measure each man
separately, even supposing it possible to overcome the usually
strong repugnance of uncivilized people to any such pro
ceeding" (Phil. Mag. Jan. 1875). That is, it being known
from wide experience that the heights of any tolerably
homogeneous set of men are apt to group themselves sym
metrically, — the condition for the coincidence of the three
principal kinds of mean, — the middle man of a row thus
arranged in order will represent the mean or average man,
and him we may subject to measurement. Moreover, since
the intermediate heights are much more thickly represented
than the extreme ones, a moderate error in the selection of
the central man of a long row will only entail a very small
error in the selection of the corresponding height.

§ 16. We can now conveniently recur to a subject which
has been already noticed in a former chapter, viz. the at
tempt which is sometimes made to establish a distinction
between an average and a mean. It has been proposed to
confine the former term to the cases in which we are dealing
with a fictitious result of our own construction, that is, with
a mere arithmetical deduction from the observed magni
tudes, and to apply the latter to cases in which there is
supposed to be some objective magnitude peculiarly repre
sentative of the average.

Recur to the three principal classes, of things appropriate
to Probability, which were sketched out in Ch. n. § 4. The
first of these comprised the results of games of chance. Toss
a die ten times: the total number of pips on the upper
side may vary from ten up to sixty. Suppose it to be

SECT. 16.] Averages. 453

thirty. We then say that the average of this batch of
ten is three. Take another set of ten throws, and we may
get another average, say four. There is clearly nothing
objective peculiarly corresponding in any way to these
averages. No doubt if we go on long enough we shall
find that the averages tend to centre about 3'5 : we then
call this the average, or the ' probable ' number of points ;
and this ultimate average might have been pretty con
stantly asserted beforehand from our knowledge of the con
stitution of a die. It has however no other truth or reality
about it of the nature of a type : it is simply the limit
towards which the averages tend.

The next class is that occupied by the members of most
natural groups of objects, especially as regards the charac
teristics of natural species. Somewhat similar remarks may
be repeated here. There is very frequently a c limit ' towards
which the averages of increasing numbers of individuals tend
to approach ; and there is certainly some temptation to re
gard this limit as being a sort of type which all had been
intended to resemble as closely as possible. But when we
looked closer, we found that this view could scarcely be
justified ; all which could be safely asserted was that this
type represented, for the time being, the most numerous
specimens, or those which under existing conditions could
most easily be produced.

The remaining class stands on a somewhat different
ground. When we make a succession of more or less suc
cessful attempts of any kind, we get a corresponding series
of deviations from the mark at which we aimed. These we
may treat arithmetically, and obtain their averages, just as
in the former cases. These averages are fictions, that is to
say, they are artificial deductions of our own which need
not necessarily have anything objective corresponding to

454 Averages. [CHAP. xvni.

them. In fact, if they be averages of a few only they
most probably will not have anything thus corresponding
to them. Anything answering to a type can only be sought
in the ' limit ' towards which they ultimately tend, for this
limit coincides with the fixed point or object aimed at.

§ 17. Fully admitting the great value and interest of
Quetelet's work in this direction, — he was certainly the first
to direct public attention to the fact that so many classes of
natural objects display the same characteristic property, — it
nevertheless does not seem desirable to attempt to mark
such a distinction by any special use of these technical
terms. The objections are principally the two following.

In the first place, a single antithesis, like this between
an average and a mean, appears to suggest a very much
simpler state of things than is actually found to exist in
nature. A reference to the three classes of things just
mentioned, and a consideration of the wide range and di
versity included in each of them, will serve to remind us
not only of the very gradual and insensible advance from
what is thus regarded as 'fictitious' to what is claimed as
' real ;' but also of the important fact that whereas the ' real
type ' may be of a fluctuating and evanescent character, the
'fiction' may (as in games of chance) be apparently fixed
for ever. Provided only that the conditions of production
remain stable, averages of large numbers will always prac
tically present much the same general characteristics. The
far more important distinction lies between the average of
a few, with its fluctuating values and very imperfect and
occasional attainment of its ultimate goal, and the average
of many and its gradually close approximation to its ulti
mate value : i.e. to its objective point of aim if there happen
to be such.

Then, again, the considerations adduced in this chapter

SECT. 18.] Averages. 455

will show that within the field of the average itself there is
far more variety than Quetelet seems to have recognized.
He did not indeed quite ignore this variety, but he prac
tically confined himself almost entirely to those symmetrical
arrangements in which three of the principal means coalesce
into one. We should find it difficult to carry out his dis
tinction in less simple cases. For instance, when there is
some degree of asymmetry, it is the ' maximum ordinate '
which would have to be considered as a ' mean ' to the
exclusion of the others ; for no appeal to an arithmetical
average would guide us to this point, which however is to
be regarded, if any can be so regarded, as marking out the
position of the ultimate type.

§ 18. We have several times pointed out that it is a
characteristic of the things with which Probability is con
cerned to present, in the long run, a continually intensifying
uniformity. And this has been frequently described as what
happens ' on the average.' Now an objection may very
possibly be raised against regarding an arrangement of
things by virtue of which order thus emerges out of disorder
as deserving any special notice, on the ground that from the
nature of the arithmetical average it could not possibly be
otherwise. The process by which an average is obtained, it
may be urged, insures this tendency to equalization amongst
the magnitudes with which it deals. For instance, let there
be a party of ten men, of whom four are tall and four are
short, and take the average of any five of them. Since this
number cannot be made up of tall men only, or of short men
only, it stands to reason that the averages cannot differ so
much amongst themselves as the single measures can. Is
not then the equalizing process, it may be asked, which is
observable on increasing the range of our observations,
one which can be shown to follow from necessary laws of

456 Averages. [CHAP. xvm.

arithmetic, and one therefore which might be asserted a
priori ?

Whatever force there may be in the above objection arises
principally from the limitations of the example selected, in
which the number chosen was so large a proportion of the
total as to exclude the bare possibility of only extreme cases
being contained within it. As much confusion is often felt
here between what is necessary and what is matter of ex
perience, it will be well to look at an example somewhat
more closely, in order to determine exactly what are the
really necessary consequences of the averaging process.

§ 19. Suppose then that we take ten digits at random
from a table (say) of logarithms. Unless in the highly un
likely case of our having happened upon the same digit ten
times running, the average of the ten must be intermediate
between the possible extremes. Every conception of an
average of any sort not merely involves, but actually means,
the taking of something intermediate between the extremes.
The average therefore of the ten must lie closer to 4'5 (the
average of the extremes) than did some of the single digits.

Now suppose we take 1000 such digits instead of 10. We
can say nothing more about the larger number, with de
monstrative certainty, than we could before about the smaller.
If they were unequal to begin with (i. e. if they were not all
the same) then the average must be intermediate, but more
than this cannot be proved arithmetically. By comparison with
such purely arithmetical considerations there is what may be
called a physical fact underlying our confidence in the grow
ing stability of the average of the larger number. It is that
the constituent elements from which the average is deduced
will themselves betray a growing uniformity : — that the pro
portions in which the different digits come out will become
more and more nearly equal as we take larger numbers of

SECT. 20.] Averages. 457

them. If the proportions in which the 1000 digits were
distributed were the same as those of the 10 the averages
would be the same. It is obvious therefore that the arith
metical process of obtaining an average goes a very little
way towards securing the striking kind of uniformity which
we find to be actually presented.

§ 20. There is another way in which the same thing
may be put. It is sometimes said that whatever may have
been the arrangement of the original elements the process of
continual averaging will necessarily produce the peculiar
binomial or exponential law of arrangement. This state
ment is perfectly true (with certain safeguards) but it is not
in any way opposed to what has been said above. Let us
take for consideration the example above referred to. The
arrangement of the individual digits in the long run is the
simplest possible. It would be represented, in a diagram,
not by a curve but by a finite straight line, for each digit
occurs about as often as any other, and this exhausts all the
' arrangement ' that can be detected. Now, when we con
sider the results of taking averages of ten such digits, we see
at once that there is an opening for a more extensive arrange
ment. The totals may range from 0 up to 100, and there
fore the average will have 100 values from 0 to 9 ; and what
we find is that the frequency of these numbers is determined
according to the Binomial1 or Exponential Law. The most
frequent result is the true mean, viz. 4'5, and from this they
diminish in each direction towards 0 and 10, which will each
occur but once (on the average) in 1010 occasions.

The explanation here is of the same kind as in the former
case. The resultant arrangement, so far as the averages are

1 More strictly multinomial : the efficients of the powers of x in the
relative frequency of the different development of
numbers being indicated by the co- (l + x + x*+ ... + x9)10.

458 Averages. [CHAP, xviii.

concerned, is only ' necessary ' in the sense that it is a neces
sary result of certain physical assumptions or experiences.
If all the digits tend to occur with equal frequency, and if
they are ' independent ' (i. e. if each is associated indifferently
with every other), then it is an arithmetical consequence
that the averages when arranged in respect of their magni
tude and prevalence will display the Law of Facility above
indicated. Experience, so far as it can be appealed to, shows
that the true randomness of the selection of the digits, — i.e.
their equally frequent recurrence, and the impartiality of
their combination, — is very fairly secured in practice. Ac
cordingly the theoretic deduction that whatever may have
been the original Law of Facility of the individual results
we shall always find the familiar Exponential Law asserting
itself as the law of the averages, is fairly justified by ex
perience in such a case.

The further discussion of certain corrections and refine
ments is reserved to the following chapter.

§ 21. In regard to the three kinds of average employed
to test the amount of dispersion, — i.e. the mean error, the
probable error, and the error of mean square, — two im
portant considerations must be borne in mind. They will
both recur for fuller discussion and justification in the course
of the next chapter, when we come to touch upon the Method
of Least Squares, but their significance for logical purposes
is so great that they ought not to be entirely passed by at
present.

(1) In the first place, then, it must be remarked that in
order to know what in any case is the real value of an error
we ought in strictness to know what is the position of the
limit or ultimate average, for the amount of an error is
always theoretically measured from this point. But this is
information which we do not always possess. Recurring

SECT. 21.] Averages. 459

once more to the three principal classes of events with which
we are concerned, we can readily see that in the case of
games of chance we mostly do possess this knowledge. In
stead of appealing to experience to ascertain the limit, we
practically deduce it by simple mechanical or arithmetical
considerations, and then the ' error ' in any individual case or
group of cases is obviously found by comparing the results
thus obtained with that which theory informs us would ulti
mately be obtained in the long run. In the case of de
liberate efforts at an aim (the third class) we may or may
not know accurately the value or position of this aim. In
astronomical observations we do not know it, and the method
of Least Squares is a method for helping us to ascertain it as
well as we can ; in such experimental results as firing at a
mark we do know it, and may thus test the nature and
amount of our failure by direct experience. In the remain
ing case, namely that of what we have termed natural kinds
or groups of things, not only do we not know the ultimate
limit, but its existence is always at least doubtful, and in
many cases may be confidently denied. Where it does exist,
that is, where the type seems for all practical purposes per
manently fixed, we can only ascertain it by a laborious resort
to statistics. Having done this, we may then test by it the
results of observations on a small scale. For instance, if we
find that the ultimate proportion of male to female births is
about 106 to 100, we may then compare the statistics ot
some particular district or town and speak of the consequent
'error,' viz. the departure, in that particular and special
district, from the general average.

What we have therefore to do in the vast majority of
practical cases is to take the average of a finite number of
measurements or observations, — of all those, in fact, which
we have in hand,— and take this as our starting point in

460 Averages. [CHAP. xvm.

order to measure the errors. The errors in fact are not
known for certain but only probably calculated. This how
ever is not so much of a theoretic defect as it may seem at
first sight ; for inasmuch as we seldom have to employ these
methods, — for purposes of calculation, that is, as distinguished
from mere illustration,— except for the purpose of dis
covering what the ultimate average is, it would be a sort of
petitio principii to assume that we had already secured it.
But it is worth while considering whether it is desirable to
employ one and the same term for 'errors' known to be
such, and whose amount can be assigned with certainty, and
for ' errors ' which are only probably such and whose amount
can be only probably assigned. In fact it has been proposed1
to employ the two terms ' error ' and ' residual ' respectively
to distinguish between the magnitudes thus determined, that
is, between the (generally unknown) actual error and the ob
served error.

§ 22. (2) The other point involves the question to what
extent either of the first two tests (pp. 446, 7) of the close
ness with which the various results have grouped themselves
about their average is trustworthy or complete. The answer
is that they are necessarily incomplete. No single estimate
or magnitude can possibly give us an adequate account of a
number of various magnitudes. The point is a very im
portant one ; and is not, I think, sufficiently attended to, the
consequence being, as we shall see hereafter, that it is far
too summarily assumed that a method which yields the
result with the least ' error of mean square ' must necessarily
be the best result for all purposes. It is not however by any
means clear that a test which answers best for one purpose
must do so for all.

It must be clearly understood that each of these tests is

1 By Mr Merriman, in his work on Least Squares.

SECT. 23.] Averages. 461

an 'average,' and that every average necessarily rejects a
mass of varied detail by substituting for it a single result.
We had, say, a lot of statures : so many of 60 inches, so
many of 61, &c. We replace these by an 'average' of 68,
and thereby drop a mass of information. A portion of this
we then seek to recover by reconsidering the 'errors' or
departures of these statures from their average. As before,
however, instead of giving the full details we substitute an
average of the errors. The only difference is that instead of
taking the same kind of average (i.e. the arithmetical) we
often prefer to adopt the one called the 'error of mean
square.'

§ 23. A question may be raised here which is of sufficient
importance to deserve a short consideration. When we have
got a set of measurements before us, why is it generally
held to be sufficient simply to assign: (1) the mean value;
and (2) the mean departure from this mean ? The answer
is, of course, partly given by the fact that we are only sup
posed to be in want of a rough approximation : but there is
more to be said than this. A further justification is to be
found in the fact that we assume that we need only con
template the possibility of a single Law of Error, or at any
rate that the departures from the familiar Law will be but
trifling. In other words, if we recur to the figure on p. 29,
we assume that there are only two unknown quantities or
disposable constants to be assigned ; viz. first, the position of
the centre, and, secondly, the degree of eccentricity, if one
may so term it, of the curve. The determination of the
mean value directly and at once assigns the former, and the
determination of the mean error (in either of the ways re
ferred to already) indirectly assigns the latter by confining us
to one alone of the possible curves indicated in the figure.
Except for the assumption of one such Law of Error the

462 Averages. [CHAP. xviu.

determination of the mean error would give but a slight
intimation of the sort of outline of our Curve of Facility.
We might then have found it convenient to adopt some plan
of successive approximation, by adding a third or fourth
'mean.' Just as we assign the mean value of the magni
tude, and its mean departure from this mean ; so we might
take this mean error (however determined) as a fresh starting
point, and assign the mean departure from it. If the point
were worth further discussion we might easily illustrate by
means of a diagram the sort of successive approximations
which such indications would yield as to the ultimate form
of the Curve of Facility or Law of Error.

As this volume is written mainly for those who take an interest in the
logical questions involved, rather than as an introduction to the actual
processes of calculation, mathematical details have been throughout avoided
as much as possible. For this reason comparatively few references have
been made to the exponential equation of the Law of Error, or to the
corresponding 'Probability integral,' tables of which are given in several
handbooks on the subject. There are two points however in connection
with these particular topics as to which difficulties are, or should be, felt by
so many students that some notice may be taken of them here

(1) In regard to the ordinary algebraical expression for the law of error,

viz. y = —p e~h2x2, it will have been observed that I have always spoken of y
X/TT

as being proportional to the number of errors of the particular magnitude x.
It would hardly be correct to say, absolutely, that y represents that number,
because of course the actual number of errors of any precise magnitude,
where continuity of possibility is assumed, must be indefinitely small. If
therefore we want to pass from the continuous to the discrete, by ascertaining
the actual number of errors between two consecutive divisions of our scale,
when, as usual in measurements, all within certain limits are referred to
some one precise point, we must modify our formula. In accordance with
the usual differential notation, we must say that the number of errors falling

into one subdivision (dx) of our scale is dx e~h2x2, where dx is a (small)

X/TT
unit of length, in which both Ir1 and x must be measured.

SECT. 23.] Averages. 463

The difficulty felt by most students is in applying the formula to actual
statistics, in other words in putting in the correct units. To take an actual
numerical example, suppose that 1460 men have been measured in regard to
their height "true to the nearest inch," and let it be known that the
modulus here is 3'6 inches. Then dx = l (inch); h~l = 3'Q inches. Now

= l; that is, the sum of all the consecutive possible values

is equal to unity. When therefore we want the sum, as here, to be 1460, we

1460 -^ — V" -(-Y

must express the formula thus ; — y=-, — —e Vs-6/ , or?/ = 228<? V3-6/ .

tjir x 3-6

Here x stands for the number of inches measured from the central or mean
height, and y stands for the number of men referred to that height in our
statistical table. (The values of e~<2 for successive values of t are given in
the handbooks.)

For illustration I give the calculated numbers by this formula for values
of x from 0 to 8 inches, with the actual numbers observed in the Cambridge
measurements recently set on foot by Mr Galton.

inches calculated observed

a; = 0 ?/ = 228 -231

x = l y = 212 =218

x = 2 0 = 166 =170

x = 3 y = lll = 110

.r = 4 y= 82 = 66

x = 5 y= 32 = 31

.r = 6 y= 11 - 10

x=7 y= 4 6

*=8 y= 1 =3

Here the average height was 69 inches : dx, as stated, = 1 inch. By
saying, ' put x = 0,' we mean, calculate the number of men who are assigned
to 69 inches; i.e. who fall between 68'5 and 69'5. By saying, 'put.r = 4,'
we mean, calculate the number who are assigned to 65 or to 73 ; i.e. who lie
between 64-5 and 65-5, or between 72-5 and 73-5. The observed results, it
will be seen, keep pretty close to the calculated: in the case of the former
the means of equal and opposite divergences from the mean have been taken,
the actual results not being always the same in opposite directions.

(2) The other point concerns the interpretation of the familiar pro

bability integral, — ~|V«*d*. Every one who has calculated the chance

•Jrjo

of an event, by the help of the tables of this integral given in so many
handbooks, knows that if we assign any numerical value to «, the
corresponding value of the above expression assigns the chance that an

464 Averages. [CHAP. xvm.

error taken at random shall lie within that same limit, viz. t. Thus put
t = l-5, and we have the result -96; that is, only 4 per cent, of the errors will
exceed 'one and a half.' But when we ask, 'one and a half what ? the
answer would not always be very ready. As usual, the main difficulty of
the beginner is not to manipulate the formulas, but to be quite clear about
his units.

It will be seen at once that this case differs from the preceding in that
we cannot now choose our unit as we please. Where, as here, there is only
one variable (t), if we were allowed to select our own unit, the inch, foot, or
whatever it might be, we might get quite different results. Accordingly
some comparatively natural unit must have been chosen for us in which we
are bound to reckon, just as in the circular measurement of an angle as
distinguished from that by degrees.

The answer is that the unit here is the modulus, and that to put '£ = 1-5 '
is to say, 'suppose the error half as great again as the modulus'; the
modulus itself being an error of a certain assignable magnitude depending
upon the nature of the measurements or observations in question. We shall

see this better if we put the integral in the form — / e~h2x2 d(hx) ; which is

J*Jo
precisely equivalent, since the value of a definite integral is independent of

the particular variable employed. Here hx is the same as x : - • i.e it is

/i'

the ratio of x to - , or x measured in terms of - . But ~ is the modulus in the
equation ( y = -1= e~Wvfi ) for the law of error. In other words the nu-

merical value of an error in this formula, is the number of times, whole or
fractional, which it contains the modulus.

CHAPTER XIX.

THE THEORY OF THE AVERAGE AS A MEANS OF
APPROXIMATION TO THE TRUTH.

§ 1. IN the last chapter we were occupied with the Average
mainly under its qualitative rather than its quantitative
aspect. That is, we discussed its general nature, its principal
varieties, and the main uses to which it could be put in
ordinary life or in reasoning processes which did not claim to
be very exact. It is now time to enter more minutely into
the specific question of the employment of the average in
the way peculiarly appropriate to Probability. That is, we
must be supposed to have a certain number of measure
ments, — in the widest sense of that term, — placed before us,
and to be prepared to answer such questions as ; Why do we
take their average ? With what degree of confidence ?
Must we in all cases take the average, and, if so, one always
of the same kind ?

The subject upon which we are thus entering is one
which, under its most general theoretic treatment, has per
haps given rise to more profound investigation, to a greater
variety of opinion, and in consequence to a more extensive
history and literature, than any other single problem within
the range of mathematics1. But, in spite of this, the main

1 Mr Mansfield Merriman pub- necticut Acad.) a list of 408 writings
lished in 1877 (Trans, of the Con- on tne subject of Least Squares.

v. 30

466 Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

logical principles underlying the methods and processes in
question are not, I apprehend, particularly difficult to grasp :
though, owing to the extremely technical style of treatment
adopted even in comparatively elementary discussions of the
subject, it is far from easy for those who have but a moderate
command of mathematical resources to disentangle these
principles from the symbols in which they are clothed. The
present chapter contains an attempt to remove these difficul
ties, so far as a general comprehension of the subject is con
cerned. As the treatment thus adopted involves a con
siderable number of subdivisions, the reader will probably
find it convenient to refer back occasionally to the table of
contents at the commencement of this volume.

§ 2. The subject, in the form in which we shall discuss
it, will be narrowed to the consideration of the average, on
account of the comparative simplicity and very wide preva
lence of this aspect of the problem. The problem is however
very commonly referred to, even in non-mathematical treatises,
as the Rule or Method of Least Squares ; the fact being
that, in such cases as we shall be concerned with, the Rule
of Least Squares resolves itself into the simpler and more
familiar process of taking the arithmetical average. A very
simple example, — one given by Herschel, — will explain the
general nature of the task under a slightly wider treatment,
and will serve to justify the familiar designation.

Suppose that a man had been firing for some time with a
pistol at a small mark, say a wafer on a wall. We may take
it for granted that the shot-marks would tend to group
themselves about the wafer as a centre, with a density vary
ing in some way inversely with the distance from the centre.
But now suppose that the wafer which marked the centre
was removed, so that we could see nothing but the surface of
the wall spotted with the shot-marks ; and that we were

SECT. 2.] Theory of the Average. 467

asked to guess the position of the wafer. Had there been
only one shot, common sense would suggest our assuming
(of course very precariously) that this marked the real centre.
Had there been two, common sense would suggest our taking
the mid-point between them. But if three or more were
involved, common sense would be at a loss. It would feel
that some intermediate point ought to be selected, but
would not see its way to a more precise determination, be-
:ause its familiar reliance, — the arithmetical average, — does
not seem at hand here. The rule in question tells us how to
proceed. It directs us to select that point which will render
the sum of the squares of all the distances of the various
shot-marks from it the least possible \

This is merely by way of illustration, and to justify the
familiar designation of the rule. The sort of cases with
which we shall be exclusively occupied are those compara
tively simple ones in which only linear magnitude, or some
quality which can be adequately represented by linear mag
nitude, is the object under consideration. In respect of these
the Rule of Least Squares reduces itself to the process of
taking the average, in the most familiar sense of that term,
viz. the arithmetical mean ; and a single Law of Error, or its
graphical equivalent, a Curve of Facility, will suffice accu
rately to indicate the comparative frequency of the different
amounts of the one variable magnitude involved.

1 In other words, we are to take when we are dealing with such cases

the " centre of gravity " of the shot- as occur in Mensuration, where we

marks, regarding them all as of equal have to combine or reconcile three or

weight. This is, in reality, the ' aver- more inconsistent equations, some

ige' of all the marks, as the elemen- such rule as that of Least Squares

;ary geometrical construction for becomes imperative. No taking of

obtaining the centre of gravity of a an average will get us out of the

system of points will show ; but it is difficulty,
lot familiarly so regarded. Of course,

30—2

468 Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

§ 3. We may conveniently here again call attention to a
misconception or confusion which has been already noticed
in a former chapter. It is that of confounding the Law of;
Error with the Method of Least Squares. These are things
of an entirely distinct kind. The former is of the nature of
a physical fact, and its production is one which in many
cases is entirely beyond our control. The latter, — or any
simplified application of it, such as the arithmetical average, —
is no law whatever in the physical sense. It is rather a
precept or rule for our guidance. The Law states, in any
given case, how the errors tend to occur in respect of their
magnitude and frequency. The Method directs us how to
treat these errors when any number of them are presented \
to us. No doubt there is a relation between the two, as will j
be pointed out in the course of the following pages ; but
there is nothing really to prevent us from using the same
method for different laws of error, or different methods for]
the same law. In so doing, the question of distinct right
and wrong would seldom be involved, but rather one of morel
or less propriety.

§ 4. The reader must understand, — as was implied in
the illustration about the pistol shots, — that the ultimate
problem before us is an inverse one. That is, we are sup-|
posed to have a moderate number of ' errors ' before us and
we are to undertake to say whereabouts is the centre from
which they diverge. • This resembles the determination of a
cause from the observation of an effect. But, as mostly
happens in inverse problems, we must commence with the
consideration of the direct problem. In other words, so far
as concerns the case before us, we shall have to begin by
supposing that the ultimate object of our aim, — that is, the
true centre of our curve of frequency, — is already known to
us : in which case all that remains to be done is to study the

SECT. 5.] Theory of the Average. 469

consequences of taking averages of the magnitudes which
constitute the errors.

§ 5. We shall, for the present, confine our remarks to
what must be regarded as the typical case where con
siderations of Probability are concerned ; viz. that in which
the law of arrangement or development is of the Binomial
kind. The nature of this law was explained in Chap. II.,
where it was shown that the frequency of the respective
numbers of occurrences was regulated in accordance with
the magnitude of the successive terms of the expansion of
the binomial (1 + l)n. It was also pointed out that when n
becomes very great, that is, when the number of influencing
circumstances is very large, and their relative individual
influence correspondingly small, the form assumed by a
curve drawn through the summits of ordinates representing
these successive terms of the binomial tends towards that
assigned by the equation

For all practical purposes therefore we may talk in
differently of the Binomial or Exponential law ; if only on
the ground that the arrangement of the actual phenomena
on one or other of these two schemes would soon become
indistinguishable when the numbers involved are large.
But there is another ground than this. Even when the
phenomena themselves represent a continuous magnitude,
our measurements of them, — which are all with which we
can deal, — are discontinuous. Suppose we had before us the
accurate heights of a million adult men. For all practical
purposes these would represent the variations of a con
tinuous magnitude, for the differences between two suc
cessive magnitudes, especially near the mean, would be
inappreciably small. But our tables will probably represent

Theory of the Average. [CHAP, xix,

them only to the nearest inch. We have so many assigned
as 69 inches; so many as 70; and so on. The tabular
statement in fact is of much the same character as if we
were assigning the number of ' heads ' in a toss of a handful
of pence ; that is, as if we were dealing with discontinuous-
numbers on the binomial, rather than with a continuous
magnitude on the exponential arrangement.

§ 6. Confining ourselves then, for the present, to this
general head, of the binomial or exponential law, we must
distinguish two separate cases in respect of the knowledge
we may possess as to the generating circumstances of the
variable magnitudes.

(1) There is, first, the case in which the conditions of
the problem are determinable a priori : that is, where we are
able to say, prior to specific experience, how frequently each
combination will occur in the long run. In this case the
main or ultimate object for which we are supposing that the
average is employed,— i. e. that of discovering the true mean
value, — is superseded. We are able to say what the mean
or central value in the long run will be ; and therefore there I
is no occasion to set about determining it, with some trouble
and uncertainty, from a small number of observations. Still \
it is necessary to discuss this case carefully, because its
assumption is a necessary link in the reasoning in other
cases.

This comparatively a priori knowledge may present itself
in two different degrees as respects its completeness. In the
first place it may, so far as the circumstances in question
are concerned, be absolutely complete. Consider the results
when a handful of ten pence is repeatedly tossed up. We
know precisely what the mean value is here, viz. equal
division of heads and tails : we know also the chance of six
heads and four tails, and so on. That is, if we had to plot

SECT. 7.] Theory of the Average. 471

out a diagram showing the relative frequency of each com
bination, we could do so without appealing to experience.
We could draw the appropriate binomial curve from the
generating conditions given in the statement of the problem.
But now consider the results of firing at a target con
sisting of a long and narrow strip, of which one point is
marked as the centre of aim1. Here (assuming that there
are no causes at work to produce permanent bias) we know
that this centre will correspond to the mean value. And we
know also, in a general way, that the dispersion on each side
of this will follow a binomial law. But if we attempted to
plot out the proportions, as in the preceding case, by erecting
ordinates which should represent each degree of frequency
as we receded further from the mean, we should find that
we could not do so. Fresh data must be given or inferred.
A good marksman and a bad marksman will both distribute
their shot according to the same general law; but the
rapidity with which the shots thin off as we recede from the
centre will be different in the two cases. Another ' constant '
is demanded before the curve of frequency could be correctly
traced out.

§ 7. (2) The second division, to be next considered,
corresponds for all logical purposes to the first. It com
prises the cases in which though we have no a priori know
ledge as to the situation about which the values will tend to
cluster in the long run, yet we have sufficient experience at
hand to assign it with practical certainty. Consider for
instance the tables of human stature. These are often very
extensive, including tens or hundreds of thousands. In such
cases the mean or central value is determinable with just as

i The only reason for supposing ing errors in two dimensions, would
thisexceptionalshapeistosecuresim- yield slightly more compile
plicity. The ordinary target, allow- suits.

472 Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

great certainty as by any a priori rule. That is, if we took
another hundred thousand measurements from the same
class of population, we should feel secure that the average
would not be altered by any magnitude which our measuring
instruments could practically appreciate.

§ 8. But the mere assignment of the mean or central
value does not here, any more than in the preceding case,
give us all that we want to know. It might so happen that
the mean height of two populations was the same, but that
the law of dispersion about that mean was very different :
so that a man who in one series was an exceptional giant or
dwarf should, in the other, be in no wise remarkable.

To explain the process of thus determining the actual
magnitude of the dispersion would demand too much mathe
matical detail ; but some indication may be given. What
we have to do is to determine the constant h in the equation1

—7
V

TT

In technical language, what we have to do is

to determine the modulus of this equation. The quantity ^

in the above expression is called the modulus. It measures
the degree of contraction or dispersion about the mean
indicated by this equation. When it is large the dispersion
is considerable; that is the magnitudes are not closely

1 When first referred to, the genera I as usual, by unity. In this form of
form of this equation was given (v. p. expression h is a quantity of the
29). The special form here assigned, order x~l ; for lix is to be a numerical

in which * is substituted for At is ^^ Banding as it does as an

fj-rr index. The modulus, being the reci-

commonly employed in Probability, procal of this, is of the same order

because the integral of ydx, between °f quantities as the errors themselves.

+ 00 and- 30, becomes equal to unity. ^n fact, if we multiply it by '4769...

That is, the sum of all the mutually we nave the so-called ' probable

exclusive possibilities is represented, error.'

SECT. 9.] Theory of the Average. 473

crowded up towards the centre, when it is small they are
thus crowded up. The smaller the modulus in the curve
representing the thickness with which the shot-marks
clustered about the centre of the target, the better the
marksman.

§ 9. There are several ways of determining the modulus.
In the first of the cases discussed above, where our theo
retical knowledge is complete, we are able to calculate it a
priori from our knowledge of the chances. We should
naturally adopt this plan if we were tossing up a large
handful of pence.

The usual a posteriori plan, when we have the measure
ments of the magnitudes or observations before us, is this :—
Take the mean square of the errors, and double this; the re
sult gives the square of the modulus. Suppose, for instance,
that we had the five magnitudes, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8. The mean of
these is 6: the 'errors' are respectively 2, 1, 0, 1, 2. There
fore the 'modulus squared' is equal to — ; i.e. the modulus is

J2. Had the magnitudes been 2, 4, 6, 8, 10; representing
the same mean (6) as before, but displaying a greater disper
sion about it, the modulus would have been larger, viz. ^8
instead of J%.

Mr Galton's method is more of a graphical nature. It
is described in a paper on Statistics by Intercomparison
(Phil. Mag. 1875), and elsewhere. It may be indicated as
follows. Suppose that we were dealing with a large number
of measurements of human stature, and conceive that all the
persons in question were marshalled in the order of their
height. Select the average height, as marked by the central
man of the row. Suppose him to be 69 inches. Then raise
(or depress) the scale from this point until it stands at such

474 Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

a height as just to include one half of the men above (or
below) the mean. (In practice this would be found to re
quire about 171 inches: that is, one quarter of any large
group of such men will fall between 69 and 7071 inches.)
Divide this number by '4769 and we have the modulus. In
the case in question it would be equal to about 3'6 inches.

Under the assumption with which we start, viz. that the
law of error displays itself in the familiar binomial form, or
in some form approximating to this, the three methods indi
cated above will coincide in their result. Where there is
any doubt on this head, or where we do not feel able to cal
culate beforehand what will be the rate of dispersion, we
must adopt the second plan of determining the modulus.
This is the only universally applicable mode of calculation:
in fact that it should yield the modulus is a truth of defini
tion; for in determining the error of mean square we are
really doing nothing else than determining the modulus, as
was pointed out in the last chapter.

§ 10. The position then which we have now reached is
this. Taking it for granted that the Law of Error will fall

into the symbolic form expressed by the equation y = -^~e~n2x\

X/TT

we have rules at hand by which h may be determined. We
therefore, for the purposes in question, know all about the
curve of frequency: we can trace it out on. paper: given
one value, — say the central one, — we can determine any
other value at any distance from this. That is, knowing
how many men in a million, say, are 69 inches high, we can
determine without direct observation how many will be 67,
68, 70, 71, and so on.

We can now adequately discuss the principal question of
logical interest before us; viz. why do we take averages or
means? What is the exact nature and amount of the ad-

SECT. 10.] Theory of the Average. 475

vantage gained by so doing? The advanced student would
of course prefer to work out the answers to these questions
by appealing at once to the Law of Error in its ultimate or
exponential form. But I feel convinced that the best
method for those who wish to gain a clear conception of the
logical nature of the process involved, is to begin by treating
it as a question of combinations such as we are familiar with
in elementary algebra; in other words to take a finite number
of errors and to see what comes of averaging these. We can
then proceed to work out arithmetically the results of com
bining two or more of the errors together so as to get a new
series, not contenting ourselves with the general character
merely of the new law of error, but actually calculating what
it is in the given case. For the sake of simplicity we will
not take a series with a very large number of terms in it, but
it will be well to have enough of them to secure that our law
of error shall roughly approximate in its form to the standard
or exponential law.

For this purpose the law of error or divergence given by
supposing our effort to be affected by ten causes, each of
which produces an equal error, but which error is equally
likely to be positive and negative (or, as it might perhaps
be expressed, 'ten equal and indifferently additive and
sub tractive causes') will suffice. This is the lowest number
formed according to the Binomial law, which will furnish to
the eye a fair indication of the limiting or Exponential law1.
The whole number of possible cases here is 210 or 1024; that
is, this is the number required to exhibit not only all the
cases which can occur (for there are but eleven really dis
tinct cases), but also the relative frequency with which each
of these cases occurs in the long run. Of this total, 252 will
1 See, for the explanation of this, and of the graphical method of illus
trating it, the note on p. 29.

476

Theory of the Average.

[CHAP. xix.

be situated at the mean, representing the 'true' result,
or that given when five of the causes of disturbance just
neutralize the other five. Again, 210 will be at what we
will call one unit's distance from the mean, or that given by
six causes combining against four ; and so on ; until at the
extreme distance of five places from the mean we get but
one result, since in only one case out of the 1024 will all the
causes combine together in the same direction. The set of
1024 efforts is therefore a fair representation of the distri
bution of an infinite number of such efforts. A graphical
representation of the arrangement is given here.

§ 11. This representing a complete set of single ob
servations or efforts, what will be the number and arrange
ment in the corresponding set of combined or reduced
observations, say of two together? With regard to the
number we must bear in mind that this is not a case of the
combinations of things which cannot be repeated; for any
given error, say the extreme one at F, can obviously be
repeated twice running. Such a repetition would be a piece
of very bad luck no doubt, but being possible it must have
its place in the set. Now the possible number of ways of
combining 1024 things two together, where the same thing
may be repeated twice running, is 1024 x 1024 or 1048576.

SECT. 12.] Theory of the Average. 477

This then is the number in a complete cycle of the results
taken two and two together.

§ 12. So much for their number ; now for their arrange
ment or distribution. What we have to ascertain is, firstly,
how many times each possible pair of observations will present
itself; and, secondly, where the new results, obtained from
the combination of each pair, are to be placed. With regard
to the first of these enquiries ; — it will be readily seen that
on one occasion we shall have F repeated twice ; on 20 occa
sions we shall have F combined with E (for F coming first
we may have it followed by any one of the 10 at E, or any
one of these may be followed by F) ; E can be repeated in
10 x 10, or 100 ways, and so on.

Now for the position of each of these reduced observations,
the relative frequency of whose component elements has thus
been pointed out. This is easy to determine, for when we
take two errors there is (as was seen) scarcely any other
mode of treatment than that of selecting the mid-point be
tween them; this mid-point of course becoming identical
with each of them when the two happen to coincide. It will
be seen therefore that F will recur once on the new arrange
ment, viz. by its being repeated twice on the old one. G,
midway between E and F, will be given 20 times. E, on
our new arrangement, can be got at in two ways, viz. by its
being repeated twice (which will happen 100 times), and by
its being obtained as the mid-point between D and F (which
will happen 90 times). Hence E will occur 190 times alto
gether.

The reader who chooses to take the trouble may work out
the frequency of all possible occurrences in this way, and if
the object were simply to illustrate the principle in accord
ance with which they occur, this might be the best way of
proceeding. But as he may soon be able to observe, and as

Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

the mathematician would at once be able to prove, the new
' law of facility of error ' can be got at more quickly deduc
tively, viz. by taking the successive terms of the expansion of
(1 + I)20. They are given, below the line, in the figure on p. 476.
§ 13. There are two apparent obstacles to any direct
comparison between the distribution of the old set of simple
observations, and the new set of combined or reduced ones.
In the first place, the number of the latter is much greater.
This, however, is readily met by reducing them both to the
same scale, that is by making the same total number of each.
In the second place, half of the new positions have no repre
sentatives amongst the old, viz. those which occur midway
between F and E, E and D, and so on. This can be met by
the usual plan of interpolation, viz. by filling in such gaps
by estimating what would have been the number at the
missing points, on the same scale, had they been occupied.
Draw a curve through the vertices of the ordinates at
A, B, C, &c., and the lengths of the ordinates at the in
termediate points will very fairly represent the corresponding
frequency of the errors of those magnitudes respectively.
When the gaps are thus filled up, and the numbers thus
reduced to the same scale, we have a perfectly fair basis of
comparison. (See figure on next page.)

Similarly we might proceed to group or ' reduce ' three
observations, or any greater number. The number of possible
groupings naturally becomes very much larger, being (1024)3
when they are taken three together. As soon as we get to
three or more observations, we have (as already pointed out)
a variety of possible modes of treatment or reduction, of
which that of taking the arithmetical mean is but one.

§ 14. The following figure is intended to illustrate the
nature of the advantage secured by thus taking the arith
metical mean of several observations.

SECT. 15.] Theory of the Average. 479

The curve A BCD represents the arrangement of a given
number of ' errors ' supposed to be disposed according to the
binomial law already mentioned, when the angles have been
smoothed off by drawing a curve through them. A' CD'
represents the similar arrangement of the same number
when given not as simple errors, but as averages of pairs of
errors. A"BD", again, represents the similar arrangement
obtained as averages of errors taken three together. They
are drawn as carefully to scale as the small size of the figure
permits.

§15. A glance at the above figure will explain to the
reader, better than any verbal description, the full signi
ficance of the statement that the result of combining two or
more measurements or observations together and taking the
average of them, instead of stopping short at the single
elements, is to make large errors comparatively more scarce.
The advantage is of the same general description as that of
fishing in a lake where, of the same number of fish, there
are more big and fewer little ones than in another water : of

480 Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

dipping in a bag where of the same number of coins there
are more sovereigns and fewer shillings; and so on. The
extreme importance, however, of obtaining a perfectly clear
conception of the subject may render it desirable to work
this out a little more fully in detail.

For one thing, then, it must be clearly understood that
the result of a set of ' averages ' of errors is nothing else
than another set of 'errors.' No device can make the at
tainment of the true result certain, — to suppose the con
trary would be to misconceive the very foundations of Pro
bability, — no device even can obviate the possibility of being
actually worse off as the result of our labour. The average
of two, three, or any larger number of single results, may
give a worse result, i.e. one further from the ultimate average,
than was given by the first observation we made. We must
simply fall back upon the justification that big deviations
are rendered scarcer in the long run.

Again ; it may be pointed out that though, in the above
investigation, we have spoken only of the arithmetical average
as commonly understood and employed, the same general
results would be obtained by resorting to almost any sym
metrical and regular mode of combining our observations or
errors. The two main features of the regularity displayed
by the Binomial Law of facility were (1) ultimate symmetry
about the central or true result, and (2) increasing relative
frequency as this centre was approached. A very little con
sideration will show that it is no peculiar prerogative of the
arithmetical mean to retain the former of these and to in
crease the latter. In saying this, however, a distinction must
be attended to for which it will be convenient to refer to a
figure.

§ 16. Suppose that 0, in the line D'OD, was the point
aimed at by any series of measurements ; or, what comes to

SECT. 16.] Theory of the Average. 481

the same thing for our present purpose, was the ultimate
average of all the measurements made. What we mean by

a symmetrical arrangement of the values in regard to 0, is
that for every error OB, there shall be in the long run a pre
cisely corresponding opposite one OB' ; so that when we erect
the ordinate BQ, indicating the frequency with which B is
yielded, we must erect an equal one B'Q'. Accordingly the
two halves of the curve on each side of P, viz. PQ and PQ'
are precisely alike.

It then readily follows that the secondary curve, viz.
that marking the law of frequency of the averages of two or
more simple errors, will also be symmetrical. Consider any
three points B, C, D: to these correspond another three
B', C', D'. It is obvious therefore that any regular and sym
metrical mode of dealing with all the groups, of which BCD
is a sample, will result in symmetrical arrangement about
the centre 0. The ordinary familiar arithmetical average is
but one out of many such modes. One way of describing it is
by saying that the average of B, (7, D, is assigned by choosing
a point such that the sum of the squares of its distances from
v. 31

482 Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

B, C, D, is a minimum. But we might have selected a point
such that the cubes, or the fourth powers, or any higher
powers should be a minimum. These would all yield curves
resembling in a general way the dotted line in our figure.
Of course there would be insuperable practical objections to
any such courses as these; for the labour of calculation
would be enormous, and the results so far from being better
would be worse than those afforded by the employment of
the ordinary average. But so far as concerns the general
principle of dealing with discordant and erroneous results, it
must be remembered that the familiar average is but one
out of innumerable possible resources, all of which would
yield the same sort of help.

§ 17. Once more. We saw that a resort to the average
had the effect of 'humping up' our curve more towards the
centre, expressive of the fact that the errors of averages are
of a better, i.e. smaller kind. But it must be noticed that
exactly the same characteristics will follow, as a general rule,
from any other such mode of dealing with the individual
errors. No strict proof of this fact can be given here, but a
reference to one of the familiar results of taking combina
tions of things will show whence this tendency arises. Ex
treme results, as yielded by an average of any kind, can only
be got in one way, viz. by repetitions of extremes in the
individuals from which the averages were obtained. But
intermediate results can be got at in two ways, viz. either by
intermediate individuals, or by combinations of individuals
in opposite directions. In the case of the Binomial Law
of Error this tendency to thicken towards the centre was
already strongly predominant in the individual values before
we took them in hand for our average ; but owing to this
characteristic of combinations we may lay it down (broadly
speaking) that any sort of average applied to any sort of law

SECT. 18.] Theory of the Average. 483

of distribution will give a result which bears the same
general relation to the individual values that the dotted lines
above bear to the black line1.

§ 18. This being so, the speculative advantages of one
method of combining, or averaging, or reducing, our observa
tions, over another method, — irrespective, that is, of the
practical conveniences in carrying them out, — will consist
solely in the degree of rapidity with which it tends thus to
cluster the result about the centre. We shall have to subject
this merit to a somewhat further analysis, but for the present
purpose it will suffice to say that if one kind of average gave
the higher dotted line in the figure on p. 479 and another
gave the lower dotted line, we should say that the former
was the better one. The advantage is of the same general
kind as that which is furnished in algebraical calculation, by
a series which converges rapidly towards the true value as
compared with one which converges slowly. We can do
the work sooner or later by the aid of either; but we get
nearer the truth by the same amount of labour, or get as
near by a less amount of labour, on one plan than on the
other.

As we are here considering the case in which the indi
vidual observations are supposed to be grouped in accordance

1 Broadly speaking, we may say ingly rapid, — that is, when the ex-

that the above remarks hold good of treme errors are relatively very few, —

any law of frequency of error in it still holds good. But if we were

which there are actual limits, how- to take as our law of facility such an

ever wide, to the possible magnitude TT . . , .

equation as y = — - , (as hinted by
of an error. If there are no limits to

the possible errors, this characteristic De Morgan and noted by Mr Edge-

of an average to heap its results up worth : Cainb. Phil. Trans, vol. x.

towards the centre will depend upon p. 184, and vol. xiv. p. 160) it does

circumstances. When, as in the ex- not hold good. The result of aver-

ponential curve, the approximation aging is to diminish the tendency to

to the base, as asymptote, is exceed- cluster towards the centre.

31— 2

484 Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

with the Binomial Law, it will suffice to say that in this case
there is no doubt that the arithmetical average is not only
the simplest and easiest to deal with, but is also the best in
the above sense of the term. And since this Binomial Law,
or something approximating to it, is of very wide prevalence.
a strong prima facie case is made out for the general employ
ment of the familiar average.

§ 19. The analysis of a few pages back carried the
results of the averaging process as far as could be con
veniently done by the help of mere arithmetic. To go
further we must appeal to higher mathematics, but the
following indication of the sort of results obtained will
suffice for our present purpose. After all, the successive
steps, though demanding intricate reasoning for their proof,
are nothing more than generalizations of processes which
could be established by simple arithmetic 1. Briefly, what we
do is this : —

(1) We first extend the proof from the binomial form,
with its finite number of elements, to the limiting or ex
ponential form. Instead of confining ourselves to a small
number of discrete errors, we then recognize the possibility
of any number of errors of any magnitude whatever.

(2) In the next place, instead of confining ourselves to
the consideration of an average of two or three only, —
already, as we have seen, a tedious piece of arithmetic, — we
calculate the result of an average of any number, n. The
actual result is extremely simple. If the modulus of the
single errors is c, that of the average of n of these will be
c-r*fn.

(3) Finally we draw similar conclusions in reference to
the sum or difference of two averages of any numbers. Sup-

1 The reader will find the proofs in Galloway on Probability, and in
of these and other similar formulae Airy on Errors.

SECT. 20.] Theory of the Average. 485

pose, for instance, that m errors were first taken and aver
aged, and then n similarly taken and averaged. These
averages will be nearly, but not quite, equal. Their sum or
difference, — these, of course, are indistinguishable in the end,
since positive and negative errors are supposed to be equal
and opposite, — will itself be an ' error ', every magnitude of
which will have a certain assignable probability or facility of
occurrence. What we do is to assign the modulus of these
errors. The actual result again is simple. If c had been
the modulus of the single errors, that of the sum or dif
ference of the averages of m and n of them will be

§ 20. So far, the problem under investigation has been
of a direct kind. We have supposed that the ultimate mean
value or central position has been given to us; either a
priori (as in many games of chance), or from more immediate
physical considerations (as in aiming at a mark), or from ex
tensive statistics (as in tables of human stature). In all
such cases therefore the main desideratum is already taken
for granted, and it may reasonably be asked what remains to
be done. The answers are various. For one thing we may
want to estimate the value of an average of many when com
pared with an average of a few. Suppose that one man has
collected statistics including 1000 instances, and another has
collected 4000 similar instances. Common sense can recog
nize that the latter are better than the former; but it has no
idea how much better they are. Here, as elsewhere, quanti
tative precision is the privilege of science. The answer we
receive from this quarter is that, in the long run, the
modulus,— and with this the probable error, the mean error,
and the error of mean square, which all vary in proportion,—

486 Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

diminishes inversely as the square root of the number of
measurements or observations. (This follows from the second
of the above formulae.) Accordingly the probable error of
the more extensive statistics here is one half that of the less
extensive. Take another instance. Observation shows that
"the mean height of 2,315 criminals differs from the mean
height of 8,585 members of the general adult population by
about two inches" (v. Edgeworth, Methods of Statistics:
Stat. Soc. Journ. 1885). As before, common sense would feel
little doubt that such a difference was significant, but it
could give no numerical estimate of the significance. Ap
pealing to science, we see that this is an illustration of the
third of the above formulae. What we really want to know
is the odds against the averages of two large batches differing
by an assigned amount: in this case by an amount equalling
twenty-five times the modulus of the variable quantity.
The odds against this are many billions to one.

§ 21. The number of direct problems which will thus
admit of solution is very great, but we must confine ourselves
here to the main inverse problem to which the foregoing
discussion is a preliminary. It is this. Given a few only of
one of these groups of measurements or observations; what
can we do with these, in the way of determining that mean
about which they would ultimately be found to cluster?
Given a large number of them, they would betray the posi
tion of their ultimate centre with constantly increasing-
certainty : but we are now supposing that there are only a
few of them at hand, say half a dozen, and that we have no
power at present to add to the number.

In other words, — expressing ourselves by the aid of
graphical illustration, which is perhaps the best method
for the novice and for the logical student, — in the direct
problem we merely have to draw the curve of frequency from

SECT. 22.] Theory of the Average. 487

a knowledge of its determining elements; viz. the position
of the centre, and the numerical value of the modulus. In
the inverse problem, on the other hand, we have three ele
ments at least, to determine. For not only must we, (1), as
before, determine whereabouts the centre may be assumed to
lie; and (2), as before, determine the value of the modulus
or degree of dispersion about this centre. This does not
complete our knowledge. Since neither of these two ele
ments is assigned with certainty, we want what is always
required in the Theory of Chances, viz. some estimate of their
probable truth. That is, after making the best assignment
we can as to the value of these elements, we want also to
assign numerically the 'probable error' committed in such '
assignment. Nothing more than this can be attained in Pro
bability, but nothing less than this should be set before us.

§ 22. (1) As regards the first of these questions, the
answer is very simple. Whether the number of measure
ments or observations be few or many, we must make the
assumption that their average is the point we want; that is,
that the average of the few will coincide with the ultimate
average. This is the best, in fact the only assumption we
can make. We should adopt this plan, of course, in the
extreme case of there being only one value before us, by just
taking that one; and our confidence increases slowly with
the number of values before us. The only difference there
fore here between knowledge resting upon such data, and
knowledge resting upon complete data, lies not in the result
obtained but in the confidence with which we entertain it.

§ 23. (2) As regards the second question, viz. the deter
mination of the modulus or degree of dispersion about the
mean, much the same may be said. That is, we adopt the
same rule for the determination of the E.M.S. (error of mean
square) by which the modulus is assigned, as we should

Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

adopt if we possessed full information. Or rather we are
confined to one of the rules given on p. 473, viz. the second,
for by supposition we have neither the a priori knowledge
which would be able to supply the first, nor a sufficient
number of observations to justify the third. That is, we
reckon the errors, measured from the average, and calculate
their mean square: twice this is equal to the square of the
modulus of the probable curve of facility 1.

§ 24. (3) The third question demands for its solution
somewhat advanced mathematics; but the results can be
indicated without much difficulty. A popular way of stating
our requirement would be to say that we want to know how
likely it is that the mean of the few, which we have thus
accepted, shall coincide with the true mean. But this would
be to speak loosely, for the chances are of course indefinitely
great against such precise coincidence. What we really do
is to assign the 'probable error'; that is, to assign a limit
which it is as likely as not that the discrepancy between
the inferred mean and the true mean should exceed2. To
take a numerical example: suppose we had made several

1 The formula commonly used for logical propriety we should like to

the E.M.S. in this case is — and kuow the ljr°bable error committed in
n - 1 both the assignments of the preceding

not 2— . The difference is trifling, tw° sections- But tb« profound ma
thematicians who have discussed this

unless n be small; the justification question, and who alone are compe-

has been offered for it that since the tent to treat it, have mostly written

sum of the squares measured from with the practical wants of Astronomy

the true centre is a minimum (that in view; and for this purpose it is

centre being the ultimate arithmeti- sufficient to take account of the one

cal mean) the sum of the squares mea- great desideratum, viz. the true values

sured from the somewhat incorrectly sought. Accordingly the only rules

assigned centre will be somewhat commonly given refer to the probable

larger, error of the mean.
2 It appears to me that in strict

SECT. 25.] Theory of the Average. 489

measurements of a wall with a tape, and that the average of
these was 150 feet. The scrupulous surveyor would give us
this result, with some such correction as this added, — 'pro
bable error 3 inches'. All that this means is that we may
assume that the true value is 150 feet, with a confidence that
in half the cases (of this description) in which we did so, we
should really be within three inches of the truth.

The expression for this probable error is a simple multiple
of the modulus: it is the modulus multiplied by '4769...
That it should be some function of the modulus, or E.M.S.,
seems plausible enough ; for the greater the errors, — in other
words the wider the observed discrepancy amongst our
measurements, — the less must be the confidence we can feel
in the accuracy of our determination of the mean. But, of
course, without mathematics we should be quite unable to
attempt any numerical assignment.

§ 25. The general conclusion therefore is that the de
termination of the curve of facility, — and therefore ultimately
of every conclusion which rests upon a knowledge of this
curve, — where only a few observations are available, is of
just the same kind as where an infinity are available. The
rules for obtaining it are the same, but the confidence with
which it can be accepted is less.

The knowledge, therefore, obtainable by an average of a
small number of measurements of any kind, hardly differs
except in degree from that which would be attainable by an
indefinitely extensive series of them. We know the same
sort of facts, only we are less certain about them. But, on
the other hand, the knowledge yielded by an average even
of a small number differs in kind from that which is yielded
by a single measurement. Revert to our marksman, whose
bullseye is supposed to have been afterwards removed. If
he had fired only a single shot, not only should we be less

Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

certain of the point he had aimed at, but we should have no
means whatever of guessing at the quality of his shooting, or
of inferring in consequence anything about the probable
remoteness of the next shot from that which had gone before.
But directly we have a plurality of shots before us, we not
merely feel more confident as to whereabouts the centre of
aim was, but we also gain some knowledge as to how the
future shots will cluster about the spot thus indicated. The
quality of his shooting begins at once to be betrayed by the
results.

§ 26. Thus far we have been supposing the Law of
Facility to be of the Binomial type. There are several
reasons for discussing this at such comparative length. For
one thing it is the only type which, — or something approxi
mately resembling which,— is actually prevalent over a wide
range of phenomena. Then again, in spite of its apparent
intricacy, it is really one of the simplest to deal with ; owing
to the fact that every curve of facility derived from it by
taking averages simply repeats the same type again. The
curve of the average only differs from that of the single
elements in having a smaller modulus; and its modulus is
smaller in a ratio which is exceedingly easy to give. If that
of the one is c, that of the other (derived by averaging

n single elements) is — .

Nil

But for understanding the theory of averages we must
consider other cases as well. Take then one which is intrin
sically as simple as it possibly can be, viz. that in which all
values within certain assigned limits are equally probable.
This is a case familiar enough in abstract Probability, though,
as just remarked, not so common in natural phenomena. It
is the state of things when we act at random directly upon

SECT. 27.] Theory of the Average. 491

the objects of choice1 ; as when, for instance, we choose digits
at random out of a table of logarithms.

The reader who likes to do so can without much labour
work out the result of taking an average of two or three
results by proceeding in exactly the same way which we
adopted 011 p. 476. The 'curve of facility' with which we
have to start in this case has become of course simply a
finite straight line. Treating the question as one of simple
combinations, we may divide the line into a number of equal
parts, by equidistant points ; and then proceed to take these
two and two together in every possible way, as we did in the
case discussed some pages back.

If we did so, what we should find would be this. When
an average of two is taken, the 'curve of facility' of the
average becomes a triangle with the initial straight line for
base; so that the ultimate mean or central point becomes
the likeliest result even with this commencement of the
averaging process. If we were to take averages of three,
four, and so on, what we should find would be that the
Binomial law begins to display itself here. The familiar bell
shape of the exponential curve would be more and more
closely approximated to, until we obtained something quite
indistinguishable from it.

§ 27. The conclusion therefore is that when we are
dealing with averages involving a considerable number it is
not necessary, in general, to presuppose the binomial law of
distribution in our original data. The law of arrangement of
what we may call the derived curve, viz. that corresponding
to the averages, will not be appreciably affected thereby.
Accordingly we seem to be justified in bringing to bear all

i i e as distinguished from acting ter on Kandomness, may result in
upon them indirectly. This latter giving a non-uniform di
proceeding, as explained in the chap-

492 Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

the same apparatus of calculation as in the former case. We
take the initial average as the probable position of the true
centre or ultimate average : we estimate the probability that
we are within an assignable distance of the truth in so doing
by calculating the 'error of mean square'; and we appeal
to this same element to determine the modulus, i.e. the
amount of contraction or dispersion, of our derived curve of
facility.

The same general considerations will apply to most other
kinds of Law of Facility. Broadly speaking, — we shall come
to the examination of certain exceptions immediately, —
whatever may have been the primitive arrangement (i.e.
that of the single results) the arrangement of the derived
results (i.e. that of the averages) will be more crowded up
towards the centre. This follows from the characteristic of
combinations already noticed, viz. that extreme values can
only be got at by a repetition of several extremes, whereas
intermediate values can be got at either by repetition of
intermediates or through the counteraction of opposite ex
tremes. Provided the original distribution be symmetrical
about the centre, and provided the limits of possible error be
finite, or if infinite, that the falling off of frequency as we
recede from the mean be very rapid, then the results of
taking averages will be better than those of trusting to
single results.

§ 28. We will now take notice of an exceptional case.
We shall do so, not because it is one which can often
actually occur, but because the consideration of it will force
us to ask ourselves with some minuteness what we mean in
the above instances by calling the results of the averages
' better ' than those of the individual values. A diagram will
bring home to us the point of the difficulty better than any
verbal or symbolic description.

SECT. 29.] Theory of the Average. 493

The black line represents a Law of Error easily stated in
words, arid one which, as we shall subsequently see, can be

conceived as occurring in practice. It represents a state of
things under which up to a certain distance from 0, on each
side, viz. to A and B, the probability of an error diminishes
uniformly with the distance from 0; whilst beyond these
points, up to E and F, the probability of error remains con
stant. The dotted line represents the resultant Law of Error
obtained by taking the average of the former two and two
together. Now is the latter 'better' than the former?
Under it, certainly, great errors are less frequent and inter
mediate ones more frequent ; but then on the other hand
the small errors are less frequent : is this state of things on
the whole an improvement or not ? This requires us to re
consider the whole question.

§ 29. In all the cases discussed in the previous sections
the superiority of the curve of averages over that of the
single results showed itself at every point. The big errors
were scarcer and the small errors were commoner; it was
only just at one intermediate point that the two were on
terms of equality, and this point was not supposed to posse*
any particular significance or importance. Accordingly we
had no occasion to analyse the various cases included under
the general relation. It was enough to say that one was
better than the other, and it was sufficient for all purposes to

494 Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

take the ' modulus ' as the measure of this superiority. In
fact we are quite safe in simply saying that the average of
those average results is better than that of the individual
ones.

When however we proceed in what Hume calls "the
sifting humour," and enquire why it is sufficient thus to
trust to the average ; we find, in addition to the considera
tions hitherto advanced, that some postulate was required as
to the consequences of the errors we incur. It involved an
estimate of what is sometimes called the ' detriment ' of an
error. It seemed to take for granted that large and small
errors all stand upon the same general footing of being mis
chievous in their consequences, but that their evil effects in
crease in 'a greater ratio than that of their own magnitude.

§ 30. Suppose, for comparison, a case in which the im
portance of an error is directly proportional to its magnitude
(of course we suppose positive and negative errors to balance
each other in the long run) : it does not appear that any
advantage would be gained by taking averages. Something
of this sort may be considered to prevail in cases of mere
purchase and sale. Suppose that any one had to buy a very
large number of yards of cloth at a constant price per yard :
that he had to do this, say, five times a day for many days in
succession. And conceive that the measurement of the
cloth was roughly estimated on each separate occasion, with
resultant errors which are as likely to be in excess as in
defect. Would it make the slightest difference to him
whether he paid separately for each piece; or whether
the five estimated lengths were added together, their average
taken, and he were charged with this average price for each
piece ? In the latter case the errors which will be made in
the estimation of each piece will of course be less in the long
run than they would be in the former : will this be of any

SECT. 31.] Theory of the Average. 495

consequence ? The answer surely is that it will not make
the slightest difference to either party in the bargain. In
the long run, since the same parties are concerned, it will not
matter whether the intermediate errors have been small or
large.

Of course nothing of this sort can be regarded as the
general rule. In almost every case in which we have to
make measurements we shall find that large errors are much
more mischievous than small ones, that is, mischievous in a
greater ratio than that of their mere magnitude. Even in
purchase and sale, where different purchasers are concerned,
this must be so, for the pleasure of him who is overserved
will hardly equal the pain of him who is underserved. And
in many cases of scientific measurement large errors may be
simply fatal, in the sense that if there were no reasonable
prospect of avoiding them we should not care to undertake
the measurement at all.

§ 31. If we were only concerned with practical con
siderations we might stop at this point ; but if we want to
realize the full logical import of average-taking as a means
to this particular end, viz. of estimating some assigned
magnitude, we must look more closely into such an ex
ceptional case as that which was indicated in the figure on
p. 493. What we there assumed was a state of things in
reference to which extremely small errors were very fre
quent, but that when once we got beyond a certain small
range all other errors, within considerable limits, were equally
likely.

It is not difficult to imagine an example which will aptly
illustrate the case in point: at worst it may seem a little far
fetched. Conceive then that some firm in England received
a hurried order to supply a portion of a machine:, say a
steam-engine, to customers at a distant place; and that it

496 Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

was absolutely essential that the work should be true to the
tenth of an inch for it to be of any use. But conceive also
that two specifications had been sent, resting on different
measurements, in one of which the length of the requisite
piece was described as sixty and in the other sixty-one
inches. On the assumption of any ordinary law of error,
whether of the binomial type or not, there can be no doubt
that the firm would make the best of a very bad job by con
structing a piece of 60 inches and a half: i.e. they would
have a better chance of being within the requisite tenth of
an inch by so doing, than by taking either of the two specifi
cations at random and constructing it accurately to this.
But if the law were of the kind indicated in our diagram1,
then it seems equally certain that they would be less likely
to be within the requisite narrow margin by so doing. As a
mere question of probability, — that is, if such estimates were
acted upon again and again, — there would be fewer failures
encountered by simply choosing one of the conflicting
measurements at random and working exactly to this, than
by trusting to the average of the two.

This suggests some further reflections as to the taking of
averages. We will turn now to another exceptional case,
but one involving somewhat different considerations than
those which have been just discussed. As before, it may be
most conveniently introduced by commencing with an ex
ample.

1 There is no difficulty in conceiv- in the estimate at random (within
ing circumstances under which a certain limits),— the firm having a
law very closely resembling this knowledge of this fact but being of
would prevail. Suppose, e.g., that course unable to assign the two to
one of the two measurements had their authors,— we should get very
been made by a careful and skilled much such a Law of Error as is sup-
mechanic, and the other by a man posed above,
who to save himself trouble had put

SECT. 33.] Theory of the Average. 497

§ 32. Suppose then that two scouts were sent to take
the calibre of a gun in a hostile fort, — we may conceive that
the fort was to be occupied next day, and used against the
enemy, and that it was important to have a supply of shot or
shell, — and that the result is that one of them reports the
calibre to be 8 inches and the other 9. Would it be wise to
assume that the mean of these two, viz. 8J inches, was a
likelier value than either separately?

The answer seems to be this. If we have reason to
suppose that the possible calibres partake of the nature of a
continuous magnitude, — i.e. that all values, with certain
limits, are to be considered as admissible, (an assumption
which we always make in our ordinary inverse step from an
observation or magnitude to the thing observed or measured)
— then we should be justified in selecting the average as the
likelier value. But if, on the other hand, we had reason to
suppose that whole inches are always or generally preferred,
as is in fact the case now with heavy guns, we should do
better to take, even at hazard, one of the two estimates set
before us, and trust this alone instead of taking an average
of the two.

§ 33. The principle upon which we act here may be
stated thus. Just as in the direct process of calculating or
displaying the 'errors', whether in an algebraic formula or in
a diagram, we generally assume that their possibility is
continuous, i.e. that all intermediate values are possible; so,
in the inverse process of determining the probable position of
the original from the known value of two or more errors, we
assume that that position is capable of falling at any point
whatever between certain limits. In such an example as the
above, where we know or suspect a discontinuity of that
possibility of position, the value of the average may be
entirely destroyed.

v. 32

498 Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

In the above example we were supposed to know that
the calibre of the guns was likely to run in English inches or
in some other recognized units. But if the battery .were in
China or Japan, and we knew nothing of the standards of
length in use there, we could no longer appeal to this
principle. It is doubtless highly probable that those calibres
are not of the nature of continuously varying magnitudes;
but in an entire ignorance of the standards actually adopted,
we are to all intents and purposes in the same position as if
they were of that continuous nature. When this is so the
objections to trusting to the average would no longer hold
good, and if we had only one opportunity, or a very few
opportunities, we should do best to adhere to the customary
practice.

§ 34. When however we are able to collect and compare
a large number of measurements of various objects, this
consideration of the probable discontinuity of the objects we
thus measure, — that is, their tendency to assume some one or
other of a finite number of distinct magnitudes, instead of
showing an equal readiness to adapt themselves to all inter
mediate values, — again assumes importance. In fact, given
a sufficient number of measurable objects, we can actually
deduce • with much probability the standard according to
which the things in question were made.

This is the problem which Mr Flinders Petrie has at
tacked with so much acuteness and industry in his work on
Inductive Metrology, a work which, merely on the ground of
its speculative interest, may well be commended to the
student of Probability. The main principles on which the
reasoning is based are these two: — (1) that all artificers are
prone to construct their works according to round numbers,
or simple fractions, of their units of measurement; and (2)
that, aiming to secure this, they will stray from it in toler-

SECT. 35.] Theory of the Average. 499

able accordance with the law of error. The result of these
two assumptions is that if we collect a very large number of
measurements of the different parts and proportions of some
ancient building, — say an Egyptian temple, — whilst no as
signable length is likely to be permanently unrepresented,
yet we find a marked tendency for the measurements to
cluster about certain determinate points in our own, or any
other standard scale of measurement. These points mark the
length of the standard, or of some multiple or submultiple of
the standard, employed by the old builders. It need hardly
be said that there are a multitude of practical considerations
to be taken into account before this method can be expected
to give trustworthy results, but the leading principles upon
which it rests are comparatively simple.

§ 35. The case just considered is really nothing else
than the recurrence, under a different application, of one
which occupied our attention at a very early stage. We
noticed (Chap. II.) the possibility of a curve of facility which
instead of having a single vertex like that corresponding to
the common law of error, should display two humps or
vertices. It can readily be shown that this problem of the
measurements of ancient buildings, is nothing more than the
reopening of the same question, in a slightly more complex
form, in reference to the question of the functions of an
average.

Take a simple example. Suppose an instance in which
great errors, of a certain approximate magnitude, are dis
tinctly more likely to be committed than small ones, so that
the curve of facility, instead of rising into one peak towards
the centre, as in that of the familiar law of error, shows a
depression or valley there. Imagine, in fact, two binomial
curves, with a short interval between their centres. Now if
we were to calculate the result of taking averages here we

500 Theory of the Average. [CHAP, xix,

should find that this at once tends to fill up the valley; and
if we went on long enough, that is, if we kept on taking
averages of sufficiently large numbers, a peak would begin to
arise in the centre. In fact the familiar single binomial
curve would begin to make its appearance.

§ 36. The question then at once suggests itself, ought we
to do this? Shall we give the average free play to perform
its allotted function of thus crowding things up towards the
centre? To answer this question we must introduce a dis
tinction. If that peculiar double-peaked curve had been, as
it conceivably might, a true error-curve, — that is, if it had
represented the divergences actually made in aiming at the
real centre, — the result would be just what we should want.
It would furnish an instance of the advantages to be gained
by taking averages even in circumstances which were origin
ally unfavourable. It is not difficult to suggest an appro
priate illustration. Suppose a man firing at a mark from
some sheltered spot, but such that the range crossed a broad
exposed valley up or down which a strong wind was generally
blowing. If the shotmarks were observed we should find
them clustering about two centres to the right and left of
the bullseye. And if the results were plotted out in a curve
they would yield such a double-peaked curve as we have
described. But if the winds were equally strong and preva
lent in opposite directions, we should find that the averaging
process redressed the consequent disturbance.

If however the curve represented, as it is decidedly more
likely to do, some outcome of natural phenomena in which
there was, so to say, a real double aim on the part of nature,
it would be otherwise. Take, for instance, the results of
measuring a large number of people who belonged to two
very heterogeneous races. The curve of facility would here
be of the kind indicated on p. 45, and if the numbers of the

SECT. 37.]

Theory of the Average.

501

two commingled races were equal it would display a pair of
twin peaks. Again the question arises, 'ought' we to in
volve the whole range within the scope of a single average ?
The answer is that the obligation depends upon the purpose
we have in view. If we want to compare that heterogeneous
race, as a whole, with some other, or with itself at some
other time, we shall do well to average without analysis.
All statistics of population, as we have already seen (v. p. 47),
are forced to neglect a multitude of discriminating charac
teristics of the kind in question. But if our object were to
interpret the causes of this abnormal error-curve we should
do well to break up the statistics into corresponding parts,
and subject these to analysis separately.

Similarly with the measurements of the ancient buildings.
In this case if all our various ' errors ' were thrown together
into one group of statistics we should find that the resultant
curve of facility displayed, not two peaks only, but a suc
cession of them; and these of various magnitudes, corre
sponding to the frequency of occurrence of each particular
measurement. We might take an average of the whole, but
hardly any rational purpose could be subserved in so doing ;
whereas each separate point of maximum frequency of oc
currence has something significant to teach us.

§ 37. One other peculiar case may be noticed in con
clusion. Suppose a distinctly asymmetrical, or lopsided curve
of facility, such as this : —

ABC

Theory of the Average. [CHAP. xix.

Laws of error, of which this is a graphical representation,
are, I apprehend, far from uncommon. The curve in question,
is, in fact, but a slight exaggeration of that of barometrical
heights as referred to in the last chapter; when it was
explained that in such cases the mean, the median, and the
maximum ordinate would show a mutual divergence. The
doubt here is not, as in the preceding instances, whether or
not a single average should be taken, but rather what kind
of average should be selected. As before, the answer must
depend upon the special purpose we have in view. For all
ordinary purposes of comparison between one time or place
and another, any average will answer, and we should there
fore naturally take the. arithmetical, as the most familiar, or
the median, as the simplest.

§ 38. Cases might however arise under which other
kinds of average could justify themselves, with a momentary
notice of which we may now conclude. Suppose, for instance,
that the question involved here were one of desirability of
climate. The ordinary mean, depending as it does so largely
upon the number and magnitude of extreme values, might
very reasonably be considered a less appropriate test than
that of judging simply by the relatively most frequent value :
in other words, by the maximum ordinate. And various
other points of view can be suggested in respect of which
this particular value would be the most suitable and sig
nificant.

In the foregoing case, viz. that of the weather curve,
there was no objective or 'true' value aimed at. But a
curve closely resembling this would be representative of
that particular class of estimates indicated by Mr Galton,
and for which, as he has pointed out, the geometrical mean
becomes the only appropriate one. In this case the curve of
facility ends abruptly at 0 : it resembles a much foreshortened

SECT. 39.] Theory of the Average. 503

modification of the common exponential form. Its charac
teristics have been discussed in the paper by Dr Macalister
already referred to, but any attempt to examine its properties
here would lead us into far too intricate details.

§ 39. The general conclusion from all this seems quite
in accordance with the nature and functions of an average as
pointed out in the last chapter. Every average, it was urged,
is but a single representative intermediate value substituted
for a plurality of actual values. It must accordingly let slip the
bulk of the information involved in these latter. Occasionally,
as in most ordinary measurements, the one thing which it
represents is obviously the thing we are in want of; and
then the only question can be, which mean will most accord
with the ' true ' value we are seeking. But when, as may
happen in most of the common applications of statistics,
there is really no ' true value ' of an objective kind behind
the phenomena, the problem may branch out in various
directions. We may have a variety of purposes to work out,
and these may demand some discrimination as regards the
average most appropriate for them. Whenever therefore we
have any doubt whether the familiar arithmetical average is
suitable for the purpose in hand we must first decide pre
cisely what that purpose is.

INDEX.

Accidents, 342
Airy, G. B., 447, 484
Anticipations, tacit, 287
Arbuthnott, 258
Aristotle, 205, 307
Average, arithmetical, 437

— geometrical, 439
median, 442

— consequences of, 482

— necessary results of, 457
uses of, 439, 489

Babbage, 343

Bags and balls, 180, 411

Belief, correctness of, 125, 131, 178

— gradations of, 139

— growth of, 199
language of, 143

— measurement of, 119, 125,

146

quantity of, 133
test of, 140, 149, 294
undue, 129

— vagueness of, 127
Bentham, 319, 323
Bernoulli, 91, 117, 389
Bertillou, 435

Births, male and female, 90, 258,

263
Boat race, Oxford and Cambridge,

339
Boole, 183

V.

Buckle, 237

Buffon, 153, 205, 352, 389
Burgersdyck, 311
Butler, 209, 281, 333, 366

Carlisle Tables, 169
Casual, meaning of, 245
Causation, need of, 237

— proof of, 244
Centre of gravity, 467
Certainty, in Law, 324

— reasonable, 327
hypothetical, 210

Chance and Causation, 244

Creation, 258

Design, 256

Genius, 353
_ neglect of small, 363

selections, 338
Chauvenet, 352
Classification, numerical scheme of,

48

Coincidences, 245

Combinations and Permutations, 87
Communism, 375, 392
Conceptualism, 275
Conflict of chances, 418
Consumptives, insurance of, 227
Cournot, 245, 255, 338
Crackanthorpe, 312, 320
Craig, J., 192
Crofton, M. W., 61, 101, 104

33

506

Index.

Dante, 285

Deflection, causes of, 57
from aim, 38
De Morgan, 83, 106, 119, 122, 135,

177, 179, 197, 236, 247, 296, 308,

350, 379, 382; 483
De Eos trial, 255
Digits, random, 111, 114
Discontinuity, 116
Distribution, random, 106
Diagrams, 29, 45, 118, 443, 476, 481,

493, 501

Dialectic, 302, 320
Donkin, 123, 188, 283
Duration of life, 15, 441
Dtising, 259

Ebbinghaus, 199

Edgeworth, F. Y., 34, 119, 256, 339,

393, 435, 483
Ellis, L., 9
Epidemics, 62
Error, law of, 29

asymmetrical, 34, 441,

443
binomial, 37, 457, 469,

480

geometrical, 34, 502
heterogeneous, 45
production of, 36
Error, mean, 446

probable, 446, 472, 488
of mean square, 447, 488
Escapes, narrow, 341
Expectation, moral, 388
Experience and probability, 74
Exponential curve, 29
Extraordinary, sense of, 159, 423
stories, 407, 421

Fallacies in Logic and Probability, 367
Fatalism, 243

Fechner, 34, 389, 435, 441
Fluctuation, 448

unlimited, 73
Forbes, J. D., 188, 262
Formal Logic, 123
Formal and Material treatment, 86
Free will, 240

Galloway, 248, 448, 484

Galton, F., 33, 50, 70, 318, 442, 451,

473, 502

Gambling and Insurance, 370
disadvantage of, 384
final results of, 385, 391
Godfray, H., 99
Grote, G., 307
Guy, 6

Hamilton, W., 266, 297
Happiness, human, 382
Heads and Tails, 77
Heredity, 50, 357
Herschel, 30, 466
Houdin, 361
Hume, 236, 419, 433
Hypotheses, 268

Immediate inferences, 121
Independent events, 175, 246
Induction and Probability, 194, 201,
208, 233, 358

difficulty of, 213
pure, 200

Inequality of wealth, 382
Inference, rules of, 167
Inoculation, 374
Insurance, justification of, 149
difficulties of, 221
life, 151

— peculiar case, 224

— theory of, 372

— varieties of, 374

Index.

507

Inverse probability, 179, 196, 249
Irregularity, absolute and relative, 6

Jacobs, J., 199
Jackson, J. G., 253
Jevons, 37, 83, 136, 198, 201, 209,
247

Kant, 310, 317
Keckermann, 298, 316
Kinds, natural, 55
Krug, 324

Lambert, 309
Language of Chance, 159
Laplace, 89, 120, 197, 237, 424
Law, absence of, 101

- empirical, 160

- of causation, 206
Least squares, 41, 467
Leibnitz, 309, 320
Letters, lost, 162, 368

— misdirected, 67, 237, 241
Lexis, W., 263, 441
Limit, conception of, 18, 109, (164.3

of possible fluctuation, 32

Lines, random, 113
Lister's method, 187
Lotteries, 128
Lunn, J. E., 248
Likely, equally, 77, 183

McAlister, D., 34, 187, 502
Mansel, H. L., 299, 301, 320
Martingale, 343

Material and Formal Logic, 265
Maximum ordinate, 441, 455
Measurement of Belief, 119

Memory, 192

Mental qualities, measurement of, 49
Merriman, M., 352, 448, 460, 465
Mill, J. S., 131, 207, 266, 282, 402

Milton, chance production of, 353
Miracles, 428
Michell, J., 260
Modality, 295

— divisions of, 307

false, 297 -

formal, 298

in Law, 319
Modulus, 464, 472, 484
Monro, C. J., 325, 416

Names, reference of, 270
Nations, comparison of, 51
Natural Kinds, 55, 63, 71
Necessary and impossible matter, 310

Objects and agencies, 53
Occam, 314

Paley, 433

Penny, tosses of, 144

Petrie, F., 498

Petersburg Problem, 19, 154

Poisson, 405

Prantl, 311

Presumption, legal, 329

Prevost, 348

Probability, definition of, 165

relative, 290

integral, 463
Probable facts, 269
_ value, 441

error, 446, 472
Problem, Three point, 104
Proctor, E. A., 262, 378
Prophecies, suicidal, 226
Providence, 89, 431
Propositions, proportional, 2
Psychical research, 256
Pyramid, the great, 251
TT, digits in, 111, 247

508

Index.

Quartiles, 446

Quetelet, 23, 30, 43, 91, 259, 330, 348,
454

Kandomness, etymology of, 96
in firing, 98
proof of, 107
Kare events, 349
Kealism, 92
Eeason, sufficient, 82
Eesiduals, 460
Eoberts, C., 25
Kod broken at random, 98
- thrown — 103
Eules, Inductive and Deductive, 176
of Succession, 191
conflict of, 222
plurality of, 217

Series, definite proportions in, 11
fixed and variable, 16
ideal, 95
peculiar, 12

Shanks, 248

Skeat, W. W., 96

Smiglecius, 306, 316

Smyth, P., 251

Socialism, 392

Spiritualism, 365

Stars, random arrangement of, 108,
260

Statistics, by Intel-comparison, 473
unconscious appeal to, 400

Statistical Journal, 6

Stature, human, 25, 471

French and English, 44

Stephen, J. F., 282, 323, 326

Stewart, D., 209, 237

Subjective and objective terms, 160

Succession, long, 360

Eule of, 190, 362
Suffield, G.,248
Suicides, 67, 237
Surnames, extinction of, 387
Surprise, emotion of, 157
Syllogisms, pure and modal, 316

Taylor, 329

Testimony, single, 411

combined, 426
two kinds of, 409
worthless, 416

Thomson, W., 153, 314, 419

Time, influence of, 191

in Probability, 279

Todhunter, 415

Tontines, 380

Triangle, random, 103

Tucker, A., 127

Types, existence of, 42, 60, 453

fixed and fluctuating, 64, 93

Ueberweg, 311
Uncertainty in life, 370
Uniformity, 240
Units of calculation, 464

Voluntary agency, 65, 68, 85

Walford, 374

Wallis, J., 312

Watson, H. W., 387

Whately, 297, 307

Whist, 401

Whitworth, W. A., 87, 183, 384

Wilson, J. M., 104

Witnesses, independent, 405

Wolf, 309

Woolhouse, 101

CAMBRIDGE : PRINTED BY C. J. CLAY, M.A. AND SONS, AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.

UU

BC

1888

Venn, John

The logic of chance
3d ed., re-written and enl

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY